Home

Oracle SQL Developer User's Guide

image

Contents

1. iea 5 67 Eind Highlight A A A iei e E ce E R EE 5 67 Insert Ma COs 35 nete A recu ede te ien votes fe E e IN ee ees 5 67 Externally Modified Piles taeda eta cie ect e t iet ies 5 67 Find Replace Text eee tton tenera iioii ede nina 5 68 Find Result A as ee ere eeu eee pestes ie RL 5 68 Format Properties imitan nme sie itd tee e e d Hte ee et eld utter bns 5 68 Generate AAA eue ee ettet 5 68 Goto Bookmark AAPP nes n Ue e c te rete t te e pater 5 69 Goto Lime Nube ege e e E HR cise SS es 5 69 Goto Line Number Error eei e ates desee tace AR ree EE ttc acci n 5 69 mitis A 5 69 TIMP OLE TO CV Orina M 5 69 Install SOE Translator teo ee eta tete eet etes 5 70 Installing a Translator and Creating a Profile Usage Notes sss 5 71 Invalid Database Versione sninn dasselbe etre eo bed Eben ea RR Re e eon 5 71 Load Keyboard Scheme onere e ee teet doe epe edere mete 5 71 Dog Into SA ON 5 72 Maintain Spatial Metadata sss eterne nenne nennt 5 72 Manage Columns o nece eet te et e eed Ete re Pe ren Far ep ri e tee tee ert dnt 5 72 Modify Value decano date ei ed ea ied ed aci 5 73 Data Mov e Details tage Reb te eto ee bete i HE etes 5 73 New Proc dure Refactoring 4 ieri eet ir et p rient ente 5 73 No Bock ht mittet teda i ie nmi ides 5 73 INO Object Found n doe A s at etiain 5 74 No Object Selected eret Ere enne ee irte ce e
2. Set serveroutput on Create objects CREATE TABLE books book id VARCHAR2 20 title VARCHAR2 50 CONSTRAINT title not null NOT NULL author last name VARCHAR2 30 CONSTRAINT last name not null NOT NULL author first name VARCHAR2 30 rating NUMBER CONSTRAINT books pk PRIMARY KEY book id CONSTRAINT rating 1 to 10 CHECK rating IS NULL OR rating 1 and rating 10 CONSTRAINT author title unique UNIQUE author last name title CREATE TABLE patrons patron id NUMBER last name VARCHAR2 30 CONSTRAINT patron last not null NOT NULL first name VARCHAR2 30 Street address VARCHAR2 50 city state zip VARCHAR2 50 location MDSYS SDO GEOMETRY CONSTRAINT patrons pk PRIMARY KEY patron id CREATE TABLE transactions transaction id NUMBER patron id CONSTRAINT for key patron id REFERENCES patrons patron id book id CONSTRAINT for key book id REFERENCES books book id transaction date DATE CONSTRAINT tran date not null NOT NULL transaction type NUMBER CONSTRAINT tran type not null NOT NULL 4 12 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Script for Creating and Using the Library Tutorial Objects CONSTRAINT transactions pk PRIMARY KEY transaction id CREATE SEQUENCE patron id seq START WITH 100 INCREMENT BY 1 The sequence for the transaction id in the tutorial is created automatically and may have the name TRANSACTIONS SEQ CREATE SEQUENCE transacti
3. sees 1 39 1 7 10 Gauges In the SOL Worksheet and User Defined Reports 1 40 1 8 Using Snippets to Insert Code Fragments sss ee eene 1 41 1 8 1 Us r Defined Snippets iie hentan te ee I ae ded et te feet E ehai 1 41 1 9 Finding Database Objeets Torie rte i tr dein sta tete ine reti Pene eed reete ette 1 42 1 10 Using Versioning ox ec ere ente eet rn i dee DS E e ete eb dia 1 42 1 10 1 About Subversion and SQL Developer sess eee een 1 43 1 10 2 About CVS and SOL Developer eite iaaa 1 43 1 10 2 1 Pending Changes O iii ped qnd EI Ste 1 44 11 Using DBA Features in SOL Developer sese eee eene 1 44 11 1 Multitenant Container Database CDB sese 1 46 11 2 Database Configuration ie eret tertinm teet ee eerte dete ee 1 46 11 3 Database tatu 1 47 11 4 B iW c 1 47 11 5 RMAN Backup Recovery ee a er ot entere te oce tette ese eat 1 47 11 5 1 Using Action Jobs sciat ee iet de eee e a He ib ed dts 1 48 11 6 Resource Manager tton petites itane ended ever ep e E Cer dee ode 1 49 11 7 SOL Translator FrameWork oooooncccoconocoonconcconoonnoononnnnnonnnonnonnnon nono ener nnne 1 49 11 8 Schedu ler sien nas ae RR Re e e Rem 1 50 11 9 DOCU aci Fer ttt recie ebrios e Te DUIS ra ERE era Pee arde e e e Ole eon 1 50 11 10 EOLA Be eta ere ted rere e eee e dee qr eei eit vereri e Dg a ER eee Pede AE EHE ee re Te UE Tg 1 51 12 Scheduli
4. Note Oracle recommends that you make a complete backup of the source database before starting the migration For more information about backing up the source database see the documentation for that type of database If possible begin the migration using a development or test environment not a production database 2 2 3 1 Creating a Database User for the Migration Repository SOL Developer requires a migration repository to migrate a third party database to an Oracle database To use an Oracle database for the migration repository you must have access to that database using a database user account Oracle recommends that you use a specific user account for migrations For example you may want to create a user named MIGRATIONS create a database connection to that user and use that connection for the migration repository and if you wish you can later delete the MIGRATIONS user to remove all traces of the migration from the database When you create a user for migrations specify the tablespace information as in the following example instead of using the defaults for tablespaces CREATE USER migrations IDENTIFIED BY password DEFAULT TABLESPACE users TEMPORARY TABLESPACE temp Do not use a standard account for example SYSTEM for migration When SQL Developer creates a migration repository it creates many schema objects that are intended only for its own use For example it creates tables views indexes packag
5. sese nens 5 5 Create New Object ais eo eine e A HU al b peer alanis 5 5 Create Chain iaceo ne ren a e intet a tte HE EUER UP RR RES 5 5 Create Edit Credential sets n eeu PRI ree even 5 5 Create Edit CVS Connecton iecore ticas 5 6 Create Edit Select Database Connection ccoccccncocncnonunononananinnnnnanananonnananannn cono na nonnn conan ona ranonass 5 7 New EditClo d Connect a rece e ee een 5 12 Advanced Connection Information eese eene erinnern ener enne 5 12 Rename Model Migration seen nennen nnne nennen tenent 5 12 Delete Confirmation attention bete E vere exi bet iecit ds 5 12 Delete Confirmation Migration eee eene nennen nennen 5 13 Rename Database Item Migration ocicicinonininnnnnnninnonennnnonconononnnconcnnororon enne nnne 5 13 Select COntiectlOfi ui ute aep nete ette ce et ee DLE e p ve ERR end 5 13 Connection AA das 5 13 No Connection Form Re eiie tete que niet delete cte dete 5 13 Connection Rename Errok esn ten nei eikin e a a non nn non nc etes ersten nico nn non nn sensere 5 13 New Folder Connections enini een ap ls ne Hs 5 14 Continue After Pause edet Bede t se e edes 5 14 Select Library sth tee ek meten tetti eie oer bt e EON etis 5 14 Create abtatyz sotto er ustedes eet fe tS Ute oL Eee cL S ne TERRE SERE MR eR ESE RENE RE 5 14 Data Import Wizard Load Data sse nennen nnne nennen 5 14 Export Import Connection Descriptors
6. 5 83 Subversion Add Property sitis r a a e oe a AEE T conan arar a a Aarie 5 83 Subversion Add to Source Control sse eene trennen nennen 5 83 Subversion Apply Patch uiuere eee dee eee eate tinet cette 5 83 Subversion Branch Tage dee s en een edet e e eed REP ved rete ette 5 84 Subversion Check Out from Subversion cococcconcoonoononnnonnnnononnonncconononcn non eene nennen nnns 5 84 Subversion Commit Resources ooccccocccocoonconncononononnnnononnnoo nono non nonncon nne re tnit rennes tentes nn nnns 5 85 Subversion Commit Working COPY eocnoccoconononononnnnnanonnnnnranannonnnnnnnnnnarnranonnnnanannrnrrarananannnnnranos 5 85 Subversion Confirm CheckoOU ccoonccnnoconoconnconncononnnoononnnon nono non nonocon non nn erret nano non rca non ninos 5 85 5 170 Subversion Create Remote Directory sss eene nnne nnns 5 85 5 171 Subversion Create Subversion Repository esee eee 5 86 5 172 Subversion Create Edit Subversion Connection eene 5 86 5 173 Subversion Delete Resources sss eere eren enne trennt nnne nennen 5 86 5 174 Subversion Edit Configuration File sse een eene 5 86 5 179 Subversion ExportbLEiles ere rere gen reete eet lee etate drea gite dete 5 87 5 176 Subversion Export Subversion Connections sss eene 5 87 D 177 Subversion Ignore seite tee ee cte teen ebrei i eer cad 5 87 5 178 Subversion Import
7. 1 For Connection select the database connection for the Enterprise Manager repository 2 For Change Plan select the change plan to be deleted 3 To the right of Change Plan click the Remove Plan X icon 4 In the Delete Plan dialog box click Apply to confirm that you want to delete the change plan 1 15 2 3 Adding and Updating Change Items To add a change item to a change plan or to update refresh the change items in a change plan you must be connected to the Enterprise repository as a user that has Edit privileges on the plan or that has the Manage Change Plans resource privilege In the Change Management window select the relevant change plan from the Change Plan list The current contents of the plan if any are listed in the Change Items display To add a change item to the selected change plan drag a database object from the Connections navigator for example a table named EMPLOYEES from a connection named HR into the Change Items pane In the dialog box specify the type of change item to be created Add Change Item Drop Change Item or Modify Change Item 1 60 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Change Manager Support in SQL Developer 1 15 2 4 Using Change Plans to Capture Change in SQL Developer There are two basic approaches to capturing changes in change plans single database or multiple databases The approach chosen may depend on the complexity of the work and the number of developers involved
8. 6 4 7 How to Change the Timing for Completion Insight You can specify the number of seconds that Completion Insight is delayed or disable Completion Insight in the Tools Preferences Code Editor Completion Insight page 6 4 8 How to Specify the Columns in the Debugger You can choose the columns and types of information that display in the Debugger in the Tools Preferences Debugger pages 6 5 Highly Visual Features of Oracle SQL Developer Oracle SOL Developer includes features that are highly visual and these features have equivalent functionality that is available to people who are blind or visually impaired The UI and visual editors The source editor provides equivalent functionality as pages and UI elements can be completely designed and coded in the source editor Ihe Component Palette The source editor provides equivalent functionality as elements and tags that can be selected from the Component Palette can also be entered in the source editor You can add a component from the Component Palette to the UI or visual editor using keystrokes In Data Modeler and in the Data Miner Workflow Editor it is possible to create edit and move elements on a diagram using only keystrokes SQL Developer Accessibility Information 6 5 Highly Visual Features of Oracle SQL Developer 6 6 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide A abstract syntax tree AST 1 100 accelerator shortcut keys 1 100 f
9. 8 BOOK_ID TITLE j AUTHOR LAST NAME AUTHOR FIRST NAME lj RATING gt A 1 A1111 Moby Dick Z Melville Hernan 10 2 A5555 Software Wizardry Abugov D 10 Icons and other controls under the Data tab provide the following options Freeze View the pin keeps that object s tab and information in the window when you click another object in the Connections navigator a separate tab and display are created for that other object If you click the pin again the object s display is available for reuse Refresh queries the database to update the data display If a filter is specified the refresh operation uses the filter Insert Row adds an empty row after the selected row for you to enter new data Delete Selected Row s marks the selected rows for deletion The actual deletion does not occur until you commit changes Commit Changes ends the current transaction and makes permanent all changes performed in the transaction Rollback Changes undoes any work done in the current transaction a Sort displays a dialog box for selecting columns to sort by For each column you can specify ascending or descending order and you can specify that null values be displayed first Filter enables you to enter a SOL predicate WHERE clause text without the WHERE keyword for limiting the display of data For example to show only rows where the RATING column value is equal to 10 specify rating 10 and press Enter To see a
10. Add Force to Views If this option is checked the FORCE keyword is added to any CREATE VIEW statements resulting in CREATE OR REPLACE FORCE VIEW in the generated DDL during a database export operation When the script is run later the FORCE keyword causes the view to be created regardless of whether the base tables of the view or the referenced object types exist or the owner of the schema containing the view has privileges on them Include Grants If this option is checked GRANT statements are included for any grant objects on the exported objects However grants on objects owned by the SYS schema are never exported Include Drop Statement If this option is checked a DROP statement is included before each CREATE statement to delete any existing objects with the same names However you may want to uncheck this option and create a separate drop script that can be run to remove an older version of your objects before creation This avoids the chance of accidentally removing an object you did not intend to drop Cascade Drops If this option is checked the DROP statements include the CASCADE keyword to cause dependent objects to be deleted also Storage If this option is checked any STORAGE clauses in definitions of the database objects are preserved in the exported DDL statements If you do not want to use the current storage definitions for example if you will re create the objects in a different system env
11. Datafiles A data file is a physical file on disk that was created by Oracle Database and contains the data for a database The data files can be located either in an operating system file system or Oracle ASM disk group The Datafiles option displays for each data file its file name tablespace status and other information Redo Log Groups A redo log group contains one or more members each online redo log member which corresponds to an online redo log file belongs to a redo log group The contents of all members of a redo log group are identical The Redo Log Groups option displays for each redo log group its status number of members and other information Rollback Segments A rollback segment records the before images of changes to the database The Rollback Segments option displays for each rollback segment its name status tablespace and other information Tablespaces A tablespace is a database storage unit that groups related logical structures together The database data files are stored in tablespaces The Tablespaces option displays for each tablespace its name megabytes allocated free and used and other information Temporary Tablespace Groups A temporary tablespace group is a tablespace group that is assigned as the default temporary tablespace for the database A tablespace group enables a database user to consume temporary space from multiple tablespaces Using a tablespace group rather than a single te
12. H2 This is a Level 2 Heading lt H2 gt dbms output put line p This is regular paragraph text p end Click Apply Use the Reports navigator to view the newly created user defined report For Connection specify any from the list This report does not depend on a specific connection of table The report is displayed as formatted HTML output 1 18 SQL Developer Preferences You can customize many aspects of the SOL Developer interface and environment by modifying SOL Developer preferences according to your preferences and needs To modify SOL Developer preferences select Tools then Preferences Information about SOL Developer preferences is stored under the directory for user specific information For information about the location of this information see Section 1 19 Location of User Related Information Most preferences are self explanatory and this topic explains only those whose meaning and implications are not obvious Some preferences involve performance or system resource trade offs for example enabling a feature that adds execution time and other preferences involve only personal aesthetic taste The preferences are grouped in the following categories Search box You can enter a string to limit the tree display to matching relevant preference groups 1 18 1 Environment The Environment pane contains options that affect the startup and overall behavior and appearance of SOL Developer You
13. sess eee eee eene 5 16 5 97 Create Database Destinati fi 1 ete cvesssccceletdesaccevcssssvasscbunceucscseesssitecesssssvisevoudsexeevns 5 16 5 38 Create Destination Group Database or External sss eee 5 16 5 39 Create Edit Database Link uut eee tere e Ra ee neu 5 17 5 40 Create Edit Index aia 5 17 5 41 Create Filters oreet ER ene A re ERI Eee os 5 19 5 42 Greate7 Edit JOD x ad iet em E e RE e ee reed dt ee eh 5 19 5 43 Create Edit Job Classe eie serit ete teet iate ds 5 21 5 44 Create Edit Materialized View Log sese eene nennen 5 21 5 45 Create PL SOL Package eicere mb ive c eet el ee Re 5 23 5 46 Create PL SQL Subprogram Function or Procedure sss 5 23 5 47 Create PrOBFamm asc Ao A E TAN 5 23 5 48 Create Edit Role rre ete eee pete cese ee ee eee Ue e ee ve EE ee ee a 5 24 5 49 Create Edit Schedule conidios 5 25 5 50 Create Edit Sequence ii eee tol n 5 26 5 51 Create SOL Milenio ie 5 26 5 52 Create Edit NOM eat 5 26 5 53 Create Table quick creation ici e Re die a ei dci ci 5 27 5 54 Create Edit Table with advanced options sess eene 5 28 5 99 Storage OPHOns sit eoe e needed ve inen rire n een e ed 5 37 5 56 Create Edit Tablespace conocida eaque eee eb a 5 38 5 97 il AAA TO TO TENA 5 40 5 58 Create Type User Defined surcos noc de ere ede venite 5 41 5 59 reate Edit Usd ee rec Reve iere E ot eter te Ee ete Ett 5 41 5 60 Create Edit
14. 5 91 Edit Join This dialog box lets you edit the join specification for a join view Swap Reverses the order of the tables Join Type Natural If this option is checked a natural join will be performed A natural join is based on all columns in the two tables that have the same name It selects rows from the two tables that have equal values in the relevant columns When specifying columns that are involved in the natural join do not qualify the column name with a table name or table alias On Using the ON clause to specify a join condition lets you specify join conditions separate from any search or filter conditions in the WHERE clause 5 64 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Filter Using When you are specifying an equijoin of columns that have the same name in both tables the USING column clause indicates the columns to be used You can use this clause only if the join columns in both tables have the same name Within this clause do not qualify the column name with a table name or table alias In an outer join with the USING clause the query returns a single column which is a coalesce of the two matching columns in the join 5 92 Feature Missing This dialog box is displayed if you try to use a SOL Developer feature that requires that the specified Oracle Database feature also be installed To use the SOL Developer feature install the Oracle Database feature if you are authorized to do so otherwise see the database ad
15. DESCRIBE works for most but not all object types for which it is supported in SOL Plus a For SQL Plus statements that are not supported a warning message is displayed a SQL Plus comments are ignored For XMLType data data in the column is displayed as SYS XMLDATA if the database connection uses a JDBC Thin driver but the expanded XML values are displayed if the connection uses an OCI thick Type 2 driver If you have SQL Plus available on your system you may want to use it instead of the script runner 1 7 3 Execution Plan The Execute Explain Plan icon generates the execution plan which you can see by clicking the Explain Plan tab The execution plan is the sequence of operations that will be performed to execute the statement An execution plan shows a row source tree with the hierarchy of operations that make up the statement For each operation it shows the ordering of the tables referenced by the statement access method for each table mentioned in the statement join method for tables affected by join operations in the statement and data operations such as filter sort or aggregation In addition to the row source tree the plan table displays information about optimization such as the cost and cardinality of each operation partitioning such as the set of accessed partitions and parallel execution such as the distribution method of join inputs For more information see the chapter about using EXPLAIN PLAN in
16. Maximizing Tab Panes You can often maximize a display pane such as a SOL Worksheet by double clicking its tab To restore the SOL Developer window to its original display double click the tab again Default Path for Running Scripts You can set a default path for SOL Developer to use if you run a SOL script file for example my_script sql without specifying the path See the Database Worksheet Parameters preferences Shutting Down and Restarting the Database A user with SYSDBA privileges can shut down and restart the database from within SOL Developer if a listener is running with a static listener configured for the database Right click the connection name and select Manage Database Feature Requests Do you have a SQL Developer feature request Log it at the Oracle Technology Network go to http sgldeveloper oracle com and select the Feature Requests link Discussion Forums Would you like to share and search information questions and comments about SOL Developer and Data Miner Visit our discussion forums SOL Developer http forums oracle com forums forum jspa forumID 260 Data Mining http forums oracle com forums forum jspa forumID 55 Help Text Font Size You can use a button in the Help Center window display pane right side to change the help text display size click Increase Font Size or Decrease Font Size repeatedly if necessary until the size is right for you If the text appears blurr
17. 3 2 importing objects 3 11 introduction and main topics 3 1 library 3 10 managing users 5 95 overview 3 1 renaming an implementation 5 95 reports 3 10 repository 3 4 Synchronize Unit Test wizard 5 96 tutorial 3 12 variable substitution 3 9 unloadiing database objects 5 56 unshared connection preference for using on new worksheet 1 94 unshared worksheet for a connection 1 24 1 32 unusable indexes 1 14 updates checking for SOL Developer updates 5 2 Use All Oracle Database 12c Features in Migration option 1 99 user information directory IDE USER DIR 1 105 user interface restoring to originalsettings 1 10 user interface UI 1 3 2 31 unit testing 3 2 user defined extensions 1 90 user defined reports chart example 1 78 creating and editing 5 42 dynamic HTML example 1 79 explanation 1 78 folders for 1 78 5 43 gauge example 1 40 UserReports xml 1 78 user defined snippets 1 41 user defined types creating 5 41 UserReports xml 1 78 users creating and editing 5 41 using 1 44 UT REPO ADMINISTRATOR role 3 4 UT REPO USER role 3 4 ututil batch file or shellscript 3 11 Index 7 V variable substitution unit testing 3 9 versioning preferences for 1 101 SOL Developer support for 1 42 viewlets SOL Developer 1 111 views 1 21 compiling 1 22 creating and editing 5 44 FROM clause 5 45 GROUP BY clause 5 46 HAVING clause 5 47 options when creating or editing 5 47 ORDER BY c
18. 3 6 2 Automatically Creating Implementations If you know that you want implementations to test certain values for a data type you can use a lookup category to generate these implementations automatically instead of creating them all manually To do this use either the DEFAULT lookup category or a user created category specify the values for the desired data type then specify that lookup category for the Configuration set to use for lookups preference in the Unit Test Parameters preferences For example assume that for NUMBER input parameters you always want to check for a very high positive number such as 9999 a very low negative number such as 9999 1 1 and 0 zero Follow these steps 1 Inthe Unit Test navigator expand the Lookups node Right click DEFAULT and select Add Datatype In the dialog box specify NUMBER In the Lookups Editor for the NUMBER type use the plus sign icon to add each of the following as a separate item new line gt N 9999 1 0 0 1 0 9999 5 Click the Commit Changes icon or press F11 6 Click Tools then Preferences then Unit Test Parameters and ensure that the configuration set to use for lookups is DEFAULT the lookup category for which you just specified the values for the NUMBER data type 7 Create the unit test in the usual way in the Unit Test navigator right click the Tests node and select Create Test However in the Specify Test Name step select Seed Cre
19. Comments Optional descriptive comment about the scheduler object 5 162 Subversion Add Property Use this dialog box to add a versioning property for the currently selected file or folder 5 163 Subversion Add to Source Control Use this dialog box to bring a new file under Subversion control Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be added to Subversion 5 164 Subversion Apply Patch Use this dialog box to apply a previously generated patch A patch must be applied to the same revision tag from which it was generated The name and location are displayed for the project or set of files to which the patch will be applied Patch Source Specify where the patch will be obtained from the system clipboard or a file SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 83 Subversion Branch Tag System Clipboard Obtains the patch from the system clipboard File Obtains the patch from a file If you select this option a suggested location and name for the patch file is already entered in the text box You can change this by typing a new location and name into the box or by using the Browse button to find a new location 5 165 Subversion Branch Tag This dialog box is displayed when you right click a remote directory in the Subversion repository and select Branch Tag Create a branch by copying the current working copy or a revision from the repository to a selected location in the repository
20. Import to CVS 5 106 Go to Bookmark Use this box to specify the bookmark to go to in the selected function or procedure After you enter the bookmark and click Go the line associated with that bookmark is highlighted 5 107 Go to Line Number Use this box to specify the line number to go to in the selected function or procedure After you enter the line number and click the Go icon that line is highlighted 5 108 Go to Line Number Error This error box tells you that you entered an invalid line number in the Go to Line Number box probably because you entered a line number greater than that of the last line in the function or procedure 5 109 History The History window displays the differences between different revisions of the same file You can see the local history of a file and when appropriate the version history of a file Revision Filter Use to filter the list of revisions displayed You can edit any of the filters or add new filters using the Customize Filters button Customize Filters button Opens the Custom Filters dialog box in which you can edit the filter values of existing filters or add new filters Refresh button Updates the display Go to First Previous Next Last Difference buttons Moves the cursor to the first previous next or last difference Purge Local History button Removes the local history versions of the files Restore from Revision button Makes the current version of the fi
21. Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet Section 1 8 Using Snippets to Insert Code Fragments Section 1 9 Finding Database Objects Section 1 10 Using Versioning Section 1 11 Using DBA Features in SOL Developer Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer Section 1 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart Section 1 14 Spatial Support in SOL Developer SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 1 Installing and Getting Started with SQL Developer Section 1 15 Change Manager Support in SOL Developer Section 1 16 Application Express Listener Administration Section 1 17 SOL Developer Reports Section 1 18 SQL Developer Preferences Section 1 19 Location of User Related Information Section 1 20 Data Modeler in SOL Developer Section 1 21 Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database Support Section 1 22 Using the Help Section 1 23 Tip of the Day Section 1 24 For More Information 1 1 Installing and Getting Started with SQL Developer To install and start SOL Developer you simply download a ZIP file and unzip it into a desired parent directory or folder and then type a command or double click a file name You should read the Oracle SQL Developer Installation Guide before you perform the installation After you have read the installation guide the basic steps are 1 Unzip the SOL Developer kit into a directory folder of your choice This directory loca
22. A typical test method is the V model which is a staged approach where each feature of the database creation is mirrored with a testing phase Figure 2 2 V model with a Database Migration shows an example of the V model with a database migration scenario Figure 2 2 V model with a Database Migration Development Phase Testing Phase Database Migration System Acceptance Requirements Testing Database Application Integration Design Testing Database Object Testing There are several types of tests that you use during the migration process During the testing stage you go through several cycles of testing to enhance the quality of the database The test cases you use should make sure that any issues encountered in a previous version of the Oracle database are not introduced again For example if you have to make changes to the migrated schema based on test results you may need to create a new version of the Oracle database schema In 2 26 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines practice you use SOL Developer to create a base line Oracle schema at the start of testing and then edit this schema as you progress with testing Note Oracle recommends that you track issues that you find during a testing cycle in an issue tracking system Track these issues against the version of the database or application that you are testing 2 2 10 2 Testing the Oracle Database Us
23. Component Palette Displays the Component Palette Configure Component Palette dialog box Debugger Displays panes related to debugging see Section 1 6 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures Log Displays the Messages Log pane which can contain errors warnings and informational messages Run Manager Displays the Run Manager pane which contains entries for any active debugging sessions Status Displays the Status pane which displays any audit violations in the document selected in the file list and provides information to help you resolve the issues Team Lets you display the Versioning navigator see Section 1 10 Using Versioning Application Express Listener Administration Displays the Application Express Listener Administration window see Section 1 16 Application Express Listener Administration 1 6 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface Cart Displays the Cart window see Section 1 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart Change Management Displays the Change Management window see Section 1 15 Change Manager Support in SOL Developer Connections Displays the Connections navigator DBA Displays the DBA navigator see Section 1 11 Using DBA Features in SOL Developer Data Miner Lets you display the Data Miner Navigator Workflow Jobs Workflow Property Inspector and Component Palette For information about Oracle Data Miner click Help then D
24. Data Encryption feature is enabled for the database Decrypts data in the column that had been encrypted and causes data that is subsequently inserted not to be encrypted Normalize Creates a new table using the distinct values in the specified column You must specify names for the new table and its primary key column as well as a sequence name and trigger name 1 3 29 1 Flashback Table Support For tables in Oracle Database Release 11 1 and later the table display includes the Flashback tab which provides a view of the modified and original data in the table If you have appropriate privileges you can click the Undo SOL subtab to select and review the syntax required to undo changes For information about using the Flashback Table feature see Oracle Database Backup and Recovery User s Guide 1 20 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Objects 1 3 30 Triggers 1 3 31 Types Triggers are stored PL SQL blocks associated with a table a schema or the database or anonymous PL SQL blocks or calls to a procedure implemented in PL SQL or Java Oracle Database automatically executes a trigger when specified conditions occur For help with specific options in creating a trigger see Section 5 57 Create Trigger A crossedition trigger is intended to fire when DML changes are made in a database while an online application that uses the database is being patched or upgraded with edition based redefinition The body of a crossedi
25. Lists information about the table count by tablespace and the tables in each tablespace Triggers Lists information about all triggers disabled triggers and enabled triggers User Synonyms Displays information about either all user synonyms or those user synonyms containing the string that you specify in the Enter Bind Variables dialog box uncheck Null in that box to enter a string User Tables Displays information about either all tables or those tables containing the string that you specify in the Enter Bind Variables dialog box uncheck Null in that box to enter a string Quality Assurance reports Quality assurance reports are table reports that identify conditions that are not technically errors but that usually indicate flaws in the database design These flaws can result in various problems such as logic errors and the need for additional application coding to work around the errors as well as poor performance with queries at runtime Tables without Primary Keys Lists tables that do not have a primary key defined A primary key is a column or set of columns that uniquely identifies each row in the table Although tables are not required to have a primary key it is strongly recommended that you create or designate a primary key for each table Primary key columns are indexed which enhances performance with queries and they are required to be unique and not null providing some automatic validation of input data Primar
26. Oracle Database SQL Tuning Guide 1 7 4 Autotrace Pane The Autotrace pane displays trace related information when you execute the SOL statement by clicking the Autotrace icon Most of the specific information displayed is determinedby theSOL Developer Preferences for Database Autotrace Explain Plan If you cancel a long running statement partial execution statistics are displayed This information can help you to identify SOL statements that will benefit from tuning For example you may be able to optimize predicate handling by transitively adding predicates rewriting predicates using Boolean algebra principles moving predicates around in the execution plan and so on For more information about tracing and autotrace see the chapter about tuning in SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference To use the autotrace feature the database user for the connection must have the SELECT CATALOG ROLE and SELECT ANY DICTIONARY privileges 1 7 5 DBMS Output Pane The PL SQL DBMS OUTPUT package enables you to send messages from stored procedures packages and triggers The PUT and PUT LINE procedures in this package enable you to place information in a buffer that can be read by another trigger procedure or package In a separate PL SQL procedure or anonymous block you can display the buffered information by calling the GET LINE procedure The SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 37 Using the SQL Worksheet DBMS Output pane is used to display
27. SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 13 New Folder Connections 5 31 New Folder Connections This dialog box enable you to create or rename a folder for organizing database connections If you are creating a folder enter the name of the new folder if you are renaming a folder replace the existing name with the desired new name For information about using folders see Section 1 4 1 Using Folders to Group Connections 5 32 Continue After Pause This dialog box is displayed when a PAUSE statement is encountered in a script that you are running in the SOL Worksheet To continue execution at the statement after the PAUSE statement click Yes To stop execution and not continue with the statement after the PAUSE statement click No 5 33 Select Library This dialog box is displayed when you click Browse in the Database pane when setting SOL Developer Preferences Use this box to select the library for the specified JDBC driver class 5 34 Create Library This dialog box is displayed when you click New in the Select Library dialog box which is displayed when you click Browse in the Database pane when setting SOL Developer Preferences Use this box to create the library for the specified JDBC driver class 5 35 Data Import Wizard Load Data Use this wizard to import data into a table For example if you right click the Tables node or a table name in the Connections navigator and select Import Data you can specify the
28. Schema SOL Developer Connection Enterprise Manager Connection Global Name Description SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 59 Change Manager Support in SQL Developer To delete a change item select its row and click the Remove Item s X icon To update the change items display to reflect the contents of the repository click the Refresh icon Related subtopics m Creating a Repository Connection Creating and Deleting Change Plans Adding and Updating Change Items a Using Change Plans to Capture Change in SOL Developer 1 15 2 1 Creating a Repository Connection To store and retrieve change plans you must create a SOL Developer database connection to the Enterprise Manager repository database This connection typically logs in as one of the repository database users created as a Change Plan administrator or developer Create the database connection specifying the user name and password of a suitably privileged user and the connection details for the schema Enterprise Manager repository 1 15 2 2 Creating and Deleting Change Plans To create a change plan 1 Ifthe Change Management window is not visible Click View then Change Management to display the window 2 For Connection select the database connection for the Enterprise Manager repository 3 To the right of Change Plan click the Add Plan icon 4 In the Create Plan dialog box specify a name for the plan and click Apply To delete a change plan
29. Single database Before development starts the developer creates Monitor change items for all objects that might be modified or dropped The developer then begins development work in the database adding modifying and dropping objects As this work progresses the developer updates Monitor change items to make them into Modify change items or converts them to Drop change items and creates new Add change items At the end of development work the change plan contains the changes that took place during the development cycle Multiple databases One database represents the pre development state and is not modified during development work All work takes place in one or more development databases Monitor and Drop change items are created as needed from the pre development database and then updated from the development database s Changes from multiple developers working in multiple databases can be combined into a single change plan 1 15 3 Change Manager Actions to Perform with Enterprise Manager You must use Enterprise Manager to perform any of the following operations related to change plans Creating change plan administrators and developers Creating change plans from Change Manager schema comparisons Deploying change plans For information about performing these operations see the Enterprise Manager help and documentation 1 15 3 1 Creating Change Plans from Change Manager Schema Comparisons You can create change p
30. The commands on the Versioning menu depend on which version management and source control systems are available for use with SOL Developer Tools menu Invokes SOL Developer tools Data Modeler Starts the Data Modeler in SOL Developer if it not already active otherwise contains the commands About Data Modeler Design Rules and General Options user preferences 1 8 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface Migration Displays the Migration Submenu which contains commands related to migrating third party databases to Oracle Unit Test Displays the Unit Test Submenu which contains commands related to unit testing Data Miner Enables you to show the Data Miner navigator and drop the Data Miner repository For information about Data Miner click Help then Data Mining Database Copy Enables you to copy objects schemas or a tablespace from one database to another see the Database Copy wizard Database Diff Enables you to compare two schemas to find differences between objects of the same type and name for example tables named CUSTOMERS in two different schemas and optionally to update the objects in the destination schema to reflect differences in the source schema see the Database Differences interface Database Export Enables you to export unload some or all objects of one or more object types for a database connection to a file containing SOL statements to create these objects and opti
31. To create a credential SOL Developer internally uses the DBMS_ SCHEDULER CREATE CREDENTIAL procedure Name Name of the credential Cannot be set to NULL It is converted to upper case unless enclosed in double quotes For an existing credential this field is read only to change the name you must drop the credential and create a new credential with the desired name Schema Schema for the credential If it is not specified the schema is that for the connection you are using Description Optional text string that can be used to describe the credential User Name User name to use for login to the host operating system or remote Oracle database This cannot be set to NULL and is case sensitive It cannot contain double quotes or spaces Password Password for the user name This cannot be set to NULL and is case sensitive The password is stored obfuscated and is not displayed in the Scheduler dictionary views SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 5 Create Edit CVS Connection Database Role Reserved for future use Windows Domain For a Windows remote executable target this is the domain that the specified user belongs to The domain is converted to uppercase automatically 5 20 Create Edit CVS Connection This information applies to creating or editing a CVS Concurrent Versions System connection For information about SOL Developer support for versioning and CVS see Section 1 10 Connection Access Method Th
32. To delete an entry select it and click the Remove Procedure X icon If no allowed procedures are specified the Oracle Application Express Listener does not validate the procedure names to determine if the procedure is allowed for processing 1 68 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Application Express Listener Administration Blocked Procedures Specify patterns for procedures packages or schema names that are forbidden be directly executed from a browser You can use an asterisk to substitute zero or more characters and a question mark to substitute for any one character If no blocked procedures are specified the Oracle Application Express Listener does not validate the procedure names to determine if the procedure is blocked from processing To add an entry click the Add Procedure icon and enter the pattern To delete an entry select it and click the Remove Procedure X icon Disable Default Internal Exclusion List If option is selected the Oracle Application Express Listener internal exclusion list is not enforced This internal exclusion list blocks users from accessing the following sys dbms utl owa owa htp htf wpg docload Oracle recommends that you not select this option that is do not disable the default internal exclusion list The only possible exception is temporarily disabling the internal exclusion list for debugging purposes Validation Function You can use the Vali
33. Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures Go to Previous Bookmark Goes to the previous bookmark in the currently active editing window for a function or procedure see Section 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures Go to Line Goes to the specified line number and highlights the line in the editing window for the selected function or procedure To display line numbers enable Show Line Numbers under the Code Editor Line Gutter preferences Go to Last Edit Goes to the last line that was edited in the editing window for a function or procedure Go to Recent Files Displays the Recent Files dialog box in which you can specify a function or procedure to go to Run menu Contains options relevant when a function or procedure is selected or when it is open for debugging Run name Starts execution of the specified function or procedure Debug name Starts execution of the specified function or procedure in debug mode The remaining items on the Debug menu match commands on the debugging toolbar which is described in Section 1 6 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures Versioning menu Contains options related to support for the Subversion version management and source control system and for any other such systems such as CVS that you have added as extensions to SOL Developer through the check for updates feature See Section 1 10 Using Versioning for more information
34. WHERE The text of the WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword You can type the text completely or you can type some of the text and use the Expression Palette to add object names function names and operators Example from the Create a View tutorial exercise p patron id t patron id GROUP BY Clause pane Specifies a clause to be used to group the selected rows based on the value of columns for each row and return a single row of summary information for each group The GROUP BY clause groups rows but does not guarantee the order of the result set to order the groupings use the ORDER BY clause Available Lists the tables and views and the columns in each that are available to be selected for use in the GROUP BY clause of the view definition Selected Lists the tables and views and the columns in each that you can use in the GROUP BY clause of the view definition To add an object as selected select it in Available and click the Add gt icon to remove an object as selected select it in Selected and click the Remove icon To move all objects from available to selected use the Add All lt lt icon to move all objects from selected to available use the Remove All lt lt icon 5 46 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit View HAVING Clause pane Specifies an expression that must be satisfied for rows to be processed by the GROUP BY clause For example HAVING MIN salary 30000 causes the GROUP
35. column This is the Dewey code or other book identifier title VARCHAR2 50 Not Null author last name VARCHAR2 30 Not Null author first name VARCHAR2 30 rating NUMBER Librarian s personal rating of the book from 1 poor to 10 great After you have entered the last column rating check Advanced next to Schema This displays a pane for more table options For this table you will use the Unique Constraints and Check Constraints panes 4 2 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create a Table PATRONS Unique Constraints pane Click Add to add a unique constraint for the table namely that the combination of author last name and title must be unique within the table This is deliberately oversimplified since most major libraries will have allow more than one copy of a book in their holdings Also the combination of last name and title is not always a foolproof check for uniqueness but it is sufficient for this simple scenario Name author title unique In Available Columns double click TITLE and then AUTHOR LAST NAME to move them to Selected Columns Check Constraints pane Click Add to add a check constraint for the table namely that the rating column value is optional it can be null but if a value is specified it must be a number from 1 through 10 You must enter the condition using SQL syntax that is valid in a CHECK clause but do not include the CHECK keyword or enclosing parentheses for the entire CH
36. make sure that the session which issues the debugger connection commands is the same session which executes your PL SQL program containing the breakpoints For example if the name of the remote system is remote use the following SQL Plus statement to open a TCP IP connection to that system and the port for the JDWP session EXEC DBMS DEBUG JDWP CONNECT TCP remotel 4000 The first parameter is the IP address or host name of the remote system and the second parameter is the port number on that remote system on which the debugger is listening 2 Right click the connection for the remote database select Remote Debug and complete the information in the Debugger Attach to JPDA dialog box Then follow the steps that you would for local debugging for example see Section 4 8 Debug a PL SQL Procedure 1 6 3 Displaying SQL Trace trc Files If you have any SQL Trace trc output files you can display them in SOL Developer as an alternative to using the TKPROF program to format the contents of the trace file To open a trc file in SOL Developer and see an attractive effective display of the information click File then Open and specify the file or drag the file s name or icon into the SOL Developer window You can then examine the information in the List View Statistics View and History panes with each pane including options for filtering and controlling the display For information about SOL Trace and TKPROF see Or
37. option to be added to the underlying svn unlock command 5 189 Subversion Update Resources Use this dialog box to incorporate into your local copies changes that other developers have committed to the Subversion repository Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be updated with content from the Subversion repository Use Revision Updates the files with content from a particular revision within the Subversion repository Enter the revision number in the adjacent text box If not selected the files will be updated from the HEAD revision Ignore Externals Select if you do not want the update operation to apply to external working copies created as the result of externals definition handling Externals definitions are used to pull data from multiple repositories See the Subversion documentation for details Recursive Deselect if you do not want the update operation to recurse into child objects of those selected 5 190 Subversion Update Working Copy Use this dialog box to update individual files with content from the Subversion repository Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be updated with content from the Subversion repository Use Revision Updates the files with content from a particular revision within the Subversion repository Enter the revision number in the adjacent text box If not selected the files will be updated from the HEAD revision Igno
38. or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s al
39. organization for these topics 1 23 1 SQL History Shortcuts Using Ctrl up arrow or Ctrl down arrow in the SOL Worksheet replaces the contents of the SOL Worksheet with lines of code from the SOL History You can step up and down through the SOL History To view the SOL History in the SOL Worksheet press F8 or click View then History 1 23 2 Unshared Worksheets To create a separate unshared worksheet for a connection press Ctrl Shift N SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 107 Tip of the Day 1 23 3 SQL Worksheet Bookmarks If you have many SOL Worksheets open you can assign a bookmark number to each and then easily navigate among them To create a bookmark click the worksheet s tab and press Alt Shift number for example Alt Shift 1 The number now appears asa small superscript in the tab To switch to a worksheet that has a bookmark press Alt number for example Alt 1 1 23 4 Oracle Data Miner Interested in Oracle Data Miner Click Help then Data Mining 1 23 5 Formatted Display of SQL Trace trc Files To see a formatted display of a SOL Trace file drag the trc file onto the area above the SOL Worksheet or open it by clicking File then Open 1 23 6 Keyboard Navigation Alt Page Down Up to Move Among Tabs You can press Alt Page Down to move to the next tab and Alt Page Up to move to the previous tab in a tabbed editor or display window such as with the tabs for Table and View grid displays Co
40. source file such as a spreadsheet or a delimited file from which to import data You create a table and import data into it or import data into an existing table Data Preview You can specify preferences that affect the preview display of data to be imported Several default values are determined by the Database Utilities Import user preferences Header If this option is enabled a header row not data to be imported is assumed to start before Before Skip or after After Skip the number of rows for Skip Rows Skip Rows The number of rows at the start to skip that is not be considered as data to be imported Thus the combination of Header and Skip Rows determines the total number of rows at the start that are not considered data to be imported Format Format of the file containing data to be imported For example xls Microsoft Excel csv comma separated value dsv delimiter separated value or tsv tab separated value Preview Limit The maximum number of rows of data to be displayed in the preview pane in the lower part of the box When the wizard creates a new table the preview data is used to calculate the size of the columns therefore ensure that the preview is a good sample of the data The displayed data is affected by the Preview Limit and by 5 14 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Data Import Wizard Load Data the Database Utilities Import user preference for Preview File Read Maximum which li
41. to return all employee names for a particular department The data exchange for a RESTful Service follows the Representational State Transfer REST protocol See Oracle Application Express Application Builder User s Guide for information on how to develop RESTful Services for use with the Application Express Listener If you are using RESTful Services specify the password for the database user APEX_ REST PUBLIC USER which used when invoking PL SQL Gateway operations and for the database user APEX LISTENER which is used to query RESTful Services definitions stored in Oracle Application Express 1 16 4 3 Security Security settings are used to validate procedure requests and determine if a user is allowed to access the procedure Verify Secure Socket Layer Requests Enable this option if HTTPS is available in your environment A RESTful service can be protected with the OAuth2 protocol to control access to non public data OAuth2 requires all requests involved in the OAuth2 authentication process to be transported via HTTPS The default behavior of the Application Express Listener is to verify that all OAuth2 related requests have been received via HTTPS It will refuse to service any such requests received over HTTP returning an HTTP status code of 403 Forbidden Disabling this option should only be used for development or test environments Do not disable this option for production environments because it will result in user credentials
42. user with extra privileges to perform the operation It is recommended that you delete this user after the operation This option is provided for convenience and is suggested unless you want to perform least privilege migrations or unless you want to grant privileges manually to a user for the data move operations This option is especially recommended for multischema migrations such as when not all tables belong to a single user Generate Failed Objects Causes objects that failed to be converted to be included in the generation script so that you can make any desired changes and then run the script If this option is not checked objects that failed to be converted are not included in the generation script 1 98 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Generate Stored Procedure for Migrate Blobs Offline Causes a stored procedure named CLOBtoBLOB_sqldeveloper with execute access granted to public to be created if the schema contains a BLOB binary large object this procedure is automatically called if you perform an offline capture If this option is not checked you will need to use the manual workaround described in Section 2 2 8 1 4 Populating the Destination Database Using the Data Files After the offline capture you can delete the CLOBtoBLOB_sqldeveloper procedure or remove execute access from public Generate Separate Emulation User Causes a separate database user named EMULATION to be created The
43. 10 1 About Subversion and SQL Developer Before you can work with a Subversion repository through SOL Developer you must create a connection to it When you create a local Subversion repository a connection to it is automatically created and this can be seen in the Versioning navigator You can subsequently edit the connection details To connect to an existing Subversion repository if no connection to that repository exists use the Versioning navigator as follows 1 If the Versioning navigator is not visible click View then Team then Versioning Navigator 2 Right click the top level Subversion node and select New Repository Connection 3 Complete the information in the Subversion Create Edit Subversion Connection dialog box including the URL of the existing repository 4 Use the connection to access the repository Existing files must be imported into the Subversion repository to bring them under version control Files are then checked out from the Subversion repository to a local folder known as the Subversion working copy Files created in or moved into SOL Developer must be stored in the Subversion working copy Files newly created within SOL Developer must be added to version control Changed and new files are made available to other users by committing them to the SOL Developer repository The Subversion working copy can be updated with the contents of the Subversion repository to incorporate changes made by oth
44. 1000 bonus In this case the query returns one row and therefore the result of the validation action is success Note that you could have instead specified the SELECT statement in this step using variable replacement explained in Section 3 7 as follows SELECT FROM employees WHERE employee id EMP ID AND salary 9400 However in this specific example scenario using variable substitution would provide no significant advantage In Specify Teardown select Table or Row Restore because you want to restore the original data values in the EMPLOYEES table before any data was modified by the unit test When prompted accept the supplied values for Target Table EMPLOYEES and Source Table the name of the temporary table In Summary review the information If you need to change anything click Back as needed and make the changes then proceed to this Summary page When you are ready to complete the unit test definition click Finish 3 12 5 Run the Unit Test To run the unit test use the Unit Test navigator If this navigator is not visible on the left side click View then Unit Test The Unit Test navigator is described in Section 3 2 1 3 In the Unit Test navigator expand the Tests node and click the AWARD BONUS test A pane for the AWARD BONUS test is displayed with Details and Results tabs On the Details tab near the top right corner select the database connection for the schema that you used to create the AW
45. 6 3 4 6 3 5 6 3 6 6 3 7 6 3 8 6 3 9 6 3 10 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 6 4 4 6 4 5 6 4 6 6 4 7 6 4 8 6 5 Oracle SOL Developer Features that Support Accessibility sss 6 1 Keyboard Access eee titre E pee a ei t epi Bec er Re Rees 6 2 Screen Reader Readability 1 tenes tee ete te tee 6 2 Flexibility in Font and Color Choices sss eee nen 6 3 No Audio only Feedback rtc n etr e ime e dete tentent 6 3 No Dependency on Blinking Cursor and Animation esee 6 3 Screen Magnifier Usability sss nennen nennen nennen 6 3 How to Change the Editor or Tabbed View of a File sess 6 3 How to Read Text in a Multiline Edit Field sse 6 3 How to Read the Line Number in the Source Editor sss 6 4 How to Access Exception Stack HTML Links and Generated Javadoc Links in the Log Window 6 4 Recommendations for Customizing Oracle SOL Developer esses 6 4 How to Customize the Accelerators Keys sess eee 6 4 How to Pass a Conflicting Accelerator Key to Oracle SOL Developer 6 4 How to Change the Look and Feel of SOL Developer sse 6 4 How to Customize the Fonts in Code Editors sess 6 4 How to Customize Syntax Highlighting sse eene 6 4 How to Display Line Numbers in Code Editor
46. 9 Unit Test Librarya aa ina 3 10 Unit Test Reports somete tddi trata tige e tec rie ia 3 10 Exporting and Importing Unit Test Objects eene 3 11 Command Line Interface for Unit Testing sees eee eene 3 11 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial ccc seen nennen nennen 3 12 Create the EMPLOYEES Table eise dada 3 14 Create the AWARD BONUS Procedure essere neret 3 14 Create the Unit Testing Repository sees eene 3 15 Created Unit Tests uae eere eerte a e dE Ne deut 3 15 R n the Unit Test ise Rete esie ipte dete qiio nit 3 16 Create and Run an Exception Unit Test sss 3 17 Createca Unit Test Suite us e reet ee tei e P HE e Hr e eren td 3 18 Run the Unit Test Ste cinc deni eee aso 3 18 SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 1 4 2 Create a Table BOOKS icon p eee eid p nep p es 4 2 Create a Table PATRONS tisse dte delegit Ad 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 Create a Table TRANSACTIONSGS esses eene nono non none eene eene AAEE 4 4 Create a 5equericex 2d hte Aba inpr etam en btc stone oboe 4 6 Insert Data irito the Tables 3 eee eere tee dete eee ide LE Ree a 4 7 Create Vie Wisin st eee a hee eode eo e eter pa Fea eee etg eed eee sh bev aee aee dps se eed 4 8 Cr ate PE SOQL Procedititre eere Nee fies re e tpe e reo eec red 4 8 D bug a PL ASOb Procedure n nete reete tee em ede gues die e nete eere
47. BY password DEFAULT TABLESPACE users TEMPORARY TABLESPACE temp GRANT CONNECT RESOURCE CREATE VIEW CREATE PUBLIC SYNONYM TO migrations WITH ADMIN OPTION GRANT ALTER ANY ROLE ALTER ANY SEQUENCE ALTER ANY TABLE ALTER TABLESPACE ALTER ANY TRIGGER COMMENT ANY TABLE CREATE ANY SEQUENCE CREATE ANY TABLE CREATE ANY TRIGGER CREATE ROLE CREATE TABLESPACE CREATE USER DROP ANY SEQUENCE DROP ANY TABLE DROP ANY TRIGGER DROP TABLESPACE DROP USER DROP ANY ROLE GRANT ANY ROLE INSERT ANY TABLE SELECT ANY TABLE UPDATE ANY TABLE TO migrations Gy Gy After you have created the converted model and done first DDL generation done for the new database it will be clear from the scripts which privileges will be required for your situation 2 2 4 Before You Start Migrating Source Specific Information Depending on the third party database that you are migrating to an Oracle database you may have to configure connection information and install drivers For more information about specific third party database requirements see the following Section 2 2 4 1 Before Migrating From IBM DB2 Section 2 2 4 2 Before Migrating From Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server a Section 2 2 4 3 Before Migrating From Microsoft Access Section 2 2 4 4 Before Migrating From MySQL SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 13 Migration Background Information and Guidelines Se
48. Binary Large Object Column specifies whether to include BLOBs in the PDF document to exclude BLOBs from the PDF document and have the BLOB column be blank or to create the BLOBs as separate files in a filename blob subdirectory and create relative links in the PDF file to the BLOB files In this case if you copy the PDF file you must also remember to copy the filename blob subdirectory and its files For the relative links option you have the option to create instead only a zip file that contains the PDF file and BLOB files If a pane includes Header this option controls whether the first row is a header row or the first row of data Database Utilities Import The Import pane determines the default values used for the Data Import Wizard Load Data wizard See also the panes for Database Utilities Import File Formats CVS Delimited Text and Database Utilities Import Import Methods External Table Insert SOL Loader Default Import Directory The default folder or directory for files containing data to be imported You can click Browse to find and select the folder or directory 1 92 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences File Encoding Default character set used for encoding of the data to be imported Preview Limit If this option is checked it specifies the maximum number of rows of data to be displayed in the preview pane before you proceed with the import operation The lower the v
49. Database objects that were not created successfully when you migrated the destination database Data that did not migrate successfully when you migrated the destination database For each error or warning in the migration log evaluate the following Number of times an issue occurred Time required to fix the issues in person hours Number of resources required to fix the issue SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 9 Migration Background Information and Guidelines After you have solved a complex problem it should be easier and quicker to resolve the next time you have the same problem 2 2 2 3 Task 3 Analyzing Operational Requirements In this task you analyze the operational requirements as follows 1 Evaluate the operational considerations in migrating the source database to a destination database Consider the following questions Note If the scope of the migration project is a complex scenario as defined in Table 2 1 Oracle recommends that you answer all of these questions If you have a simple scenario determine the answers to the most appropriate questions a What backup and recovery changes do you require What downtime is required during the migration Have you met the performance requirements Are you changing the operational time window Whateffect does the downtime have on the business Whattraining requirements or additional staff considerations are requi
50. Developer User s Guide Create Edit View Schema Database schema containing the objects to be selected Type Filter Filter Types Enables you to limit the display of objects available for selection to certain types of database objects for example to show only tables or views Name Filter Enables you to limit the display of objects available for selection according to a character string in the name with the percent sign 76 as a wildcard character For example to limit the display of available tables and views to those whose names start with the string EM specify the following name filter EM Auto Query If this option is enabled the display of available objects is automatically refreshed when you specify or change the Type Filter or Name Filter value Query Refreshes the display of available objects based on the Type Filter and Name Filter values Available Lists the objects typically tables and views in a hierarchical display from which you can select objects to use in the SELECT FROM and WHERE clauses of the view definition Selected Lists the objects typically columns that you can use in the SELECT FROM and WHERE clauses of the view definition To add an object as selected select it in Available and click the Add gt icon to remove an object as selected select it in Selected and click the Remove icon To move all objects from selected to available use the Remove All lt lt icon To move an o
51. Express Listener 1 16 3 Connecting to Application Express Listener Server The Application Express Listener Administration requires a connection to the Application Express Listener to retrieve or upload the administration settings Right click on the Listener navigator to display the context menu and select Connect The Listener Connection dialog box is displayed where you can select a connection add a connection to the list or edit a connection in the list When you select a connection and click OK you are always prompted for the Application Express Listener Administration password the password you provided during the installation of the Application Express Listener After successful authentication the administration settings are retrieved and displayed If you add or edit a listener connection you can specify the following information Connection Name Name to identify the Application Express Listener that you are connecting to based on the information that you are providing Username Application Express Listener Administrator username that you provided during Application Express Listener installation See Oracle Application Express Listener Installation and Developer Guide for information about configuring the administration user http or https Select which protocol to use Hostname DNS name or IP address of the Application Express Listener Port Port on which the Application Express Listener is listening for requests Ser
52. For convenience you can click buttons to affect all settings Grant All Revoke All Admin All Admin None then you can specify other settings for individual privileges Quotas tab Specifies disk usage limits on specified tablespaces for the user If you check Unlimited there is no disk usage limit on the tablespace SQL tab Displays the SOL statements that SOL Developer will use to create after executing a CREATE USER statement a new user or to edit an existing user This display is read only if you want to make any changes go back to the relevant tabs and make the changes there 5 60 Create Edit User Defined Report The following information applies to a user defined report For information about how to create a user defined report as well as examples of creating such reports see Section 1 17 15 User Defined reports Add Child Add a child report in this report Test Tests the report definition by running it in a separate window This feature enables you to test the report before creating it Details tab Name Name of the user defined report Style Report style Table default Code formats the code in the output Chart bar or pie chart see Section 1 17 15 1 User Defined Report Example Chart for an example Gauge dial or status meter see Section 1 7 10 Gauges In the SOL Worksheet and User Defined Reports plsgl dbms output dynamic HTML see Section 1 17 15 2 User Defined Report Example Dynamic
53. For the rest of the definition click the tab for the program type PL SQL code Stored Procedure or Executable file PL SQL tab The program is a PL SQL block Job or program arguments are not supported when the job or program type is PLSQL_BLOCK In this case the number of arguments must be 0 Enter or paste in the complete PL SQL code or edit the existing code Stored Procedure tab The program is a PL SQL or Java stored procedure or an external C subprogram Only procedures not functions with return values are supported PL SQL procedures with INOUT or OUT arguments are not supported Schema Schema of the stored procedure I not specified the schema of the job is assumed Procedure Name of the stored procedure Arguments For each argument name data type default value and whether it is an input output or input output argument Executable tab The program is external to the database External programs implies anything that can be executed from the operating system s command line AnyData arguments are not supported Executable Name of the external executable including the full path name but excluding any command line arguments If the action starts with a single question mark the question mark is replaced by the path to the Oracle home directory for a local job or to the Scheduler agent home for a remote job If the action contains an at sign and the job is local the at sign is replaced with the SID
54. From Location of the working copy or revision Working Copy Causes the current working copy to be copied HEAD Revision Causes the HEAD revision the latest revision in the repository to be copied Use Revision Causes the revision specified in the text box to be copied To see a list of revisions from which you can choose click List Revisions To Destination location Comment Optional descriptive comment Switch to new branch tag If this option is checked the existing working copy is switched to the new branch After you click OK the SVN Console Log pane is displayed at the bottom with messages about commands that were executed 5 166 Subversion Check Out from Subversion Use this dialog box to check out modules from a Subversion repository to create the initial local copies of files and folders that are being stored within a Subversion repository It is these local copies stored outside the Subversion repository that you work on This location and the files within it constitute the Subversion working copy Note With Subversion there is no check in procedure so you do not check in files that you have updated and check them out again when you next want to work on them Instead when you have finished working on your local copies of files you commit them to the Subversion repository to bring the files held there up to date Also if you want to incorporate into your local copies changes that other developers have c
55. HTML for an example or Script executable script Description Optional description of the report ToolTip Optional tooltip text to be displayed when the mouse pointer stays briefly over the report name in the Reports navigator display SQL Statement The complete SQL statement for retrieving the information to be displayed in the user defined report As a trivial example the statement SELECT user Current User FROM DUAL displays Current User as the heading and the name of the user associated with the current database connection Suggestion Look at the SOL statements for various SOL Developer supplied reports check the Messages Log pane below the report results or click the SOL icon under the Report Results tab 5 42 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit User Defined Report Folder Binds tab Name Name of the bind variable Prompt String displayed when the user is prompted to enter a value Example Table name Default Default value if the user does not enter a value at the prompt To accept the Oracle SQL value specify NULL VALUE ToolTip Optional tooltip text to be displayed when the mouse pointer stays briefly over the bind variable name Chart Details tab Available if the report type is Chart Chart Type Bar chart with horizontal or vertical bars or pie chart 3D Graph True for a three dimensional appearance False for a two dimensional appearance Gradient Effect True for a gradient effe
56. Mac OS X Users Your user gt Library Application Support SOLDeveloper CodeTemplate xml SOL Developer Windows C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application user preferences Data SQL Developer systemn n n n n Linux or Mac OS X sgldeveloper systemm n n n n If you want to prevent other users from accessing your user specific SOL Developer information you must ensure that the appropriate permissions are set on the directory where that information is stored or on a directory above it in the path hierarchy For example on a Windows system you may want to ensure that the SOL Developer folder and the lt user name gt Application Data SQL Developer folder under Documents and Settings are not shareable and on a Linux or Mac OS X system you may want to ensure that the sqldeveloper directory is not world readable 1 20 Data Modeler in SQL Developer SOL Developer includes an integrated version of SOL Developer Data Modeler You can create open import and save a database design and you can create modify and delete Data Modeler objects To display Data Modeler in a pane click Tools then Data Modeler After that the Data Modeler menu under Tools includes additional commands for example enabling you to specify design rules and general options user preferences 1 21 Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database Support When you connect to an Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database the available types of objects t
57. Max Runs The maximum number of consecutive scheduled runs of the job Max Failures The number of times a job can fail on consecutive scheduled runs before it is automatically disabled Instance ID In an Oracle Real Application Clusters environment the instance ID of the instance that the job must run on Raise Events Determines at what stages of the job execution to raise events See the DBMS SCHEDULER SET ATTRIBUTE documentation in Oracle Database PL SQL Packages and Types Reference for details Summary SQL May include a summary in hierarchical form or the PL SOL statement that will be used to implement your specifications or both 5 43 Create Edit Job Class This interface is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler job class or editing an existing job class For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer To create a job class SOL Developer internally uses the DBMS_ SCHEDULER CREATE JOB CLASS procedure which is documented in Oracle Database PL SQL Packages and Types Reference Name Name of the job class If you specify a schema it must be SYS For an existing job class this field is read only to change the name you must drop the job class and create a new job class with the desired name Description Optional text string that can be used to describe the job class Logging Level Specifies how much information is written to the job log RUNS detailed informati
58. My Oracle Support For information visit http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id info or visit http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id trs if you are hearing impaired Product Accessibility If you are using a screen reader such as JAWS SOL Developer must be running on the same system as the screen reader For more information about using a screen reader and Java Access Bridge with SOL Developer see Chapter 6 SOL Developer Accessibility Information and Oracle SOL Developer Installation Guide Related Documents For information about installing Oracle SOL Developer see the Oracle SOL Developer Installation Guide Oracle error message documentation is only available in HTML If you only have access to the Oracle Documentation CD you can browse the error messages by range Once you find the specific range use your browser s find in page feature to locate the xvii specific message When connected to the Internet you can search for a specific error message using the error message search feature of the Oracle online documentation To download free release notes installation documentation white papers or other collateral go to the Oracle Technology Network OTN at http www oracle com technetwork The documentation section of the OTN site is at http www oracle com technetwork indexes documentation Conventions The following text conventions are used in this document Co
59. Owner The detail display pane for a report includes the following icons at the top Freeze View the pin keeps that report in the SOL Developer window when you click another report in the Reports navigator a separate tab and detail view pane are created for that other report If you click the pin again the report s detail view pane is available for reuse a Run Report updates the detail view pane display by querying the database for the latest information a Run Report in SOL Worksheet displays the SOL statement used to retrieve the information for a report in a SOL Worksheet pane where you can view edit and run the statement see Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet The time required to display specific reports will vary and may be affected by the number and complexity of objects involved and by the speed of the network connection to the database For most reports that contain names of database objects you can double click the object name in the report display pane or right click the object name and select Go To to display that object in a detail view pane just as if you had selected that object using the Connections navigator To export a report into an XML file that can be imported later right click the report name in the Reports navigator display and select Export To import a report that had previously been exported select the name of the report folder name such as a SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 71 SQL D
60. Run the unit test object User Input None Framework Activities Execute the unit test 4 Checkand record the results User Input Identify the expected return result plus any validation rules Framework Activities Check the results including for any validation and store the results 5 Perform any end processing teardown User Input Enter the PL SQL block or enter NULL for no teardown activities Framework Activities Execute the block For each test you enter the information called for in the preceding steps to create a test case A unit test is a group of test cases one or more on a specific PL SQL object Each test case is an implementation Each unit test has at least one implementation named Default by default however you can add one or more other implementations For example you can have implementations that test various combinations of parameter values including those that generate exceptions When a unit test is run each implementation is run one after the other Each implementation runs the startup action if any for the test then the test implementation itself and then the teardown action if any The difference between implementations is in the values of the calling arguments Any dynamic value query explained in Section 3 5 Using a Dynamic Value Query to Create a Unit Test is evaluated before the execution of all of the implementations including before any startup action You can group unit te
61. SOL Developer is running must have an Oracle Client installation that contains the JDBC and orai18n libraries is present on the path and is version 10 2 or later TimesTen tab The following information applies to a connection to an Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database For Username and Password specify the user name and password of the user account in the TimesTen database DSN Data source name Select an existing DSN if any are displayed or User specified to create a new DSN A DSN is a character string that identifies a TimesTen database and includes connection attributes to be used when connecting to the database A DSN has the following characteristics its maximum length is 32 characters it cannot contain spaces and it consists of ASCII characters except for the following Connection Type if DNS is user specified C S for client server mode or Direct for direct mode Connection String Connection attributes including database attributes first connection attributes general connection attributes NLS attributes and Cache Connect attributes See Oracle TimesTen Application Tier Database Cache User s Guide for information about the attributes Oracle Password for Cache The password for the TimesTen user account on the Oracle Database See the TimesTen documentation for more information For more information about SQL Developer support for TimesTen see Section 1 21 For detailed usage and reference inf
62. SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit External Tool 5 87 Create Edit External Tool This interface is displayed as a wizard if you are creating a new external tool and as a dialog box if you are editing an existing external tool see Section 5 86 External Tools External Program Options Program Executable Path of the program executable for the tool Arguments Arguments parameters to be passed to the program You can click Insert to insert a macro for the argument see Section 5 100 Insert Macro Run Directory Directory in which to run the program You can click Insert to insert a macro for the directory see Section 5 100 Insert Macro Command Sample A read only sample display of the command to run the program Display Options Specify how the external tool should appear when displayed in menu or toolbar items Caption for Menu Items The text string that will appear for any menu item that calls the external tool To indicate the mnemonic character use the ampersand before the character For example amp Mytool for the M to be underlined and used as the mnemonic ToolTip Text Text for the tooltip to be displayed when the mouse pointer hovers over the icon for the tool in a toolbar Icon Location File path of the icon associated with the tool Click Browse to specify a graphics file or Use Default to use the default icon if you previously specified a nondefault icon Preview A read only display of
63. Select Connection dialog box You should add only connections for which the associated database user has DBA privileges or at least privileges for the desired DBA navigator operations on the specified database If you attempt to perform a DBA navigator operation for which the database connection user does not have sufficient privileges you will receive an error The following options are available from the DBA navigator hierarchy Connections connection name Multitenant Container Database CDB Database Configuration Initialization Parameters Automatic Undo Management Current Database Properties Restore Points View Database Feature Usage Database Status Status Data Pump Export Jobs Import Jobs RMAN Backup Recovery Backup Jobs Backup Sets 1 44 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using DBA Features in SQL Developer Image Copies RMAN Settings Scheduled RMAN Actions Resource Manager Consumer Group Mappings Consumer Groups Plans Settings Statistics SQL Translator FrameWork SOL Translation Profiles SQL Translators Scheduler Global Attributes Job Classes External Destinations Security Audit Settings Profiles Roles Users Storage Archive Logs Control Files Datafiles Redo Log Groups Rollback Segments Tablespaces Temporary Tablespace Groups To perform limited database management operations you can right click the connection name in the DBA navigator display and select Manage Databa
64. Steps 2 1 1 Migrating Using the Migration Wizard The Migration wizard provides convenient comprehensive guidance through the actions that can be involved in database migration capturing the source database converting it to Oracle format generating DDL to perform the conversion and so on This is the recommended approach when performing a migration you can resolve issues during these phases and you can then inspect or modify objects to suit your needs The migration wizard is invoked in a variety of contexts such as when you right click a third party database connection and select Migrate to Oracle or when you click Tools then Migration then Migrate Sometimes the wizard is invoked at a page other than the first step On all pages except the last enabling Proceed to Summary Page causes Next to go to the Summary page Repository The Repository page of the wizard requires that you specify the database connection for the migration repository to be used The migration repository is a collection of schema objects that SOL Developer uses to manage metadata for migrations If you do not already have a migration repository and a database connection to the repository create them as follows 1 Create an Oracle user named MIGRATIONS with default tablespace USERS and temporary tablespace TEMP and grant it at least the RESOURCE role and the CREATE SESSION and CREATE VIEW privileges For multischema migrations you must grant the RESO
65. Subversion Connections eecececoconononennnnrnnnncnnnnnnnarnnnncnnarnnnenarararanancnnos 5 87 5 179 Subversion Import to Subversion e s ineens ikeir eene 5 87 5 180 Subversion Lock ResO fc s eiecit cantata laos es e eR MER eei 5 88 5 181 Subversion Merge ete ee eire ee tee pei tre e e ta Fete ee ta 5 88 5 182 Subversion Pending Changes sese 5 89 5 183 Subversion Properties iiti eene Deere tete reote pio teer 5 90 5 184 Subversion Remove from Subversion essere ener tnnt nennen 5 90 5 185 Subversion Repository Browser sess eee eene eene nennnen 5 90 5 186 Subversion Revert Local Changes esses eene nennen 5 90 5 187 Subversion Switches sc c c0 act oed eH ae HERE ERU P RERO E eae isabel 5 90 5 188 Subversion Unlock Resources innsin eaii i e aren e iiini 5 91 5 189 Subversion Update Resources rete ea tere AEEA 5 91 5 190 Subversion Update Working Copy sse eee eene nnne nennen 5 91 5 191 Subversion Versioning Properties eese 5 92 5 192 Third Party Database Objects ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeennenenenennn nnne nnne nennen 5 92 5 193 Unable to Connect inea s Ibm eile ib ettet ds 5 92 5 194 Unableto Open Ple cd ee aee ette te e tet 5 92 5 195 Unit Testing Action Required sse nennen n nnne nennen 5 92 5 196 Unit Testing Add Category iseset eet ete e eee teet end ee teet es 5 92 5 197 Unit Testing Ad
66. TABLE award bonus dyn query emp id NUMBER PRIMARY KEY sales amt NUMBER INSERT INTO award bonus dyn query VALUES 1001 5000 INSERT INTO award bonus dyn query VALUES 1002 6000 INSERT INTO award bonus dyn query VALUES 1003 2000 commit In the Unit Test navigator right click the Tests node and select Create Test The Unit Testing Create Unit Test wizard is displayed Click Next to go from each step to the next and when you are finished specifying the unit test click Finish In Select Operation select the database connection for the schema that you used to create the AWARD BONUS procedure then expand the Procedures node and select AWARD BONUS In Specify Test Name for Test Name specify AWARD BONUS DYN QUERY same as the name of the table that you created and select Create with single dummy representation In Specify Startup select Table or Row Copy because you want to save the current data values in the EMPLOYEES table before any data is modified by the unit test When prompted for Source Table specify EMPLOYEES and for Target Table accept the default name provided for a temporary table that will be automatically created when it is needed and deleted when it is no longer needed In Specify Parameters click Next to go to the next page For this example do not specify the Dynamic Value Query here instead you will specify it in later steps In Specify Validations click Next to go to the next page In
67. Updates feature before you can create a database connection to a third party database SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 89 SQL Developer Preferences of that associated type See the tabs for creating connections to third party databases in the Create Edit Select Database Connection dialog box Database User Defined Extensions The User Defined Extensions pane specifies user defined extensions that have been added You can use this pane to add extensions that are not available through the Check for Updates feature These extensions can be for user defined reports actions editors and navigators For more information about extensions and checking for updates see Section 1 18 7 Extensions One use of the Database User Defined Extensions pane is to create a Shared Reports folder and to include an exported report under that folder click Add Row specify Type as REPORT and for Location specify the XML file containing the exported report The next time you restart SOL Developer the Reports navigator will have a Shared Reports folder containing that report For more information about creating user defined extensions see a How To create an XML User Defined Extension https wikis oracle com display oraclesqldeveloper How To Cr eate an XML User Defined Extension a Creating User Defined Extensions in Oracle SQL Developer http www oracle com webfolder technetwork tutorials obe db 11g r2 prod appdev sqldev srccodexmlext xmle
68. User Defined Report eese eee nennen nennen 5 42 5 61 Create Edit User Defined Report Folder sse 5 43 5 62 Create Edit Vie Wenn emo emt rettet tud hu et bae 5 44 5 68 Create XML Schema so rS RN Rete eee s 5 49 5 64 Color Palette and Custom Colors esses eene enetnetenne trennen nent 5 49 5 65 Configure Extension s encre inr ere het it e ER tie eee eee 5 50 5 66 Configure File Type Associations eene nnne nnne nnns 5 50 5 67 Copy Golunins i sce e e UE PR BAR oet Ete duras 5 50 5 68 gt Custom Filters etnias e d co RE HP b e b vati 5 50 5 69 Data Pump EXPO tSS i idiota iaa 5 51 5 70 Data Pump Import eene e eden fente red di 5 52 5 71 Database Copy 5 uin leo e andinas 5 53 5 72 Database Differences 0 A aan ees 5 54 5 73 Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data 5 56 5 74 DDL Panel for Creating or Editing an Object sess eee eee 5 58 5 75 JDebugger Attach to JPDA iniit eiie irent e ad beri teda 5 58 5 76 Deploy or Import Application eese eee eee nennen 5 58 577 Deploy Objects se e Rete a ad e Pee a Aon rude perte A AT copas 5 59 5 77 1 Deploy Objects o eds eden erste test dee t det e eee rat eo crate nidis 5 59 5 77 2 Deploy Objects to loud et cete eee aere t ree re e eene 5 60 5 77 2 1 Unsupported Type Error for Cloud Deployment eese 5 61 5 78 Describe Object Window ec eei er te
69. WHERE keyword For example to restrict the data to rows where a column named RATING contains a value greater than 5 specify rating 5 and click Go to see the results of the query 5 155 4 Summary The page title is Summary Copy Summary Diff Summary or Export Summary You can review a hierarchical display of your specifications for the operation To go back and make any changes click Back To perform the operation click Finish SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 81 Sign In checking for updates 5 156 Sign In checking for updates This dialog box is displayed if any of the updates that you selected during the check for updates process are on a remote site that requires you to log in Currently all updates are on the Oracle Technology Network OTN so you must enter your OTN user name and password User Name Your user name at the remote site Password Your password at the remote site Sign Up If you do not have an account at the remote site click this link Find Password If you have an account at the remote site but cannot remember your password click this link 5 157 Single Record View The main use for this box which is displayed by right clicking the display grid for an object and selecting Single Record View is to edit data for a table or view one record at a time After you change data in any cells in a row you can apply the changes by clicking Apply or by navigating to another record For non Da
70. You can use shortcut keys to access menus and menu items for example Alt F for the File menu and Alt E for the Edit menu or Alt H then Alt S for Help then Search You can also display the File menu by pressing the F10 key except in the SOL Worksheet where F10 is the shortcut for Explain Plan To close a window that has focus such as the SOL Developer main window a wizard or dialog box or the Help Center and any of its dependent windows you can press Alt F4 Icons under the menus perform various actions including the following New creates a new database object see Section 5 17 Create New Object Open opens a file see Section 5 125 Open File a Save saves any changes to the currently selected object a Save All saves any changes to all open objects Back moves to the pane that you most recently visited Or use the drop down arrow to specify a tab view Forward moves to the pane after the current one in the list of visited panes Or use the drop down arrow to specify a tab view Open SQL Worksheet opens the SOL Worksheet see Using the SOL Worksheet If you do not use the drop down arrow to specify the database connection to use you are asked to select a connection The left side of the SOL Developer window has tabs and panes for the Connections and Reports navigators icons for performing actions and a hierarchical tree display for the currently selected navigator as shown in the following figu
71. a database administrator deploys the change plan to one or more destination databases using Oracle Enterprise Manager A change plan can contain multiple change items each of which describes changes to be made to a single schema object There are three types of change item reflecting three basic actions to be carried out at the destination database An Add change item adds a database object A Drop change item drops the database object The definition of the object to be dropped is copied into the change item enabling Change Manager to check the definition in the destination database to ensure that the object definitions are the same A Modify change item makes one or more changes to a database object for example adding a column or a constraint to a table To deploy a change plan to a destination database the DBA uses Enterprise Manager to create a Change Manager Schema Synchronization from the contents of the change plan During this process Change Manager detects and reports conflicts between the change plan and the database For example the database may already contain an object that the change plan is trying to add The generated script carries out operations in the correct order The Change Management Parameters user preferences affect Change Manager support in SOL Developer especially how objects are compared to determine if a change has occurred and how extensive the DDL statements are when the script for deploying
72. a database link by right clicking the database link name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Test Database Link Validates the database link Drop Deletes the database link 1 3 7 Destination Groups A destination group is an Oracle Scheduler object whose members are a list of Scheduler destination objects In a database destination group the members are database destinations for running remote database jobs In an external destination group members are external destinations for running remote external jobs For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 3 8 Directories A directory object specifies an alias for a directory called a folder on Windows systems on the server file system where external binary file LOBs BFILEs and external table data are located To create a directory that is a directory object you can use SOL Developer or the SOL statement CREATE DIRECTORY You can use directory names when referring to BFILEs in your PL SQL code and OCI calls rather than hard coding the operating system path name for management flexibility All directories are created in a single namespace and are not owned by an individual schema You can secure access to the BFILEs stored within the directory structure by granting object privileges on the directories to specific users 1 3 9 Editions Edition based redefinition introduced in Oracle Dat
73. above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation Link2 Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear 4 The names identified above with the specific software must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their names without prior written permission of the Apache Group THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NE
74. adding columns and selecting from a larger set of features To do this check the Advanced box in the Create Table dialog box For help with options for creating a table with advanced features see Create Edit Table with advanced options Create the table automatically from a Microsoft Excel worksheet To do this right click Tables under a connection in the Connections navigator and select Import Data When asked for the file select a file of type xls or csv You can perform the following operations on a table by right clicking the table name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Edit Displays the Create Edit Table with advanced options dialog box Table Table actions include Rename Copy create a copy using a different name Drop delete the table Truncate delete existing data without affecting the table definition Lock set the table lock mode row share exclusive and so on Comment descriptive comment explaining the use or purpose of the table Parallel change the default degree of parallelism for queries and DML on the table No Parallel specify serial execution and Count Rows return the number of rows Column Column actions include Comment descriptive comment about a column Add Drop and Normalize Constraint Includes options for adding dropping enabling and disabling constraints Index Options include Create create an index on specified columns
75. also specify the following to be included in each display a tag and a condition to be evaluated Enable Disable a Group of Breakpoints Enables or disables the specified breakpoint group when this breakpoint occurs 5 144 Save Save As or Select File This is a standard box for saving information to a file or for selecting a file use Location to navigate to double clicking the folder in which to save or open the file then specify the file name including any extension and if necessary the file type 5 78 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Set Data Mapping 5 145 Save Files This box asks if you want to save the specified files before another action occurs for example saving procedures you had been editing before disconnecting 5 146 Unable to Save Files This box informs you that SOL Developer is unable to save the specified file or files To cancel the attempt to save the files and to return to edit the relevant object click Cancel 5 147 Save Style Settings This dialog box is displayed when you click Save As in the Code Editor PL SOL Syntax Colors pane when setting SOL Developer Preferences You can save the specified color settings as a named color scheme which adds it to the drop down list for Scheme in that pane 5 148 Schema Differences Source or Destination Error This error box is displayed if you click Apply before specifying the source or the destination or both for a schema differences operation C
76. an Oracle Scheduler object that defines a location for running a job There are two types of destinations an external destination specifies a remote host name and IP address for running a remote external job a database destination specifies a remote database instance for running a remote database job If you specify a destination when you create a job the job runs on that destination If you do not specify a destination the job runs locally on the system on which it is created For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 12 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Objects 1 3 6 Database Links Public and Private A database link is a database object in one database that enables you to access objects on another database The other database need not be an Oracle Database system however to access non Oracle systems you must use Oracle Heterogeneous Services After you have created a database link you can use it to refer to tables and views in the other database The Connections navigator has a Database Links node for all database links public and private owned by the user associated with the specified connection and a Public Database Links node for all public database links on the database associated with the connection For help with specific options in creating a database link see Section 5 39 Create Edit Database Link You can perform the following operations on
77. and uses a service principal and password For more information about Kerberos authentication options see Database Advanced For information about configuring Kerberos authentication see Oracle Database Advanced Security Administrator s Guide Proxy Connection If this option is checked proxy authentication will be used as explained in Section 1 4 5 Connections with Proxy Authentication Displays the Oracle Proxy Authentication dialog box Basic connection type Hostname Host system for the Oracle database Port Listener port SID Database name Service Name Network service name of the database for a remote database connection over a secure connection TNS connection type Network Alias Oracle Net alias for the database The list for selecting a network alias is initially filled from all tnsnames files on your system unless you have set the Database Advanced preference Tnsnames Directory to identify the location of the tnsnames ora file to be used Connect Identifier Oracle Net connect identifier LDAP connection type Enterprise users are authenticated with the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP server The user login information must be configured in the LDAP server and mapped to a schema in the database Support for LDAP compliant directory servers provides a centralized vehicle for managing and configuring a distributed Oracle network The directory server can replace client side and server side loc
78. application server Request path sales f p 1 1 the request URL relative to the context root Example of routing rule using request path prefix 1 66 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Application Express Listener Administration Assuming the Application Express Listener is deployed on example com its context path is apex and your database setting name is sales prod you can create the following request path prefix routing rule Rule Type Request Path Routing Rule sales Schema for RESTful Services sales_rest The preceding rule means that any requests matching http example com apex sales will be routed to the sales prod database connection The sales rest schema specified in the sales prod database connection will be searched for RESTful Services definitions The preceding routing rule will match any of the following requests http example com apex sales f p 1 1 https example com apex sales f p 1 1 http example com apex sales leads http www example com apex sales forecasting report month jan if www example com resolves to the same system The preceding routing rule will not match any of the following requests http example com apex leads f p 1 1 missing the sales prefix http example com apex f p 1 1 missing the sales prefix http example com pls sales leads the context root is wrong Example of routing rule using URL prefix Assuming the Application Express Listener i
79. are brought into the buffer cache only during read operations but not during write operations Retention If this option is checked old versions of this LOB column and retained You can specify this option only if the database is running in automatic undo mode and if you do not specify a Pct Version value Logging DEFAULT means to use the Oracle Database default ON means that the table creation and any subsequent direct loader SOL Loader and direct path INSERT operations against the table partition or LOB storage are logged in the redo log file OFF means that these operations are not logged in the redo log file Chunk The number of bytes to be allocated for LOB manipulation If the value is not a multiple of the database block size then the database rounds up in bytes to the next multiple The maximum value is 32768 32K which is the largest Oracle Database block size allowed The default CHUNK size is one Oracle Database block Pct Version Specifies the maximum percentage of overall LOB storage space used for maintaining old versions of the LOB The default value is 10 meaning that older versions of the LOB data are not overwritten until they consume 10 of the overall LOB storage space You can specify a Pct Version value whether the database is running in manual mode where it is the default or automatic undo mode where SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 33 Create Edit Table with advanced options Retention i
80. back to the previous step click Back Select Operation Select a database connection on the right then use the hierarchy tree to select an object to be tested For example to test a procedure expand the Procedures node and select the desired procedure Specify Test Name Test Name Name for the unit test Can be the same as the name of the database object for example procedure or function to be tested SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 93 Unit Testing Create Unit Test Create with single dummy representation Creates a single sometimes called one off test case for which you must specify the input parameter values when you run the test Select create implementation using lookup values Generates multiple test cases using sets of input parameter values that you will specify Specify Startup Specify the action to perform at the start of the test before any of the actual test operations are performed Reasons for using a startup action might include the following You want to create copies of the entire table or specific rows that will be modified by the test so that you can restore the original values later during teardown You want to perform some special operations before the test is run None Perform no startup action Row Copy Copy rows from a specified table You will be asked to specify the table and q query for selecting the rows Table Copy Copy a specified table You will be asked to spe
81. be created Maximum Statements Maximum number of statements to cache for each connection Connection Size Maximum and Minimum number of connections Inactivity Timeout How long in seconds an available connection can remain idle before it is closed Abandoned Connection Timeout How long in seconds a borrowed in use connection can remain unused before it is considered as abandoned and reclaimed URL Mapping URL mapping is used in configuring multiple database connections to define the rules for how requests are routed to the appropriate database Specify the rules in the Rule Type and the Routing Rule to your database connection You can use regular expressions in the Routing Rule To add a mapping click the Add URL icon select the Rule Type and specify the Routing Rule To delete a mapping select it and click the Remove URL X icon Rule Type Type of rule Request Path URL Path orRegular Expression Routing Rule Rule on how to route the request to your database connection See the examples or routing rules in this topic Schema for RESTful Services optional The name of the Application Express workspace where RESTful services are defined in the database connection This can be omitted if RESTful Services are not being used Example of routing rules URL http example com apex sales f p 1 1 Protocol http a Hostname example com Context root apex location at which the Listener in deployed on the
82. being passed in clear text Security Cache When you specify a PL SQL validation function Oracle Application Express Listener uses the security cache to cache the procedures names and determine if they are valid or invalid Using a caching mechanism reduces the number of database round trips needed to execute the PL SOL Validation Function Maximum Cache Entries Maximum cache size When the maximum entries have been reached the older or stale procedure name that was least recently used is removed from the cache and a new procedure name is added to the cache Total Cache Entries Total number of procedure names that are valid or invalid in the security cache Clear Cache If the total cache entries is greater than zero Clear Cache is available and you can click it to delete the cache entries As a best practice clear the cache whenever a PL SQL Validation Function is updated Allowed Procedures Specify patterns for procedures packages or schema names that are allowed to be directly executed from a browser You can use an asterisk to substitute zero or more characters and a question mark to substitute for any one character A benefit of specifying allowed procedures is that the procedure names and procedure patterns are stored in the Oracle Application Express Listener By contrast invoking the PL SQL validation function requires a database round trip To add an entry click the Add Procedure icon and enter the pattern
83. capture can be done online or offline Online capture is done in a convenient guided sequence during the Migrating Using the Migration Wizard process Offline capture involves creating a script that you run later as explained in Section 2 2 5 1 Offline Capture You can use offline capture with IBM DB2 MySQL Microsoft SOL Server databases and Sybase Adaptive Server After capturing the source database you can view the source database information in the captured model in SOL Developer If necessary you can modify the captured model and change data type mappings Note Oracle recommends that you do not change the default data type mappings unless you are an experienced Oracle database administrator 2 2 5 1 Offline Capture To perform an offline capture of an IBM DB2 MySQL Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database you create a set of offline capture scripts run these scripts outside SOL Developer to create the script output a dump of the third party metadata tables and load the script output the ocp file containing the converted model using SOL Developer Tocreate the script file a Windows bat file or a Linux or UNIX sh file and related files click Tools then Migration then Create Database Capture Scripts When this operation completes you are notified that several files bat sql ocp have been created one of which is the controlling script You must run the controlling sc
84. captured 2 2 4 5 Before Migrating From Teradata Note that for the current release of SOL Developer the following Teradata objects will not be migrated to Oracle procedures functions triggers views macros and BTEO scripts To configure a Teradata database for migration 1 Ensure that the source database is accessible by the Teradata database user that is used by SQL Developer for the source connection This user must be able to see any objects to be captured in the Teradata database objects that the user cannot see are not captured Ensure that you can connect to the Teradata database from the system where you have installed SOL Developer Ensure that you have downloaded the tdgssconfig jar and terajdbc4 jar files from Teradata In SQL Developer do the following a Click Tools then Preferences then Database then Third Party JDBC Drivers b Click Add Entry Select the tdgssconfig jar file d Click OK o e Repeat steps b through d for the terajdbc4 jar file SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 17 Migration Background Information and Guidelines 2 2 5 Capturing the Source Database Before migrating a third party database you must extract information from the database This information is a representation of the structure of the source database and it is called the captured model The process of extracting the information from the database is called capturing the source database The
85. changes is generated See the following subtopics for more information related to support for Change Manager Change Plan Administrators and Developers Developing Change Plans with SOL Developer Change Manager Actions to Perform with Enterprise Manager 1 15 1 Change Plan Administrators and Developers Change plans are stored in the Enterprise Manager repository An Enterprise Manager super administrator has unlimited access to all change plans However in most cases it is preferable to create Enterprise Manager administrators with specific Change Plan privileges and limited access to other Enterprise Manager facilities There are two general types of Change Plan privilege 1 58 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Change Manager Support in SQL Developer a A Change Plan Administrator has unlimited access to change plans the administrator can create edit and delete any change plan A Change Plan Administrator is typically a DBA A Change Plan Developer has access to specific change plans The access may be view only or view and edit A Change Plan Developer is typically a developer of database applications To create a Change Plan Administrator or one or more Change Plan Developers you muse Enterprise Manager as explained in Section 1 15 3 Change Manager Actions to Perform with Enterprise Manager 1 15 2 Developing Change Plans with SQL Developer The SOL Developer user interface support for Change Manager in
86. cirio titre nr s 1 108 Customizing SQL Developer Appearance sse 1 108 1 23 12 Maximizing Tab Pasai e ee e d e ee eee 1 109 1 23 13 Default Path for Running Scripts sese eene nennt 1 109 1 23 14 Shutting Down and Restarting the Database sss 1 109 1 23 15 Feature Requests cui due ra deo tc er a RH ED Ge ias 1 109 1 23 16 Discussion Potts ie eerte e elo nteger Poe eed eve rede ados eere ean 1 109 1 23 17 Help Text Font Size nati tino qe cm nete eerie tr bte tre eee trie 1 109 1 23 18 Procedure and Function Signatures sse een 1 109 1 23 19 Type Ahead in Navigators nceienesiteet idee ii 1 109 1 23 20 Extended Paste e nee Ies Rene diets 1 110 1 23 21 Closing Tabbed Windows Using the Mouse Wheel sse 1 110 1 23 22 Go to Last Edit Location eee Maeda Senes 1 110 1 23 23 Closing Tabbed Windows Using the Context Menu sse 1 110 1 23 24 List of All Open Windows esee eene nennen enne 1 110 1 23 25 Go to Subprogram Implementation from Package Window ss 1 110 1 23 26 Select Multiple Table or Column Names in Completion Insight 1 110 1 23 27 Startup Time and Automatic Check for Updates sss 1 110 1 24 For More Information cccccccsscsssssssesseosecneseecseccecesscessenssesscencessecnseceecosseessaesssesssesseeneeess 1 111 SQL Developer Migrating Third Party
87. click this icon to display the Deploy Objects dialog box where you can specify further options and generate the deployment scripts and a zip file that contains them Open Cart icon Lets you open a saved cart by specifying the XML file with the cart contents If the cart currently contains any objects you are asked if you want to remove the current objects from the cart before opening a saved cart a Yes empties the current cart and fills the cart with the objects from the cart you are opening a No does not empty the current cart but adds the objects from the cart you are opening to the current cart objects Save Cart icon active if one of more objects are selected Displays the Save Cart dialog box where you specify the File an XML file and the Encoding You can later open the saved cart Selected Objects Contains objects that have been selected for potential deployment To add objects select them in the Connections navigator and drag and drop them into the Selected Objects area Delete Row icon red X Lets you delete selected objects from the Selected Objects area Include Lets you select and deselect all objects or selected objects for inclusion in the deployment Type Type of database object Owner Owner of the database object Name Name of the database object Data For tables and views lets you include or exclude the associated data for the deployment Where Optional WHERE clause without the WHERE keywor
88. column COMMIT END OF FILE 2 2 9 Making Queries Case Insensitive With several third party databases it is common for queries to be case insensitive For example in such cases the following queries return the same results SELECT FROM orders WHERE sales rep Oracle SELECT FROM orders WHERE sales rep oracle SELECT FROM orders WHERE sales rep OrAcLe If you want queries to be case insensitive for a user in the Oracle database you can create an AFTER LOGON ON DATABASE trigger in which you set for that database user the NLS SORT session parameter to an Oracle sort name with CI for case insensitive appended The following example causes queries for user SMITH to use the German sort order and to be case insensitive CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER set sort order AFTER LOGON ON DATABASE DECLARE username VARCHAR2 30 BEGIN username SYS_CONTEXT USERENV SESSION USER IF username LIKE SMITH then execute immediate alter session set NLS COMP LINGUISTIC execute immediate alter session set NLS SORT GERMAN CI END IF END 2 2 10 Testing the Oracle Database During the testing phase you test the application and Oracle database to make sure that the Migrated data is complete and accurate Applications function in the same way as the source database Oracle database produces the same results as the source database Applications and Oracle database meet the operational and perf
89. create a new database connection for example unit test repos for the unit testing repository user Click Save to save the connection then Cancel to close the dialog box Create the repository in the schema of the user that you created as follows Click Tools then Unit Test then Select Current Repository Specify the database connection for example unit test repos for the unit testing repository user When you see a message that no repository exists for that connection follow the prompts to create a new repository SOL Developer will display several prompts so it can execute commands that grant the necessary privileges to the unit test repository user In each case click Yes and enter the SYS account password when prompted 3 12 4 Create a Unit Test To create the first unit test use the Unit Test navigator If this navigator is not visible on the left side click View then Unit Test The Unit Test navigator is described in Section 3 2 1 In the Unit Test navigator right click the Tests node and select Create Test The Unit Testing Create Unit Test wizard is displayed In the remaining steps click Next to go from each step to the next and when you are finished specifying the unit test click Finish In Select Operation select the database connection for the schema that you used to create the AWARD BONUS procedure then expand the Procedures node and select AWARD BONUS In Specify Test Name for Test Name specify A
90. data pane 1 28 temporary 5 28 truncating 1 19 validating structure 1 20 tablespaces creating and editing 5 38 temporary tables 5 28 Teradata before migrating 2 17 connections 5 11 test case definition of 3 2 test suite definition of 3 2 thick OCT driver database advanced parameters preference 1 86 third party databases configuring before migrating 2 13 third party JDBC drivers 1 89 TimesTen cache groups 1 12 database connections 5 9 replication schemes 1 18 support for in SQL Developer 1 106 Tip of the Day 1 107 TKPROF opening in SOL Developer as an alternative to using 1 31 tnsnames ora file 1 23 tools external 1 9 5 62 5 63 trace files tre 1 31 transferring data offline 2 20 translation scratch editor 2 33 tre files 1 31 triggers 1 21 compound 1 100 creating and editing 5 40 truncating a table 1 19 T SQL not supported in worksheet for SQL Server or Sybase connection 2 34 translation to PL SQL 2 33 tutorial creating objects for a small database 4 1 types creating 5 41 U unique constraints 5 30 unit test definition of as related to test cases 3 2 unit testing 1 101 adding a category forlookups 5 92 adding an implementation 5 93 adding an item to a library 5 92 command line interface 3 11 copying or renaming a unit test 5 93 Create Unit Test wizard 5 93 editing and running a unit test 3 5 example 3 12 exporting objects 3 11 graphical user interface GUI
91. eene tees 5 74 Object Preferences sse reete d d qe ee neque ee teles 5 74 Offline Generation Error Destination Directory ssssssesssseeene eee 5 74 Open ul oa 5 74 Oracle Only Repo Ecclesia ttes 5 74 xi xii 5 127 5 128 5 129 5 130 5 131 5 132 5 133 5 134 5 135 5 136 5 137 5 138 5 139 5 140 5 141 5 142 5 143 5 144 5 145 5 146 5 147 5 148 5 149 5 150 5 151 5 152 5 153 5 154 5 155 5 155 1 5 155 2 5 155 3 5 155 4 5 156 5 157 5 158 5 159 5 160 5 161 5 162 5 163 5 164 5 165 5 166 5 167 5 168 5 169 Paste sack hag nene cese i eet suas E bend data 5 75 Privilege Warning for Migration omcocecononononnrncnnnennnnnnnnonnorononnnnnnnnnnnnnararanonnn T ten 5 75 Recent Files onte nd edite iem ed a epe c oe ng 5 75 Create Repository detener bes nee a rre ne e ede e eee s 5 75 Delete or Truncate Repository sese eene nnn 5 75 Capture Microsoft Access Exporter XML sse nene 5 76 Rename Local Variable iin ttt bete t et d iit t ie eet 5 76 R n me T ab 5 5 age eie ete be oi Le ome e EIS EE o oen 5 76 Rename Proced te 5 eS REA eene 5 76 Select Current Repositoty esie pepper ete cost ee dL e irte fe rci eee epa 5 76 Cannot Capture Tables A a ee ducts 5 76 Report Panel datei ca suites asd CAL AOS 5 77 Reset Expired Password Enter New Password sess eee 5 77 Rev1SIOn 18let irt tbes coe eee ee
92. files are removed from the cache when a new file is added Keep files for the specified duration If selected files that are cached expire after the specified number of days hours or minutes must be greater than 0 SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 69 Application Express Listener Administration Caching Total Cache Entries Maximum cache size When the maximum entries have been reached the older or stale procedure name that was least recently used is removed from the cache and a new procedure name is added to the cache Clear Cache displayed the total cache entries is greater than zero Deletes the current cache entries Cache File Location Directory for the cache files 1 16 4 5 Environment Application Express Document Table Name of the document table used by Application Express All files uploaded using the PL SQL Gateway are stored in a document table PL SOL Gateway Default Web Page Default web page to display Extension Classes Extension classes to extend the Application Express Listener Procedure Recorder If selected causes procedures to be logged Error Reporting You can specify to show debug messages on the console or to show error messages in a browser or to do both or neither On production systems you should leave both options unselected disabled Show debug messages on console If selected displays debug messages on the console This may help with problem diagnosis and is appended to t
93. for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International Inc AMD Opteron the AMD logo and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services Contents PRA oos S A ua ONU OPE f xvii Audietice iiit tei ic e em etie t te etm etu aer un dt Cete i cea it e tet xvii Documentation Accessibility sense p e a e nnne nenne tenentes xvii Product Accessibility sssini Ihe aa xvii Related Document intima oe ua ite e Hohe een xvii CONVENTIONS PME xviii Third Party License Information ete trees teen ero tp te epe ere xviii 1 SQ
94. for subsequent automatic refresh operations If you do not specify a value the refresh operation is performed only once at the time specified for Start on Constraints If this option is checked more rewrite alternatives can be used during the refresh operation resulting in more efficient refresh execution The behavior of this option is affected by whether you select Enforced or Trusted Enforced Causes only enforced constraints to be used during the refresh operation Trusted Enables the use of dimension and constraint information that has been declared trustworthy by the database administrator but that has not been validated by the database If the dimension and constraint information is valid performance may improve However if this information is invalid then the refresh procedure may corrupt the materialized view even though it returns a success status Materialized View Options Parallel If this option is checked parallel operations will be supported for the materialized view and you can specify a number for the default degree of parallelism for queries and DML on the materialized view after creation Enable Cache If this option is checked the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed This setting is useful for small lookup tables If 5 48 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Color Palette and Custo
95. for the import operation To make any changes click Back To perform the operation click Finish 5 180 Subversion Lock Resources Use this dialog box to perform a Subversion lock operation on one or more checked out files working copies Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files to be locked You can individually select and deselect files Steal Lock Breaks any existing locks and relocks the files for your use Causes the force option to be added to the underlying svn lock command Comments Comments to accompany the action 5 181 Subversion Merge A merge operation copies changes made in one branch to another branch or copies changes from a branch to the trunk main line of development It is typically used to 5 88 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Subversion Pending Changes bring another developer s work into your own files and to merge private development back into the main line of development The merge is created by comparing the content of two revisions within the Subversion repository and applying the differences to a Subversion working copy If you subsequently wish to use the result of the merge in the main line of development you commit the working copy to the Subversion repository in the usual way Specify the following Merge Type Merge Selected Revision Range Reintegrate a Branch or Merge Two Different Trees Merge Resource Merge Options Your selection for M
96. is the Recycle pool from taking up unnecessary cache space Free Lists Number of free lists for each of the free list groups for the table The default and minimum value for this parameter is 1 meaning that each free list group contains one free list Free List Groups Number of groups of free lists for the table The default and minimum value for this parameter is 1 Oracle uses the instance number of Real Application Clusters instances to map each instance to one free list group Partitioning pane Specifies partitioning options for a partitioned table which is a table that is organized into smaller and more manageable pieces called partitions SOL queries and DML statements do not need to be modified in order to access partitioned tables however after partitions are defined DDL statements can access and manipulate individuals partitions rather than entire tables or indexes Also partitioning is entirely transparent to applications Partition By The type of partitioning RANGE partitions the table on ranges of values from the column list which for an index organized tablet must be a subset of the primary key columns of the table HASH partitions the table using the hash method rows assigned to partitions using a hash function on values found in columns designated as the partitioning key LIST partitions the table on lists of literal values from column useful for controlling how individual rows map to specific partitions Availab
97. job expects arguments to be passed the Name and Data Type of each argument are listed For each input or input output argument specify the appropriate Value Notification Select Job Events for which to send notification email messages For each message you can specify recipient email addresses and the sender or no sender and you can modify the body of the message Properties Auto Drop Determines whether the job is to be automatically dropped after it has completed or has been automatically disabled Restartable Determines whether the job can be restarted in case of failure Stop on Window Close If the schedule of a job is a window or a window group TRUE causes the job to stop once the associated window is closed and fALSE causes the job to continue after the window closes Note that if the job is allowed to continue its resource allocation will probably change because closing a window generally also implies a change in resource plans Follow Default Time Zone Determines whether if the job start date is null then when the default time zone scheduler attribute is changed the Scheduler recomputes the next run date and time for this job so that it is in accordance with the new time zone Parallel Instances For an event based job determined what happens if an event is raised and the event based job that processes that event is already running FALSE causes the new event to be ignored TRUE causes an instance of the job to be s
98. lt icon to move all objects from selected to available use the Remove All lt lt icon SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 45 Create Edit View If you attempt to remove any objects that have dependencies in the SOL query a Confirm Remove box warns you that the dependencies will be removed with the FROM expression to cancel the remove operation click No Alias Alias for the table or view For the example in DDL tab or pane select the EMP table Join If you select two tables and click this button the Edit Join dialog box is displayed SELECT Clause pane Specifies objects that you can use in the SELECT clause of the view definition SELECT List Lists the objects typically columns that you can currently use in the SELECT clause To add an object click the Add icon to delete an object select it and click the Delete X icon to move an object up or down in the view definition select it and use the up arrow and down arrow buttons Note After you add an object to add another object click the Add icon Expression Column name or an expression For expressions you can type them or you can use the Expression Palette to add object names and function names Validate Checks the validity of the Expression entry For the example in DDL tab or pane select DEPTNO column and the MIN emp sal and MAX emp sal functions WHERE Clause pane Specifies the WHERE clause of the view definition
99. might try larger values to see if more geometries would be invalid or smaller values to see if fewer geometries would be invalid Spatial Column Name of the column of type SDO GEOMETRY in the specified feature table Identification Columns Other non spatial columns in the table Validation Results For any invalid geometries identifies the ROWID value of the row containing the invalid geometry and an Oracle error message number and the context of the error the coordinate edge or ring that causes the geometry to be invalid You can then look up the error message for more information about the cause of the failure 5 210 View Whole Value This dialog box is displayed if during debugging you right click an item node of type string byte array char array short array int array or long array in the Data tab display and select View Whole Value View as String Displays the item s value as a text string as opposed to hexadecimal values Wrap Text Enables the wrapping of long lines in the box in which the value is displayed 5 211 Windows This dialog box is displayed if you right click the tab for a window in the display area of the SOL Developer main window Windows A list of the windows in the display area Activate Makes active switches focus to the selected window Close Closes the selected window 5 212 XMLType Column Properties This dialog box is displayed if you define a table column as type SYS XMLTY
100. minimum and maximum values and the low and high values and optionally a WHERE clause The required structure for the query before any optional WHERE clause is SELECT lt value column gt min max low high FROM lt table name gt For example to create a report of salaries in gauge dial format with the same values and WHERE clause as in the preceding query right click on User Defined Reports in the Reports navigator and select Add Report In the Add Report dialog box specify a report name for Style select Gauge and for SOL enter the following SELECT salary 1000 30000 10000 18000 FROM employees WHERE employee id EMPLOYEE ID Click the Chart Details tab near the bottom of the box for Chart Type select DIAL for Query Based select true and click Apply Use the Reports navigator to view the newly created user defined report For Connection specify one that connects to the HR sample schema For the bind variable 1 40 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using Snippets to Insert Code Fragments value specify 104 The report shows four semicircular dials each with a label containing the salary amount and a needle pointing to an appropriate place on the dial 1 8 Using Snippets to Insert Code Fragments Snippets are code fragments such as SQL functions Optimizer hints and miscellaneous PL SQL programming techniques Some snippets are just syntax and others are examples You can insert and
101. more source data types a custom mapping for the function and format mask Add one row for each mapping For example the following rows specify the Source Type Function and Mask for custom mappings for the Sybase data types datetime smalldatetime and time datetime TO TIMESTAMP mon dd yyyy hh mi ss ff3am smalldatetime TO DATE Mon dd yyyy hh miam time TO TIMESTAMP hh mi ss ff3am Migration Generation Options The Generation Options pane contains options that are used when generating sql script files for creating migrated database objects in the target schema One single file or A file per object Determines how many files are created and their relative sizes Having more files created might be less convenient but may allow more flexibility with complex migration scenarios Generate Comments Generates comments in the Oracle SOL statements Generate Controlling Script Generates a master script for running all the required files Least Privilege Schema Migration For migrating schema objects in a converted model to Oracle causes CREATE USER GRANT and CONNECT statements not to be generated in the output scripts You must then ensure that the scripts are run using a connection with sufficient privileges You can select this option if the database user and connection that you want to use to run the scripts already exist or if you plan to create them Generate Data Move User For data move operations creates an additional database
102. name p first name t transaction type t transaction date FROM patrons p transactions t WHERE p patron id t patron id ORDER BY p patron id t transaction type Click the Execute SOL Statement icon in the SOL Worksheet toolbar and view the results of the query Click the Execute Explain Plan icon in the SOL Worksheet toolbar to see the execution plan displayed on the Explain tab that Oracle Database follows to execute the SOL SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 11 Script for Creating and Using the Library Tutorial Objects statement The information includes the optimizer strategy and the cost of executing the statement For information about how to generate and interpret execution plans see Oracle Database SQL Tuning Guide 4 10 Script for Creating and Using the Library Tutorial Objects The following statements create and use the database objects that you have created or will create for the tutorial in Chapter 4 SOL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database You can view these commands to help you understand the library database objects that are covered in the tutorial Clean up from any previous tutorial actions DROP TABLE transactions DROP TABLE books DROP TABLE patrons DROP SEQUENCE patron id seq DROP SEQUENCE transactions seq DROP TRIGGER transactions trg DROP VIEW patrons trans view DROP PROCEDURE list a rating DROP PROCEDURE list a rating2
103. next extent to be allocated to the table or index Specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit associated with the number Extents Min Minimum number of extents allocated when the table or index is created Extents Max Maximum number of extents allocated when the table or index is created Unlimited if checked means that there is no maximum and any specified maximum is ignored Pct Increase Percentage that each extent grows over the previous extent Buffer Pool lt DEFAULT gt means to use the Oracle Database default KEEP means to put blocks from the segment into the Keep buffer pool maintaining an appropriately sized Keep buffer pool lets Oracle retain the database object in memory to avoid I O operations RECYCLE means to put blocks from the segment into the Recycle pool an appropriately sized Recycle pool reduces the number of objects whose default pool is the Recycle pool from taking up unnecessary cache space SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 37 Create Edit Tablespace Free Lists Number of free lists for each of the free list groups for the table or index The default and minimum value for this parameter is 1 meaning that each free list group contains one free list Free List Groups Number of groups of free lists for the table or index The default and minimum value for this parameter is 1 Oracle uses the instance number of Real Application Clusters instances to map each instance to one free list
104. not copy paste a SELECT statement containing a COUNT function and then edit the SELECT query Code Editor Display The Display pane contains general options for the appearance and behavior of the code editor Enable Text Anti Aliasing allows smooth edged characters where possible Show Whitespace Characters renders spaces new lines carriage returns non breaking spaces and tab characters as alternate visible characters Show Breadcrumbs shows the breadcrumb bar which shows the hierarchy of nodes from the current caret position up to the top of the file Hover the mouse cursor over a node to display information about the node Show Scroll Tip enables the Tip window that displays the methods in view while scrolling Show Code Folding Margin allows program blocks in procedures and functions to be expanded and collapsed in the display Show visible Right Margin renders a right margin that you can set to control the length of lines of code Enable Automatic Brace Matching controls the highlighting of opening parentheses and brackets and of blocks when a closing parenthesis or bracket is typed Code Editor Fonts The Fonts pane specifies text font options for the code editor Display Only Fixed Width Fonts If this option is checked the display of available font names is restricted to fonts where all characters have the same width Fixed width fonts are contrasted with proportional width fonts Code Editor Line Gutter The
105. object representing the Schema MDSYS patron s geocoded address Type SDO GEOMETRY After you have entered the last column location click OK to finish creating the table Go to Section 4 3 Create a Table TRANSACTIONS to create the next table 4 3 Create a Table TRANSACTIONS The TRANSACTIONS table contains a row for each transaction involving a patron and a book for example someone checking a book out or returning a book It includes two foreign key columns You will use the Create Table dialog box to create the table declaratively the table that you create will be essentially the same as if you had entered the following statement using the SOL Worksheet CREATE TABLE transactions transaction id NUMBER patron id CONSTRAINT for key patron id REFERENCES patrons patron id book id CONSTRAINT for key book id REFERENCES books book id transaction date DATE CONSTRAINT tran date not null NOT NULL transaction type NUMBER CONSTRAINT tran type not null NOT NULL CONSTRAINT transactions pk PRIMARY KEY transaction id To create the TRANSACTIONS table if you are not already connected connect to the database as the user for the schema you are using for this tutorial Right click the Tables node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New Table and enter the 4 4 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create a Table TRANSACTIONS following information If a tab or field is not mentioned do no
106. object type or All for all object types and click Lookup to display objects that satisfy the filter Name Shows only objects that satisfy the filter specification You can use the standard wildcard character for example EM to show all objects starting with EM You can use quotation marks double quotes to specify mixed case searching 7o If this option is checked the wildcard is automatically added to any Name string that you specify More and Less Click More to enable filtering by Schema and Type click Less to hide the Schema and Type controls Schema Select the database schema in which to search for objects Type Select All Objects for all object types or a specific type of object to further filter the display of objects Lookup Click Lookup to display a list of objects that meet the selection criteria for the selected connection Use the arrow keys to move selected objects or all objects from the available objects box to the selected objects box The page title is Specify Data or Table Data You can limit the data for the operation by selecting objects in the same way as on the Specify Objects page You can select the columns included in the operation by clicking the pencil icon in the Columns cell Note For an export operation involving CLOB columns only the first 32 KB of any CLOB is exported You can limit the rows in the operation by entering a valid WHERE clause for a query on the table without the
107. of database objects in SOL and PL SQL statements are not case sensitive To include lowercase characters special characters or spaces in object names enclose the name in quotation marks when you type it Example My table 5 1 Add Extension This dialog box is displayed when you click Add in the File Types pane of SOL Developer Preferences Extension Specify the file extension including the period for example xyz After you click OK you can select that extension and modify its details including the file type content type and whether to have files with the extension automatically opened by SOL Developer 5 2 Add Schema Error This dialog box is displayed when you specify an invalid file after clicking Add in the XML Schemas pane of SOL Developer Preferences A list of the errors is displayed Ignore errors and continue registration Ignores the errors and allows the process of registering the specified XML schema or schemas after you click OK Choose this option only if you are sure that the apparent errors can be ignored Skip registration and open using SOL Developer Opens an editing window in which you can correct any errors SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 1 Analyze Database Migration 5 3 Analyze Database Migration This dialog box is displayed if you right click a third party database connection and select Analyze Database You specify the database connection for the migration reposit
108. of the current Oracle instance Arguments For each argument name data type default value and whether it is an input output or input output argument 5 48 Create Edit Role This dialog box is used for creating a new database role or editing an existing database role The role properties are grouped under several tabs To create or edit a role the user associated with your database connection must have the DBA role You should also be familiar with the main concepts and techniques documented in Oracle Database Administrator s Guide 5 24 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Schedule Role tab Specifies general properties for the role Role Name The role name string For an existing role this field is read only to change the name you must drop the user and create a new user with the desired name New Password If you specify a password the role is a local role and a user must specify the password to the database when enabling the role If you do not specify a password the role is authorized by the database and no password is required to enable the role If you specify a password you must type the same password string for Confirm Password Granted Roles tab Specifies roles to be granted to the role being created or modified For each listed role you can check Granted to grant the specified role to this role Admin to permit the role to grant this role to other users or roles and Default to use the default
109. once the keyword names are removed so this option should be used with care On Commit Use Comment Templates If this option is enabled your commit comments will be entered through template forms The forms are set up by the CVS system administrator There may be different forms for different circumstances and installations and it may be that none of them are suitable for your commit comments In this case this preference lets you disable the use of all forms On Commit Automatically Add Files If this option is enabled local files are added to the CVS repository whenever you perform a commit action Create Backup Files on Remove If this option is enabled backup copies are made of files that are removed through actions of the source control system Versioning CVS General The CVS General pane specifies environment settings and the operation timeout Use Navigator State Overlay Icons If this option is enabled state overlay icons are used State overlay icons are small symbols associated with object names in the navigators They indicate the state of version controlled files for example up to date Use Navigator State Overlay Labels If this option is enabled state overlay labels are used State overlay labels are tooltips associated with object names in the navigators Automatically Make Files Editable If this option is enabled an editor is automatically used on a data file when you start to change it If you edit a file
110. or database lists events from which you can select for use in the trigger definition Selected Events For a trigger on a schema or database lists events used in the trigger definition DDL tab You can view a SOL CREATE statement that reflects the current definition of the object or a SOL ALTER statement to modify an existing object to reflect your changes 5 58 Create Type User Defined This dialog box is displayed when you right click Types in the Connections navigator and select Create Type to create a user defined type After you complete the information in this dialog box and click OK a SOL Worksheet is displayed in which you must specify the appropriate definition of the type Schema Database schema in which to create the type Name Name of the type Must be unique within its schema Type Select the type of data type to be created array type object type specification object type specification and type body or table type For more information about creating a user defined type see the CREATE TYPE statement in Oracle Database SOL Language Reference 5 59 Create Edit User This dialog box is used for creating a new database user or editing an existing database user The user properties are grouped under several tabs To create or edit a database user the user associated with your database connection must have the DBA role You should also be familiar with the main concepts and techniques documented in Oracle Databa
111. or part of the primary key for the table The primary key is the column or set of columns that uniquely identifies each row in the table A primary key column cannot be null If you want to have the primary key values automatically populated by a convenient method that uses a before insert trigger and a sequence then before you finish creating the table you must check the Advanced box and use the Primary Key tab starting with the Populate Primary Key Column field To add another column click Add Column When you are finished adding columns either click OK or click the DDL tab to review the CREATE TABLE statement DDL tab quick creation You can review and save the CREATE TABLE statement that SOL Developer will use to create a new table or that reflects any changes you have made to the table properties If you want to make any changes go back to the Table tab and make the changes there When you are finished click OK 5 54 Create Edit Table with advanced options The table dialog box is used for creating a new table or editing an existing table The table properties are grouped in several panes To create a new table the only things you must do are specify the schema and the table name add the necessary columns and click OK Although it is not required you should also specify a primary key using the Primary Key pane For other table related features use the appropriate tabs the order in which you visit tabs usually does no
112. ordering them first by values in the PATRON ID column in the PATRONS table and then by values in the TRANSACTION TYPE column in the TRANSACTIONS table The result is a listing by patron ID of all patrons who had transactions and for each listed patron the transaction information listed by transaction type CREATE VIEW patrons trans view AS SELECT p patron id p last name p first name t transaction type t transaction date FROM patrons p transactions t WHERE p patron id t patron id ORDER BY p patron id t transaction type SOL Parse Results If you click Test Syntax displays any SOL syntax errors or displays a message indicating no errors if there are no syntax errors Revert Cancels any edits you have made in the SOL Query box and displays the contents of the box before these edits Test Syntax Checks the statement in the SOL Query box for any SQL syntax errors Test Query Displays a dialog box that runs the SOL query and indicates the result If there is an error in the query such as an invalid character or a missing expression the error is displayed Quick Pick Objects pane Specifies objects that you can use in the SELECT FROM and WHERE clauses of the view definition Identify the tables and views on which this view is based and the columns in those tables and views that are used in the definition of this view To see the results of your quick pick specification either check Auto Query or click Query 5 44 Oracle SQL
113. readme txt file that is included with the tdgssconfig jar and a terajdbc4 jar files Host Name Host system for the Teradata database DBS Port TCP IP Port on which the Teradata server will listen Charset Character set for the data TMODE Transaction mode ANSI TERA Teradata or DEFAULT To add a connection parameter to the list in the box click Add to delete a connection parameter from the list click Delete Creating and Editing Connections To create a new connection when no connections exist enter the connection information and click Connect To test the connection before you create it click Test To create a new connection when one or more connections already exist click to select an existing connection change the Connection Name to the desired name edit other connection information as needed and click Save or Connect to create the new connection To test the connection before you create it click Test To edit an existing connection click in its entry in the Connection Name column change any connection information except the connection name and click Save or Connect To test the connection before you save changes to it click Test SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 11 New Edit Cloud Connection 5 22 New Edit Cloud Connection Use this dialog box to create or edit a connection to an Oracle Cloud Database Service instance Connection Name A name for this connection to a specified Cloud Database Servi
114. reflect your environment 2 22 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines The following shows the code for two scripts start sql and finish sql that implement this workaround Read the comments in the code and modify any SOL statements as needed to reflect your environment and your needs Note After you run start sql and before you run finish sql run BCP and before you run BCP change the relevant line in the ct1 file from blob column CHAR 2000000 HEXTORAW blob column to blob column CLOB CHAR 2000000 START SQL Modify this for your environment This should be executed in the user schema in Oracle that contains the table DESCRIPTION ALTERS THE OFFENDING TABLE SO THAT THE DATA MOVE CAN BE EXECUTED DISABLES TRIGGERS INDEXES AND SEQUENCES ON THE OFFENDING TABL E 1 Add an extra column to hold the hex string al al ter table lt tablename gt add lt blob_column gt _CLOB CLOB 2 Allow the BLOB column to accept NULLS al ter table lt tablename gt MODIFY lt blob_column gt NULL 3 Disable triggers and sequences on lt tablename gt lter trigger lt triggername gt disable lter table tablename drop primary key cascade drop index indexname 4 Allow the table to use the tablespace alter table tablename move lob blob column store as tablespace lob tablespace a
115. rte 4 9 Use the SOL Worksheet for Queries sess nnne nennen 4 11 Script for Creating and Using the Library Tutorial Objects sss 4 12 SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 5 20 5 21 5 22 5 22 1 5 23 5 24 5 25 5 26 5 27 5 28 5 29 5 30 5 31 5 32 5 33 5 34 5 35 5 36 Add EXtenslon esa idad cete HU i tii 5 1 Add Sch ma Error ug uaa UE Bone e edici 5 1 Analyze Database Migration ie eee ee De ndi ete edat te onte tete eed 5 2 Application MIgratiori 2 reti eet cete te e dne beet er Et e e he ERE 5 2 Change A te ee etd t De Noh t ee tr eR e ets 5 2 Check for Updates eee eee Ete Rete PU qui dee mie n ee ee te es 5 2 Check Out from C VS 5i ies deeem cen eie Lect ict tem bee tdt 5 8 Choose Directory oti poter tiet heme aeta be i Ner verbit ets 5 8 Component Palette n edite a Ere i a ede Fra e E d Re ae iter 5 8 Component Palette Configure Component Palette sss 5 3 Component Palette Create Palette Page sse nnns 5 4 Component Palette New Edit Code Snippet sss eene 5 4 Component Palette New Section Rename Section sess eee 5 4 Confirm Drop ApplicatiOl 4 enne oce ee ete tide ete be nei rete etit etes 5 4 Confirm Running SOL visor dee ib ested nce bbc utile ebur 5 4 Connection Has Uncommitted Changes
116. see Section 5 36 Export Import Connection Descriptors To perform limited database management operations if you are connected AS SYSDBA right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Manage Database You can click to refresh the read only display of memory SGA and PGA and tablespace information If a listener is running with a static listener configured for the database you can also click to start and stop the database To perform remote debugging if you are using the Sun Microsystem s Java Platform Debugger Architecture JPDA and you would like the debugger to listen so that a debuggee can attach to the debugger right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Remote Debug Use the dialog box to specify remote debugging information see Section 5 75 Debugger Attach to JPDA To estimate or compute statistics for objects in a database schema right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Gather Schema Statistics Statistics are used to optimize SOL execution To generate documentation in HTML format comparable to Javadoc for Java classes about a schema right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Generate DB Doc To view the generated documentation open the index html file in the output directory that you specified Note that Generate DB Doc is also used for migration projects right click the
117. selected users a Format Reformats the text of the function definition Create Unit Test Creates a unit test see Chapter 3 for the function Quick DDL Enables you to export the DDL statement for creating the function to a file a SOL Worksheet or the clipboard 1 3 12 Indexes An index is a database object that contains an entry for each value that appears in the indexed column s of the table or cluster and provides direct fast access to rows Indexes are automatically created on primary key columns however you must create indexes on other columns to gain the benefits of indexing For help with specific options in creating an index see Section 5 40 Create Edit Index You can perform the following operations on an index by right clicking the index name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Drop Deletes the index 1 14 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Objects Rebuild Recreates the index or one of its partitions or subpartitions If the index is unusable a successful rebuild operation makes the index usable For a function based index rebuilding also enables the index however if the function on which the index is based does not exist the rebuild operation fails Rename Changes the name of the index Make Unusable Prevents the index from being used by Oracle in executing queries An unusable index must be rebuilt or dropped and re created before it can
118. selected data item primitive value string or reference pointer during debugging Note You cannot undo the action after you click OK so be careful when making any changes Current Value The value of the data item New Value The new value for the data item enter or select from a drop down list a Fora primitive value you can enter a new value a Fora reference pointer you can enter the memory address of an existing object or array To set a reference pointer to null enter 0 as a memory address Fora string you can enter either a new string value or the memory address of an existing string Interpret New Value as Object Address If this option is checked the New Value entry is interpreted as a memory address pointer to an object or array in the heap of the program you are debugging For a string this box must be checked check if the value you enter in the New Value field is the memory address of an existing string 5 118 Data Move Details This dialog box is displayed when you click Migration then Migrate Data It specifies the source and target information for online data migration which is explained in Section 2 2 8 Source Connection Database connection from which data is to be migrated Target Connection Database connection to which data is to be migrated Converted Model Converted model containing tables whose data is to be moved to the corresponding Oracle database tables Use qualified names from converted mod
119. separate line and click the Commit Changes icon or press F11 when you are finished entering the set of numbers for each lookup a For EMP_ID_LOOKUP 100 99 1001 1002 1003 1004 2000 9999 a ForSALES AMT LOOKUPT 1000 0 1000 2000 5000 6000 10000 99999 You can delete and rename lookup categories by using the context right click menu in the Unit Test navigator You can also delete a data type under a lookup category however deleting in this case removes any currently specified data values for that type for the lookup category and it makes the type available for selection in the Unit SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 7 Using Lookups to Simplify Unit Test Creation Testing Add Data Type dialog box 3 6 1 Providing Values for Input Fields When you are specifying Input parameters for a unit test implementation you can click the Lookup Category control to select a lookup category When you then click in a cell under Input you can click the dropdown arrow to select a value from the specified lookup You can also enter a value other than one in the list For example if you created the EMP ID LOOKUP lookup category as explained in Section 3 6 and if you select it as the lookup category when specifying parameters then the values 100 99 1001 1002 1003 1004 2000 9999 and null will be in the dropdown list for the Input cell for the EMP ID parameter For the SALES AMT parameter use the SALES AMT LOOKUP category
120. sia 5 77 Run Debug Profile PE SQL onte ep tee c me epe re 5 77 Create EditBreakpoint ect iii rellena 5 78 Save Save AS orSelectiEile ateos 5 78 Save Blle8 eon hee eR ne ee eee e e EE E ERE ERES 5 79 Unable to Save Files ee en toh e ao reete Nee ce S En 5 79 Save Style Settings i c edit te e Ht ne E eed eee aia 5 79 Schema Differences Source or Destination Error sse 5 79 Script Execution Failed s irc e eee eei ett oer it e ipee A 5 79 Script Generation Complete seseina I I eU a eter hr be Fete rio abd rebat 5 79 Set Data Mapping iiu dee tete dee Het e erat dt ente eee A ansat 5 79 Add Edit Rule cionado e ERR e 5 80 Set Encoding sete ee edente ve apa e eda MIR Ad te p eee don 5 80 Set Pause Continue iii een te Lois tat ete eee Eee Ad RN ERE iatan 5 80 Shared Wizard Pages cR He ee e e a Eee e ede eee 5 80 TYPOS sha G 5 81 Specify Objects ih stitial ieee Bert o RR ade tbe i OR b titre el Foot b a tor tre ota 5 81 rictu 5 81 A i er oA anc adio hr ADU ie Eh oe bite 5 81 Sign In checking for updates etae te iere tte radere ce ter decis 5 82 Sinole Record Views sio bu e is eoe ec i ee ec tea tt ueteris 5 82 Save Snippet User Defined seen nnnnnnnen 5 82 Edit Snippets ser Defimed nre Ip een eee e de pee dece nias 5 82 Show SQL 5 3 aeoeieedneiaca ie idus A e oe s 5 83 Start Date End Date Repeat Interval Comments Scheduler
121. source control status of a file This window shows files that have been added modified or removed locally or remotely files whose content conflicts with other versions of the same file files that have not been added to source control files that are being watched and files for which editors have been obtained You can use this information to detect conflicts and to resolve them where possible The Outgoing pane shows changes made locally the Incoming pane shows changes made remotely and the Candidates pane shows files that have been created locally but not yet added to source control You can double click file names to edit them and you can use the context menu to perform available operations 1 11 Using DBA Features in SQL Developer SOL Developer enables users with DBA database administrator privileges to view and in some cases edit certain information relevant to DBAs and in some cases to perform DBA operations To perform DBA operations use the DBA navigator which is similar to the Connections navigator in that it has nodes for all defined database connections If the DBA navigator is not visible select View then DBA If no connections appear in the DBA navigator display you must add at least one connection To add a connection to the DBA navigator click the plus icon or right click Connections and select Add Connection then select a connection You can also specify a new connection by clicking the plus icon in the
122. subset of the string followed by an ellipsis Ga To paste unloaded data into a Microsoft Excel file specify Export Data but not Export DDL select text for Format and select Clipboard for Save As and after completing the unload paste from the clipboard into Excel For exporting date fields in date format instead of timestamp format If you encounter problems exporting dates check that the following line is in the sqldeveloper conf file to have dates unloaded in date format AddVMOption Doracle jdbc mapDateToTimestamp false For exporting large tables to Microsoft Excel files If you encounter problems try adding the following line to the sqldeveloper conf file to increase heap size and then restarting SQL Developer AddVMOption Xmx1024M Ifthe number of table rows exceeds 65 536 SOL Developer writes the rows to multiple worksheets within the xls file Save As Specifies how or where target statements and data are to be saved Single File A single file contains both DDL and data When you are unloading DDL only Insert format can be specified for data Separate Files Each object is saved to a separate file in the specified directory Type Files Objects of the same type are saved to a single file in the specified directory Separate Directories A directory for each object type being exported is created Files are created in the appropriate directory a Worksheet Statements are sent to a SOL
123. table named EMPLOYEES ORIGINAL User PL SOL Code Run a script You will be asked to specify the script file Summary Displays the selected options To make any changes click Back To perform the operation click Finish 5 204 Unit Testing Manage Users Use this dialog box to add or remove database users as unit test users Users tab or administrators Administrators tab Managing unit test users and administrators is explained in Section 3 3 1 On each tab use the icons to move selected database users or or all listed database users gt gt or lt lt into or out of the column on the right which identifies the unit testing users or administrators With Admin If this option is checked the users in the column on the right can grant the specified unit test role User or Administrator to other database users 5 205 Unit Testing Rename Test Implementation Use this dialog box to rename an implementation for a unit test The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 5 206 Unit Testing Result of Operation This informational box indicates either that the operation was successful or that an error occurred If an error occurred a brief explanation is included SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 95 Unit Testing Synchronize Unit Test 5 207 Unit Testing Synchronize Unit Test Use this wizard to synchronize a unit test that is to update the selected unit test to reflect change
124. template might contain text like the following Problem Description with bug ID if any Fix Description You can add edit and remove comment templates and you can export templates to an XML file or import templates that had previously been exported Versioning Subversion General The Subversion General pane specifies environment settings and the operation timeout Use Navigator State Overlay Icons If this option is enabled state overlay icons are used State overlay icons are small symbols associated with object names in the navigators They indicate the state of version controlled files for example up to date Use Navigator State Overlay Labels If this option is enabled state overlay labels are used State overlay labels are tooltips associated with object names in the navigators Automatically Make Files Editable If this option is enabled an editor is automatically used on a data file when you start to change it If you edit a file unintentionally immediately use Versioning then Unedit to revert Operation Timeout Maximum time allowed for Subversion operations to complete Edit Subversion Configuration File To modify the Subversion file directly click Edit server Versioning Subversion Version Tools The Subversion Version Tools pane specifies options for the pending changes window and the merge editor Use Outgoing Changes Commit Dialog Enables you to make optimum use of limited screen space wh
125. the output of that buffer This pane contains icons and other controls for the following operations Add New DBMS Output Tab Prompts you to specify a database connection after which a tab is opened within the DBMS Output pane for that connection and the SET SERVEROUTPUT setting is turned on so that any output is displayed in that tab To stop displaying output for that connection close the tab a Clear Erases the contents of the pane Save Saves the contents of the pane to a file that you specify a Print Prints the contents of the pane Buffer Size For databases before Oracle Database 10 2 limits the amount of data that can be stored in the DBMS OUTPUT buffer The buffer size can be between 1 and 1000000 1 million Poll The interval in seconds at which SOL Developer checks the DBMS_ OUTPUT buffer to see if there is data to print The poll rate can be between 1 and 15 1 7 6 OWA Output Pane OWA Oracle Web Agent or MOD PLSQL is an Apache Web Server extension module that enables you to create dynamic web pages from PL SQL packages and stored procedures The OWA Output pane enables you to see the HTML output of MOD PLSQL actions that have been executed in the SOL Worksheet This pane contains icons for the following operations Add New OWA Output Tab Prompts you to specify a database connection after which a tab is opened within the OWA Output pane for that connection and entries written to the OWA output
126. the table To add a column click the Add Column icon to delete a column select it and click the Remove Column X icon to move a column up or down in the table definition select it and use the up arrow and down arrow buttons To copy in column definitions from another table click the Copy Columns icon to display the Copy Columns dialog box Note After you add a column to add another column click the Add Column icon Name Name of the column Must be unique within the table Suggestion For a new column replace any default name such as COLUMNI Datatype Simple indicates a simple non object data type Complex indicates an object type For a complex type you must specify the schema and the type name for example MDSYS and SDO GEOMETRY for the Oracle Spatial geometry type Type Name of the data type Most of the remaining information depends on the specific type Precision For numeric data the precision total number of significant digits that can be represented of the column data Scale For numeric data the scale number of digits after the decimal point of the column data Size For character data the maximum size of the column data Units For character data the units represented by the Size BYTE for bytes or CHAR for characters This attribute is important if the database can contain data in Unicode format with multiple bytes for each character Default For relevant types the defaul
127. to restrict the display For more information see Bind Variables for Reports 3 10 Exporting and Importing Unit Test Objects You can export and import unit tests suites and objects that are stored in the library such as startup validation and teardown actions Exporting an object causes all dependent objects to be included in the resulting XML file For example if you export a suite the resulting XML file includes all tests in that suite as well as all startup validation and teardown actions within each test in that suite To export an object right click its name in the Unit Test navigator and select Export to File then specify the location and name for the XML file that will include the definitions of the objects Importing unit test objects from an XML file causes all objects in the file to be created in the appropriate places in the Unit Test navigator hierarchy If an object already exists in the repository with the same name as an object of the same type in the XML file it is replaced overwritten by the object definition in the XML file To import unit test objects click Tools then Unit Test then Import from File then specify the XML file to be used for the import operation 3 11 Command Line Interface for Unit Testing In addition to running unit tests and suites and exporting and importing unit test objects within the SOL Developer graphical interface you can use the ututi1 batch file Windows or shell scr
128. to select a command and press Enter or use the accelerators to invoke a command on the context menu The following functionality is available in Oracle SQL Developer dialogs and wizards Users can navigate to and invoke all controls within all wizards and dialogs The order in which the Tab key causes focus to flow is consistent and logical Mnemonic keys are provided for controls where appropriate 6 3 2 Screen Reader Readability Here is a summary of screen readability in SOL Developer when it is used with a screen reader When used with menus and toolbars All menus and menu items are read All toolbar items including the Navigator toolbar items are read a The hint text on all toolbar items is read When used with SOL Developer windows 6 2 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Oracle SQL Developer Features that Support Accessibility All open windows are read All components within each window including tabs are read m Status text at the bottom of the IDE and within the source editor is read When used with dialogs and wizards a All controls within all wizards and dialogs are read a Hint text is read 6 3 3 Flexibility in Font and Color Choices The user interface in SOL Developer improves usability for people who are visually impaired by offering flexibility in color and font choices The following font and color features are included Users can specify both the font and the size in w
129. to the Subversion working copy The results of the comparison are displayed in the Messages Log window 5 182 Subversion Pending Changes This window shows files that have been added modified or removed either locally or remotely files whose content conflicts with other versions of the same file and files that have not been added to source control This window is opened automatically when you first initiate an action that changes the local source control status of a file You can also open this window manually The window shows any outgoing changes files that have been added modified or removed locally and local files whose content conflicts with remote files candidates files that have been created locally but not yet added to source control and incoming changes files that have been added modified or removed at a remote location SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 89 Subversion Properties You can restrict the files shown in the Pending Changes window by selecting a scope from the drop down list The default scope is Active Application which will show files from the application currently selected in the navigator You can carry out appropriate source control actions on the files listed in the window using the buttons in the toolbar Clicking a button will either immediately initiate the operation or open a dialog box through which you can choose options before proceeding 5 183 Subversion Properties This d
130. unintentionally immediately use Versioning then Unedit to revert Operation Timeout Maximum time allowed for CVS operations to complete Versioning CVS Navigator Labels The CVS Navigator Labels pane specifies formatting for CVS information appears on navigator nodes and tool tips For a full explanation of keyword substitution modes see the CVS documentation Versioning CVS Version Tools The CVS Version Tools pane specifies options for the pending changes window and the merge editor Use Outgoing Changes Commit Dialog Enables you to make optimum use of limited screen space when the Pending Changes window is open You can save screen space by not showing the Comments area of the Pending Changes window but you might still want to add comments before a commit action You can choose the circumstances under which the Commit dialog is opened always only when the Comments area of the Pending Changes window is hidden or never Incoming Changes Timer Interval The frequency at which the change status of files is checked Merge Editor Specifies whether files are merged locally or at the server Versioning Subversion The Subversion pane specifies the Subversion client to use with SOL Developer SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 103 SQL Developer Preferences Versioning Subversion Comment Templates The Subversion Comment Templates pane specifies templates for comments to be used with commit operations For example a
131. which can be either folders directories containers or files For more information about Oracle XML DB Repository see Oracle XML DB Developer s Guide in the Oracle Database documentation library To create a subfolder of an existing folder right click the folder name and select Create Subfolder To delete a folder and optionally all subfolders under it right click the folder name and select Drop Folder 1 3 35 XML Schemas XML schemas are schema definitions written in XML that describe the structure and various other semantics of conforming instance XML documents For conceptual and usage information about XML schemas see Oracle XML DB Developer s Guide in the Oracle Database documentation library You can edit an XML schema by right clicking the XML schema name in the Connections navigator and selecting Open from the menu you can delete a selected schema by selecting Drop Schema from the menu 1 3 36 Captured and Converted Database Objects for Migration If you are migrating a third party database to Oracle the Captured Models and Converted Models navigators can display models that include database objects such as tables and procedures A captured object represents an object in the captured third party database and a converted object represents an Oracle model of that object as it will be created in the Oracle database The context menu for each captured object includes Convert to Oracle which creates a corresponding conver
132. with the Apache License Version 2 0 the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org A copy of the license is also reproduced below Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 Link2 TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii xxiii xxiv ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form f
133. 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer To create a database destination SOL Developer internally uses the DBMS_ SCHEDULER CREATE DATABASE DESTINATION procedure Name Name of the database destination It can optionally be prefixed with a schema name Cannot be null It is converted to uppercase unless enclosed in double quotes Enabled Enables the database destination Causes the DBMS SCHEDULER ENABLE procedure to be called after the chain is created Connection Info An Oracle Net connect identifier that is resolved to the Oracle database instance being connected to Agent The external destination name of the Scheduler agent to connect Equivalent to an agent name Comments Optional text string that can be used to describe the database destination 5 38 Create Destination Group Database or External This interface is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler database or external destination group For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 5 16 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Index Properties Name Name of the destination group It can optionally be prefixed with a schema name Cannot be null It is converted to uppercase unless enclosed in double quotes Enabled Enables the destination group Causes the DBMS SCHEDULER ENABLE procedure to be called after the chain is created Comments Optional text string that can be used to describe t
134. 2 4 Start SOL Developer This creates a folder or directory where your user information is stored explained in step 2 which has the same content as when SOL Developer was installed If you have made changes to the SOL Developer shortcut key accelerator key mappings you can restore the mappings to the defaults for your system by clicking Tools then Preferences then Shortcut Keys then More Actions then Load Keyboard Scheme and then selecting Default 1 10 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Objects 1 3 Database Objects You can create edit and delete drop most types of objects in an Oracle database by using the context menu right click or Shift F10 in the Connections navigator or by clicking the Actions button in the detail pane display For some objects you can do other operations as appropriate for the object type For some object types the context menu includes Open which generates a tabular overview display of information about objects of that type For example selecting Open for the Tables node in the Connections navigator displays a list of all tables for the connection and for each table the table name the number of rows the table status the number of columns the comment if any and other information Note The actions available from context menus and Actions buttons depend on the Oracle Database release number for the specified database connection If an action mentioned in the text i
135. 3 10 1 23 11 c c c c c c c l c l l2 l c1 l4 l l4 l l c1 l c c1 l l l1 l l c c 17 15 17 15 O A ee e tton A M t cA TD eres 1 73 Database Administration reports ococonenoncnncnnnnnnnnonenennnacanannnnnnnrarnrnnnnnananarnanarnranannn ra rannnnos 1 73 Data Dictar FTP Susini e enger tela bae te ei D Fore ii 1 74 Scheduler reports iden ee e e e n idee renta t dte 1 74 PI SOL TODOS atre eere reet entente e e D AAA 1 75 o r SE 1 75 Streams fepoFts eue ed a edis dtu de e Hla p eret d eate ed 1 75 Table reportarse cn b be eee ds 1 76 AMT fepotts oro here dee be ten a oer UD Ies UTD Eod 1 77 Data Modeler reports err ede SR GR date den te ee e dete eres 1 77 User Defined reports deep ee eite e tet O 1 78 1 User Defined Report Example Chart sse 1 78 2 User Defined Report Example Dynamic HTML eee 1 79 SOL Developer Preferences 22 nien tete ted edere o tent iii 1 80 Environment ipee HI e Eee E e ever di apre i HERE Eee 1 80 Change Management Parameters sess eene enne 1 81 Code Editors A ee ie e A ni etie 1 82 Compare atid Merge tiet ceret ito rer toO a baii 1 85 Database A e niet e 1 85 D b ggetx cx ee ie ete tee ettet e doeet reae dee o e et due 1 95 EXTONSIO S e E a 1 95 External Editor nia loli eR eate 1 96 ULE Dy POS aie n esce te reet dett e ete qe ete ob e ostro leds 1 96 Global Tenore ist iet pee BR ae d i te eee doe
136. 31 Migration SUDTIeRU ic tende a ete t e tee a eene eee ena 2 33 Other Menus Migration Items sess eee eene nennen 2 33 Migration Pr ferences uec aer n eei petiere deter inii ete vere 2 33 Migration Log Panes s ni aa aeaaee aee iaaah 2 33 Using the Translation Scratch Editor sess eene 2 33 Command Line Interface for Migration ssssssseeeeee eee eee 2 34 SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 3 8 1 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 6 1 3 6 2 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 3 12 1 3 12 2 3 12 3 3 12 4 3 12 5 3 12 6 3 12 7 3 12 8 Overview of Unit Testing irte diner eene decr ebd 3 1 SQL Developer User Interface for Unit Testing sssssssssseeeeeeneee 3 2 Unit Test Subt nenu x xit ete eU de ecd m E Ere HRS 3 3 Other Men s Unit Test ems gea aeree 3 3 Unit Test Preferences A nre a ee 3 4 Unit Test Repository 4i oi pee e i HR en ies or t ud eed tee us terere 3 4 Managing Repository Users and Administrators sss 3 4 Editing and Running a Unit Test ccc sese eee ia 3 5 Using a Dynamic Value Query to Create a Unit Test sse eee 3 5 Using Lookups to Simplify Unit Test Creation sssssssssssesesseeenee ee 3 7 Providing Values for Input Fields sese eee ee eene 3 8 Automatically Creating Implementations eee eee nennen 3 8 Using Variable Substitution in Validation Actions sese 3
137. 4 Using the PL SQL Hierarchical Profiler Comment Profile only Descriptive comment to be included in the execution profile Target Name of the function or procedure to run or to run in debug mode You have a choice only if you specified a package that has more than one subprogram Parameters List of each parameter for the specified target The mode of each parameter can be IN the value is passed in OUT the value is returned or IN OUT the value is passed in and the result of the function or procedure s action is stored in the parameter PL SQL Block A block of PL SQL code created by SOL Developer You should change the formal IN and IN OUT parameter specifications in this block to actual values that you want to use for running or debugging the function or procedure For example to specify 10 as the value for an input parameter named in rating change IN RATING gt IN RATING to IN RATING gt 10 When you click OK SOL Developer runs the function or procedure SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 77 Create Edit Breakpoint If you are debugging a function or procedure the debugging toolbar and one or more windows for debug related information are displayed as explained in Section 1 6 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures 5 143 Create Edit Breakpoint Use this box to create or edit a breakpoint to use when debugging a PL SQL function or procedure Definition tab Specify the de
138. ARD BONUS procedure Do not change any other values However if you later want to run the unit test with different specifications or data values you can click the Edit pencil icon in the Code Editor toolbar at the top of the pane Click the Run Test green arrowhead icon in the Code Editor toolbar or press F9 At this point focus is shifted to the Results tab where you can soon see that the AWARD BONUS ran successfully If you want to check the EMPLOYEES table data you will see that the salary for employee 1001 is the same as it was before 8400 because the startup action for the unit test copied the original data to the temporary table and the teardown action restored the original data to the EMPLOYEES table 3 16 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Example of Unit Testing Tutorial 3 12 6 Create and Run an Exception Unit Test Create another unit test for the exception condition where the COMMISSSION PCT value is null for the employee and therefore no commission or bonus can be calculated For this tutorial the test data includes employee 1004 with a null commission percentage This condition could result from several possible scenarios the most likely being an attempt to run the procedure on a salaried employee who is not eligible for commissions The steps for creating this exception unit test are similar to those in Section 3 12 4 except there are no startup or teardown steps because this test should not modify
139. Actions For Oracle Database 11 1 and later connections Displays DBMS SCHEDULER jobs that have been used to execute RMAN scripts lets you view log files For more information see Section 1 11 5 1 Using Action Jobs 1 11 5 1 Using Action Jobs Action jobs are applicable to connections to an Oracle Database Release 11 1 or later database Most backup and recovery actions involve RMAN scripts The action jobs dialog boxes let you save the generated RMAN to a disk you can then copy the script to the server system and run the script there Before you can execute the script for an action job you must create a DBMS_ SCHEDULER credential by running a procedure in the following format BEGIN DBMS_SCHEDULER CREATE_CREDENTIAL username gt user name password gt password database_role gt NULL windows_domain gt NULL comments gt NULL credential_name gt credential name END Then run the Action Jobs Configure action This action places some scripts in the server side database home in lt home gt sqldeveloper dbascripts and creates some DBMS_SCHEDULER program objects in the database If you want to unconfigure an action job you can use the Action Jobs Unconfigure action which removes the server side directory containing the script and log files and drops the DBMS_SCHEDULER program objects After you perform the configuration the Run Scheduler Job action of the Script Processing control becomes
140. Add gt icon to remove a schema from the display select it in Displayed Schemas and click the Remove icon To move all schemas from available to displayed or the reverse use the Add All gt gt or Remove All lt lt icon Only display schemas with visible objects Limits the display to available schemas that have any database objects that are visible to the database user associated with the current connection 5 66 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Externally Modified Files 5 98 Filter Error This dialog box is displayed if you did not specify any data for an export operation Be sure to specify Filter Data options that select some data for the export operation 5 99 Find Highlight This dialog box is displayed when you right click in the table data grid and select Find Highlight to find and optionally highlight with a specified background color occurrences of a specified string value in the table data Type the string value and press the down arrow to search forward from the currently selected grid cell or the up arrow to search backward Search goes to matching cells but does not highlight Highlight goes to matching cells and highlights Text matching options You can ignore case require a whole word match require a starting with match or allow the value to wrap across cell boundaries Color Highlight only Specifies the background color for highlighting Persist Highlight Highlight only If this op
141. BY clause to consider only rows where the minimum value of the relevant salary values is less than 30000 HAVING You can type the complete expression text or you can use the Expression Palette to add object names function names and operators to the expression text ORDER BY Clause pane Specifies one or more columns or column expressions whose values will be used to sort the results returned by the view Without an ORDER BY clause no guarantee exists that the same query executed more than once will retrieve rows in the same order ORDER BY List Lists the objects typically columns that you can currently use in the ORDER BY clause To add an object click the Add icon to delete an object select it and click the Delete X icon to move an object up or down in the view definition select it and use the up arrow and down arrow buttons Note After you add an object to add another object click the Add icon ORDER BY Expression Filter For each column or column expression you can type the text completely into the Expression box or you can type some of the text and use the Expression Palette to add object names function names and operators Validate Tests the validity of the syntax for the expression Order ASC for ascending expression values sorted in ascending order DESC for descending expression values sorted in descending order Nulls Ordering NULLS FIRST to have null expression values appear bef
142. Check that indexes and sequences are created successfully e Ensure that views migrated successfully by doing the following Comparing the number of rows in the Oracle database with those in the source database Calculating the sum of numerical columns in the Oracle database and compare with those in the source database SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 27 Migration Background Information and Guidelines f Ensure that triggers procedures and functions are migrated successfully Check that the correct values are returned for triggers and functions 3 Runthe test cases against the migrated database 4 Create a report that evaluates the test case results These reports allow you to evaluate the data to qualify the errors file problem reports and provide a customer with a controlled version of the database 5 If the tests pass go to step 7 If all tests in the test cases pass or contain acceptable errors the test passes If acceptable errors occur document them in an error report that you can use for audit purposes 6 If the test cases fail a Identify the cause of the error b Identify the test cases needed to check the errors c Logan issue on the controlled version of the migrated database code in the problem report d Add the test case and a description of the problem to the incident tracking system of your organization which could be a spreadsheet or bug reporting system Aside from the t
143. Checking this option also adds QUOTA UNLIMITED ON SYSTEM to the CREATE USER statements in generated scripts For example for a user named Emulation CREATE USER Emulation IDENTIFIED BY Emulation DEFAULT TABLESPACE SYSTEM TEMPORARY TABLESPACE TEMP QUOTA UNLIMITED ON SYSTEM GRANT CREATE SESSION RESOURCE CREATE VIEW CREATE MATERIALIZED VIEW CREATE SYNONYM CREATE PUBLIC SYNONYM ALTER SESSION CREATE SQL TRANSLATION PROFILE TO Emulation If you want to use a different tablespace than SYSTEM modify the scripts accordingly Migration Identifier Options The Identifier Options pane contains options that apply to object identifiers during migrations Prepended to All Identifier Names Microsoft Access Microsoft SOL Server and Sybase Adaptive Server migrations only A string to be added at the beginning of the name of migrated objects For example if you specify the string as XYZ and if a source table is named EMPLOYEES the migrated table will be named XYZ EMPLOYEES Be aware of any object name length restrictions if you use this option Is Quoted Identifier On Microsoft SOL Server and Sybase Adaptive Server migrations only If this option is enabled quotation marks double quotes can be used to refer to identifiers for example SELECT Col 1 from Table 1 if this option is not enabled quotation marks identify string literals Important The setting of this SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 99 SQL Developer Pr
144. Create Text create an Oracle Text index on a column Create Text create a function based index on a column and Drop Constraint Options include Enable or Disable Single Drop delete a constraint Add Check add a check constraint Add Foreign Key and Add Unique Privileges If you are connected as a database user with sufficient privileges you can Grant or Revoke privileges on the table to other users SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 19 Database Objects Statistics Options include Gather Statistics compute exact table and column statistics and store them in the data dictionary and Validate Structure verifies the integrity of each data block and row and for an index organized table also generates the optimal prefix compression count for the primary key index on the table Statistics are used by the Oracle Database optimizer to choose the execution plan for SQL statements that access analyzed objects Storage Options include Shrink Table shrink space in a table for segments in tablespaces with automatic segment management and Move Table to another tablespace The Shrink Table options include Compact only defragments the segment space and compacts the table rows for subsequent release but does not readjust the high water mark and does not release the space immediately and Cascade performs the same operations on all dependent objects of the table including secondary indexes on index organized tables Tri
145. DBC classes in a Java Archive JAR file and supports security parameter settings through Java properties objects For more information about using Oracle Advanced Security see Oracle Database JDBC Developer s Guide 1 4 4 Connections with Operating System OS Authentication When you create a connection to an Oracle database that is using operating system OS authentication you can omit the user name and password that is specify a connection name and all the other necessary information except do not specify a user name or password For information about using external authentication including the use of the O5 AUTHENT PREFIX and REMOTE OS AUTHENT database initialization parameters see Oracle Database Security Guide If you omit the user name and password trying to create a connection to a system that is not configured for external authentication an error message is displayed SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 25 Entering and Modifying Data 1 4 5 Connections with Proxy Authentication Proxy authentication enables one JDBC connection to act as a proxy for other JDBC connections If you use the Proxy Connection option when you create a database connection the connection will be used to connect as the specified user for the connection but authenticated using the user name and either the password or distinguished name of the proxy user For information about using a middle tier server for proxy authentication see Oracle Databa
146. Database connections are shown for selection Include Data If this option is enabled any data in the table in the third party database is copied to the new table after it is created in the Oracle database If this option is not enabled the table is created in the Oracle database but no data is copied If Table Exists Specifies what happens if a table with the same name as the one to be copied already exists in the destination Oracle database Indicate Error generates an error and does not perform the copy Append adds the rows from the copied table to the destination Oracle table Replace replaces the data in the destination Oracle table with the rows from the copied table Note that if the two tables with the same name do not have the same column definitions and if Include Data is specified the data may or may not be copied depending on whether the source and destination column data types are compatible To perform the copy operation click Apply If a table with the same name as the one to be copied already exists in the destination Oracle database then If the two tables do not have the same column definitions the copy is not performed If the two tables have the same column definitions and if Include Data was specified the data is appended that is the rows from the table to be copied are inserted into the existing Oracle table 2 2 Migration Background Information and Guidelines The following topics provide background i
147. Databases 2 1 Migration Basic Options and Steps sssssssssssssse eee eene 2 1 2 1 1 Migrating Using the Migration Wizard ssssssssssseeeeeeene een 2 2 2 1 2 Copying Selected Tables to Oracle sse eee eene 2 4 2 2 Migration Background Information and Guidelines sese 2 5 2 2 1 Overview Of Mistica dt iria ibid 2 6 2 2 1 1 How Migration WOtrks etcetera adan ete b ra 2 6 2 2 1 2 Migration Implemented as SOL Developer Extensions esses 2 7 2 2 2 Preparing a Migration Plan sse eene nnne nennen 2 7 2 2 2 1 Task 1 Determining the Requirements of the Migration Project 2 7 2 2 2 2 Task 2 Estimating Workload sse eee een nenne 2 9 2 2 2 3 Task 3 Analyzing Operational Requirements sees eee 2 10 2 2 2 4 Task 4 Analyzing the Application sss enn 2 10 2 2 2 5 Task 5 Planning the Migration Project sss eee 2 11 2 2 3 Before You Start Migrating General Information sss 2 11 2 2 3 1 Creating a Database User for the Migration Repository sese 2 12 2 2 3 2 Requirements for Creating the Destination Oracle Objects 2 12 2 2 4 Before You Start Migrating Source Specific Information sees 2 13 2 2 4 1 Before Migrating From IBM DB2 sssssseseeeeee eene nennen 2 14 2 2 4 2 Before Mi
148. Delete For a trigger on a table or a view Insert fires the trigger whenever an INSERT statement adds a row to a table or adds an element to a nested table Update fires fire the trigger whenever an UPDATE statement changes a value in one of the columns specified in Selected Columns or in any column if no columns are specified Delete fires the trigger whenever a DELETE statement removes a row from the table or removes an element from a nested table Referencing Old For a trigger on a table the correlation names in the PL SQL block and WHEN condition of a row trigger to refer specifically to old value of the current row Referencing New For a trigger on a table the correlation names in the PL SOL block and WHEN condition of a row trigger to refer specifically to new value of the current row Available Columns For a trigger on a table lists the columns from which you can select for use in an Update trigger definition Selected Columns For a trigger on a table lists the columns used in an Update trigger definition When For a trigger on a table an optional trigger condition which is a SOL condition that must be satisfied for the database to fire the trigger This condition must contain correlation names and cannot contain a query Schema For a trigger on a schema the name of the schema on which to create the trigger 5 40 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit User Available Events For a trigger on a schema
149. Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 71 Log In to CVS 5 114 Log In to CVS Use this dialog box to log in to the specified CVS repository You must know the password for the specified user Connect Automatically on Startup If this option is checked a login operation is performed when you start SOL Developer 5 115 Maintain Spatial Metadata This dialog box is displayed if you select a table and specify Update Spatial Metadata Internally SOL Developer uses the information in this box to modify the relevant row in the xxx SDO GEOM METADATA and xxx SDO INDEX INFO views which are documented in Oracle Spatial Developer s Guide Table Name Name of a feature table that has a column of type SDO GEOMETRY Spatial Index Name Name of the spatial index associated with the specified combination of table and column names Spatial Column Name of the column of type SDO GEOMETRY in the specified feature table Coordinate System The SRID spatial reference identifier value for the coordinate system for all geometries in the column or null if no specific coordinate system should be associated with the geometries For example 8307 is the SRID value for the WGS 84 longitude latitude coordinate system Spatial Dimensions The dimensional information DIMINFO column in USER SDO GEOM METADATA Note that for geodetic layers you must specify the dimensional extents in the index metadata as 180 180 for longitude and 90 90 for latitude
150. ECK clause text Name rating 1 to 10 Condition rating is null or rating gt 1 and rating lt 10 Click OK to finish creating the table Go to Section 4 2 Create a Table PATRONS to create the next table 4 2 Create a Table PATRONS The PATRONS table contains a row for each patron who can check books out of the library that is each person who has a library card It includes an object type MDSYS SDO GEOMETRY column You will use the Create Table dialog box to create the table declaratively the table that you create will be essentially the same as if you had entered the following statement using the SOL Worksheet CREATE TABLE patrons patron id NUMBER last name VARCHAR2 30 CONSTRAINT patron last not null NOT NULL first name VARCHAR2 30 Street address VARCHAR2 50 city state zip VARCHAR2 50 location MDSYS SDO GEOMETRY CONSTRAINT patrons pk PRIMARY KEY patron id The use of single city state zip column for all that information is not good database design it is done here merely to simplify your work in the tutorial The location column Oracle Spatial geometry representing the patron s geocoded address is merely to show the use of a complex object type To create the PATRONS table if you are not already connected connect to the database as the user for the schema you are using for this tutorial Right click the Tables node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New Table and ente
151. ELSE UPDATE employees SET salary salary sales amt commission WHERE employee id emp id END IF END award bonus Click the Run Script icon or press F5 to create the AWARD BONUS procedure 3 12 3 Create the Unit Testing Repository You will need a unit testing repository in the database to hold schema objects that you create and that SOL Developer will maintain You can create a separate database user for this repository or use the schema of an existing database user however to simplify your learning and any possible debugging you may need to do later it is 3 14 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Example of Unit Testing Tutorial recommended that you use a separate schema for the unit testing repository and the instructions in this section reflect this approach 1 Create a database user for example UNIT TEST REPOS for the unit testing repository Using a database connection with DBA privileges right click Other Users in the Connections navigator and select Create User Specify UNIT TEST REPOS as the user name and complete any other required information For Default Tablespace specify USERS for Temporary Tablespace specify TEMP For System Privileges enable CREATE SESSION then click Apply then Close Create a database connection for the unit testing repository user that you created as follows Click Tools then Unit Test then Manage Users In the Select Connection dialog box click the plus icon to
152. ES table data you will see that the information for employee 1004 and all the other employees was not changed SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 17 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial Design Consideration As an alternative to creating a separate unit test for the exception condition you could add it as an implementation to the AWARD BONUS test right click AWARD BONUS and select Add Implementation Thus the AWARD BONUS unit test would have two implementations the Default implementation using employee 1001 and the AWARD BONUS NO COMM EXC implementation using employee 1004 The approach in this tutorial enables you to create a simple unit test suite using the two unit tests see Section 3 12 7 However in more realistic unit testing scenarios it is probably better to use a unit test for each procedure add implementations for each test case for a procedure and group multiple unit tests for individual procedures into one or more test suites 3 12 7 Create a Unit Test Suite Create a unit test suite that groups together the two unit tests of the AWARD BONUS procedure If the Unit Test navigator is not visible on the left side click View then Unit Test The Unit Test navigator is described in Section 3 2 1 2 In the Unit Test navigator right click the Suites node and select Add Suite In the Unit Testing Add Test Suite dialog box specify AWARD BONUS SUITE as the suite name In the Unit Test naviga
153. Extension You can also create by using a gradient box or by speechifying the RGB Red Green Blue values for the color 5 65 Configure Extension This dialog box which is displayed if you click Configure for Versioning Support in the Extensions preferences pane enables you to select from among available versioning support extensions for SOL Developer For information about using versioning with SOL Developer see Section 1 10 If you change any existing settings you will need to restart SOL Developer 5 66 Configure File Type Associations This dialog box which is displayed the first time you start SOL Developer enables you to associate certain file types with SOL Developer If a file type is associated with SOL Developer files with that type s extension will automatically be opened by SOL Developer when you double click the file name Any previous association for that file type is replaced If you do not associate a file type with SOL Developer any existing association for that file is unchanged After you close this box you can change the associations for these file types and many others by clicking Tools and then Preferences and selecting File Types see Section 1 18 9 File Types 5 67 Copy Columns This dialog box is displayed if you click the Copy Columns icon when specifying column definitions for a table Schema The schema that owns the table from which to copy column definitions Table The table within the
154. GLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE 1 SQL Developer Concepts and Usage Note This book is for an old release of SOL Developer You are encouraged to use the latest available release See http www oracle com technetwork developer tools sq 1 developer for information about downloads and documentation Oracle SOL Developer is a graphical version of SOL Plus that gives database developers a convenient way to perform basic tasks You can browse create edit and delete drop database objects run SOL statements and scripts edit and debug PL SQL code manipulate and export unload data and view and create reports You can connect to any target Oracle database schema using standard Oracle database authentication Once connected you can perform operations on objects in the database You can connect to schemas for selected third party non Oracle databases such as MySQL Microsoft SQL Server Sybase Adaptive Server Microsoft Access and IBM DB2 and view metadata and data in these databases and you can migrate third party databases to Oracle This chapter contains the following major sections Section 1 1 Installing and Getting Started with SOL Developer Section 1 2 SOL Developer User Interface Section 1 3 Database Objects Section 1 4 Database Connections Section 1 5 Entering and Modifying Data Section 1 6
155. If this option is enabled the staging table is committed and dropped after the import operation If this option is not enabled the staging table is not committed or dropped Send Create Script to Worksheet If this option is enabled after you click Finish SOL Developer does not immediately perform the import operation but instead opens a SOL Worksheet with statements that will be used if you click the Run Script icon in the worksheet Choose Columns Available Columns Lists the columns from which you can select for import into columns in the table To select one or more columns use the arrow buttons to move columns from Available to Selected Selected Columns Lists the columns whose data is to be imported into columns in the database table To change the order of a selected column in the list for the import operation select it and use the up and down arrow buttons Column Definition Enables you to specify information about the columns in database table into which to import the data Match By The kind of automatic matching from source to target columns by Name by Position or None use the default The default for existing tables is by name if a header is present in the file and by position if no header is present SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 15 Export Import Connection Descriptors Source Data Columns and Target Table Columns You can select a source file data column to display its target Oracle column prope
156. L Developer Concepts and Usage 1 1 Installing and Getting Started with SOL Developer sse 1 2 1 2 SOL Developer User Interface 5 ete ee eee etes 1 3 1 2 1 Menus for SOL Developet rene eene tenete edes eet ete detienen 1 6 1 2 2 Restoring the Original Look and Feel sse een 1 10 1 3 Database Objects eerte aee me tei men eee e he e be a deitas 1 11 1 3 1 Applications Application Express 3 0 1 and Later sss 1 11 1 3 2 Cache Groups Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database sss 1 12 1 3 3 Chains zo ede Ree et stupet e a t AA Ie t AS 1 12 1 3 4 Crederitidls A te aed eet 1 12 1 3 5 Database Destinada aaa 1 12 1 3 6 Database Links Public and Private esee 1 13 1 3 7 Destination Groups oit euet mae eene deceased ees ar donet 1 13 1 3 8 Directories ia E rie e die eh bee di vae c de o dca dee bete des 1 13 1 3 9 Editions cde ao aree eie Poe E be ete Pee 1 13 1 3 10 File Watchets i iie Etre e D f tenetis e ee ie 1 14 1 3 11 FUNCION Stella e ette et irte ette ia Casa ages ghd rondas Seats eR Ds enc 1 14 1 3 12 Indexes n eene n e ie tie 1 14 1 3 13 Java ULSA AI 1 15 1 3 14 TA A 1 15 1 3 15 Job Classes Haee ite etie pe ive sie e x dne e ee Hbi ek s 1 15 1 3 16 Materialized Views erepto tene e e e e e e en Pee ee tied 1 15 1 3 17 Materialized View LOg58 5 nca aito nete ee subia tin obe bte de esi ie reb eb er dee ts 1 16 1 3 18 Multitenant C
157. Lets you create or edit a code snippet which you will be able to drag into files that you edit Name Name for the code snippet Image Icon image to be associated with the snippet Code Code for the snippet 5 13 Component Palette New Section Rename Section Lets you create or rename a section in the Code Snippets panel of the Component Palette You can create sections in the Code Snippets panel to organize your snippets better For example if you have a group of code snippets that pertain to mathematical functions you can create a new section called Math and group the related snippets under it Name Name of the section 5 14 Confirm Drop Application This dialog box is displayed when you right click an Application Express application and select Drop To drop the application click Yes to keep not drop the application click No If the application contains an uninstall script that script is run before the application is dropped 5 15 Confirm Running SQL This dialog box is displayed in certain situations when SQL Developer needs to run a setup script on the server The script is displayed in a text box where you can view or edit the contents To allow the script to run click Yes to prevent the script from running click No 5 4 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Credential 5 16 Connection Has Uncommitted Changes This dialog box is displayed if you try to end the active database session while t
158. Line Gutter pane specifies options for the line gutter left margin of the code editor Show Line Numbers If this option is checked lines are numbered To go to a line number while you are using the SOL Worksheet press Ctrl G Enable Line Selection by Click Dragging If this option is checked you can select consecutive lines in the editor by clicking in the gutter and dragging the cursor without releasing the mouse button Code Editor PL SQL Syntax Colors The PL SQL Syntax Colors pane specifies colors for different kinds of syntax elements Code Editor Printing The Printing pane specifies options for printing the contents of the code editor The Preview pane sample display changes as you select and deselect options Code Editor Printing HTML The Printing HTML pane specifies options for printing HTML files from the code editor 1 84 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Code Editor Undo Behavior The Undo Behavior pane specifies options for the behavior of undo operations Ctrl Z or Edit then Undo Only consecutive edits of the same type are considered for example inserting characters and deleting characters are two different types of operation Allow Navigation Only Changes to be Undoable If this option is checked navigation actions with the keyboard or mouse can be undone If this option is not checked navigation actions cannot be undone and only actual changes to the text can be undo
159. METRY a The objects are from a non Oracle database connection 5 78 Describe Object Window This window is displayed when you select a database object name in the SOL Worksheet right click and select Describe The information is read only and is displayed using tabs that are appropriate for the type of object For example if the display is for a table the information displayed is similar to that in the Create Edit Table with advanced options dialog box 5 79 Edit View Value Data or Table Column This dialog box enables you to view and if applicable edit data in certain dialog box fields in a cell in the table Data grid in some other grid display for example to edit the value of a single column within a row or in a filter specification If you are permitted to modify the data you can change the data value and then click OK If you are not permitted to modify the data the Value display is read only The specific options for editing the value available depend on the context such as the data type of the column associated with that cell in the grid For example for BLOB or BFILE data you can Load a file containing data such as an image file a Use the external editor associated with the MIME type and file extension see the preferences for External Editor Save the result of any edits For date based values such as for CREATED as the filter criterion you can specify a date or click Set Today to specify to
160. No null TITLE WARCHAR2 50 BYTE No null AUTHOR LAST VARCHAR2 30 BYTE No null AUTHOR FIRS VARCHAR2 30 BYTE Yes null RATING NUMBER Yes null For objects other than subprograms icons provide the following options a Freeze View the pin keeps that object s tab and information in the window when you click another object in the Connections navigator a separate tab and display are created for that other object If you click the pin again the object s display is available for reuse Edit displays a dialog box for editing the object Refresh updates the display by querying the database for the latest information a Actions displays a menu with actions appropriate for the object The actions are the same as when you right click an object of that type in the Connections navigator except the Actions menu does not include Edit To switch among objects click the desired tabs to close a tab click the X in the tab If you make changes to an object and click the X you are asked if you want to save the changes SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 5 SQL Developer User Interface For tables and views this information is grouped under tabs which are labeled near the top For example for tables the tabs are Columns Data for seeing and modifying the data itself Indexes Constraints and so on and you can click a column heading under a tab to sort the grid rows by the values in that column For most objects the tabs i
161. ORACLE Oracle amp SQL Developer User s Guide Release 3 2 E35117 06 July 2014 Provides conceptual and usage information about Oracle SOL Developer a graphical tool that enables you to browse create edit and delete drop database objects run SOL statements and scripts edit and debug PL SQL code manipulate and export data migrate third party databases to Oracle view metadata and data in third party databases and view and create reports Note This book is for an old release of SOL Developer You are encouraged to use the latest available release See http www oracle com technetwork developer tools sq 1 developer for information about downloads and documentation Oracle SOL Developer User s Guide Release 3 2 E35117 06 Copyright O 2006 2014 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Primary Author Chuck Murray This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change w
162. Open SOL Worksheet with Profile In the SOL worksheet that is displayed you can run SOL statements and procedures in that third party SOL For example in the worksheet for a profile associated with the SYBASE TSOL TRANSLATOR translator you could enter the following Sybase syntax that is not recognized by native Oracle Database select top 5 from my table If you double click the profile name in the DBA navigator and then select the SOL Translations tab you can see the SOL text and the translated text for each statement executed If you want and if you are sufficiently knowledgeable you can modify the TRANSLATED TEXT cells for selected statements to change the way they are interpreted and executed by Oracle 5 112 Invalid Database Version The feature you are trying to use is not supported with Oracle Database Release 10 and earlier releases To use the feature you must connect to an Oracle database with a version number of 11 1 or higher 5 113 Load Keyboard Scheme This dialog box is displayed when you select Load Keyboard Scheme from More Actions when specifying shortcut key preferences for SOL Developer You can load a set of predefined key mappings for certain systems and external editing applications If you load any preset key mappings that conflict with changes that you have made your changes are overwritten You can specify Default to restore the shortcut key mappings to the SOL Developer defaults for your system SQL
163. PE and click the XMLType Properties button For more information about XMLType storage models see Oracle XML DB Developer s Guide Store As Binary XML data stored in compact post parse XML schema aware format can be used with XML data that is not based on an XML schema CLOB data stored in Character Large Object instances or Object Relational data stored as a set of objects Note that effective with Oracle Database Release 12 1 Store As CLOB for XMLType is deprecated XML Schema Owner Owner of the XML schema XML Schema Name of the XML Schema For example http xmlns oracle com xdb XDBResource xsd Element Select the desired element from the list of elements defined in the XML schema Allow Any Schema only if Store As is Binary XML Encodes all XML schema based documents using an encoding based on the XML schema referenced by the document SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 97 XMLType Column Properties Allow Non Schema only if Store As is Binary XML Encodes all XML schema based documents using an encoding based on the referenced XML schema encodes all non schema based documents using the non schema based encoding 5 98 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide 6 SQL Developer Accessibility Information Note Unless otherwise indicated the SOL Developer accessibility information presented here also applies to Data Modeler and Data Miner This topic provides information on the acce
164. Pump as documented in Oracle Database Utilities Source page Connection Database connection to use to export the specified information for the specified types of objects Data or DDL Specify whether to export only the data applies to tables and views only the object definitions the DDL or both the data and the object definitions Types to be Exported Specify whether to export the database or just one or more tablespaces schemas or tables Your selection will affect the display of some remaining wizard pages Tablespaces page If you specified Tablespaces for Types to be Exported select one or more tablespaces to be exported and use the arrow icons to move them to the Selected Source Tablespaces box Schemas page If you specified Schemas for Types to be Exported select one or more schemas to be exported and use the arrow icons to move them to the Selected Source Schemas box Tables page If you specified Tables for Types to be Exported select one or more tables to be exported and use the arrow icons to move them to the Selected Source Schemas box Tables tab To select one or more tables see Specify Objects under Shared Wizard Pages Include Exclude Filter tab Optionally filter the objects to be included or excluded using the same interface as for the Filter page Filter page Lets you specify data and metadata filtering to limit the type of information that is exported You can specify multiple filters by ad
165. QL Developer User s Guide Example of Unit Testing Tutorial 2 Inthe Details tab near the top right corner select the database connection for the schema that you used to create the AWARD BONUS procedure Do not change any other values However if you later want to run the unit test suite with different specifications you can click the Edit pencil icon in the Code Editor toolbar at the top of the pane 3 Click the Run Suite green arrowhead icon in the Code Editor toolbar or press F9 After the suite is run focus is shifted to the Results tab where you can soon see that the AWARD BONUS SUITE test suite ran successfully SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 19 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial 3 20 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide 4 SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database In this tutorial you will use SOL Developer to create objects for a simplified library database which will include tables for books patrons people who have library cards and transactions checking a book out returning a book and so on Note Other SOL Developer tutorials including Oracle By Example OBE lessons are available from the Start Page If the tab for that page is not visible click Help then Start Page The tables are deliberately oversimplified for this tutorial They would not be adequate for any actual public or organizational library For example this library contains only book
166. RE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Log4j 1 2 9 This program contains Log4j 1 2 9 which has the following associated attribution text The Apache Software License Version 1 1 Copyright c 2000 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The end user documentation included with the redistribution if any must include the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation Link1 Alternately this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself if and wherever such third party acknowledgments normally appear 4 The names Apache and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called Apache nor may Apache appear in their name witho
167. Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures 7 When you have enough information to fix the problem you can click the Terminate icon in the debugging toolbar From this debugging session you know that to fix the logic error you should change rating lt in_ratingtorating in_rating in the definition of the_cursor 4 9 Use the SQL Worksheet for Queries You can use the SQL Worksheet to test SOL statements using a database connection To display the worksheet from the Tools menu select SOL Worksheet In the Select Connection dialog box select the database connection that you used to create the BOOKS PATRONS and TRANSACTIONS tables for the tutorial in Chapter 4 SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database The SOL Worksheet has the user interface shown in Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet In the Enter SOL Statement box enter the following statement the semicolon is optional for the SOL Worksheet SELECT author last name title FROM books Notice the automatic highlighting of SOL keywords SELECT and FROM in this example Click the Execute SOL Statement icon in the SOL Worksheet toolbar The results of the query are displayed on the Results tab under the area in which you entered the SOL statement In the Enter SOL Statement box enter or copy and paste the following statement which is the same as the SELECT statement in the view you created in Create a View SELECT p patron id p last
168. SER DIR environment variable location if defined otherwise as indicated in the following table which shows the typical default locations under a directory or in a file for specific types of resources on different operating systems Note the period in the name of any directory named sqldeveloper Table 1 1 Default Locations for User Related Information Resource Type System Windows Linux or Mac OS X User defined Windows C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data SQL reports Developer UserReports xml Linux or Mac OS X sqldeveloper UserReports xml User defined Windows C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application snippets Data SQL Developer UserSnippets xml Linux sqldeveloper UserSnippets xml Mac OS X Users Your user Library Application Support SOLDeveloper UserSnippets xml SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 105 Data Modeler in SQL Developer Table 1 1 Cont Default Locations for User Related Information Resource Type System Windows Linux or Mac OS X SOL history Windows C Documents and Settings N user name Application Data X SOL Developer SqlHistory xml Linux sqldeveloper SqlHistory xml Mac OS X Users Your user Library Application Support SOLDeveloper SqlHistory xml Code templates Windows C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data SQL Developer CodeTemplate xml Linux sqldeveloper CodeTemplate xml
169. SQL SOL Server and Sybase Adaptive Server Oracle Representation for Zero Length String The value to which Oracle converts zero length strings in the source data Can be a space or a null value NULL Specific notes a For Microsoft Access offline migrations a null value and a space are considered the same a For Sybase offline migrations is considered the same as a space For MySQL offline migrations a null value is exported as NULL which is handled as type VARCHAR2 You can specify another escape character by using the fields escaped by option with the mysqldump command for example specifying XN for null or for For information about the mysqldump command see Section 2 2 8 1 3 Creating Data Files From MySQL For MySQL offline migrations the data is exported to a file named table name txt so if you are moving data from two or more tables with the same name but in different schemas rename files as needed so that they are all unique and modify the SOL Loader ctl file accordingly Online The online data move options determine the results of files created when you click Migration then Migrate Data Number of Parallel Data Move Streams online data moves The number of internal connections created for simultaneous movement of data from the source database to the Oracle tables Higher values may shorten the total time required but will use more database resources during that time Number of Ro
170. SQL function or procedure 1 28 dialog box 5 77 remote debugging 1 31 decryption data in a table column 1 20 deploying objects using the Cart 1 53 deployment after database migration 2 29 destination groups Scheduler 1 13 creating and editing 5 16 destination schema database schema differences 5 54 destinations database Scheduler 1 12 dialog boxes and tabs 5 1 directories directory objects 1 13 disabled constraints 1 76 discussion forum SOL Developer 1 111 documentation generating for schema 1 24 downloads SOL Developer 1 111 drag and drop effects 1 86 drivers third party JDBC 1 89 dynamic HTML user defined report example 1 79 E editions 1 13 crossedition triggers 1 21 embedded PL SQL gateway EPG for Application Express starting and stopping 1 12 emulation user generating separate 1 99 encryption data in a table column 1 20 entering data in tables 1 26 EPG embedded PL SQL gateway for Application Express starting and stopping 1 12 errors parse exceptions 2 19 Excel importing data 5 14 execution plan 1 37 expired password resetting 1 24 EXPLAIN PLAN execution plan 1 37 exporting database objects 5 56 reports 1 71 table data 1 20 5 62 unit test objects 3 11 expression watches 1 32 extensions 5 63 SOL Developer 1 95 user defined 1 90 external destination groups Scheduler 1 13 external editor SQL Developer preferences 1 96 external
171. Specify Teardown select Table or Row Restore because you want to restore the original data values in the EMPLOYEES table before any data was modified by the unit test When prompted accept the supplied values for Target Table EMPLOYEES and Source Table the name of the temporary table In Summary review the information If you need to change anything click Back as needed and make the changes then proceed to this Summary page When you are ready to complete the unit test definition click Finish In the Unit Test navigator click the node for AWARD BONUS DYN QUERY under Tests to display the test in an editing window 3 6 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using Lookups to Simplify Unit Test Creation 11 In the Details pane click the pencil icon next to Dynamic Value Query enter the following and click OK SELECT emp id sales amt FROM award bonus dyn query 12 For Expected Result leave the value as Success 13 In Specify Validations click the plus icon and select Query returning no rows For the query replace the SELECT statement in the Process Validation box with the following any semicolon at the end of the statement is ignored SELECT FROM employees WHERE salary amt 20000 AND commission pct IS NOT NULL That is for all salespersons employees whose commission percentage is not null check whether the salary resulting from the unit test run is greater than 20000 If there are no such salespersons t
172. T INTO books VALUES A3333 Finding Inner Peace Blissford Serenity null INSERT INTO books VALUES A4444 Great Mystery Stories Whodunit Rodney 5 INSERT INTO books VALUES A5555 Software Wizardry Abugov D 10 INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Smith Jane 123 Main Street Mytown MA 01234 null INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Chen William 16 S Maple Road Mytown MA 01234 null INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Fernandez Maria 502 Harrison Blvd Sometown NH 03078 null INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Murphy Sam 57 Main Street Mytown MA 01234 null INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 100 A1111 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 100 A2222 SYSDATE 2 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 101 A3333 SYSDATE 3 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 101 A2222 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 102 A3333 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 103 A4444 SYSDATE 2 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id tr
173. TDS JDBC Driver for Microsoft SQL Server and the MySQL JDBE Driver which enable you to create connections to third party databases If the system you are using is behind a firewall see the SOL Developer user preferences for Web Browser and Proxy About Displays version related information about SOL Developer and its components 1 2 2 Restoring the Original Look and Feel If you have made changes to the SOL Developer user interface look and feel such as accidentally repositioning navigators and panes you can restore the interface to the way it was after SOL Developer was installed by following these steps 1 Ifyouare running SOL Developer exit 2 Create a backup copy of the folder or directory where your SOL Developer user information is stored in case you want to restore any old user defined reports snippets code templates or SOL history The default location is a build specific directory or folder under the following a Windows C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data SOL Developer a Linux or Mac OS X sqldeveloper If you have specified a nondefault location for your SOL Developer user information see Section 1 19 create the backup copy of that folder or directory instead If you do not want to use any old information or settings you can skip creating a backup copy 3 Delete the original not the backup folder or directory where your user information is stored explained in step
174. This dialog box prompts you to specify the location and name of a text file to contain the output of the export operation such as data values during a debug operation 5 85 External Locator Configuration This dialog box is displayed if you click External Locator Configuration when creating a CVS repository Specify the information required to connect to the remote repository when the method by which the client will gain access to and authenticate against the server is External Set Remote Shell If this option is checked external repositories are accessed through a remote shell utility usually rsh the default or ssh Set Remote Shell If this option is checked you specify the name of the CVS program on the remote server It is unlikely to need to be changed from the default and should only be changed in cooperation with the administrator of the CVS remote server 5 86 External Tools This dialog box is displayed when you click Tools and then External Tools It displays information about user defined external tools that are integrated with the SOL Developer interface Find Tools Checks for any tools that Oracle offers for your consideration and adds them to the list if they are not already included New Starts a wizard for defining a new external tool see Section 5 87 Create Edit External Tool Edit Displays a dialog box for editing the selected external tool see Section 5 87 Create Edit External Tool 5 62 Oracle
175. This table contains some of the columns used in the HR EMPLOYEES table that is included in the Oracle supplied sample schemas but it does not contain all of the columns and it contains fewer rows and different data You can create this EMPLOYEES table in an existing schema and using an existing database connection or you can create a new schema and connection for the table To create and populate this table enter the following statements in a SOL Worksheet or a SOL Plus command window Connect as the database user that will be used to run the unit tests Then enter the following statements CREATE TABLE employees employee id NUMBER PRIMARY KEY commission pct NUMBER salary NUMBER INSERT INTO employees VALUES 1001 0 2 8400 INSERT INTO employees VALUES 1002 0 25 6000 INSERT INTO employees VALUES 1003 0 3 5000 Next employee is not in the Sales department thus is not on commission INSERT INTO employees VALUES 1004 null 10000 commit 3 12 2 Create the AWARD BONUS Procedure Create the AWARD BONUS procedure in the same schema as the EMPLOYEES table In a SOL Worksheet using the appropriate database connection enter the following text create or replace PROCEDURE award bonus emp id NUMBER sales amt NUMBER AS commission REAL comm missing EXCEPTION BEGIN SELECT commission pct INTO commission FROM employees WHERE employee id emp id IF commission IS NULL THEN RAISE comm missing
176. Tutorial Objects INSERT INTO books VALUES A3333 Finding Inner Peace Blissford Serenity NSERT INTO books VALUES A4444 Great Mystery Stories Whodunit Rodney NSERT INTO books VALUES A5555 Software Wizardry Abugov D 10 INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Smith Jane 123 Main Street Mytown MA 01234 null INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Chen William 16 S Maple Road Mytown MA 01234 null INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Fernandez Maria 502 Harrison Blvd Sometown NH 03078 null INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Murphy Sam 57 Main Street Mytown MA 01234 null INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 100 A1111 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 100 A2222 SYSDATE 2 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 101 A3333 SYSDATE 3 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 101 A2222 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 102 A3333 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 103 A4444 SYSDATE 2 INSERT INTO transacti
177. URCE role with the ADMIN option and you must also grant this user the CREATE ROLE CREATE USER and ALTER ANY TRIGGER privileges all with the ADMIN option 2 Create a database connection named Migration Repository that connects to the MIGRATIONS user 3 Right click the Migration Repository connection and select Migration Repository then Associate Migration Repository to create the repository If you do not already have a database connection to the third party database to be migrated create one For migrations other than from Microsoft Access you should set the third party JDBC driver preference before creating the connection For example create a database connection named Sales Sybase to a Sybase database named sales Connection The database connection to the migration repository to be used Truncate If this option is enabled the repository is cleared all data from previous migrations is removed before any data for the current migration is created Project The Project page of the wizard specifies the migration project for this migration A migration project is a container for migration objects Name Name to be associated with this migration project Description Optional descriptive comments about the project Output Directory The directory or folder in which all scripts generated by the migration wizard will be placed Enter a path or click Choose to select the location 2 2 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Mig
178. Using DBA Features in SQL Developer Current Database Properties For each current database initialization parameter displays the name value current value and description Restore Points Displays restore points that can be used for recovery lets you create and delete restore points A restore point is a name associated with a timestamp or an SCN of the database A restore point can be used to flash back a table or the database to the time specified by the restore point without the need to determine the SCN or timestamp Restore points are also useful in various RMAN operations including backups and database duplication View Database Feature Usage Displays database features and the number of detected usages for each 1 11 3 Database Status Includes options for displaying status information about the database Status Includes tabs for displaying information about the Database Status Oracle Host Oracle Home and TNS Listener 1 11 4 Data Pump Includes options for using the Oracle Data Pump Export and Import utilities which are described in detail in Oracle Database Utilities Export Jobs Displays any Data Pump Export jobs You can right click and select Data Pump Export Wizard to create a Data Pump Export job Import Jobs Displays any Data Pump Import jobs You can right click and select Data Pump Import Wizard to create a Data Pump Import job 1 11 5 RMAN Backup Recovery Includes options related to databa
179. WARD BONUS same as the procedure name and select Create with single dummy representation In Specify Startup click the plus icon to add a startup action and for the action select Table or Row Copy because you want to save the current data values in the EMPLOYEES table before any data is modified by the unit test When prompted for Source Table specify EMPLOYEES and for Target Table accept the default name provided for a temporary table that will be automatically created when it is needed and deleted when it is no longer needed The target table will be created and if a table already exists with the name that you specify as the target table it will be overwritten In Specify Parameters change the values in the Input column to the following For Parameter EMP ID 1001 For Parameter SALES AMT 5000 SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 15 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial For Expected Result leave the value as Success In Specify Validations click the plus icon and select Query returning row s For the query replace the SELECT statement in the Process Validation box with the following any semicolon at the end of the statement is ignored SELECT FROM employees WHERE employee id 1001 AND salary 9400 That is because employee 1001 has a 20 percent 0 2 commission and because the sales amount was specified as 5000 the bonus is 1000 5000 0 2 and the new salary for this employee is 9400 8400 base salary plus
180. Worksheet window Clipboard Statements are copied to the clipboard Types to Export page Specify object types to be exported and options for the export operation Object Types Check the types of objects that you want to export You can click Toggle All to check and uncheck all individual types You must select at least one object type Specify Objects page See Specify Objects under Shared Wizard Pages Specify Data page See Data under Shared Wizard Pages SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 57 DDL Panel for Creating or Editing an Object Export Summary page See Summary under Shared Wizard Pages If a script is created and if Save As was specified as Worksheet the file is displayed in a SOL Worksheet window where you can run it as a script and perform other operations 5 74 DDL Panel for Creating or Editing an Object You can review and save the SOL statement that SOL Developer will use to create or edit the object to reflect any changes you have made to the object s properties If you want to make any changes go back to the relevant panels and make the changes there To save the SOL statement to a script file click Save and specify the location and file name 5 75 Debugger Attach to JPDA This dialog box is displayed when you right click a database connection name and select Remote Debug Use this dialog box if you are using the Sun Microsystem s Java Platform Debugger Architecture JPDA and you would lik
181. You can specify the tnsnames ora location in the Database Advanced preferences By default tnsnames ora is located in the SORACLE HOME network admin directory but it can also be in the directory specified by the TNS ADMIN environment variable or registry value or on Linux systems the global configuration directory On Windows systems if the tnsnames ora file exists but its connections are not being used by SOL Developer define TNS_ ADMIN as a system environment variable For information about the tnsnames ora file see the Local Naming Parameters tnsnames ora chapter in Oracle Database Net Services Reference You can create additional connections for example to connect to the same database but as different users or to connect to different databases Each database connection is listed in the Connections navigator hierarchy To create a new database connection right click the Connections node and select New Database Connection Use the dialog box to specify information about the connection see Section 5 21 Create Edit Select Database Connection You can also create a new database connection by selecting an existing connection in that dialog box changing the connection name changing other connection attributes as needed and clicking Save or Connect To create automatically generate a database connection for each unlocked user account in the Oracle database instance on the local system right click the Connections node and selec
182. a SOL Worksheet window Clipboard Statements are copied to the clipboard Encoding Character set to be used for encoding of the output file or files Open SQL File When Exported If this option is checked the output file is opened automatically when the export operation is complete Generate Controlling Script for Multiple SOL Files If this option is checked then if statements are generated in multiple sql script files a controlling or master sql script file is also generated to run all the individual script files Database Utilities Export Formats CSV Delimited Excel Fixed HTML PDF SQL Loader Text XML A separate pane is provided for specifying default attributes for each supported format for exported data The displayed and editable attributes depend on the specific format Right Enclosure in Data is Doubled CSV Delimited and Text formats If this option if checked then for CSV delimited and text format if the right enclosure occurs in the data itis doubled in the exported data file The PDF Format options include panes for options specific to cell column and table layout headers and footers and security Note that if a table has multiple columns and the columns do not fit horizontally on a PDF page then the Table Layout Horizontal Alignment option does not apply but instead the table is split vertically spanning multiple pages and the information on each page is left aligned PDF Format Column Layout
183. ab is displayed If you close the tab and cause it to be displayed again the default tab name appears 5 136 Rename Procedure This dialog box is displayed if you try to rename a procedure Specify a unique new name for the procedure 5 137 Select Current Repository This dialog box is displayed if you click Migration then Repository Management then Select Current Repository You can use this dialog box to reconnect to a migration repository after you have disconnected using Migration then Repository Management then Disconnect Migration Repository In addition if you have multiple migration repositories and you can use this dialog box to switch from one to another Select Current Repository Name of the database connection with the migration repository to be used for all operations relating to migrating third party databases to Oracle 5 138 Cannot Capture Table This dialog box is displayed if you try to capture a third party database before establishing and connecting to a current migration repository If no migration repository exists create one by clicking Migration then Repository Management then Create Repository 5 76 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Run Debug Profile PL SQL To make an existing migration repository the current one right click its connection in the Connections navigator and select Associate Migration Repository To open a connection to the migration repository expand the node for its connect
184. abase 112 Release 2 11 2 enables you to upgrade the database component of an application while it is in use thereby minimizing or eliminating down time To upgrade an application while it is in use you copy the database objects that comprise the application and redefine the copied objects in isolation Your changes do not affect users of the application they continue to run the unchanged application When you are sure that your changes are correct you make the upgraded application available to all users For more information see the chapter about edition based redefinition in Oracle Database Development Guide To specify the current edition right click the edition name and select Set Current Edition To create an edition under an existing edition right click the edition name and select Create Edition To delete an edition and optionally all editions under it right click the edition name and select Drop Edition SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 13 Database Objects 1 3 10 File Watchers A file watcher is an Oracle Scheduler object that defines the location name and other properties of a file whose arrival on a system causes the Scheduler to start a job You create a file watcher and then create any number of event based jobs or event schedules that reference the file watcher When the file watcher detects the arrival of the designated file it raises a file arrival event The job started by the file arrival event can retrieve th
185. acle Change Management Pack the Oracle Tuning Pack and the Oracle Diagnostics Pack For each cell in this display combination of license and connection the value can be true checked box false cleared box or unspecified solid filled box If an option is specified as true for a connection in this pane you will not be prompted with a message about the option being required when you use that connection for a feature that requires the option Database NLS The NLS pane specifies values for globalization support parameters such as the language territory sort preference and date format These parameter values are used for SOL Developer session operations such as for statements executed using the SOL Worksheet and for the National Language Support Parameters report Specifying values in this preferences pane does not apply those values to the underlying database itself To change the database settings you must change the appropriate initialization parameters and restart the database Note that SOL Developer does not use default values from the current system for globalization support parameters instead SOL Developer when initially installed by default uses parameter values that include the following NLS LANG AMERICAN LS TERR AMERICA LS CHAR AL32UTF8 LS SORT BINARY LS CAL GREGORIAN LS DATE LANG AMERICAN LS DATE FORM DD MON RR 2 a Database ObjectViewer Parameters The ObjectViewer Parameter
186. acle Database SQL Tuning Guide 1 6 4 Using the PL SQL Hierarchical Profiler For an Oracle Database Release 11 1 or later connection you can use the PL SOL hierarchical profiler to identify bottlenecks and performance tuning opportunities in PL SQL applications Profiling consists of the two steps running the PL SQL module in profiling mode and analyzing the reports In addition some one time setup work is required the first time you use profiling in SOL Developer To initiate profiling right click the name of the function or procedure in the Connections navigator hierarchy and select Profile or click the Profile button on the PL SQL source editor toolbar After the function or procedure is run in profiling mode the profiler reports are located at the Execution Profiles tab of the object viewer window You can review subprogram level execution summary information such as Number of calls to the subprogram Time spent in the subprogram itself function time or self time SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 31 Using the SQL Worksheet Time spent in the subprogram itself and in its descendent subprograms subtree time Detailed parent children information including all subprograms that a given subprogram called that is children of the given subprogram For more information about using the PL SQL hierarchical profiler see Oracle Database Development Guide 1 6 5 Setting Expression Watches A watch enables you t
187. ad only mode To copy existing objects to the schedule design editor drag the objects from the Connections navigator onto the editing canvas To create a new object right click in the canvas and select the context menu command for creating a new object of the desired type To open an object double click it or right click it and select Open To delete an object right click it and select Drop You will be prompted to confirm that you want to drop the object To remove the object from the editing canvas without deleting the object itself right click it and select Clear To enable a disabled object right click it and select Enable to disable an enabled object right click it and select Disable You can click drag and release to set a relationship between compatible objects For example to set a schedule for a job you can drag the schedule onto the job which causes a line to be drawn between the objects You can unset remove that relationship by right clicking the line and selecting the appropriate command such as Unset Schedule and then clicking OK when you are prompted to confirm the action 1 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart The Cart is a convenient tool for deploying Oracle Database objects from one or more database connections to a destination connection You drag and drop objects from the Connections navigator into the Cart window or you can open a previously saved cart XML file specify any desired options and cl
188. ains A cache group describes a collection of in memory database tables that map to all or a subset of the tables in an Oracle database A cache group can consist of all or a subset of the rows and columns in these tables Multiple cache groups can be used to cache different sets of related tables in the Oracle database A chain is an Oracle Scheduler object that enables you to implement dependency scheduling in which jobs are started depending on the outcomes of one or more previous jobs A chain consists of multiple steps that are combined using dependency rules The dependency rules define the conditions that can be used to start or stop a step or the chain itself Conditions can include the success failure or completion codes or exit codes of previous steps Logical expressions such as AND OR can be used in the conditions In a sense a chain resembles a decision tree with many possible paths for selecting which tasks run and when For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SQL Developer 1 3 4 Credentials A credential is an Oracle Scheduler object that is a user name and password pair stored in a dedicated database object A job uses a credential to authenticate itself with a database instance or the operating system so that it can run For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 3 5 Database Destinations A database destination is
189. alized tnsnames ora files LDAP Server Select from the list from DIRECTORY SERVER entries in the Idap ora file or enter the directory server location and port either SSL or non SSL for example system123 example com 389 636 Idap system nonssl port ssl port Context LDAP administrative context The contexts available in the selected server are listed 5 8 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Select Database Connection DB Service Database connection information click Load to display a list of database services associated with the selected context If an error is displayed no database services are associated with this context If a connection uses the OCI Thick driver see the Use OCI Thick preference under Database Advanced the system on which SOL Developer is running must have an Oracle Client installation that contains the JDBC and orail8n libraries these libraries must be present on the path and the Oracle Client installation must be version 10 2 or later Advanced connection type Custom JDBC URL URL for connecting directly from Java to the database overrides any other connection type specification If you are using TNS or a naming service with the OCI driver you must specify this information Example jdbc oracle thin scott Glocalhost 1521 0rcl Note that in this example the is required and the user will be prompted to enter the password To use a custom JDBC URL the system on which
190. alue the faster the preview pane is populated When the wizard creates a new table the preview data is used to calculate the size of the columns therefore ensure that the preview is a good sample of the data Preview File Read Maximum Specifies the maximum number of bytes of data to be displayed in the preview pane if the specified preview row limit has not already been reached before you proceed with the import operation You should set some maximum to ensure that very large files are not inadvertently read into memory Database Utilities Import File Formats CVS Delimited Text A separate pane is provided for specifying default attributes for each supported format for imported data The displayed and editable attributes depend on the specific format If a pane includes Header this option controls whether the first row is a header row or the first row of data Delimiter Identifies the character used to separate the data into columns The delimiter character is not included in the data loaded If the preview page does not show the data separated into columns the correct delimiter is probably not specified Examine the data in the preview area to determine the correct delimiter Line Terminator Identifies the terminator for each line The line terminator is not included in the data loaded If the preview page shows the data in one single row the correct terminator is not specified Left Enclosure and Right Enclosure Enclosur
191. alues sorted in ascending order DESC for a descending index index values sorted in descending order Properties Enables you to specify index properties such as compression parallelism and storage options Compress If this option is checked key compression is enabled which eliminates repeated occurrence of key column values and may substantially reduce storage If this option is checked you can enter an integer to specify the prefix length number of prefix columns to compress Parallel If this option is checked parallel creation of the index is enabled You can also enter an integer in the text box to specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Each parallel thread may use one or two parallel execution servers If you specify Parallel without entering an integer the optimum degree of parallelism is automatically calculated Storage Options Enables you to specify storage options for the index Displays the Storage Options dialog box 5 18 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Job Partitions When applicable enables you to specify whether the index is not partitioned locally partitioned or globally partitioned If you specify Local or Global additional fields are displayed relevant to the selected partitioning option Local Specifies that the index is partitioned on the same columns with the same number of partitions and the same partition boun
192. and the tolerance value is interpreted as meters Name Name of the dimension for example X or Longitude Lower Boundary Lower left point of the dimension For geodetic data must be 180 for longitude and 90 for latitude Upper Boundary Upper right point of the dimension For geodetic data must be 180 for longitude and 90 for latitude Tolerance A level of precision with spatial data reflecting the distance that two points can be apart and still be considered the same for example to accommodate rounding errors For geodetic data tolerance is specified as meters Tolerance is explained in detail in Oracle Spatial Developer s Guide 5 116 Manage Columns Use this dialog box to reorder hide or show columns in the display when you are editing a table or data in a table To move a column higher or lower in the display order click the column and then click the appropriate icon on the left To hide a column or to show a hidden column click the column if necessary and click the appropriate icon between the Shown Columns and Hidden Columns lists When you are finished click OK Your action affects only the current display it does not change the table definition or any data in the table 5 72 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide No Lock 5 117 Modify Value This dialog box is displayed when you right click a variable in the Data or Smart Data pane during debugging and select Modify Value You can modify the value for the
193. ansaction date transaction type VALUES 100 A4444 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 102 A2222 SYSDATE 2 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 102 A5555 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 7 Create a View VALUES 101 A2222 SYSDATE 1 Click the Run Script icon or press the F5 key To create a view go to Section 4 6 Create a View 4 6 Create a View Create a view that returns information about patrons and their transactions This view queries the PATRONS and TRANSACTIONS tables and returns rows that contain a patron s ID last name and first name along with a transaction and the transaction type The rows are ordered by patron ID and by transaction type within patron IDs To create the patrons trans view view if you are not already connected connect to the database as the user for the schema you are using for this tutorial Right click the Views node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New View and enter the following information If a tab or field is not mentioned do not enter anything for it Schema Specify your current schema as the schema in which to create the view Name patrons trans view SQL Query tab In the SOL Que
194. any table data and there is no need for any validation action 1 Inthe Unit Test navigator right click the Tests node and select Create Test The Unit Testing Create Unit Test wizard is displayed Click Next to go from each step to the next and when you are finished specifying the unit test click Finish 2 InSelect Operation select the database connection for the schema that you used to create the AWARD BONUS procedure then expand the Procedures node and select AWARD BONUS 3 InSpecify Test Name for Test Name specify AWARD BONUS NO COMM EXC and select Create with single dummy representation 4 InSpecify Startup click Next to go to the next page 5 InSpecify Parameters change the values in the Input column to the following EMP ID 1004 SALES AMT 5000 For Expected Result change the value to Exception and leave the expected error number as ANY 6 InSpecify Validations click Next to go to the next page 7 InSpecify Teardown click Next to go to the next page 8 In Summary review the information If you need to change anything click Back as needed and make the changes then proceed to this Summary page When you are ready to complete the unit test definition click Finish To run this unit test follow the steps in Section 3 12 5 except specify AWARD BONUS NO COMM EXC instead of AWARD BONUS On the Results tab you will see that the AWARD BONUS NO COMM EXC test ran successfully and if you check the EMPLOYE
195. approach 2 2 11 1 2 Big Bang Approach Using the Big Bang approach you migrate all of the users at the same time This approach may cause schedule outages during the time you are removing the old system migrating the data deploying the Oracle system and testing that the system is operating correctly This approach relies on you testing the database on the same scale as the original database It has the advantage of minimal data conversion and synchronization with the original database because that database is switched off The disadvantage is that this approach can be labor intensive and disruptive to business activities due to the switch over period needed to install the Oracle database and perform the other migration project tasks 2 2 11 1 3 Parallel Approach Using the Parallel approach you maintain both the source database and destination Oracle database simultaneously To ensure that the application behaves the same way in the production environment for the source database and destination database you enter data in both databases and analyze the data results The advantage of this approach is if problems occur in the destination database users can continue using the source database The disadvantage of the Parallel approach is that running and maintaining both the source and the destination database may require more resources and hardware than other approaches 2 2 11 2 Deploying the Destination Database There are several ways to deploy
196. ase schema in which to create the PL SQL package Name Name of the package Must be unique within a schema Add New Source in Lowercase If this option is checked new text is entered in lowercase regardless of the case in which you type it This option affects only the appearance of the code because PL SQL is not case sensitive in its execution The package is created and is displayed in the Editor window where you can enter the details 5 46 Create PL SQL Subprogram Function or Procedure Use this dialog box to create a PL SQL subprogram function or procedure A function returns a value a procedure does not return a value Specify the information for the package and for each parameter then click OK to create the subprogram and have it displayed in the Editor window where you can enter the details Schema Database schema in which to create the PL SQL subprogram Name Name of the subprogram Must be unique within a schema Add New Source in Lowercase If this option is checked new text is entered in lowercase regardless of the case in which you type it This option affects only the appearance of the code because PL SQL is not case sensitive in its execution Parameters tab For each parameter in the procedure to be created specify the following information Name Name of the parameter Type Data type of the parameter Mode IN for input only OUT for output only or IN OUT for input and output that is the output is st
197. ata Mining DBMS Output Displays the output of DBMS_OUTPUT package statements see Section 1 7 5 DBMS Output Pane Files Displays the Files navigator which is marked by a folder icon You can use the Files navigator to browse open edit and save files that are accessible from the local system Find DB Object Displays the Find Database Object pane see Section 1 9 Finding Database Objects Map View Displays the Map View pane see Section 1 14 2 Map Visualization of Spatial Data Migration Projects Lets you display any captured models and converted models see Section 2 3 SOL Developer User Interface for Migration OWA Output Displays Oracle Web Agent MOD PLSQL output see Section 1 7 6 OWA Output Pane Recent Objects Displays a pane with names of recently opened objects You can click a name in the list to go to its editing window Reports Displays the Reports navigator see Section 1 17 SOL Developer Reports SOL History Displays information about SOL statements that you have executed You can select statements and append them to or overwrite statements on the worksheet see Section 1 7 7 SOL History Snippets Displays snippets see Section 1 8 Using Snippets to Insert Code Fragments Task Progress Displays the Task Progress pane Unit Test Displays the Unit Test navigator see Chapter 3 SOL Developer Unit Testing Show Status Bar Controls the display of the status bar a
198. atabase that you selected is exported to an XML file The exporter tool currently does not support creating XML files from secured or replica databases 2 16 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines 2 2 4 4 Before Migrating From MySQL To configure a MySQL database for migration install MySQLConnector J release 3 1 12 or 5 0 4 on the system where you have installed SOL Developer and set the appropriate SOL Developer preference Follow these steps 1 Ensure that you can connect to the MySQL database from the system where you have installed SOL Developer Ensure that you have downloaded the MySQLConnector J API from the MySQL website at http www mysql com In SOL Developer if you have not already installed the MySOL JDBC driver using Check for Updates on the Help menu do the following a Click Tools then Preferences then Database then Third Party JDBC Drivers b Click Add Entry c Select the jar file for the MySQL driver you downloaded from http www mysql com d Click OK Ensure that the source database is accessible by the MySQL user that is used by SOL Developer for the source connection This user must be able to see any objects to be captured in the MySQL database objects that the user cannot see are not captured For example if the user can execute a stored procedure but does not have sufficient privileges to see the source code the stored procedure cannot be
199. atabases Convert The Convert page of the wizard lets you examine and modify for each data type in the course database the Oracle Database data type to which columns of that source type will be converted in the migrated database For each source data type entry the possible Oracle Data Type values reflect the valid possible mappings which might be only one Add New Rule Lets you specify mappings for other source data types Edit Rule Lets you modify the mapping for the selected source data type Advanced Options Displays the Migration Identifier Options preferences page Target Database The Target Database page of the wizard specifies the Oracle database to which the third party database or databases will be migrated Mode Online causes the migration to be performed by SOL Developer when you have completed the necessary information in the wizard Offline causes SOL Developer to generate scripts after you have completed the necessary information in the wizard and you must later run those scripts to perform the migration Connection The database connection to the Oracle Database user into whose schema the third party database or databases are to be migrated To add a connection to the list click the Add icon to edit the selected connection click the Edit pencil icon Generated Script Directory The directory or folder in which migration script files will be generated derived based on your previous entry for the project O
200. ate implementations using lookup values that is not Create with single dummy representation For Specify Startup and Specify Teardown specify any desired action You cannot specify anything for Specify Parameters or Specify Validations now An implementation with a name in the form Test Implementation n will automatically be created for each possible combination of input parameters of type NUMBER For any validation actions you must specify them later by editing each generated implementation 3 8 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using Variable Substitution in Validation Actions 3 7 Using Variable Substitution in Validation Actions You can use variable substitution in validation actions to write dynamic validations that provide a result based on the values of input and output parameters of a procedure or function or on the return value of a function You can specify strings in the following format in validation actions Forinput parameters PARAMETER NAME For example if an input parameter is named EMP ID SELECT WHERE employee id EMP ID AND For output parameters DARAMETER NAMES For example if an output parameter is named SALARY SELECT WHERE SALARYS lt old salary a For the return value RETURNS For example if a function returns a numeric value SELECT WHERE RETURNSS gt 1 What is actually substituted is the string representation of the parameter val
201. atements Supported and Not Supported in SQL Worksheet The SQL Worksheet supports some SQL Plus statements SOL Plus statements must be interpreted by the SOL Worksheet before being passed to the database any SOL Plus that are not supported by the SOL Worksheet are ignored and not passed to the database The following SOL Plus statements are supported by the SOL Worksheet e ee acc ept autotrace clear screen conn ect def ine desc ribe doc ument echo errors esc ape exec ute exit feed back help ho st pagesize pau se print pro mpt quit rem ark roll back show SHOW ALL and individual options shown in SHOW ALL output set valid SET options corresponding to options in SHOW ALL output spo ol filename ext OFF sta rt term out timi ng undef ine user var iable ver ify whenever SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 35 Using the SQL Worksheet xquery The following SOL Plus statements are not supported by the SOL Worksheet a ppend archive attr ibute bre ak bti tle c hange col umn comp ute copy del disc onnect ed it get i nput l ist newpage oradebug passw ord r un recover repf ooter reph eader sav e startup shu tdown startup store tti tle For information about SQL Plus statements you can enter the help statement For information about a specific statement or topic include it as the parameter for example hel
202. atements in the SOL Worksheet are formatted when you click Format SQL The options include whether to insert space characters or tab characters when you press the Tab key and how many characters uppercase or lowercase for keywords and identifiers whether to preserve or eliminate empty lines and whether comparable items should be placed or the same line if there is room or on separate lines Import Lets you import code style profile settings that you previously exported Export Exports the current code profile settings to an XML file Autoformat PL SOL in Procedures Packages Views and Triggers If this option is checked the SOL Formatter options are applied automatically as you enter and modify PL SQL code in procedures packages views and triggers if this option is not checked the SOL Formatter options are applied only when you so request Panes for product specific formatting options Individual panes let you specify formatting options for Oracle and for other vendors Microsoft Access IBM DB2 Microsoft SOL Server Sybase Adaptive Server In each of these panes you can click Edit to specify input output alignment indentation line breaks CASE line breaks white space and other options Database Third Party JDBC Drivers The Third Party JDBC Drivers pane specifies drivers to be used for connections to third party non Oracle databases such as IBM DB2 MySQL Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server You do not ne
203. ator display SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 43 Create Edit View 5 62 Create Edit View The view dialog box is used for creating or editing a view or materialized view You can use the SOL Query tab or a series of panes to specify the query part of the view definition and you can use one or more other panes depending on the type of view for other parts of the definition For Edit View you cannot change the definition of an existing view but you can define modify or drop view constraints If you click OK before you are finished creating or editing the view right click the view name in the Connections navigator select Edit and continue creating or editing the view Schema Database schema in which to create the view Name Name of the view Must be unique within a schema Advanced If this option is checked the dialog box changes to include a pane that provides an extended set of features for creating the view SQL Query tab or pane As a tab if you did not check the Advanced box it contains the SOL code for the query part of the view definition using the SELECT and FROM keywords and usually a WHERE clause with whatever syntax is needed to retrieve the desired information As a pane if you checked the Advanced box it presents options for building specific parts of the query For example the following query from the Create a View tutorial topic selects columns from the PATRONS and TRANSACTIONS tables
204. available in the RMAN dialog boxes and you can click Apply to cause the RMAN script to be executed in the server using a DBMS_ SCHEDULER job 1 48 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using DBA Features in SQL Developer After an RMAN job has been run you can view the log file containing the output from RMAN by using the Action Jobs View Latest Log action This lets you check for any errors that may have occurred during the running of the RMAN script Some RMAN jobs involve performing a database restart Examples are setting the archive log mode and some whole database backup and restore operations In such cases after you click Apply you are asked to confirm that you want to proceed and if you do proceed the job is queued with no waiting for the completion Because of the restart the SOL Developer connection must be disconnected and then connected again after the database is restarted After the reconnection examine the log file to see whether the job completed successfully 1 11 6 Resource Manager Includes the following options related to database resource management Consumer Group Mappings A consumer group mapping specifies mapping rules that enable the Resource Manager to automatically assign each session to a consumer group upon session startup based upon session attributes The Consumer Group Mappings option displays for each attribute its priority value and associated consumer group Consumer Groups A resource c
205. base Reports The Reports pane specifies options relating to SOL Developer Reports Close all reports on disconnect If this option is checked all reports for any database connection are automatically closed when that connection is disconnected Database SQL Editor Code Templates The SQL Editor Code Templates pane enables you to view add and remove templates for editing SOL and PL SQL code Code templates assist you in writing code more quickly and efficiently by inserting text for commonly used statements You can then modify the inserted text The template ID string is not used by SOL Developer only the template content Description text is used in that it is considered by completion insight explained in Code Editor Completion Insight in determining whether a completion popup should be displayed and what the popup should contain For example if you define code template ID mydate as SELECT sysdate FROM dual then if you start typing select in the SOL Worksheet the auto popup includes SELECT sysdate FROM dual Add Template Adds an empty row in the code template display Enter an ID value then move to the Template cell you can enter template content in that cell or click the pencil icon to open an editing box to enter the template content Remove Template Deletes the selected code template 1 88 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Database SQL Formatter The SQL Formatter pane controls how st
206. base advanced parameters preference 1 86 offline data transfer 2 20 online help using 1 107 Open command on Connections navigator context menu 1 11 open SOL Worksheet automatically preference for database connections 1 94 operating system authentication 5 8 ORA ROWSCN pseudocolumn Use ORA ROWSCN for DataEditor insert and update statements preference 1 87 Oracle Application Express applications 1 11 Oracle By Example OBE lessons 1 111 Oracle Database 12c features generating in migration 1 99 Oracle Database connections 5 7 Oracle Web Agent OWA 1 38 ORDER BY clause 5 47 OS authentication 5 8 OTN page SOL Developer 1 111 overview SOL Developer 1 1 overview display of database objects Open command on context menu 1 11 OWA OUTPUT pane 1 38 P packages creating 5 23 debugging 5 77 running 5 77 parallel data move streams 1 97 parameter insight 1 83 parse exception errors 2 19 partitioned tables partition definitions 5 35 partitioning options 5 34 subpartitioning options templates 5 35 password resetting expired 1 24 pathname forjava exe 1 2 PDB definition 1 16 pinning an object s display 1 5 1 27 1 71 PL SQL hierarchical profiler 1 31 PL SQL packages creating 5 23 PL SQL subprograms creating 5 23 debugging 5 77 breakpoints 5 78 running 5 77 plsql dbms_output user defined report example 1 79 pluggable database PDB definition 1 16 preferences cust
207. be used again Coalesce Merges the contents of index blocks where possible to free blocks for reuse Compute Statistics For a function based index collects statistics on both the index and its base table using the DBMS STATS package Such statistics will enable Oracle Database to correctly decide when to use the index Rebuild Index Partition Rebuilds a specified index partition Drop Index Partition Drops deletes a specified index partition a Quick DDL Saves the DDL statement to create the index to a file a SOL Worksheet or the system clipboard 1 3 13 Java Sources 1 3 14 Jobs Java sources can be created and managed in the database You can create a Java source object by right clicking the Java node in the Connections navigator selecting Load Java and specifying the Java source name and either entering the source code or loading a Java source class or resource from a file BFILE A CREATE OR REPLACE AND RESOLVE JAVA SOURCE statement is executed using the information you specify For information about Java concepts and stored procedures see Oracle Database Java Developer s Guide A job is an Oracle Scheduler object that is a collection of metadata that describes a user defined task It defines what needs to be executed the action when the one time or recurring schedule or a triggering event where the destinations and with what credentials A job has an owner which is the schema in which it is cr
208. bject up or down in the selected list select it in Selected and use the arrow buttons For the example in DDL tab or pane select the DEPTNO and SAL columns from the EMP table FROM Clause pane Specifies the tables and views that you can use in the FROM clause of the view definition Type Filter Filter Types Indicates whether or not you have limited the types of database objects to be displayed in the Available List by clicking the Filter Types and selecting any combination of Materialized Views Tables and Views Naming Filter Substring for limiting object names to appear as available For example to display only objects with names that start with EM specify EM with the percent sign as a wildcard character Auto Query If this option is enabled the display of available objects is automatically refreshed when you specify or change the Type Filter or Name Filter value Query Refreshes the display of available objects based on the Type Filter and Name Filter values Available Lists the tables and views that are available to be selected for use in the FROM clause of the view definition Selected Lists the tables and views that you can use in the FROM clause of the view definition To add an object as selected select it in Available and click the Add gt icon to remove an object as selected select it in Selected and click the Remove icon To move all objects from available to selected use the Add All lt
209. ble tablename FOR UPDATE p n P cur rec cur ROWTYPE BEGIN OPEN cur FETCH cur INTO cur rec WHILE cur FOUND LOOP RETRIVE THE clobLoc and blobLoc clobLoc cur rec clob column blobLoc cur rec blob column currentPlace 1 reset evertime find the lenght of the clob inputLength DBMS LOB getLength clobLoc loop through each peice LOOP get the next piece and add it to the clob piece DBMS_LOB subStr clobLoc pieceMaxSize currentPlace append this piece to the BLOB DBMS LOB WRITEAPPEND blobLoc LENGTH piece 2 HEXTORAW piece currentPlace currentPlace pieceMaxSize EXIT WHEN inputLength lt currentplace END LOOP FETCH cur INTO cur_rec END LOOP END CLOBtoBLOB now run the procedure 2 24 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines It will update the blob column with the correct binary representation of the clob column EXEC CLOBtoBLOB drop the extra clob cloumn alter table tablename drop column blob column clob 2 apply the constraint we removed during the data load alter table tablename MODIFY FILEBINARY NOT NULL Now re enable the triggers indexes and primary keys alter trigger triggername enable ALTER TABLE tablename ADD CONSTRAINT pkname PRIMARY KEY column CREATE INDEX index name ON tablename
210. bled merged XML files will be validated Comparing Source Files You can compare source files in the following ways A file currently being edited with its saved version Place the focus on the current version open in the editor from the main menu select File then Compare With then File on Disk a One file with another file Place the focus on the file in the editor to be compared from the main menu select File then Compare With then Other File In the Select File to Compare With dialog navigate to the file and click Open 1 18 5 Database The Database pane sets properties for the database connection Validate date and time default values If this option is checked date and time validation is used when you open tables SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 85 SQL Developer Preferences Default path to store export in Default path of the directory or folder under which to store output files when you perform an export operation To see the current default for your system click the Browse button next to this field Filename for connection startup script File name for the startup script to run when an Oracle database connection is opened You can click Browse to specify the location The default location is the default path for scripts see the Database Worksheet preferences pane Database Advanced The Advanced pane specifies options such as the SOL array fetch size and display options for null values You can a
211. blespace are of this size Locally managed temporary tablespaces can only use this type of allocation Initial Extent Size of the first extent of the tablespace Specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit associated with the number Next Extent Size of the next extent to be allocated to the tablespace Specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit associated with the number Min Extents Minimum number of extents allocated when the tablespace is created Max Extents Maximum number of extents allocated when the tablespace is created Unlimited if checked means that there is no maximum and any specified maximum is ignored Pct Increase Percentage that each extent grows over the previous extent Block Size You can specify a nonstandard block size for the tablespace The integer you specify in this clause must correspond with the setting of one DB K CACHE SIZE parameter setting Online Status Online makes the tablespace available immediately after creation to users who have been granted access to the tablespace or Offline make the tablespace unavailable immediately after creation 5 38 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Tablespace Default Logging Logging causes the creation of a database object as well as subsequent inserts into the object to be logged in the redo log file No Logging causes these operations not to be logged in the redo log file or File System Logging valid only for logg
212. brary node in the Unit Test navigator which is explained in Section 3 2 You can store the following kinds of actions in the library in the following categories Dynamic value queries Startup actions leardown actions Validation actions Most categories have subcategories For example the Startup Actions node has subnodes for Table or Row Copy and User PL SQL Code You can add an entry to the library in the following ways Expand the Library hierarchy to display the relevant lowest level node such as User PL SQL Code under Startups right click and select Add action typel specify a name for the action click the name of the newly created action and complete the specification Use the Publish to Library option when specifying the action when you are creating a unit test enter a name for the action and click Publish The action will be added under the appropriate category and subcategory in the Library display in the Unit Test navigator To use an action from the library when you are creating a unit test select it from the list under Library on the appropriate page in the Unit Testing Create Unit Test wizard or when you are editing a unit test When you select an action from the library you have the following options for incorporating it into the process startup teardown or validation Copy Uses a copy of the action which you can then edit for example to modify the WHERE clause in a User PL SQL Code p
213. buffer are displayed in that tab To stop displaying output for that connection close the tab a Clear Erases the contents of the pane Save Saves the contents of the pane to a file that you specify a Print Prints the contents of the pane 1 7 7 SQL History You can click View then History or press F8 in the SOL Worksheet to view a dockable window with SQL statements and scripts that you have executed and optionally select one or more statements to have them either replace the statements currently on the SOL Worksheet or be added to the statements currently on the SOL Worksheet You can click on a column heading to sort the rows by the values in that column The SQL history list will not contain any statement that can include a password Such statements include but are not necessarily limited to CONNECT ALTER USER and CREATE DATABASE LINK You can control the maximum number of statements in the history by setting the SOL History Limit preference see Database Worksheet preferences Append Appends the selected statement or statements to any statements currently on the SOL Worksheet You can also append the selected statement or statements by dragging them from the SOL History window and dropping them at the desired location on the SOL Worksheet 1 38 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using the SQL Worksheet Replace Replaces any statements currently on the SOL Worksheet with the selected statement or statement
214. bug mode and displays the Debugging Log tab which includes the debugging toolbar for controlling the execution Make Compile for Debug performs a PL SQL compilation of the subprogram so that it can be debugged Make Compile performs a PL SQL compilation of the subprogram Profile displays the Run Debug Profile PL SQL dialog box The Debugging Log tab under the code text area contains the debugging toolbar and informational messages The debugging toolbar has the icons shown in the following figure amp 8 EE as SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 29 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures Find Execution Point goes to the execution point the next line of source code to be executed by the debugger Step Over bypasses the next subprogram unless the subprogram has a breakpoint and goes to the next statement after the subprogram If the execution point is located on a subprogram call it runs that subprogram without stopping instead of stepping into it then positions the execution point on the statement that follows the call If the execution point is located on the last statement of a subprogram Step Over returns from the subprogram placing the execution point on the line of code that follows the call to the subprogram from which you are returning Step Into executes a single program statement at a time If the execution point is located on a call to a subprogram Step Into steps into that sub
215. calculated by an award bonus procedure to be created during this example Assume that the following data exists in these columns in the EMPLOYEES table EMPLOYEE ID COMMISSION PCT SALARY 1001 0 2 8400 1002 0 25 6000 1003 0 3 5000 1004 null 10000 You create a procedure named AWARD BONUS which has two input parameters The 1 oN O Oo FF Y DN emp_id The employee ID of an employee sales_amt The amount of sales with which the employee is credited for the period in question This amount is calculated using the COMMISSION_PCT value for the specified employee and the result is added to the SALARY value for that employee If the COMMISSION_PCT is null for the employee no commission or bonus can be calculated and an exception is raised This scenario occurs if an attempt is made to add a commission based bonus to the salary of an employee who is not in the Sales department rest of this example involves the following major steps Create the EMPLOYEES Table Create the AWARD_BONUS Procedure Create the Unit Testing Repository Create a Unit Test Run the Unit Test Create and Run an Exception Unit Test Create a Unit Test Suite Run the Unit Test Suite SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 13 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial 3 12 1 Create the EMPLOYEES Table This tutorial uses a table named EMPLOYEES which must exist before you run any unit tests of the AWARD BONUS procedure
216. can add it to one of the Oracle supplied snippet categories such as Aggregate Functions or to a category that you create If you add a snippet to an Oracle supplied category and if your snippet has the same name as an existing snippet your snippet definition replaces the existing one If you later upgrade to a new version of SOL Developer and if you choose to preserve your old settings your old user defined snippets will replace any Oracle supplied snippets of the same name in the new version of SOL Developer To create a snippet do any of the following Open the Snippets window and click the Add User Snippets icon Select text for the snippet in the SOL Worksheet window right click and select Save Snippet a Click the Add User Snippet icon in the Edit Snippets User Defined dialog box To edit an existing user defined snippet click the Edit User Snippets icon in the Snippets window Information about user defined snippets is stored in a file named UserSnippets xml under the directory for user specific information For information about the location of this information see Section 1 19 Location of User Related Information SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 41 Finding Database Objects 1 9 Finding Database Objects You can find various types of objects tables columns declarations within functions or procedures and so on associated with an Oracle database connection and open editing panes to work with those obj
217. can specify that certain operations be performed automatically at specified times with the trade off usually being the extra time for the operation as opposed to the possibility of problems if the operation is not performed automatically for example if you forget to perform it when you should The undo level number of previous operations that can be undone and navigation level number of open files values involve slight increases or decreases system resource usage for higher or lower values Automatically Reload Externally Modified Files If this option is checked any files open in SOL Developer that have been modified by an external application are updated when you switch back to SOL Developer overwriting any changes that you might have made If this option is not checked changes that you make in SOL Developer overwrite any changes that might have been made by external applications Silently Reload When File Is Unmodified If this option is checked you are not asked if you want to reload files that have been modified externally but not in SOL Developer If this option is not checked you are asked if you want to reload each file that has been modified externally regardless of whether it has been modified in SOL Developer 1 80 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Environment Dockable Windows The Dockable Windows pane configures the behavior of dockable windows and the shapes of the four docking areas o
218. ce if you are not already connected connect to the database as the user for the schema you are using for this tutorial Right click the Sequences node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New Sequence and enter information using the Create Sequence dialog box Schema Specify your current schema as the schema in which to create the sequence Name patron id seq Increment 1 Start with 100 Min value 100 Click OK to finish creating the sequence 4 6 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Insert Data into the Tables To insert sample data into the tables go to Section 4 5 Insert Data into the Tables 4 5 Insert Data into the Tables For your convenience in using the view and the PL SQL procedure that you will create add some sample data to the BOOKS PATRONS and TRANSACTIONS tables If you do not add sample data you can still create the remaining objects in this tutorial but the view and the procedure will not return any results Go to the SOL Worksheet window associated with the database connection you have been using For information about using the SOL Worksheet see Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet Copy and paste the following INSERT statements into the Enter SOL Statement box INSERT INTO books VALUES A1111 Moby Dick Melville Herman 10 INSERT INTO books VALUES A2222 Get Rich Really Fast Scammer Ima 1 INSER
219. ce instance Can be any name that you choose Database Username Name of the database user to use for this connection You cannot specify the password here When you attempt to connect to the Cloud connection an Authentication dialog box is displayed prompting you for the user name and password URL URL for the Cloud Database Service home page Application Express Also known as the Service Home May be in the following form https database identity group db data center host name server path Advanced Displays the Advanced Connection Information dialog box SFTP Username Secure FTP user name that you received in email when you signed up for the Cloud service You cannot specify the password here You will be prompted for the password when necessary Hostname Secure FIP host system Port Secure FTP port number 5 22 1 Advanced Connection Information This dialog box is displayed if you click Advanced in the New Edit Cloud Connection dialog box HTTP or HTTPS Select the desired protocol HTTPS provides secure communication Hostname lt host name gt part of the URL in the New Edit Cloud Connection dialog box Port Port number if any Server Path lt server path gt part of the URL in the New Edit Cloud Connection dialog box For example apex Service Name Service name For example sqldev 5 23 Rename Model Migration This dialog box is displayed when you right click a cap
220. ced you must edit the table and set the status of the constraint to Enabled see the appropriate tabs for the Create Edit Table with advanced options dialog box Foreign Key Constraints For each foreign key constraint lists information that includes the owner the table name the constraint name the column that the constraint is against the table that the constraint references and the constraint in the table that is referenced Primary Key Constraints For primary key constraint lists information that includes the owner the table name the constraint name the constraint status enabled or disabled and the column name Unique Constraints For each unique constraint lists information that includes the owner the table name the constraint name the constraint status enabled or disabled and the column name Indexes Includes information about all indexes indexes by status indexes by type and unused indexes Organization Specialized reports list information about partitioned tables clustered tables and index organized tables Quality Assurance See Quality Assurance reports 1 76 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Reports Statistics For each table lists statistical information including when it was last analyzed the total number of rows the average row length and the table type In addition specialized reports order the results by most rows and largest average row length Storage
221. cess Oracle SOL Developer features support keyboard access to SOL Developer functionality a summary is provided in this section The following menu and toolbar functionality is provided through keyboard access Users can navigate to and invoke all menu items All toolbar functions are accessible through menu items All menus and menu items have unique and functioning mnemonic keys a All context menus within the navigators and source editor can be invoked Frequently used menu items have unique accelerator keys The following functionality is available in SOL Developer windows Navigate between all open windows to all nodes within a window or pane and between tabs in a window Set focus in a window or pane Invoke all controls within a window or pane and perform basic operations Navigate and update properties in the Property Inspector Use Completion Insight and Code Templates in the source editor Invoke context sensitive help topics navigate to and open all help topics and navigate between the navigation and viewer tabs Open close dock undock minimize restore and maximize the applicable SOL Developer window Tips You can press Escape to move the focus from the current dockable window to the last active editor Press Shift Escape to move the focus and also close the current window a You can press Shift F10 to open the context menu for any window Use the Down Arrow and Up arrow keys
222. ch the MySQL server will listen 5 10 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Select Database Connection Choose Database Name of the MySQL database Zero Date Handling Because the MySQL JDBC driver cannot handle the default 0000 00 00 date specify one of the following options for handling this date Set to NULL to set it to a null value or Round to 0001 01 01 to set it to 0001 01 01 SQL Server and Sybase tabs The following information applies to a connection to a Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database Note that to connect to a Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database you must first download the appropriate connection driver and then click Tools then Preferences and use the SOL Developer user preference pane for Database Third Party JDBC Drivers to add the driver Host Name Host system for the Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database Port TCP IP Port on which Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server will listen Retrieve Database Name of the Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database Teradata tab The following information applies to a connection to a Teradata database Note that to connect to a Teradata database you must first download the tdgssconfig jar and a terajdbc4 jar files and then click Tools then Preferences and use the SOL Developer user preference pane for Database Third Party JDBC Drivers to add these files See also the
223. change the pane sizes for example to make the Contents pane narrower to allow more room for the help topic content You can also resize and reposition the Help Center window For Search you can click the icon binoculars to see search options case sensitive Match case or case insensitive and whether to match topics based on all specified words any specified words or a Boolean expression The Keep on Top button toggles whether the Help Center window is kept on top of the display when you switch focus click back in the SOL Developer window To print a help topic display it in the topic display pane and click the Print icon at the top of the pane To increase or decrease the size of the font in the help topic viewer click the Change Font Size A icon in the Help Center topic display area toolbar then select Increase Font Size of Decrease Font Size This setting is preserved only for the duration of the current help pane or window therefore you may want to keep the Help Center window open after setting the help text font to your preferred size 1 23 Tip of the Day For English locales you can display a random suggestion for effective use of SOL Developer by clicking Help then Tip of the Day The tip window is also displayed automatically when you start SOL Developer unless you disable the Show tips at startup option in the tip window For convenience this section lists the available tip topics There is no special order or
224. cheduling jobs in SOL Developer 1 51 schema XML 1 22 5 49 schema differences differences between two database schemas 5 54 schema documentation generating 1 24 schema objects 1 11 schema statistics gathering 1 24 scratch editor 2 33 script runner 1 36 scripts running 1 36 search for database objects 1 42 security Advanced Security for JDBC connection 1 25 SELECT clause 5 46 sequences 1 18 creating and editing 5 26 for populating table columns 5 32 sessions monitoring 1 9 shared reports 1 72 shared repository 3 4 shortcut keys 1 100 for menus 1 4 restoring to default scheme 1 101 shrinking a table 1 20 single record view 5 82 size of help text increasing or decreasing 1 107 snippets 1 41 user defined 1 41 source database capturing 2 18 source schema database schema differences 5 54 spaces in object names quotation marks required 5 1 Spatial support Maintain Spatial Metadata dialog box 5 72 Validate Geometry dialog box 5 96 special characters in object names quotation marks required 5 1 split data pane for a table or view 1 28 SOL monitoring execution 1 9 SOL Developer preferences 1 80 SOL file creating 5 26 SOL formatting command line interface 1 39 Index 6 SOL scripts running 1 36 SQL Server configuring 2 14 creating data files 2 21 third party JDBC drivers 1 89 SQL Server connections 5 11 SQL Trace files tre 1 31 SOL Worksheet closing a
225. cialized types of views such as materialized views described in Section 1 3 16 Materialized Views to meet a variety of enterprise needs For help with specific options in creating and editing a view see Create Edit View Editioning views are shown in a separate navigator node if the connection is to an Oracle Database release that supports Editions An editioning view selects a subset of the columns from a single base table and optionally provides aliases for them In providing aliases the editioning view maps physical column names used by the base table to logical column names used by the application For more information about editioning views see the chapter about edition based redefinition in Oracle Database Development Guide You can perform the following operations on a view by right clicking the view name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Edit Displays the Create Edit View dialog box Drop Deletes the view SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 21 Database Objects a Compile Recompiles the view to enable you to locate possible errors before runtime You may want to recompile a view after altering one of its base tables to ensure that the change does not affect the view or other objects that depend on it 1 3 34 XML DB Repository Oracle XML DB Repository is a component of Oracle Database that is optimized for handling XML data The Oracle XML DB repository contains resources
226. cify the table For example you might want to copy the EMPLOYEES table to a table named EMPLOYEES ORIGINAL User PL SOL Code Run a script You will be asked to specify the script file Specify Parameters If you are creating a single test case specify the parameter values in the Input column for each input parameter For example for the example award bonus procedure you might test the case where employee ID 1001 sold 5000 dollars work of goods or services EMP ID Input 1001 SALES AMT Input 5000 If you are creating multiple test cases specify the information for each parameter for each test case For example to create a test with 5 test cases for the example award bonus procedure you need to enter 10 rows on this page 2 input parameters times 5 test cases Specify Validations Specify one or more validation actions to perform after the test case is run to check whether the desired result was returned For example if a test case for a procedure was supposed to increase the salary for employee number 1001 to 2000 specify a Query returning row s validation of SELECT salary FROM employees WHERE employee id 1001 AND salary 2000 For all validation action options except None you will be prompted to specify the required information To add a validation action for a test case click the Add icon to delete a validation action for a test case select it and click the Remove X icon None Perform no validatio
227. click File then Replace With then File on Disk a To replace the file on disk with the contents of the Worksheet click File then Save SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 67 Find Replace Text 5 102 Find Replace Text This dialog box specifies a text string to find optionally a replacement text string and search options Text to Search For Text string to search for Replace With If you check this option enter a text string to replace the text string that is being searched for Options Options to control the search behavior Match Case makes the search case sensitive Search from Beginning starts the search at the beginning instead of at the text cursor Highlight All Occurrences highlights all occurrences of the search string instead of just the first one Wrap Around searches across line breaks Whole Word Only find the search string only if it is a complete word and not just part of a word Regular Expressions means that the search string is a regular expression Selected Text Only means to search only in the text block that you have selected Direction Forward starts the search from the cursor in the direction of normal text flow Backward starts the search from the cursor in the opposite direction of normal text flow 5 103 Find Result This box is displayed if you specify text to search for in the Find Replace Text dialog box that is not in the SOL Worksheet If you think that the text is in the worksheet re
228. clude an extended set of features for creating the table For example you must check this option if you want to create a partitioned table an index organized table or an external table Schema Database schema in which to create the table Name Name of the table Must be unique within a schema Table tab quick creation Specifies properties for each column in the table Columns Lists the columns currently in the table Note To add a column after the currently selected column click Add Column to delete a column select it and click Remove Column Column Name Name of the column Must be unique within the table Suggestion For a new column replace any default name such as COLUMNI Type Data type for the column The drop down list includes only selected frequently used data types To specify any other type for the column you must use the Columns panel of the Create Edit Table with advanced options dialog box Size For VARCHAR data the maximum size of the column data for NUMBER data the maximum number of digits SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 27 Create Edit Table with advanced options Not Null If this option is checked the column must contain data you cannot specify no value or an explicit null value for this column when you insert a row If this option is not checked the column can contain either data or no data Primary Key If this option is checked the column is the primary key
229. cludes the Change Management window and the Change Management Parameters user preferences To display the Change Management window click View then Change Management The Change Management window is displayed within the SOL Developer main window Change Management El ta BE Connection B cp admin x Change Plan sysmanyColumnTesting JaP 2 c Change Items Action Type Mame Schema SalDev C Modify TABLE BONUS SCOTT database Modify TABLE EMP SCOTT database Modify TABLE SALGRADE SCOTT database At the top of the Change Management window are icons for the following operations Disconnect disconnects the selected Change Plan connection PreScriptlets you enter a script with statements to be executed before the selected change plan is deployed a Post Script lets you enter a script with statements to be executed after the selected change plan is deployed Connection Database connection for the Change Management repository Change Plan A change plan within the selected repository To the right of the Change Plan are icons for the following operations Add Plan to create a new change plan to the repository Remove Plan X to delete the selected plan from the repository and Refresh to refresh the window with the current contents of the repository Change Items A list of change items for the selected change plan with the following information about each item Action Database Object Type Object Name
230. copy data from the source database to the destination database During this process you must a Use SQL Developer to generate the data unload scripts for the source database and corresponding data load scripts for the destination database Run the data unload scripts to create data files from the source database using the appropriate procedure for your source database Creating Data Files From Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server Creating Data Files From Microsoft Access Creating Data Files From MySQL For IBM DB2 see the chapter about offline data loading in Oracle SQL Developer Supplementary Information for IBM DB2 Migrations For Teradata perform the offline data move using BTEQ and SQL Loader a Run the data load scripts using SQL Loader to populate the destination database with the data from these data files as described in Section 2 2 8 1 4 2 20 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines 2 2 8 1 1 Creating Data Files From Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server To create data files from a Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database 1 Copy the contents of the directory where SOL Developer generated the data unload scripts onto the computer where the source database is installed 2 Editthe BCP extract script to include the name of the source database server a On Windows edit the unload script bat script to alter the bcp lines to includ
231. ct False for no gradient effect Chart Style Thematic name for the overall appearance of the chart Show Grid True to show the grid lines False to hide the grid lines Show Legend True to show the chart legend False to hide the chart legend Gauge Details tab Available if the report type is Gauge Gauge Type Dial like a fuel gauge in an automobile or Status meter bar representation Query Based True if the minimum maximum low and high values are specified in the SOL query False to specify the minimum maximum low and high values in the remaining fields Min Minimum value displayed on the gauge Max Maximum value displayed on the gauge Low Low value usually greater than Min and less than High High High value usually greater than Low and less than Max 5 61 Create Edit User Defined Report Folder The following information applies to a folder for organizing user defined reports Each folder can contain reports and other folders subfolders For example you can create a folder named Sales and then under that folder create folders named Sales by District and Sales by Product For information about how to create user defined reports and folders for these reports see Section 1 17 15 User Defined reports Name Name of the folder Description Optional description of the folder ToolTip Optional tooltip text to be displayed when the mouse pointer stays briefly over the folder name in the Reports navig
232. ction 2 24 5 Before Migrating From Teradata 2 2 4 1 Before Migrating From IBM DB2 To configure an IBM DB2 database for migration 1 Ensure that the source database is accessible by the IBM DB2 database user that is used by SQL Developer for the source connection This user must be able to see any objects to be captured in the IBM DB2 database objects that the user cannot see are not captured For example if the user can execute a stored procedure but does not have sufficient privileges to see the source code the stored procedure cannot be captured 2 Ensure that you can connect to the IBM DB2 database from the system where you have installed SQL Developer 3 Ensure that you have downloaded the db2jcc jar and db2jcc_license_ cu jar files from IBM 4 In SQL Developer do the following a Click Tools then Preferences then Database then Third Party JDBC Drivers b Click Add Entry Select the db2jcc Jar file Click OK o A e Repeat steps b through d for the db2jcc license cu jar file 2 2 4 2 Before Migrating From Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server To configure a Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database for migration 1 Ensure that the source database is accessible by the Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server user that is used by SOL Developer for the source connection This user must be able to see any objects to be captured in the Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Ser
233. d started you can follow these steps instead after you create the proxy user and grant it appropriate privileges 1 Create a new database connection For example connection name proxy conn user name proxy user scott password password for proxy user 2 For Connection Type specify TNS Note Do not enable Proxy Connection 3 For Network Alias select the network alias for the database for the connection 4 Complete any other necessary connection information and click Connect to create the connection 1 5 Entering and Modifying Data You can use SQL Developer to enter data into Tables and to edit and delete existing table data To do any of these operations select the table in the Connections navigator then click the Data tab in the table detail display If you click one of the other tabs 1 26 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Entering and Modifying Data Columns Constraints Grants Statistics Triggers and so on you can view the information and perform relevant context menu right click operations The following figure shows the Data pane for a table named BOOKS with a filter applied to show only books whose rating is 10 and after the user has double clicked in the Title cell for the first book EBooks x Columns Data Constraints Grants Statistics Triggers Flashback Dependencies Details Partitions Indexes 5QL Q KMD A s Fiter rating 10 vv Actions
234. d to filter the data rows from a table or view Connection Connection from which the object was selected 1 54 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Spatial Support in SQL Developer Arrow buttons Let you move objects up or down in the order of Selected Objects This affects the order in which objects are created in the generated scripts Before Script Optionally specify a sql script to be executed first in the generated master deployment script before the other generated scripts After Script Optionally specify a sql script to be executed last in the generated master deployment script after the other generated scripts The default location for Before Script and After Script is the Open Script Directory preference under the Database Utilities Cart user preferences 1 13 1 Cart Versus Database Export Wizard The Cart and the Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data wizard enable you to perform the same basic operations A suggested guideline for choosing which one to use is repeatability of the deployment export operation If you want to be able to repeat the operation with or without slight modifications the Cart provides a convenient way to save a cart and to deploy it and then run the scripts in multiple destinations schemas in the same database or another database You can also open a saved cart modify it as needed save it to a different cart name and deploy that cart If you will not need to rep
235. d Data Type aeree rete trece eiii aia 5 92 5 198 Unit Testing Add Item to Library sees eee eee enn nnns 5 92 5 199 Unit Testing Add Test Implementation sse eee enne 5 93 5 200 Unit Testing Add Test Suite e tdt ie ere e eee ee oed Leben ig 5 93 5 201 Unit Testing Add Tests or Suites to a Suite sess eee eee 5 93 5 202 Unit Testing Copy or Rename Unit Test esse eee en 5 93 5 203 Unit Testing Create Unit Test iie eere ren be ree pe bee er oes 5 93 5 204 Unit Testing Manage USES orisii anaana eiee a a aea ae apaia iaa a iori 5 95 5 205 Unit Testing Rename Test Implementation sese eee nnne 5 95 5 206 Unit Testing Result of Operati0N ccccconnnninncnnnnnnnnninnononnnnancnnoroninnincn nono rnn nino nennen 5 95 5 207 Unit Testing Synchronize Unit Testes rsisi roiske enne 5 96 5 208 Unsupported Database Version sese ee eene nennen nennen 5 96 5 209 Validate G omltty i e oh pte ia ata 5 96 5 210 View Whole Value viii netu etel i dias 5 97 5 231 M TndOWSszc gie cete eR oie ee cates ated eee teet a t E e EL e E Ee PR ERE 5 97 5 212 XMLType Column Properties sse nennen nennen nennen 5 97 6 SQL Developer Accessibility Information 6 1 About Oracle SOL Developer Accessibility sese en 6 1 6 2 Using a Screen Reader and Java Access Bridge with Oracle SOL Developer 6 1 xiii xiv 6 3 6 3 1 6 3 2 6 3 3
236. d of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS APPENDIX How to apply the Apache License to your work To apply the Apache License to your work attach the following boilerplate notice with the fields enclosed by brackets replaced with your own identifying information Don t include the brackets The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third party archives Copyright yyyy name of copyright owner Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License you may not use this file except in compliance XXV xxvi with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at Link3 Unles
237. d script sh script The following shows a line from a sample unload_script bat script mysqldump h localhost u USERNAME p PASSWORD T DESTINATION PATH fields terminated by lt EOFD gt fields escaped by lines terminated by lt EORD gt CarrierDb CarrierPlanTb Edit this line to include the correct values for USERNAME PASSWORD and DESTINATION PATH Do not include the angle brackets in the edited version of this file In this command line localhost indicates a loopback connection which is required by the T option See the mysqldump documentation for more information SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 21 Migration Background Information and Guidelines 3 Runthe script a On Windows enter prompt unload script bat a On Linux or UNIX enter prompt gt chmod 755 unload_script sh prompt gt sh unload_script sh This script creates the data files in the current directory 4 Copy the data files and scripts if necessary to the target Oracle database system or to a system that has access to the target Oracle database and has SQL Loader Oracle Client installed 2 2 8 1 4 Populating the Destination Database Using the Data Files To populate the destination database using the data files you run the data load scripts using SOL Loader 1 Navigate to the directory where you created the data unload scripts 2 Editthe oracle ctl bat Windows systems or oractl ctl sh Linux o
238. database connection are automatically closed when that connection is disconnected Prompt for Save File on Close If this option is checked you are prompted to save changes when you close a SQL Worksheet if it contains any unsaved changes If this option is not checked any unsaved changes are discarded Grid in checker board or zebra pattern If this option is checked two different light colored backgrounds are used for alternating rows of grid displays to provide some visual contrast If this option is not checked all grid rows have a white background Max rows to print in a script Limits the number of rows displayed Max lines in script output Limits the number of lines output SOL History Limit Maximum number of statements that can be stored in the SOL History Must be greater than 0 zero If you enter an invalid value no value is stored in this field Default path to look for scripts The default directory where SOL Developer looks when you run a script using O If you type a path you can specify multiple delimited locations if you click Browse you can select a single location In addition to any path that you specify SOL Developer looks in the location specified by the SOLPATH environment variable Save bind variables to disk on exit If this option is checked bind variables that you enter when running a script are saved on disk for reuse If you do not want bind variable values stored on disk for security or other reaso
239. database file is accessible from the system where you have installed SOL Developer 9 Usethe Oracle Universal Installer to verify that you have the Oracle ODBC driver installed If you need to install the driver it is available on the Oracle Database Server or Database Client CD You can also download the Oracle ODBC driver from the Oracle Technology Network OTN website http www oracle com technetwork developer tools visual studio dow nloads Install the Oracle ODBC driver into an Oracle home directory that contains the Oracle Net Services You can obtain the Oracle Net Services from the Oracle Client or Oracle Database CD You install Oracle Net Services to obtain the Net Configuration Assistant and Net Manager These allow you to create a net configuration in the tnsnames ora file Note For more information about installing the networking products needed to connect to an Oracle database see the installation guide for your Oracle Database release 2 24 3 1 Creating Microsoft Access XML Files To prepare for capturing a Microsoft Access database the Exporter for Microsoft Access tool must be run either automatically or manually as explained in Section 2 2 5 Capturing the Source Database This tool is packaged as a Microsoft Access MDE file and it allows you to export the Microsoft Access MDB file to an XML file Note Do not modify any of the files created by the Exporter tool Each Microsoft Access d
240. database to an Oracle database must take into consideration the users and the type of business that may be affected during the transition period For example you may use the Big Bang approach because you do not have enough systems to run the source database and Oracle database simultaneously Otherwise you may want to use the Phased approach to make sure that the system is operating in the user environment correctly before it is released to the general user population You can use one of the following approaches 2 2 11 1 1 Phased Approach Using the Phased approach you migrate groups of users at different times You may decide to migrate a department or a subset of the complete user base The users that you select should represent a cross section of the complete user base This approach allows you to profile users as you introduce them to the Oracle database You can reconfigure the system so that only selected users are affected by the migration and unscheduled outages only affect a small percentage of the user population This approach may affect the work of the users you migrated However because the number of users is limited support services are not overloaded with issues The Phased approach allows you to debug scalability issues as the number of migrated users increases However using this approach may mean that you must migrate data to and from legacy systems during the migration process The application architecture must support a phased
241. dation Function to determine if the requested procedure in the URL should be allowed for processing Oracle Application Express Listener executes the validation function you specify for each requested procedure or checks the security cache to determine if a procedure is valid or invalid The validation function returns true if the procedure is allowed for processing Otherwise it returns false Validation Function Type Implementation language PL SQL or JavaScript Validation Function For PL SOL the name of the stored function that resides in the database If the validation function you specify does not exist an error message is displayed For JavaScript the code written in JavaScript The advantage of using JavaScript instead of using the PL SQL database function is that there are not any database round trips to execute the validation function Virus Scanning Specify the Internet Content Adaptation Protocol ICAP Server name and Port for virus scanning of your files A message is displayed if a file is infected 1 16 4 4 Cache Files Specify procedure names to allow caching of files To add an entry click the Add Procedure icon and enter the procedure To delete an entry select it and click the Remove Procedure X icon Keep most recently used files If selected files that are most recently used will remain in the cache Specify the maximum number of files to cache When the maximum entries have been reached the older
242. day s date 5 80 Enter Bind Values This dialog box enables you to enter values for each bind variable If the NULL option is checked you cannot enter a value in this dialog box 5 81 Erase from Disk This dialog box asks you to confirm your action if you select certain objects such as one or more files in the Files navigator or the Connections node in the Connections navigator and press the Delete key To perform the deletion click Yes to cancel the deletion click No SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 61 Error Writing to Export File 5 82 Error Writing to Export File This box is displayed if you tried to export table data to a file but the directory or folder path does not exist Click OK to close the box then enter a valid path in the Export dialog box and click Apply 5 83 Export Error This dialog box is displayed when you tried to export some or all objects of one or more types of database objects to a file containing SOL statements but did not include some essential information which might include one or more of the following The database connection For Connection select the database connection from which the objects will be exported The name of the output file Look at the Options tab and be sure that you specified a file a One or more objects or types of objects Look at the Objects tab and be sure that you selected checked at least one object or type of object 5 84 Export Data
243. deactivates the current repository but does not disconnect from the database Microsoft Access Exporter Contains submenu items from which you specify the version of the exporter tool to use to create an XML file to be used for creating the captured model You can also use the exporter tool to export table data Specify the exporter tool version for the version of Access that is on your PC and that was used to create the mdb file Create Database Capture Scripts specifies options for creating script files including an offline capture properties ocp file which you can later load and run Translation Scratch Editor Displays the translation scratch editor which is explained in Section 2 3 5 2 3 2 Other Menus Migration Items The View menu has the following item related to database migration Migration Projects Displays the Migration Projects navigator which includes any captured models and converted models in the currently selected migration repository 2 3 3 Migration Preferences The SOL Developer user preferences window displayed by clicking Tools then Preferences contains a Migration pane with several related subpanes and a Translation pane with a Translation Preferences subpane For information about these preferences click Help in the pane or see Section 1 18 11 Migration 2 3 4 Migration Log Panes Migration Log Contains errors warnings and informational messages relating to migration operations Lo
244. ding rows If you specify any Include or Exclude rows you must put any object names in single quotes Example Filter Type TABLE and Expression not in EMPLOYEES Table Data page See Data under Shared Wizard Pages Options page Lets you specify Data Pump Export options for the job Output Files page Lets you specify one of more output dump files and certain options including whether to delete existing dump files before creating new ones and whether to include the timestamp in dump file names SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 51 Data Pump Import Job Schedule page Lets you specify scheduling options for the Data Pump Export job The options include whether to start the job immediately or later and any repeat options Summary page See Summary under Shared Wizard Pages On the Summary page you can click the PL SQL tab to see the PL SQL procedure that will perform the job For information about the Data Pump PL SQL API see Oracle Database Utilities 5 70 Data Pump Import This wizard is displayed if you expand a connection in the DBA navigator right click Import Jobs and select Data Pump Import Wizard For information about using the DBA navigator see Section 1 11 Using DBA Features in SOL Developer To use the Data Pump Import wizard you must understand the concepts and techniques for Oracle Data Pump as documented in Oracle Database Utilities Type page Connection Database connection
245. ds as its associated table Oracle Database automatically maintains local index partitioning as the underlying table is repartitioned Global Specifies that the partitioning of the index is user defined and is not equipartitioned with the underlying table You can partition a global index by range or by hash In both cases you can specify up to 32 columns as partitioning key columns The partitioning column list must specify a left prefix of the index column list If the index is defined on columns a b and c then for the columns you can specify a b c or a b or a c but you cannot specify b c or c or b a If you omit the partition names then Oracle Database assigns names of the form SYS Pn 5 41 Create Filter This dialog box is displayed when you click New to add a user defined exclusion filter when importing files into a repository Filter Shell filename pattern which can contain both normal characters and meta characters including wildcards See the supplied Selected Filters list for typical patterns For example to exclude files with the extension xyz enter the following XYZ When you click OK the specified filter is added to the Selected Filters list 5 42 Create Edit Job This interface is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler job or editing an existing job For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SQL Developer To create a job SOL Developer internal
246. e NLS preferences pane to change the value for use with all SOL Developer connections current and future or you can use the ALTER SESSION statement in the SOL Worksheet window to change the value for the current connection only Detailed explanations of various DBA options including usage and reference information are available in appropriate manuals in the Oracle Database Documentation Library on the Oracle Technology Network OTN 1 11 1 Multitenant Container Database CDB Available only for Release 12c connections Includes options for managing a Multitenant Container Database CDB and the pluggable databases PDBs within it 1 11 2 Database Configuration Includes the following options related to database configuration management Initialization Parameters For each database initialization parameter displays the name value current value default value description and other information You can modify the values of some parameters Automatic Undo Management Automatic undo management is a mode of the database in which undo data is stored in a dedicated undo tablespace The only undo management that you must perform is the creation of the undo tablespace all other undo management is performed automatically The Automatic Undo Management option displays information about automatic undo management and any recommendations relating to its use You can change the Retention value 1 46 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide
247. e Scheduler hierarchy to display a context menu with commands relevant to that item Typical commands include the following a New object type enables you to create a new object of that type Refresh queries the database for the current details about the selected object for example a connection or just a table Apply Filter restricts the display of objects using a filter that you specify To remove the effects of applying a filter right click the node and select Clear Filter Open displays a pane with relevant information on the right side of the window The pane may be read only or editable Help displays a brief definition or description of objects of that type Drop with an object selected drops deletes the object Create Like with an object selected creates an object of that type using information from the selected object You must specify a name for the newly created object and you can change other properties as needed If you right click the top level Scheduler node you can create an object of a specified type and you can display the Scheduler Design Editor The pane with information about an item opened from the Scheduler hierarchy typically contains icons and other controls for the following Freeze View the pin keeps that object s tab and information in the window when you click another object in the Connections navigator a separate tab and display are created for that other object If you cl
248. e constraint the combination of values must be unique and no column in the constraint definition can have a null value For example if you specify the office_name and city columns for a unique constraint you could not have two Sales offices in Chicago but you could have a Sales office in Chicago and a Sales office in Atlanta Unique Constraints Lists the unique constraints currently defined on the table To add a unique constraint click the Add button to delete a unique constraint select it and click the Remove button Note After you add a unique constraint to add another unique constraint click the Add button Name Name of the unique constraint Must be unique within the database Enabled If this option is checked the unique constraint is enforced Available Columns Lists the columns that are available to be added to the unique constraint definition Selected Columns Lists the columns that are included in the unique constraint definition To add a column to the unique constraint definition select it in Available Columns and click the Add gt icon to remove a column from the unique constraint definition select it in Selected Columns and click the Remove icon To move all columns from 5 30 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Table with advanced options available to selected or the reverse use the Add All gt gt or Remove All lt lt icon To move a column up or down in the
249. e cycle of database system development from design provided by Data Modeler to development to testing This chapter contains the following major sections Section 3 1 Overview of Unit Testing Section 3 2 SQL Developer User Interface for Unit Testing Section 3 3 Unit Test Repository Section 3 4 Editing and Running a Unit Test Section 3 5 Using a Dynamic Value Query to Create a Unit Test Section 3 6 Using Lookups to Simplify Unit Test Creation Section 3 7 Using Variable Substitution in Validation Actions Section 3 8 Unit Test Library Section 3 9 Unit Test Reports Section 3 10 Exporting and Importing Unit Test Objects Section 3 11 Command Line Interface for Unit Testing Section 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial 3 1 Overview of Unit Testing The SQL Developer unit testing framework involves a set of sequential steps for each test case The steps are as follows including the user input for before the step is run and the framework activities for the step while the test is being run 1 Identify the object to be tested User Input Identify the object such as a specific PL SQL procedure or function Framework Activities Select the object for processing 2 Perform any startup processing User Input Enter the PL SQL block or enter NULL for no startup processing SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 1 SQL Developer User Interface for Unit Testing Framework Activities Execute the block 3
250. e enables you to control the columns to appear in the debugger Inspector pane and aspects of how the data is displayed Debugger Smart Data The Smart Data pane enables you to control the columns to appear in the debugger Smart Data pane and aspects of how the data is displayed Debugger Stack The Stack pane enables you to control the columns to appear in the debugger Stack pane and other options Debugger ToolTip The ToolTip pane enables you to control the columns to appear in the debugger ToolTip pane Debugger Watches The Watches pane enables you to control the columns to appear in the debugger Watches pane and aspects of how the data is displayed 1 18 7 Extensions The Extensions pane determines which optional extensions SOL Developer uses when it starts SOL Developer also uses some mandatory extensions which users cannot remove or disable If you change any settings you must exit SOL Developer and restart it for the new settings to take effect For Versioning Support the settings selected or not and configuration options if selected affect whether the Versioning menu is displayed and the items on that menu Extensions Controls the specific optional SOL Developer extensions to use at startup To cause an extension not to be used at the next startup uncheck its entry To completely remove an extension you must go to sqldeveloperlextensions under SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 95 SQL Developer Prefe
251. e event message to learn about the newly arrived file For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SQL Developer 1 3 11 Functions A function is a type of PL SQL subprogram which is a programming object that can be stored and executed in the database server and called from other programming objects or applications Functions return a value procedures do not return a value For help with specific options in creating a PL SQL subprogram see Section 5 46 Create PL SQL Subprogram Function or Procedure You can perform the following operations on a function by right clicking the function name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Edit Displays the function text so that you can view and edit it Run Displays the Run Debug Profile PL SOL dialog box and then executes the function in normal not debug mode Compile Performs a PL SQL compilation of the function Compile for Debug Performs a PL SQL compilation of the procedure with PL SOL library units compiled for debugging Profile for an Oracle Database Release 11 1 or later connection Displays the Run Debug Profile PL SOL dialog box and then executes the function and collects execution statistics Drop Deletes the function Grant Enables you to grant available privileges on the function to selected users a Revoke Enables you to revoke available privileges on the function from
252. e has been added but not yet committed it will revert to unadded status If a file is scheduled for removal in the Pending Changes window it will be added back to the navigator and given its previous status Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be reverted Recursive Select if you want the revert operation to recurse into child objects of those selected 5 187 Subversion Switch Use this dialog box to update the current working copy of the specified file from the specified repository and revision 5 90 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Subversion Update Working Copy From URL Full URL for the repository location associated with the current working copy To URL Full URL for the repository location to use to update the current working Cep HEAD Revision Causes the HEAD revision the latest revision in the repository to be used for the update operation Use Revision Causes the revision specified in the text box to be used for the update operation To see a list of revisions from which you can choose click List Revisions 5 188 Subversion Unlock Resources Use this dialog box to perform a Subversion unlock operation on one or more locked checked out files working copies Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files to be unlocked You can individually select and deselect files Force Unlock Breaks any existing locks and unlocks the files Causes the force
253. e help 1 107 hierarchical profiler PL SOL 1 31 HTML dynamic user defined report 1 79 IBM DB2 before migrating 2 14 IBM DB2 connections 5 10 IDE USER DIR location 1 105 implementation adding for a unit test 5 93 renaming for a unit test 5 95 importing Microsoft Excel data 5 14 reports 1 71 unit test objects 3 11 indexes 5 32 coalescing 1 14 creating or editing 5 17 explanation 1 14 Index 3 making unusable 1 14 rebuilding 1 14 index organized tables properties 5 35 introduction SOL Developer 1 1 J Javasources 1 15 java exe pathname for 1 2 JDBC connections 5 10 JDBC drivers 1 89 job classes Scheduler 1 15 creating and editing 5 21 job scheduler using in SOL Developer 1 51 jobs scheduling using SOL Developer 1 51 jobs Scheduler 1 15 creating and editing 5 19 jTDS JDBC driver for Microsoft SOL Server and Sybase Adaptive Server 1 89 K Kerberos authentication 5 8 Database Advanced Parameters 1 86 keyboard shortcuts 1 100 L least privilege schema migration 1 98 library adding an item for unit testing 5 92 unit testing 3 10 link database 5 17 LOB parameters 5 33 local connections creating 1 23 locking a table 1 19 lookups adding for unit testing 5 92 lowercase characters in object names quotation marks required 5 1 materialized view logs 1 16 creating and editing 5 21 materialized views 1 15 options when creating or edi
254. e last name and salary of each employee in each department grouping the results by department ID 10 20 30 110 Note that the expected syntax for the SOL statement for a chart report is SELECT lt group gt lt series gt lt value gt FROM lt table s gt 1 78 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Reports Click the Chart Details tab near the bottom of the box for Chart Type select BAR_ VERT STACK bar chart stacked vertically and click Apply Use the Reports navigator to view the newly created user defined report For Connection specify one that connects to the HR sample schema The report is displayed as a chart part of which is shown in the following illustration For example as you can see department 50 has mainly employees with the lowest salaries and department 90 consists of the three highest paid employees 280K 240K 200K 160K 120K 80K OK A A 1 17 15 2 User Defined Report Example Dynamic HTML This example creates a report using one or more PL SQL DBMS_OUTPUT statements so that the report is displayed as dynamic HTML SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 79 SQL Developer Preferences Right click on User Defined Reports and select Add Report In the Add Report dialog box specify a report name for Style select plsql dbms output and for SOL enter the following begin dbms output put line H1 This is Level 1 Heading lt H1 gt dbms output put line
255. e method by which the client will gain access to and authenticate against the server The methods available depend on which CVS preferences you have set the available methods might include External Password Server Secure Shell via SSH2 and Other Most of the remaining Connection fields apply only to specific Access Method values User Name A CVS user name known to the repository Host Name Qualified host name or IP address of the CVS server system Port TCP IP port number on which the repository is listening Repository Path The location of the CVS repository software The seeded can be overwritten with a path in the format suitable for your operating system for example c cvs A simple formatting error such as a forward slash instead of a backslash will result in a message asking you to enter a valid repository path SSH2 Key Path and file name for the SSH2 private key file for this connection You can generate a SSH2 private key file using Generate SSH2 Key Pair Generate SSH2 Key Pair Displays a dialog box for generating an SSH2 key pair that is a private key file and a public key file You specify the private key file in the SSH2 Key box You add the details of the public key file to the list of public keys on the CVS server system Use HTTP Proxy Settings Check enable this option if you are behind a firewall and need to use HTTP to access the CVS server External Locator Configuration Displays the External Locato
256. e migration project requirements of Task 1 2 Categorize the list of tasks required to complete the migration project You should group these tasks according to your business This allows you to schedule and assign resources more accurately 3 Update and finalize the migration project plan based on the information that you have obtained from Task 3 and Task 4 4 Make sure the migration project plan meets the requirements of the migration project The migration plan should include a project description resources allocated training requirements migration deliverable general requirements environment analysis risk analysis application evaluation and project schedule 2 2 3 Before You Start Migrating General Information You may need to perform certain tasks before you start migrating a third party database to an Oracle database See the following for more information SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 11 Migration Background Information and Guidelines Section 223 1 Creating a Database User for the Migration Repository a Section 2 2 3 2 Requirements for Creating the Destination Oracle Objects See also any information specific to the source database that you will be migrating as explained in Section 2 2 4 Note SOL Developer does not migrate grant information from the source database The Oracle DBA must adjust as appropriate user login and grant specifications after the migration
257. e name and selected Export fewer panes are required In several panes if you select Proceed to summary clicking Next takes you to the Export Summary page See Also Cart Versus Database Export Wizard to consider whether you may want to use the Cart instead of the Database Export wizard Source Destination page Contains up to four main areas for specifying the database connection and the DDL data and target options If you specify any options they override the defaults for Database Utilities Export user preferences Connection Select the database connection with the objects to be exported 5 56 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data Other options on this page See Database Utilities Export for explanations of individual options Export DDL If this option is enabled DDL statements are included in the export operation Select the options to apply to the DDL that is generated Export Data If this option is enabled data is included in the operation Select the options to apply to the data that is unloaded Format Select the desired output format for the data to be unloaded Depending on the selected format other options may appear For example for xls Microsoft Excel file you can specify worksheet names for the data and the SELECT statement For CLOB data exporting is supported only if the format is 1oader SOL Loader or pdf PDF Some export types export only a
258. e procedure if you are not already connected connect to the database as the user for the schema you are using for this tutorial Right click the Procedures node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New Procedure and enter the following information using the Create PL SOL Procedure dialog box Object Name list a rating Click OK A source window for the new procedure is opened Enter or copy and paste the following procedure text replacing any existing text CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE list a rating in rating IN NUMBER AS matching title VARCHAR2 50 TYPE my cursor IS REF CURSOR the cursor my cursor BEGIN OPEN the cursor FOR SELECT title FROM books WHERE rating in rating USING in rating DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE All books with a rating of in rating LOOP FETCH the cursor INTO matching title EXIT WHEN the cursor NOTFOUND DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE matching title END LOOP CLOSE the cursor END list a rating This procedure uses a cursor named the cursor to return only rows where the book has the specified rating in rating parameter and uses a loop to output the title of each book with that rating Click the Save icon to save the procedure As a usage example after creating the procedure named LIST A RATING if you have inserted data into the BOOKS table for example using the INSERT statements in Section 4 5 Insert Data into the Tables you could use the following statement to return a
259. e the appropriate variables The following shows a line from a sample unload script bat script bcp AdventureWorks dbo AWBuildVersion out AdventureWorks dbo AWBuildVersion dat q c t lt EOFD gt r lt EORD gt U Username P Password S lt ServerName gt 3 Run the BCP extract script On Windows enter prompt unload script bat This script creates the data files in the current directory 4 Copy the data files and scripts if necessary to the target Oracle database system or to a system that has access to the target Oracle database and has SOL Loader Oracle Client installed 2 2 8 1 2 Creating Data Files From Microsoft Access To create data files from a Microsoft Access database use the Exporter for Microsoft Access tool Note For information about how to create data files from a Microsoft Access database see online help for the exporter tool 2 2 8 1 3 Creating Data Files From MySQL To create data files from a MySQL database 1 Copy the contents of the directory where SOL Developer generated the data unload scripts if necessary onto the system where the source database is installed or a system that has access to the source database and has the mysqldump tool installed 2 Edit the unload script script to include the correct host user name password and destination directory for the data files On Windows edit the unload script bat script a On Linux or UNIX edit the unloa
260. e the debugger to listen so that a debuggee can attach to the debugger For more information about remote debugging see Section 1 6 2 Remote Debugging Host Name or IP address of the remote host on which SOL Developer should listen for the database to connect Port Listening port number on the remote host You can choose any valid port number that is not in use by another process Timeout The number of seconds that SOL Developer will wait for the remote database to make a debugging connection Don t Show Dialog Box Before Connecting If this option is checked this dialog box will not be displayed before future connections for remote debugging 5 76 Deploy or Import Application Use this wizard to deploy or import an Application Express application into a specified target schema Deploy to Connection or Specify File to Import Choose Connection to Deploy Application For a deploy operation specify the database connection for the target schema into which to deploy the application Specify File to Import For an import operation specify the location and name of the SQL file containing the exported application usually the output of a previous export application operation Choose Import Options Specifies options for the application to be deployed or imported Workspace Name of the Application Express workspace Parse As Schema Schema against which all of the application s SOL and PL SQL will be parsed Application Na
261. e the test cases to verify that the Oracle database provides the same business logic results as the source database Note Oracle recommends that you define completion criteria so that you can determine the success of the migration This procedure explains one way of testing the migrated database Other methods are available and may be more appropriate to your business requirements To test the Oracle database 1 Createa controlled version of the migrated database Oracle recommends that you keep the database migration scripts in a source control system 2 Design a set of test cases that you can use to test the Oracle database from unit to system level The test cases should a Ensure the following All the users in the source database have migrated successfully Privileges and grants for users are correct Tables have the correct structure defaults are functioning correctly and errors did not occur during mapping or generation b Validate that the data migrated successfully by doing the following Comparing the number of rows in the Oracle database with those in the source database Calculating the sum of numerical columns in the Oracle database and compare with those in the source database c Ensure that the following applies to constraints You cannot enter duplicate primary keys Foreign keys prevent you from entering inconsistent data Check constraints prevent you from entering invalid data d
262. e user to which the role was granted the role whether the role was granted with the ADMIN option and whether the role is designated as a default role for the user System Privileges For each privilege granted to the user associated with the database connection lists the privilege and whether it was granted with the ADMIN option Policies Lists information about policies Public Grants Lists information about privileges granted to the PUBLIC role 1 17 11 Streams reports Streams reports list information about stream rules All Stream Rules Lists information about all stream rules The information includes stream type and name rule set owner and name rule owner and name rule set type streams rule type and subsetting operation Your Stream Rules Lists information about each stream rule for which the user associated with the database connection is the rule owner or rule set owner The SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 75 SQL Developer Reports information includes stream type and name rule set owner and name rule owner and name rule set type streams rule type and subsetting operation 1 17 12 Table reports Table reports list information about tables owned by the user associated with the specified connection This information is not specifically designed to identify problem areas however depending on your resources and requirements some of the information might indicate things that you should monitor or add
263. e with ratings other than 10 So you decide to debug the procedure To debug the procedure follow these steps 1 Click the Compile for Debug icon in the toolbar under the LIST A RATINC2 tab 2 Settwo breakpoints by clicking in the left margin left of the thin vertical line beside each of these two lines FETCH the cursor INTO matching title FETCH rating cursor INTO matching rating Clicking in the left margin toggles the setting and unsetting of breakpoints Clicking beside these two lines will enable you to see the values of the matching title and matching rating variables as execution proceeds in debug mode 4 10 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Use the SQL Worksheet for Queries 3 Click the Debug icon and in the Run PL SQL dialog box change IN RATING gt IN RATING to IN RATING gt 10 then click OK 4 Click View then Debugger then Data to display the Data pane Tip Expand the Name column width so that you can see MATCHING RATING 5 Press the F9 key or click Debug then Resume to have execution proceed stopping at the next breakpoint 6 Repeatedly press the F9 key or click Debug then Resume noticing especially the value of MATCHING RATING as each row is processed You will notice the first incorrect result when you see that the title Get Rich Really Fast is included even though its rating is only 1 obviously less than 10 See the screen illustration with debugging information in Section 1 6
264. eat a specific export operation the wizard provides a convenient interface for such one time actions 1 14 Spatial Support in SQL Developer SOL Developer lets you work with Oracle Spatial data and metadata Oracle Spatial referred to as Spatial facilitates the storage retrieval update and query of collections of spatial features in an Oracle database Spatial includes a schema MDSYS a data type SDO_GEOMETRY a spatial indexing mechanism and index type and operators functions and procedures for performing area of interest queries spatial join queries and other spatial analysis operations For complete information about Oracle Spatial including the differences between Spatial and Oracle Locator a subset of Spatial see Oracle Spatial Developer s Guide SOL Developer support for Spatial includes the following Context Menu Operations on Spatial Data and Metadata Map Visualization of Spatial Data 1 14 1 Context Menu Operations on Spatial Data and Metadata In the Connections navigator display the context menu right click for a table includes a Spatial submenu which includes the following commands Update Spatial Metadata displays the Maintain Spatial Metadata dialog box which enables you to update the spatial metadata for data in columns of type SDO GEOMETRY in the table Validate Geometry Using Tolerance performs a consistency check based on the tolerance value that you specify for valid geometry types in
265. eate Synchronization from Change Plan This takes you to the first page of the Create Schema Synchronization wizard The process of creating a synchronization from a Change Plan is similar to creating a synchronization from scratch However in the first phase of synchronization processing rather than comparing the source database or baseline version to the destination database Change Manager applies the changes contained in the change plan to the destination database definitions not to the actual objects The result of this operation provides the basis for script generation and execution the second and third phases of schema synchronization processing Conflicts During change plan processing Change Manager may detect conflicts between change items and the destination database In general a conflict means that the state of the destination database is not what was expected Examples of conflicts include A table that is to be added already exists and has a different definition than that contained in the change item a A table to be modified does not exist A column to be added to a table already exists and has a different data type than the column added by the change item Aconstraint to be dropped from a table does not exist a A view to be dropped exists but has a different definition than that stored in the change item A procedure to be dropped does not exist After changes have been applied to the destination d
266. eated For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 3 15 Job Classes A job class is an Oracle Scheduler object that enables the Scheduler administrator to group jobs for logical purposes such as to assign the same set of attribute values to member jobs to set service affinity for member jobs to set resource allocation for member jobs or to group jobs for prioritization For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 3 16 Materialized Views A materialized view is a database object that contains the results of a query The FROM clause of the query can name tables views and other materialized views Collectively these objects are called master tables a replication term or detail tables a data SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 15 Database Objects warehousing term This reference uses master tables for consistency The databases containing the master tables are called the master databases For help with specific options in creating a materialized view see Section 5 62 Create Edit View especially the View Information or Materialized View Properties pane 1 3 17 Materialized View Logs A materialized view log is a table associated with the master table of a materialized view When DML changes are made to master table data Oracle Database stores rows describing those changes in the materialized view log and t
267. ected rectangle in the pane 1 14 2 2 Visualizing Geometries from the Table Data Grid To visualize one or more geometries by from the table data grid follow these steps 1 Display the information for a spatial table by clicking its name in the Connections navigator hierarchy display 2 Click the Data tab to display the data in the table 3 Inthe grid display of table data click the cell with the spatial data for a geometry object For example if the spatial column is named GEOM click one of the cells under GEOM The cell content will start with MDSYS SDO_GEOMETRY 4 Right click and select one of the following from the context menu SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 57 Change Manager Support in SQL Developer Display Geometry Shape displays the selected geometry object in a standalone box Identify Geometry Shape in Map View highlights the selected geometry object in the Map View window if it is included in the window Invoke Map View on Result Set displays all geometry objects in the column that is it displays the layer For information about icons and options in the Map View window see Section 1 14 2 1 Visualizing Geometries by Creating and Executing a Query 1 15 Change Manager Support in SQL Developer A change plan is an Oracle Change Manager container for schema object changes Using SQL Developer you can create change plans and populate them change information Later
268. ects Click the Search icon on the left to display the Find Database Object window where you can specify a connection name and search criteria To display all criteria click More For a connection to an Oracle Database Release 11 1 or later connection clicking More causes SOL Developer to use PL Scope which enables you to search for the usage for example for the variable declarations The following figure shows part of the Find Database Objects pane with results from a search for column definitions associated with a connection named hr system05 where the column name starts with EM y GBFind Database Object yx Connection E hr_systemos S Name EM S Type COLUMN Usage DEFINITION 68 Lookup E EMPLOYEES EMAIL g SYS KU 10 1 FHTABLE VIEW E E svS KU 10 1 HTABLE VIEW EM g SYS KU 10 1 IOTABLE VIEW E g SYS KU 10 1 PFHTABLE VIEW E svS KU 10 1 PHTABLE VIEW E E SYS KU 10 1 PIOTABLE VIEW g SYS KU ACPTABLE VIEW EMPCN 19514049 4a apoj eyed el Connection Database connection to use for the search Name An object name or a string containing one or more wildcard characters For example EM for all names starting with EM Type Type of object for which to restrict the search Usage Usage of the object May or may not be relevant depending on the type of object Click the Lookup icon to display objects that meet the specified criteria To view or edit one of t
269. ed and invokes a certain program For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 3 22 Queues A queue is an object in which messages are enqueued and dequeued Queues are managed by Oracle Streams Advanced Queueing AQ For information about using queues see Oracle Database Advanced Queuing User s Guide SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 17 Database Objects 1 3 23 Queue Tables A queue table is a table that holds messages to be used with Oracle Streams Advanced Queueing AQ For information about using queue tables see Oracle Database Advanced Queuing User s Guide especially the information about managing queue tables in the chapter describing the Oracle Streams AQ administrative interface 1 3 24 Recycle Bin The Recycle bin applicable only to Oracle Database Release 10g and later holds objects that have been dropped deleted The objects are not actually deleted until a commit operation is performed Before the objects are actually deleted you can undelete them by selecting them in the Recycle bin and selecting Flashback to Before Drop from the context menu The Recycle bin is available only for non system locally managed tablespaces Thus to take advantage of the Recycle bin to be able to recover dropped tables for a database user create or edit the user to have a non system default tablespace for example USERS and not SYSTEM You can perform the fol
270. ed to add a driver for connections to Microsoft Access databases To add a driver click Add Entry and select the path for the driver a For IBM DB2 the db2jcc jar and db2jcc license cu jar files which are available from IBM For MySQL a file with a name similar to mysql connector java 5 0 4 bin jar in a directory under the one into which you unzipped the download for the MySQL driver a For Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server jtds 1 2 jar which is included in the jtds 1 2 dist zip download a For Teradata tdgssconfig jar and terajdbc4 jar which are included along with a readme txt file in the TeraJDBC__indep_ indep 12 00 00 110 zipor TeraJDBC__indep_ indep 12 00 00 110 tar download Alternative As an alternative to using this preference you can click Help then Check for Updates to install the JTDS JDBC Driver for Microsoft SOL Server and the MySQL JDBE Driver as extensions To find a specific third party JDBC driver see the appropriate website for example http www mysql com for the MySQL Connector J JDBC driver for MySQL http jtds sourceforge net for the jTDS driver for Microsoft SOL Server and Sybase Adaptive Server or search at http www teradata com for the JDBC driver for Teradata For MySQL use the MySQL 5 0 driver not 5 1 or later with SOL Developer release 1 5 You must specify a third party JDBC driver or install a driver using the Check for
271. edit snippets when you are using the SOL Worksheet or creating or editing a PL SQL function or procedure To display snippets from the View menu select Snippets In the snippets window on the right side use the drop down to select a group such as Aggregate Functions or Character Functions In most cases the fragments in each group do not represent all available objects in that logical grouping or all formats and options of each fragment shown For complete and detailed information see the Oracle Database documentation To insert a snippet into your code in a SOL Worksheet or in a PL SQL function or procedure drag the snippet from the snippets window and drop it into the desired place in your code then edit the syntax so that the SOL function is valid in the current context To see a brief description of a SOL function in a tooltip hold the pointer over the function name For example you could type SELECT and then drag CONCAT charl char2 from the Character Functions group Then edit the CONCAT function syntax and type the rest of the statement such as in the following SELECT CONCAT title is a book in the library FROM books 1 8 1 User Defined Snippets You can create and edit snippets User defined snippets are intended mainly to enable you to supplement the Oracle supplied snippets although you are also permitted to replace an Oracle supplied snippet with your own version When you create a user defined snippet you
272. editing 5 5 charts user defined report example 1 78 check constraints 5 31 Check for Updates feature 5 2 CLOBtoBLOB_sqldeveloper stored procedure 1 99 close all SOL Worksheets automatically on disconnect preference for database connections 1 94 clustered primary keys Sybase generating as Oracle index organized tables 1 99 clustered unique indexes Sybase generating as Oracle index organized tables 1 99 coalescing an index 1 14 code coverage gathering and viewing statistics 3 5 code fragments 1 41 code insight completion insight 1 83 column sequences 5 32 columns decrypting 1 20 encrypting 1 20 normalizing column data 1 20 Compact option for shrinking a table 1 20 compiling Index 1 function 1 14 1 17 for debug 1 14 1 17 view 1 22 completion SQL Developer preferences 1 83 completion insight 1 83 compound triggers 1 100 configuring 2 14 third party databases 2 13 configuring file type associations 5 50 connections creating editing or selecting 5 7 explanation 1 23 IBM DB2 5 10 JDBC 5 10 Microsoft Access 5 9 Microsoft SQL Server 5 11 MySQL 5 10 Oracle Database 5 7 Oracle TimesTen 5 9 separate unshared connection preference 1 94 separate unshared worksheet for 1 24 1 32 Sybase Adaptive Server 5 11 Teradata 5 11 using folders to group 1 24 constraints check 5 31 disabled 1 76 unique 5 30 converted model correcting errors in 2 19 creating and cust
273. een granted the SYSDBA system privilege you can specify a connection that includes the privilege SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 7 Create Edit Select Database Connection Connection Type Select Basic TNS LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Advanced or Local Bequeath using bequeath protocol if the client and database exist on the same computer then a client connection can be passed directly to a dedicated server process without going through the listener The display of fields changes to reflect any change in connection type OS Authentication If this option is checked control of user authentication is passed to the operating system OS This allows the specified user to connect to the database by authenticating that user s OS username in the database No password is associated with the connection since it is assumed that OS authentication is sufficient For information about using OS authentication see Oracle Database JDBC Developer s Guide Kerberos Authentication If this option is checked credentials can be shared across many Kerberos enabled applications for example to have the same username and password for both the operating system and Oracle Database Thick driver configuration is done through sglnet ora sq1net authentication services KERBEROS and related parameters so no username and password are needed Thin driver configuration uses the configuration conf file and the credentials cache
274. eferences option must match the setting in the source database to be migrated as explained in Section 2 2 4 2 Before Migrating From Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server Migration Translators The Translators pane contains options that relate to conversion of stored procedures and functions from their source database format to Oracle format These options apply only to migrations from Microsoft Access Microsoft SOL Server and Sybase Adaptive Server Default Source Date Format Default date format mask to be used when casting string literals to dates in stored procedures and functions Variable Name Prefix String to be used as the prefix in the names of resulting variables In Parameter Prefix String to be used as the prefix in the names of resulting input parameters Query Assignment Translation Option to determine what is generated for a query assignment only the assignment assignment with exception handling logic or assignment using a cursor LOOP END LOCP structure to fetch each row of the query into variables Display AST If this option is checked the abstract syntax tree AST is displayed in the Source Tree pane of the Translation Scratch Editor window described in Section 2 3 5 if you perform a translation Generate Compound Triggers If this option is checked then depending on the source code SQL Developer can convert a Sybase or SQL Server trigger to an Oracle compound trigger which uses tw
275. efinitions Change Manager reports the results of the operations including any conflicts encountered Change Plans and Schema Synchronizations Comparison Schema change plans and schema synchronizations are similar in some ways and use some of the same underlying technology However they have different purposes and uses The purpose of a schema synchronization is to make the set of objects at the destination database identical to those at the source database or baseline version Schema synchronization compares the objects at the source and destination and then generates a script to reconcile all the differences The purpose of a change plan is to carry out a specific set of changes at any destination database The changes may apply to an entire object Add or Drop or to attributes of an object Modify for example add a column In other words schema synchronization picks up any changes that have been made to the destination object or schema and makes those changes at the destination Change plan deployment however makes only those changes specified in the change items With schema synchronizations there is no chance of conflict because the source definition always overrides the destination definition With change plans however there is a possibility of conflict because the specified changes might not be applicable at a destination database or might conflict with other changes 1 62 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Appl
276. el for insert If this option is checked object names are qualified by the schema name 5 119 New Procedure Refactoring This dialog box is displayed if you are editing a procedure select one or more PL SQL statements right click and select Refactoring then Extract Procedure The selected statements are encapsulated into the procedure to be created Defined Locally For a standalone procedure defines the newly refactored code in the definition section of the original procedure Stored For a standalone procedure defines the newly refactored code in a new standalone procedure Name Name of the procedure to encapsulate the selected statements For a packaged procedure the newly extracted procedure text is placed immediately after the current procedure 5 120 No Lock This dialog box is displayed if multiple instances of SOL Developer are running on the system and if you attempt to open a unit test object such as a test or suite when that SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 73 No Object Found object is already open in another instance of SOL Developer Thus the current instance of SOL Developer is unable to get a lock on that object at this time Either use the other instance of SOL Developer to view or modify the object or close the object in the other instance of SOL Developer and then open the object in this instance 5 121 No Object Found This dialog box is displayed if no objects could be found to satisf
277. elected database connection click the pencil icon In both cases a dialog box for specifying connection information is displayed see Section 5 21 Create Edit Select Database Connection 5 28 Connection Information Use this dialog box to specify the user name and password for the selected database connection If the specified user name does not exist in the database associated with the connection or if the specified password is not the correct one for that user the connection is refused 5 29 No Connection Found This dialog box is displayed when you attempt to perform an operation that requires a database connection but no connection currently exists for that operation For example you might have opened a SQL file but not selected a connection or the connection might have disconnected or you might have tried to perform a schema copy operation without specifying both the From Schema and To Schema connections To select a connection in the SOL Worksheet click OK to close this dialog box then select a connection from the drop down list in the SOL Worksheet icon bar 5 30 Connection Rename Error This dialog box is displayed when you attempt to rename a database connection to a name that is already used for another connection For example you might have forgotten to enter a new name for the connection that you want to rename To rename the connection click OK to close this dialog box then specify a unique connection name
278. eloper Migrating Third Party Databases 2 31 SQL Developer User Interface for Migration sales mdb It also shows the Migration Submenu Figure 2 3 Main Window for a Database Migration E Oracle SQL Developer File Edit View Navigate Run Versioning MCO Help S CO S5OBdgo0oex amp Emno o Data Modeler A Migration Migrate El 1 a Unit Test Repository Management Microsoft Access Exporter Script Generation B Create Database Capture Scripts a Translation Scratch Editor y Configure Palette a Connections amp P Data Miner H Auto Generated Database Copy rs E3 sales access Database Diff ce E sales orade Database Unload j BS i Monitor SQL ymigration Projects M Monitor Sessions ES PE IA OO SQL Worksheet AltF10 e A amp Schema Visualizer ci 8 2010 09 08 14 05 13 d SA Captured Database Objects External Tools E Dis MsaccessDatabase o Y sales H Tables ce B8 Views t 3 Indexes a Procedures e Functions 1 3 Triggers Sequences i sd Users a gh Converted Database Objects amp Fg MsaccessDatabase amp Y sales Message Date Time E Tables t views v Messages Migration Log adc2190149 scott Editing Preferences Migration Log Log In this figure a The Connections navigator shows two database connections sales access connected to a Microsoft Access database named sales mdb and sales oracle connected to an Oracle us
279. eloper Data Modeler User s Guide To export to the reporting SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 77 SQL Developer Reports repository you must use the full Data Modeler product you cannot use the Data Modeler in SOL Developer that is included in SOL Developer To use any Data Modeler reports in SOL Developer you must have created a database connection to the schema that contains the Data Modeler reporting repository To view any Data Modeler report expand the Data Modeler Reports hierarchy and double click the desired report If you are prompted for a database connection select the one containing the reporting repository If you are prompted for bind variables follow the guidelines in Bind Variables for Reports Design Content Includes reports about the data types and the logical and relational models Design Rules Includes reports about potential violations of the Data Modeler design rules For example for logical model attributes you can see attributes without data types and attributes not based on domains and for relational model tables you can see tables without columns primary keys foreign key links and unique constraints 1 17 15 User Defined reports User Defined reports are any reports that are created by SOL Developer users To create a user defined report right click the User Defined node under Reports and select Add Report A dialog box is displayed in which you specify the report name and the SOL query to
280. eloper unit testing feature described in Chapter 3 Configuration set to use for lookups Lookup category to be used for automatically generating test implementations when you create a unit test as explained in Section 3 6 2 The list includes the default category and any user added categories see the Unit Testing Add Category dialog box 1 18 15 Versioning Versioning preferences affect the behavior of the version control and management systems that you can use with SOL Developer You can specify preferences for CVS and Subversion For information about using versioning with SOL Developer see Section 1 10 Using Versioning Versioning CVS The CVS pane specifies options for use with CVS Concurrent Versions System CVS Client Internal to Oracle SOL Developer installed with SOL Developer or External Executable separately installed CVS client for which you must specify the name or path a Name on System Path Name of the CVS server executable The default cvs is correct for most installations This option assumes that the name of the CVS server executable is on the system path SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 101 SQL Developer Preferences Path from Environment Location of the CVS server executable especially if there is more than one on the system path The selection area will list all instances of the CVS server executable known to the local system You may have more than one version of CVS installed this
281. emulation package is created in the new EMULATION schema and is referenced by all other migrated users If this option is not checked no separate EMULATION user is created and the emulation package is created within each migrated user Generating a separate emulation user is usually the best practice because the emulation package is defined in one place rather than having multiple copies of it However if you prefer each migrated user to be standalone and not need to reference anything from another user then uncheck this option Sybase To Index Organized Tables Controls whether Sybase clustered unique constraints or clustered primary keys are converted to Oracle index organized tables NONE causes neither to be converted to index organized tables they are converted to Oracle unique constraints and primary keys respectively From Clustered Unique Constraints converts each clustered constraint into a primary key and creates an index organized table if there is no primary key already From Clustered Primary Keys creates an index organized table if the primary key is clustered the Sybase default Use All Oracle Database 12c Features in Migration if using the Oracle JDBC Driver Release 12c or higher Allows the migrated objects in the target Oracle Database schema to use features that are new in Oracle Database 12c Release 12 1 If this option is not checked features that are new in Oracle Database 12c will not be considered for inclusion
282. en the Pending Changes window is open You can save screen space by not showing the Comments area of the Pending Changes window but you might still want to add comments before a commit action You can choose the circumstances under which the Commit dialog is opened always only when the Comments area of the Pending Changes window is hidden or never Incoming Changes Timer Interval The frequency at which the change status of files is checked Merge Editor Specifies whether files are merged locally or at the server 1 18 16 Web Browser and Proxy The Web Browser and Proxy pane settings are relevant only when you use the Check for Updates feature click Help then Check for Updates and only if your system is behind a firewall Browser Command Line To specify a Web browser other than your default browser specify the executable file to start that browser To use your default browser leave this field blank Use HTTP Proxy Server Check your Web browser options or preferences for the appropriate values for these fields 1 104 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Location of User Related Information 1 18 17 XML Schemas The XML Schemas pane lets you view all the currently registered XML schemas add new schemas to support additional namespaces and elements remove existing schemas and unload schemas from memory SQL Developer Schemas for XML Editing Lists the names and locations of the pre registered schemas currently available
283. en you click Help and then Check for Updates you can check for and download available SOL Developer updates The following pages may be displayed If you have enabled the SOL Developer preference to check for updates automatically at startup and if you click to see available updates at startup the Updates page is displayed If you are unable to check for updates because your system is behind a firewall you may need to set the SOL Developer user preferences for Web Browser and Proxy 1 Source Select the source or sources to be checked for available updates any or all of some specified online update centers or a local ZIP file containing an update bundle You can also click Add to add a user defined update center 2 Updates If any updates are available from the selected source or sources select those that you want to download The available updates include certain third party JDBC drivers which require that you agree to the terms of their licenses The Show Upgrades Only option restricts the display to upgrades of currently installed SOL Developer components To enable the display of all new and updated components whether currently installed or not uncheck this option 5 2 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Component Palette Configure Component Palette After you click Next you may be prompted to enter your Oracle Web Account user name and password If you do not have an account you can click the Sign Up link 3 License Ag
284. enabled using a special configuration option when you build CVS Set Compression Level z If this option is enabled you can set the compression level for files sent between client and server The level can be set from Minimum high speed low compression to Maximum low speed high compression Keyword Substitution Mode CVS uses keyword substitution modes to insert revision information into files when they are checked out or updated This option controls the mode of replacement for keyword substitution in versioned files Automatic The default recommended option Keyword Only Mode Generates only keyword names in keyword strings and omits their values This option is useful for disregarding differences due to keyword substitution when comparing different revisions of a file Keyword Value Mode Generates keyword strings using the default form Keyword Value Locker Mode Like the keyword value mode except that the name of the locker is always inserted if the given revision is currently locked Old Contents Mode Generates the old keyword string present in the working file just before it was checked in Value Only Mode Generates only keyword values for keyword strings This can help generate files in programming languages where it is hard to strip keyword delimiters from a string However further keyword substitution cannot be 1 102 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences performed
285. end of line The behavior is analogous to that for Smart Home except that the cursor responds to the End key and its behavior regarding the end of the line and any trailing spaces is altered Use Jump Scrolling for Keyboard Navigation Implement jump scrolling which involves behavior of the keyboard arrow keys With this setting selected when you navigate off screen using the keyboard arrow keys the editor view will jump to recenter the cursor location in the middle of the editor view With this setting deselected the editor view will scroll the editor view the minimum amount to bring the cursor back into view Use Change of Case As Word Boundary Has change of case regarded as the boundary of a word for example when you double click to select a word Enable Cut or Copy of Current Line with No Selection Applies all cut and copy operations to the current line whenever there is no text selection in the editor Automatically Copy Paste Imports Automatically add imports when references are introduced to objects that have not yet been imported Adjust Indentation When Pasting Corrects the indentation of a pasted in item that includes indentation Reformat Code Block When Pasting Reformats the code correctly when you paste it into a new location Escape When Pasting in String Literals Includes the correct escape characters in pasted in string literals Code Editor Bookmarks The Bookmarks pane contains options that determine
286. entering its complete file name such as mumble txt or you can exclude all files of the same type by entering a construct that describes the file type such as txt 1 96 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Add Adds the new filter to the list in the Filter box Remove Deletes the selected filter from the list in the Filter box Restore Defaults Restores the contents of the Filter box to the SOL Developer defaults Filter Contains the list of files and file types For each item if it is enabled checked the filter is enforced and the file or file type is ignored by SOL Developer but if it is disabled unchecked the filter is not enforced 1 18 11 Migration The Migration pane contains options that affect the behavior of SOL Developer when you migrate schema objects and data from third party databases to an Oracle database Default Repository Migration repository to be used for storing the captured models and converted models For information about migrating third party databases to Oracle including how to create a migration repository see Chapter 2 Migration Data Move Options The Data Move Options pane contains options that affect the behavior when you migrate data from third party databases to Oracle Database tables generated by the migration This pane includes options that can be used for online data migration for all supported third party databases and for offline data migration for My
287. er or copy and paste the following procedure text replacing any existing text CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE list a rating2 in rating IN NUMBER AS matching title VARCHAR2 50 matching rating NUMBER TYPE my cursor IS REF CURSOR the cursor my cursor rating cursor my cursor BEGIN OPEN the cursor FOR SELECT title FROM books WHERE rating in rating USING in rating OPEN rating cursor FOR SELECT rating FROM books WHERE rating in rating USING in rating DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE All books with a rating of in rating LOOP FETCH the cursor INTO matching title FETCH rating cursor INTO matching rating EXIT WHEN the cursor NOTFOUND DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE matching title END LOOP CLOSE the cursor CLOSE rating cursor END list a rating2 This procedure contains a logic error in the definition of the cursor it selects titles where the rating is less than or equal to a specified rating whereas it should select titles only where the rating is equal to the specified rating Click the Save icon to save the procedure Assume that you wanted to run this procedure and list all books with a rating of 10 Right click LIST A RATING2 in the Connections navigator hierarchy display and select Run Under PL SOL Block in the Run PL SQL dialog box change change IN_ RATING gt IN RATING to IN RATING gt 10 and click OK In the Log window however you see unexpected output many titles are listed including som
288. er named SALES whose schema owns the migrated schema objects Not shown is the migration repository connection to a user named MIGRATION used for the migration repository The Migration Projects navigator shows one captured model which was created using an XML file created by the exporter tool for Access applications If the source database is a type other than Microsoft Access the procedure for creating the captured model is different you can generate it directly from the source database connection The Migration Projects navigator also shows one converted model which is an Oracle representation of the source database The converted model is created from the captured model and the converted model is used to generate the schema objects that you can see using an Oracle database connection sales oraclein this figure 2 32 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface for Migration 2 3 1 Migration Submenu The Migration submenu contains options related to migrating third party databases to Oracle To display the Migration submenu click Tools then Migration Migrate Displays a wizard for performing an efficient migration The wizard displays steps and options relevant to your specified migration Repository Management Enables you to create delete or truncate remove all data from a migration repository select the current migration repository and disconnect from the current migration repository which
289. er unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 5 201 Unit Testing Add Tests or Suites to a Suite Use this dialog box to add one or more unit tests or suites to a test suite The Tests or Suites tab is displayed depending on whether you right clicked the Tests or Suites node in the Unit Test navigator display and selected Add Test or Add Suite The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 List of tests or suites Select one or more tests to be added to the suite Run Test Startups If this option is checked the startup action defined for each specified test or suite is run when the suite is run Run Test Teardowns If this option is checked the teardown action defined for each specified test or suite is run when the suite is run Any startup and teardown actions for a test are specified when you create the unit test see Unit Testing Create Unit Test 5 202 Unit Testing Copy or Rename Unit Test Use this dialog box to copy or rename a unit test The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 If you specified Copy a copy of the selected unit test is created and is given the name you specify If you specified Rename the name of the selected unit test is changed to the name you specify 5 203 Unit Testing Create Unit Test Use this wizard to create a unit test The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 To go from one step to the next click Next to go
290. er users 1 10 2 About CVS and SQL Developer CVS repositories can be created on a local PC or remote server There can be more than one CVS repository You need to create one or more CVS repositories Source files are held in a CVS repository The source files in a CVS repository are grouped into modules If you have new files a wizard in SOL Developer will help you import them into the CVS repository and place them under version control A copy is made of your original files and placed in a subdirectory backup of the one from which you imported them Files to be worked on are checked out from the CVS repository This makes a local copy of the files You can see the contents of the CVS repository in the SOL Developer CVS Navigator and open read only versions of files You can then decide which files you want to check out and work on SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 43 Using DBA Features in SQL Developer CVS creates a new directory populated with the copy of the source files You can see the files in the System Navigator You can also open them from here Source files have a status depending on what operations have been carried out on them A preference lets you choose whether the version control status of a file is shown in the System Navigator 1 10 2 1 Pending Changes CVS The Pending Changes window is displayed if you click Versioning then CVS then Pending Changes or when you initiate an action that changes the local
291. eration Use File Modification Time If this option is checked the file s modification time is used as the time of import If this option is not checked the time when the import operation is performed is used as the time of import Perform Module Checkout If this option is checked the modules are checked out after they are imported Summary You can review the information that will be used to perform the import operation To go back and make any changes click Back as needed To perform the import operation click Finish 5 111 Install SQL Translator This dialog box is displayed if you right click SOL Translators under SOL Translator FrameWork for a connection in the DBA navigator see Using DBA Features in SOL Developer and select Install SOL Translator SOL Translator SOL translator to be installed for the desired third party SOL to be translated for example Sybase SQL Translator for Sybase Mode online lets you perform the installation interactively in SOL Developer offline creates a zip file containing several files including a Linux sh file that you can run to perform the installation Create New Profile If this option is checked you can also create a new SQL translator profile associated with the translator being created In this case specify a name for the profile for example sybase_profile and an existing Oracle database schema to own the profile Whether you check this option or not you can also create n
292. erge Type affects the content of subsequent displays which can include the following From URL and its start revision to merge The resource that is the basis of the comparison The resource entered in the To URL box will be compared against the resource entered here HEAD Revision from Repository Causes the comparison to be made against the most recently committed resources in the Subversion repository Use Revision Causes the comparison to be made against a resource in the Subversion repository with a particular revision number When selected the accompanying text box becomes available You can then enter a revision number into the text box or click the List Revisions button to select the revision that you require To URL and its end revision to merge The resource that will be compared with the base resource selected in the From URL box Same as From URL Uses the same base repository location for both elements of the comparison Ignore Ancestry Ignores any relationships between resources in the Subversion repository when comparing the start and end revisions The effect of this will be to retain resources that have names identical to those they are being compared with even though the resources have no common ancestry The alternative is that a resource that predates an identically named one may be deleted and replaced with the later resource Dry Run Causes the comparison to be performed without the changes being applied
293. eria that must be satisfied for a result to be returned You can specify any WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword For example for employees SALARY specifying gt 10000 limits the results to employees with salaries greater than 10 000 Or You can specify one or more OR clauses to be added to the query criteria For example if Expression employees LAST NAME you could specify Oras Smith to add OR employees LAST NAME Smith to the query 1 7 9 Command Line Interface for SQL Formatting To formata sql file or all sql files in a directory or folder you can use the format batch file Windows or shell script Linux on the operating system command line These files are located in the sq1developerNsqldeveloper bin folder or Sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin directory under the location where you installed SOL Developer Before invoking the ormat file or script start the SOL Developer graphical interface so that the Database SOL Formatter preferences which are used for the formatting are loaded and available format bat or format sh has the following syntax format sh bat input input file or directory output output file or directory SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 39 Using the SQL Worksheet The following example takes the SOL code in c temp myfile sql and creates c NtempWnyfile out sql containing the formatted code Enter the command on one command line C Program Files sqldeveloper sqlde
294. es Summary page See Summary under Shared Wizard Pages The results are displayed in a Diff Report window where you can see the DDL statements to update the objects in the destination schema to reflect differences from the source schema To create a file containing these DDL statements click the Generate Script SOL icon in that window In the Generate SOL dialog box you can specify the Save As destination or type Single File Separate Files Type Files Separate Directories Worksheet Clipboard the location and the encoding To display only objects with differences that have the same name in both connections select Show Equal Objects To display all objects that have differences or that exist one one connection but not the other select Show New Objects 5 73 Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data Use this wizard to export database objects and optionally data For a selected database connection you can export some or all objects of one or more types of database objects to output files a SOL Worksheet or the clipboard The output may contain SOL data definition language DDL statements to create these objects It may also contain SOL statements to insert data into these objects and other formatted files The number of panes and the options available depend on the potential scope of the export operation For example if you clicked Tools then Database Export all panes are available however if you right clicked a tabl
295. es and triggers many with names starting with MD_ and MIGR You should not directly modify these objects or any data stored in them 2 2 3 2 Requirements for Creating the Destination Oracle Objects The user associated with the Oracle database connection used to perform the migration that is to run the script containing the generated DDL statements must have the following roles and privileges Note You must grant these privileges directly to a user account Granting the privileges to a role which is subsequently granted to a user account does not suffice You cannot migrate a database as the user SYS Roles CONNECT WITH ADMIN OPTION 2 12 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines RESOURCE WITH ADMIN OPTION Privileges LTER ANY ROLE LTER ANY SEQUENCE ER ANY TABLE LTER TABLESPACE LTER ANY TRIGGER OMMENT ANY TABLE REATE ANY SEQUENCE REATE ANY TABLE REATE ANY TRIGGER REATE VIEW WITH ADMIN OPTION REATE PUBLIC SYNONYM WITH ADMIN OPTION REATE ROLE REATE USER ROP ANY SEQUENCE ROP ANY TABLE ROP ANY TRIGGER ROP USER ROP ANY ROLE RANT ANY ROLE NSERT ANY TABLE ELECT ANY TABLE PDATE ANY TABLE gt pp pp H Q Hutuiuistus oc 900 H au For example you can create a user called migrations with the minimum required privileges required to migrate a database by using the following commands CREATE USER migrations IDENTIFIED
296. es and substitution variables of type VARCHAR2 although in most cases VARCHAR2 is automatically converted internally to NUMBER if necessary a pop up box is displayed for entering variable values a Run Script executes all statements in the Enter SOL Statement box using the Script Runner The SOL statements can include substitution variables but not bind variables of type VARCHAR2 although in most cases VARCHAR2 is automatically converted internally to NUMBER if necessary a pop up box is displayed for entering substitution variable values a Commit writes any changes to the database and ends the transaction also clears any output in the Results and Script Output panes a Rollback discards any changes without writing them to the database and ends the transaction also clears any output in the Results and Script Output panes a Cancel stops the execution of any statements currently being executed Monitor SOL Status Oracle Database Release 11 1 and later only calls the real time SOL monitoring feature of Oracle Database enabling you to monitor the performance of SOL statements while they are executing Explain Plan generates the execution plan for the statement internally executing the EXPLAIN PLAN statement To see the execution plan click the Explain tab For more information see Section 1 7 3 Execution Plan SOL Tuning Advisor displays a window that runs the SOL Tuning Advisor which is SOL diagnostic softwa
297. es are used for character data and are optional Enclosures are not included in the data loaded Right Enclosure in Data is Doubled If this option if checked then for CSV delimited and text format any right enclosure that is doubled in the data is loaded imported as a single right enclosure also the data preview will show such data as it will be loaded that is double right enclosures will be displayed as single right enclosures in the preview if this option is checked Database Utilities Import Import Methods External Table Insert SQL Loader The Import Methods pane lets you specify the default mode for importing data in the following situations Existing Table Import Method For importing data into an existing table specifies the default method to be used for loading data New Table Import Method For creating a new table to hold the data to be imported specifies the default method to be used for loading data A separate pane is provided for specifying default attributes for each supported method or tool to be used for exporting the data The displayed and editable attributes depend on the specific method External Table Method preferences apply to both the External Table method and the Staging External Table method Identify Oracle directories for default log bad and discard directories to be used as defaults for the data load If any of the optional directories are not specified here or in the wizard the de
298. est case the incident log should include the following Provide a clear concise description of the incident encountered Provide a complete description of the environment such as platform and source control version Attach the output of the test if useful Indicate the frequency and predictability of the incident Provide a sequence of events leading to the incident Describe the effect on the current test diagnostic steps taken and results noted Describe the persistent after effect if any e Attempt to fix the errors f Return to step 1 7 Identify acceptance tests that you can use to make sure the Oracle database is an acceptable quality level 2 2 10 2 1 Guidelines for Creating Tests You may already have a collection of unit tests and system tests from the original application that you can use to test the Oracle database However if you do not have any unit or system tests you need to create them When creating test cases use the following guidelines Plan specify and execute the test cases recording the results of the tests The amount of testing you perform is proportional to the time and resources that are available for the migration project Typically the testing phase in a migration project can take anywhere from 40 to 60 of the effort for the entire project Identify the components that you are testing the approach to the test design and the test completion criteria Define each test ca
299. eveloper Reports user defined folder in which to store the imported report right click and select Import You can create a shared report from an exported report by clicking Tools then Preferences and using the Database User Defined Extensions pane to add a row with Type as REPORT and Location specifying the exported XML file The next time you restart SOL Developer the Reports navigator will have a Shared Reports folder containing that report Reports are grouped in the following categories About Your Database reports list release information about the database associated with the connection All Objects reports list information about all objects accessible to the user associated with the specified database connection not just objects owned by the user Application Express reports list information about Oracle Application Express 3 0 1 or later applications pages schemas UI defaults and workspaces ASH and AWR reports list information provided by the Active Session History ASH and Automated Workload Repository AWR features Database Administration reports list usage information about system resources Data Dictionary reports list information about the data dictionary views that are accessible in the database Examples of data dictionary views are ALL OBJECTS and USER TABLES PL SQL reports list information about your PL SQL objects and allow you to search the source of those objects Scheduler reports list in
300. ew columns match exactly the precision returned by subquery or the create operation will fail Index Storage Options Use Index If this option is checked a default index is created and used to speed up incremental fast refresh of the materialized view If this option is not checked this default index is not created For example you might choose to suppress the index creation now and to create such an index explicitly later Use Tablespace If this option is checked you can specify the tablespace in which the materialized view is to be created If this option is not checked the materialized view is created in the default tablespace of the schema containing the materialized view DDL tab or pane You can view a SOL CREATE statement that reflects the current definition of the object or a SOL ALTER statement to modify an existing object to reflect your changes To save the SOL statement to a script file click Save and specify the location and file name 5 63 Create XML Schema This dialog box enables you to create an XML schema object that can be associated with XML document instances Name Name of the XML schema object After you click OK an editing pane is displayed for specifying the URL of the XML schema 5 64 Color Palette and Custom Colors You can use the color palette editor to select a color from the supplied Available Colors or and saved Custom Colors SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 49 Configure
301. ew pane is available for reuse Refresh refreshes the display in the pane Debug starts execution of the first or next implementation of the unit test in debug mode and displays the results in the Results tab a Run starts normal execution of the unit test and displays the results in the Results tab Before you click Run you can specify the database user for the run operation by selecting a database connection on the right Edit pencil icon enables you to edit the unit test specification If you cannot modify the unit test lick the Edit icon Commit Changes saves any changes that you have made to the unit test Rollback Changes discards any unsaved changes that you have made to the unit test If you click the Edit icon you can modify the Startup Process Teardown Process and details for each implementation You can also specify Gather Code Coverage Statistics to have SOL Developer collect statistics related to code coverage To view any statistics that have been gathered from unit test runs use the Test Runs Code Coverage report In that report you can click a row with summary information to display detailed information in the Code Coverage Details pane 3 5 Using a Dynamic Value Query to Create a Unit Test As an alternative to specifying exact input data when creating a unit test you can create a dynamic value query to use data from a table as input for the test The query returns values from specified c
302. ew profiles separately Click Apply to start the installation of the SOL translator This installation involves several steps and it may take a long time 5 70 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Load Keyboard Scheme 5 111 1 Installing a Translator and Creating a Profile Usage Notes Installing a SOL translator is an Oracle schema enables you to run third party statements and procedures have SOL Developer automatically translate them to Oracle syntax and see the results you would expect from Oracle Install the SOL translator in an Oracle schema where the user has been granted the usual privileges for connecting and creating database objects as well as the CREATE SOL TRANSACTION PROFILE privilege For example GRANT CREATE SQL TRANSACTION PROFILE to USER3 After you click Apply SOL Developer checks if the database user has the necessary privileges and if it does not it prompts you to log in as the SYS user and then confirm the granting of certain privileges The actual translator installation can take a long time during which the Online SOL Translator Install progress box is displayed If you want to continue working in SOL Developer during the installation you can click Run in Background After the installation grant execute access on the translator to the database user For example GRANT EXECUTE on SYBASE TSOL TRANSLATOR to USER3 You can now right click a profile that is associated with the translator and select
303. example modifying the column list or adding a WHERE clause If you drag and drop a function or procedure a snippet like text block is constructed for you to edit when including that object in a statement To view details for any object you can select its name in the Enter SOL Statement box and select Popup Describe from the context menu or press Shift F4 For example if you select a table name and press Shift F4 information about Columns Constraints Grants and so on is displayed or if you select a procedure name and press Shift FA information about Code Grants Dependencies References and Details is displayed Tabs display panes with the following information 1 34 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using the SQL Worksheet Results Displays the results of the most recent Execute Statement operation Explain Displays the output if you clicked the Explain Execution Plan icon see Section 1 7 3 Execution Plan Script Output Displays the output if you clicked the Run Script icon see Section 17 2 Script Runner DBMS Output Displays the output of DBMS OUTPUT package statements see Section 1 7 5 DBMS Output Pane a OWA Output Displays Oracle Web Agent MOD PLSOQL output see Section 1 7 6 OWA Output Pane To toggle the relative heights of the Enter SOL Statement area and the area for tabs and display panes press Ctrl Alt L You can also manually adjust the heights 1 7 1 SQL Plus St
304. f DEL modified by coldel timestampformat YYYY MM DD HH mm ss datesiso nochardel select query DB2 version 9 supports LOB data in separate files which is better for migrating large data sizes With version 8 to support large LOB data you must modify the oracle ctl file command and db2 command in unload script bat or unload_script sh The table data is exported to files with names in the format lt catalog gt lt schema gt lt table gt dat The format of file is as follows data14 COL DEL data2 lt COL_DEL gt lt ROW_DEL gt where COL DEL and ROW DEL come from migration offline preference settings Before you execute the DB2 data dump script you must log in by entering a command in the following format db2 connect to catalog user user name using password You can then execute the script using the logged connection session 2 2 6 Creating and Customizing the Converted Model After you capture a third party database the next step is to convert it creating the converted model The converted model is a representation of the structure of the destination database SOL Developer creates the converted model using the information from the captured model By default all procedures functions triggers and views are copied to the converted model during translation and translated to Oracle PL SQL However if translation fails for any of the objects those objects appear in the converted model but the
305. f SOL Developer top bottom left and right Dockable Windows Always on Top If this option is checked dockable windows always remain visible in front of other windows Windows Layout Click the corner arrows to lengthen or shorten the shape of each docking area Environment Local History The Local History pane controls whether information about editing operations on files opened within SOL Developer is kept If local history is enabled you can specify how long information is retained and the maximum number of revisions for each file Environment Log The Log pane configures the colors of certain types of log messages and the saving of log messages to log files Save Logs to File If this option is checked all output to the Messages Log window is saved to log files where the file name reflects the operation and a timestamp You are also asked to specify a Log Directory and if the specified directory does not already exist it is created if and when it is needed Note that if you save log information to files the number of these files can become large Maximum Log Lines The maximum number of lines to store in each log file 1 18 2 Change Management Parameters The Change Management Parameters pane contains options that affect Change Manager Support in SOL Developer especially how objects are compared to determine if a change has occurred and how extensive the DDL statements are when the script for deploying changes is genera
306. f this option is checked a single network connection is used to create a public database link that can be shared among multiple users In this case you must also specify the Authentication information Authentication User Name and Password The user name and password on the target instance This information authenticates the user to the remote server and is required for security The specified user and password must be a valid user and password on the remote instance DDL tab You can review and save the SOL statement that SOL Developer will use to create the database link 5 40 Create Edit Index The following information applies to an index which is a database object that contains an entry for each value that appears in the indexed column or columns of the table or cluster and provides direct fast access to rows as explained in Section 1 3 12 SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 17 Create Edit Index Indexes For detailed information about all index related options see the CREATE INDEX reference section in Oracle Database SQL Language Reference Advanced If this option is checked the dialog box changes to enable you to set advanced properties select Advanced on the left side Schema Database schema that owns the table associated with the index Table Name of the table associated with the index Name Name of the index Must be unique within a schema Index Type Normal for a standard Oracle index in which ca
307. fault directory is used Note these are Oracle directory objects that must be created before the external table can be used and the appropriate permissions must be granted SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 93 SQL Developer Preferences Staging Table Suffix For Staging External Table the suffix will be appended to the name of the table to create the name of the external table used as the staging table Commit and Drop Staging Table Indicates the default setting for the commit and drop staging table option If this option is enabled the staging table will be dropped and the data will be committed at the end of the load Database Worksheet The Worksheet pane specifies options that affect the behavior of the SOL Worksheet Open a worksheet on connect If this option is checked a SOL Worksheet window for the connection is automatically opened when you open a database connection If this option is not checked you must use the Open SOL Worksheet right click command or toolbar icon to open a SOL Worksheet New Worksheet to use unshared connection If this option is checked a separate unshared connection to the database is used for each new SOL Worksheet window that connects to a given database If this option is not checked the existing connection to the database is used for subsequent SOL Worksheet windows that connect to the database Close all worksheets on disconnect If this option is checked all SOL Worksheet windows for any
308. feta 1 96 IML SALON Nes sont ie reete tiet e de I HAT D re Dh e Dti e e ese eet etra fedes 1 97 Mouseover Popups iss eh edito nim nee Te A ene i n t eee didis 1 100 Shortcut Keys Accelerator Keys sse ene nnns 1 100 Unit Test P rameters e eee tee ce dead 1 101 VELO 1 101 Web Browser and Proxy iuter itte ete eterne rere eee iie 1 104 XMIT Schiemias eer ee ee ei tutae ed 1 105 Location of User Related Information cocccococconanoconnconnconannnononnnon nono non nonncno non anco non nncnncnnnns 1 105 Data Modeler in SOL Developer siini inana a aaay a r aa en nnne 1 106 Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database Support sss 1 106 Using the Helper e een eai td Se C theft rio cvs tmm ATTE SUE 1 107 Tip of the Day eee tee tede A end einen ands 1 107 SOL History Shortcuts tete RI in ih tegit t ene qe terrere 1 107 Unshared Worksheets 2 gaius dace ideada 1 107 SOL Worksheet Bookmarks inue etes eh iia iia 1 108 Oracle Data Minera Sene RR Et hee teet dese pate edo 1 108 Formatted Display of SOL Trace trc Files 1 108 Keyboard Navigation Alt Page Down Up to Move Among Tabs 1 108 Folders for Organizing ConnectioNS cocociononcnnnnnnninnonononinnonnnnonanonnonnonanonanonononananonononos 1 108 Third Party Databases and SQL Developer sees 1 108 Debugger Ports and Firewalls sssesssseeeeee eee eee 1 108 Viewing Multiple Tables
309. finition of the breakpoint Breakpoint Type Type of breakpoint indicating when the breakpoint will occur Options include breaking when one of the following occurs a specific line of code Source exception class or other class method file or watch Breakpoint Details Options depend on the breakpoint type Breakpoint Group Name Breakpoint group in which to include this breakpoint Breakpoint groups can be edited enabled and disabled Conditions tab Specify any conditions that apply to the breakpoint Condition A SQL condition WHERE clause without the WHERE keyword restricting when the breakpoint occurs For example to specify that the condition should occur only when status code is greater than 10 specify status code 10 Thread Options You can specify whether the breakpoint occurs for all threads or only when the breakpoint is hit by threads that either do or do not have a specified name Pass Count The number of times the debugger should allow execution to pass over the breakpoint before the breakpoint occurs Actions tab Specify the actions to be taken when the breakpoint occurs The options you specify override any default values on the Debugger Breakpoints Default Actions pane for SOL Developer Preferences Halt Execution Pauses execution when the breakpoint occurs Beep Beeps when the breakpoint occurs Log Breakpoint Occurrence Sends a message to the log window when the breakpoint Occurs You can
310. formation about jobs running on the database Security reports list privilege related information about the database Streams reports list information about stream rules Table reports list information about tables owned by the user associated with the specified connection These reports can help you to better understand the metadata and data The table reports include Quality Assurance reports that indicate possible logical design flaws and sources of runtime performance problems XML reports list information about XML objects Data Modeler reports list information about design objects that have been exported to the Data Modeler reporting repository TimesTen reports list information about Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database objects see Section 1 21 Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database Support User Defined reports are any customized reports that you have created Bind Variables for Reports For some reports you are prompted for bind variables before the report is generated These bind variables enable you to further restrict the output The default value for all bind variables is null which implies no further restrictions To specify a bind variable select the variable name and type an entry in the Value field Any bind variable values that you enter are case insensitive all matches are returned where the value string appears anywhere in the name of the relevant object type 1 72 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Repo
311. fy the output file such as a zip file to contain the script files that can be used to deploy the selected objects to the schema of another Oracle Database connection The generated script files include a master script that invokes the other scripts This master script has a name in the format Generated yyyymmddhhmmss sql where yyyymmdd is the master script file creation date and hhmmss is the creation time The default values for many options in this dialog box are determined by the Database Utilities Export user preferences File Location and name of the output file to contain the generated scripts plus any before and after scripts that you specified for the deployment You can click Browse to find a location Format Format for the output file such as ZIP for a zip file Export DDL If this option is checked the data definition language DDL statements for the database objects to be deployed are included in the output file and the other options in this group affect the content and format of the DDL statements For explanations of specific options see the Export DDL options under Database Utilities Export Data If this option is checked the output file or files contain appropriate statements or data for inserting the data for deployed tables and views If this option is not checked the data for deployed tables and views is not included that is only the DDL statements are included SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and W
312. g this option Database PL SQL Compiler The PL SQL Compiler pane specifies options for compilation of PL SQL subprograms Generate PL SOL Debug Information If this option is checked PL SOL debug information is included in the compiled code if this option is not checked this debug information is not included The ability to stop on individual code lines and debugger access to variables are allowed only in code compiled with debug information generated Types of messages You can control the display of informational severe and performance related messages The ALL type overrides any individual specifications for the other types of messages For each type of message you can specify any of the following a No entry blank Use any value specified for ALL and if none is specified use the Oracle default Enable Enable the display of all messages of this category Disable Disable the display of all messages of this category Error Enable the display of only error messages of this category Optimization Level 0 1 or 2 reflecting the optimization level that will be used to compile PL SQL library units The higher the setting of this parameter the more effort the compiler makes to optimize PL SQL library units However for a module to be compiled with PL SOL debugging information the level must be 0 or 1 PLScope Identifiers Specifies the amount of PL Scope identifier data to collect and use All or None Data
313. g Change Plans 25 1 ie te eei eee reme eni Leder a 1 61 16 Application Express Listener Administration sse 1 63 16 1 About Oracle Application Express Listener sees een 1 63 16 2 Application Express Listener Administration Toolbar and Context Menu 1 63 16 3 Connecting to Application Express Listener Server sess 1 64 16 4 Listener Navigator Global and Database Settings sess 1 64 16 4 1 COonriectioris ea 1 66 16 4 2 RESTful Connections ice at eee tete ee chetin eda ie eed oes 1 67 16 4 3 DECUIILY s itai tentabat ee b rare t ba bb er ios 1 68 16 4 4 Cache Files nob E Reti Hane mere En Ee Le ERE 1 69 16 4 5 Environment 2 222 nee etie a n Ho eda eo bo e ola ee ding 1 70 16 4 6 Excel hac EU etienne 1 71 AF SOL Developer Repotts re eee cete te re ree ie nit iiie e teer eres 1 71 17 1 About Your Database reports ene teret niet ete e ete dtes 1 73 17 2 AdMObjects reports eret Decet ete derat ape bao eh aia blico 1 73 17 3 Application Express reports eiii asas ita 1 73 17 4 ASH and AWR reports eR te qe a Eder out 1 73 vi 17 5 17 6 17 7 17 8 17 9 17 10 17 11 17 12 17 13 17 14 17 15 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 18 6 18 7 18 8 18 9 18 10 18 11 18 12 18 13 18 14 18 15 18 16 18 17 1 19 1 20 1 21 1 22 1 23 1 28 1 1 23 2 1 23 3 1 23 4 1 23 5 1 23 6 1 23 7 1 23 8 1 23 9 1 2
314. g guarantees consistent result sets The REFERENCED setting can result in different numbers of rows returned depending on the columns referenced in subsequent queries but is faster than the ALL setting If a subsequent query selects all columns of the external table then the settings behave identically Reject Limit The number of conversion errors can occur during a query of the external data before an Oracle Database error is returned and the query is aborted Access Parameters Values to the parameters of the specific access driver for this external table Location Specifications One or more external data sources Each is usually a file but it need not be Oracle Database does not interpret this clause it is up to the access driver to interpret this information in the context of the external data Use the Add icon to add each location specification Comment pane Optional descriptive comment about the table 5 36 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Storage Options DDL pane You can review and save the CREATE TABLE statement that SOL Developer will use to create a new table or that reflects any changes you have made to the table properties If you want to make any changes go back to the relevant tabs and make the changes there To save the SOL statement to a script file click Save and specify the location and file name When you are finished click OK 5 55 Storage Options This dialog box is displayed if you click S
315. gger Options include Create Create PK from Sequence create a before insert trigger to populate the primary key using values from a specified sequence Enable or Disable All Enable or Disable Single and Drop delete the trigger Import Data Enables you to import data from a Microsoft Excel worksheet xls or csv file Export Data Enables you to export some or all of the table data to a file or to the system clipboard in any of the following formats XML XML tags and data CSV comma separated values including a header row for column identifiers SOL Insert INSERT statements or SOL Loader SOL Loader control file After you select a format the Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data wizard is displayed You can perform the following operations on a column in a table by right clicking the column name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Rename Renames the column Drop Deletes the column including all data in that column from the table Comment Adds a descriptive comment about the column Encrypt for Oracle Database Release 10 2 and higher and only if the Transparent Data Encryption feature is enabled for the database Displays a dialog box in which you specify a supported encryption algorithm to be used for encrypting all data in the column Current data and subsequently inserted data are encrypted Decrypt for Oracle Database Release 10 2 and higher and only if the Transparent
316. gging Page Contains an entry for each migrated related operation Data Editor Log Contains entries when data is being manipulated by SOL Developer For example the output of a Microsoft Excel import operation will be reported here as a series of INSERT statements 2 3 5 Using the Translation Scratch Editor You can use the translation scratch editor to enter third party database SQL statements and have them translated to Oracle PL SQL statements You can specify translation from Microsoft SOL Server T SQL to PL SQL from Sybase T SQL to PL SQL or from Microsoft Access SOL to PL SQL SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 33 Command Line Interface for Migration You can display the scratch editor by clicking Tools then Migration then Translation Scratch Editor The scratch editor consists of two SQL Worksheet windows side by side as shown in the following figure scratch Editor x Y gt BBA B Worksheet Query Builder CREATE OR REPLACE VIEW UNKNOUN NAME AS SELECT District Name FROM Sales Districts WHERE District Id 1 EA sales_access 99 255653 select District Name from Sales Districts where District Id 1 Source Tree X he Source AST Tree E SELECT 0 17 to lt 1 24 gt D3 SELECT LIST 0 21 3 SELECT ITEM 0 217 3 DBOBJECT NAME 0 217 To translate a statement to its Oracle equivalent select the type of translation enter the third party SOL s
317. gnated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work 2 Grant of Copyright License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable copyright license to reproduce prepare Derivative Works of publicly display publicly Xix XX perform sublicense and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form 3 Grant of Patent License Subject to the terms and conditions of this License each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual worldwide non exclusive no charge royalty free irrevocable except as stated in this section patent license to make have made use offer to sell sell import and otherwise transfer the Work where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution s alone or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licen
318. grating From Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server 2 14 2 2 4 3 Before Migrating From Microsoft Access sssssseeeeee eee 2 15 2 2 4 4 Before Migrating From MySQL eene nennen nennen 2 17 2 2 4 5 Before Migrating From Teradata sess eee nennen 2 17 2 2 5 Capturing the Source Database eiecit riae terat 2 18 2 2 5 1 Offline Capture anta ee ham e oer Rene 2 18 2 2 6 Creating and Customizing the Converted Model sess 2 19 2 2 6 1 Correcting Errors in the Converted Model sess 2 19 2 2 7 Generating the DDL for the Oracle Schema Objects sss 2 20 2 2 8 Migrating the Data eere te Ie eie patei dee t p em dee te cote e ae 2 20 vii viii 2 2 8 1 2 2 9 2 2 10 2 2 10 1 2 2 10 2 2 2 11 2 2 11 1 2 2 11 2 2 3 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 4 Transferring the Data Offline sse eene 2 20 Making Queries Case Insensitive ccccccssssesescscecesesssnsnesesesceeesescscsanenesesneeseseeeanenens 2 25 Testing the Oracle Database teh ee ree ere tit dei 2 25 Testing Methodology ce en diana 2 26 Testing the Oracle Database sse eene 2 27 Deploying the Oracle Database sss eee eee eee 2 29 Choosing a Rollout Strategy sese eene nene nnne 2 30 Deploying the Destination Database sess eene 2 30 SOL Developer User Interface for Migration eee eene 2
319. group 5 56 Create Edit Tablespace This dialog box is used for creating a new tablespace or editing an existing tablespace The tablespace properties are grouped under several tabs For more information see the CREATE TABLESPACE statement in Oracle Database SQL Language Reference Name Name of the tablespace Tablespace Type Permanent contains persistent schema objects that are stored in data files Temporary contains schema objects only for the duration of a session and stored in temp files or Undo a type of permanent tablespace used by Oracle Database to manage undo data if you are running your database in automatic undo management mode Properties tab Specifies general properties for the database role File Type Small File a traditional Oracle tablespace which can contain 1022 data files or temp files each of which can contain up to approximately 4 million 2 22 blocks or Big File contains only one data file or temp file which can contain up to approximately 4 billion 2 32 blocks Management Type Local uses bitmaps in the tablespaces themselves to manage extents or Dictionary uses the data dictionary to manage extents Auto Allocate If this option is enabled Oracle Database determines the optimal size of additional extents with a minimum extent size of 64 KB Uniform Size available only if Auto Allocate is disabled You can specify an extent size or use the default size of 1 MB All extents in the ta
320. hat is if the query returns no rows the result of the validation action is success 14 Run the AWARD BONUS DYN QUERY unit test For the basic steps to run a unit test see Section 3 12 5 3 6 Using Lookups to Simplify Unit Test Creation A lookup is an object that contains for one or more data types data values that can be tested Lookups are mainly used for the following purposes Providing lists of values dropdown lists for Input fields as explained in Section 3 6 1 Automatically creating test implementations based on lookup values as explained in Section 3 6 2 To create a lookup 1 Inthe Unit Test navigator right click the Lookups node and select Add Category 2 Specify the category name for example EMP ID LOOKUP 3 Foreach data type for which you want to specify lookup values that is valid and invalid data values for possible testing right click the category name and select Add Datatype select the data type and use the plus sign icon to add as many data values as you want Note that nu11 is automatically included in the list of values for each data type for each lookup that you create For example for the environment described in Section 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial you could create lookups named EMP ID LOOKUP and SALES AMT LOOKUP Each would have only one data type NUMBER For the NUMBER data for each lookup use the plus sign icon to add each of the following values on a
321. hat is the third party application language What version of the application language are you using In the scope of the project you should have identified the applications you must migrate Ensure that you have included all the necessary applications that are affected by migrating the database What types of connectivity issues are involved in migrating to an Oracle database Do you use connectivity software to connect the applications to the third party database Do you need to modify the connectivity software to connect the applications to the Oracle database What version of the connectivity software do you use Can you use this same version to connect to the Oracle database Are you planning to rewrite the applications or modify the applications to work with an Oracle database Use Table 2 1 to determine whether you have a complex or simple source database environment Identify the requirements based on the specific scenario If the migration project is a simple scenario you may not have to complete all possible migration tasks You make decisions based on your specific environment For example if you have a complex scenario you may require extra testing based on the complexity of the application accessing the database Table 2 1 Complex and Simple Scenarios Complex Scenario Simple Scenario Involves more than one of the following Involves the following Large database greater than 25 GB Small database
322. hat you can work with include several that apply to an Oracle Database and the following that are specific to TimesTen Cache groups Replication schemes To create a connection to a TimesTen database use the TimesTen tab in the Create Edit Select Database Connection dialog box For additional usage and reference information see the following Oracle SQL Developer Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database Support User s Guide for information about using TimesTen specific features in SQL Developer m http www oracle com technetwork database timesten timesten sq ldeveloper overview 158942 html for an overview SQL Developer 1 106 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Tip of the Day support for Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database and Oracle TimesTen Application Tier Database Cache and links to related information a http www oracle com technetwork database timesten for links to TimesTen documentation white papers tutorials case studies and other resources 1 22 Using the Help SQL Developer provides a Help menu and context sensitive help click the Help button or press the F1 key in certain contexts Much of the help content is also in Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide which is in the SQL Developer Documentation Library Help is displayed in the Help Center window which has a Contents pane on the left a Search box at the top right and a help topic display pane under the Search box You can move the horizontal divider to
323. he Application Express Listener log output However you should rot enable this option on production systems due to the performance impact of outputting large amounts of data to the log Show error messages on browser If selected displays error responses in the browser including for each a detailed error message and a stack trace However do not enable this option on productions systems due to the risk of sensitive information being revealed Log Reporting Logging Specifies whether to make entries in the Oracle Application Express Listener The log includes activities such as adding a procedure to the cache finding a procedure in the cache or reloading a procedure The log displays the database time and processing time in milliseconds for that procedure Keep most recent log messages If selected entries that are most recent will remain in the log Specify the maximum number of log messages to cache When the maximum entries have been reached the older log messages are removed from the cache when a new log message is added Pre Processing Specify the names of procedures to be executed before executing the requested procedure To add an entry click the Add Procedure icon and enter the procedure name To delete an entry select it and click the Remove Procedure X icon 1 70 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Reports Post Processing Specify the names of procedures to be executed after executing the req
324. he database then click Create d From the File menu within the new database select Get External Data then select Import e Select the secured Microsoft Access database that you want to import then click Import f From the Import Objects dialog click Options g Select the Relationships and Definition and Data options h From the Tables tab choose Select All i Click OK All Microsoft Access objects are copied over to the new Microsoft Access database except for the security settings SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 15 Migration Background Information and Guidelines 5 If the application contains linked tables to other Microsoft Access databases refresh these links by opening the application in Microsoft Access and performing the following From the Tools menu in Microsoft Access 97 select Add Ins then select Linked Table Manager From the Tools menu in Microsoft Access 2000 select Database Utilities then select Linked Table Manager 6 Ensure that the Microsoft Access database is not a replica database but a master database When you use the Exporter for Microsoft Access to export an error message is displayed if the database is a replica SOL Developer does not support the migration of a replica database 7 From the Tools menu within Microsoft Access select Database then select Compact Database to compact the Microsoft Access database files 8 Ensure that the Microsoft Access
325. he destination group Members Select members for the group and specify whether to use the default credential for all members 5 39 Create Edit Database Link The following information applies to a database link which is a database object in one database that enables you to access objects on another database as explained in Section 1 3 6 Database Links Public and Private Public If this option is checked the database link is public available to all users If this option is not checked the database link is private and is available only to you Schema Database schema in which to create the database link Name Name of the database link Must be unique within a schema Host Name The service name of a remote database If you specify only the database name Oracle Database implicitly appends the database domain to the connect string to create a complete service name Therefore if the database domain of the remote database is different from that of the current database you must specify the complete service name Current User Creates a current user database link The current user must be a global user with a valid account on the remote database If the database link is used directly that is not from within a stored object then the current user is the same as the connected user Fixed User Creates a fixed user database link for which you specify the user name and password used to connect to the remote database Shared I
326. he master table The changes for direct path INSERT operations are stored in the direct loader log Force Refresh Performs a fast refresh if one is possible otherwise performs a complete refresh Never Do not perform refresh operations When The type of refresh operation to be performed On Demand Performs a refresh when one of the DBMS MVIEW refresh procedures is called On Commit Performs a fast refresh whenever the database commits a transaction that operates on a master table of the materialized view This may increase the time taken to complete the commit because the database performs the refresh operation as part of the commit process a Specify Performs refresh operations according to what you specify in the Start on and Next fields Never Does not perform a refresh operation Type Refresh type which determines the type of materialized view Primary Key Creates a primary key materialized view which allows materialized view master tables to be reorganized without affecting the eligibility of the materialized view for fast refresh a Row ID Creates a rowid materialized view which is useful if the materialized view does not include all primary key columns of the master tables Start on Starting date and time for the first automatic refresh operation Must be in the future Next Time for the next automatic refresh operation The interval between the Start on and Next times establishes the interval
327. he objects or the parent object that contains the specified object double click or right click its name in the results display You can detach move and dock the Find Database Objects pane by clicking and holding the tab and dragging and positioning the pane 1 10 Using Versioning SQL Developer provides integrated support for the Subversion versioning and source control system and you can add support for other such systems as extensions by clicking Help then Check for Updates Available extensions include CVS Concurrent Versions System Serena Dimensions and Perforce The SOL Developer documentation does not provide detailed information about the concepts and 1 42 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using Versioning operations of such systems it assumes that you know them or can read about them in the product documentation a For information about Subversion see http subversion tigris org For Subversion documentation see http svnbook red bean com a For the CVS manual by Per Cederqvist and others see http ximbiot com cvs manual To access the versioning features of SOL Developer use the Versioning menu If you create any versioning repositories you can use the hierarchical display in the Files navigator which is marked by a folder icon If that navigator is not visible click View then Files You can also view a hierarchical display of repositories and their contents in the Versioning navigator 1
328. hen uses the materialized view log to refresh materialized views based on the master table This process is called incremental or fast refresh Without a materialized view log Oracle Database must reexecute the materialized view query to refresh the materialized view This process is called a complete refresh Usually a fast refresh takes less time than a complete refresh 1 3 18 Multitenant Container Database CDB A multitenant container database CDB is an Oracle database that includes zero one or many user created pluggable databases PDBs A PDB is a portable collection of schemas schema objects and nonschema objects that appears to an Oracle Net client as a non CDB For more information see the Overview of Pluggable Databases and Architecture of Pluggable Databases chapters in Oracle Database Concepts 1 3 19 Packages A package is an object that contains subprograms which are programming objects that can be stored and executed in the database server and called from other programming objects or applications A package can contain functions or procedures or both For help with specific options in creating a package see Section 5 45 Create PL SOL Package You can perform the following operations on a package by right clicking the package name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Edit Opens the package in a window where you can modify the content and other information Run Lets yo
329. here are transactions to be committed Select the appropriate option and click OK To commit the changes and end the session select Commit Changes To roll back the changes and end the session select Rollback Changes To cancel the attempt to end the session select Abort Connection Disconnect Selecting Abort Connection Disconnect and clicking OK has the same effect as clicking Cancel 5 17 Create New Object This dialog box is displayed if you click File then New Specify the type of object to create After you click OK the dialog box for creating that type of object is displayed 5 18 Create Chain This dialog box or pane is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler chain For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer To create a chain SOL Developer internally uses the DBMS SCHEDULER CREATE CHAIN procedure Name Name of the chain Schema Schema for the credential If it is not specified the schema is that for the connection you are using Description Optional text string that can be used to describe the chain Enable Enables the chain Causes the DBMS SCHEDULER ENABLE procedure to be called after the chain is created 5 19 Create Edit Credential This dialog box or pane is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler credential or editing an existing credential For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer
330. hich the font displays for code editors a All features of the product have black text on a white or gray background Colored text underlining or images are never used as the only method of conveying information 6 3 4 No Audio only Feedback In SQL Developer there is no situation in which the only feedback a user receives is audible feedback All audible feedback is accompanied by a visual indicator For example a prompt accompanies the bell sound that occurs when an error or illegal action has taken place 6 3 5 No Dependency on Blinking Cursor and Animation SOL Developer makes minimal use of a blinking cursor and animation No features in SOL Developer use blinking indicators with the exception of the cursor in the source editor No features rely on animated sequences 6 3 6 Screen Magnifier Usability The SOL Developer user interface works well with screen magnifiers All features of the product can be magnified by a screen magnifier 6 3 7 How to Change the Editor or Tabbed View of a File When you press Enter on a node in the Connections Navigator you open the default editor for that file To switch to the different editors and views available for a document you can use the Alt Page Up and Alt Page Down accelerators to invoke the Navigate gt Go to Window gt Right Editor and Navigate gt Go to Window gt Left Editor menu commands respectively 6 3 8 How to Read Text in a Multiline Edit Field To have
331. ialog box is displayed if you right click a node under a connection in the Versioning navigator and select Properties It displays properties and property values for the selected object 5 184 Subversion Remove from Subversion Use this dialog box to begin the process of removing the listed files from the Subversion repository After you have clicked OK the listed files will appear on the Outgoing tab of the Pending Changes window The files will be removed from the Subversion dialog when you next commit the individual files or the working copy that they are part of 5 185 Subversion Repository Browser Use this dialog box to select the location of a Subversion repository when using the branching merging and switching facilities Locations in this dialog are shown as directories and objects The chosen location is ultimately returned from this dialog as a URL Repository Connection If the required location already exists select it from the browser tree To create a new location navigate to a parent directory then select the Create New Remote Directory icon This opens a dialog box that will show the location of the parent object in the form of a URL and let you name a directory beneath that one that will become the new location 5 186 Subversion Revert Local Changes Use this dialog box to revert files to their previous state If the contents of a file have been changed the file will be reverted to its base revision If a fil
332. ibution Neither the name of the author nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Batik Version 1 7 This program contains Batik version 1 7 which has the following associated attribution text This product includes software developed by The Apache Software Foundation http www apache org This software contains code from the World Wide Web Consortium W3C for the Document Object Model API DOM API and SVG Document Type Definition DTD This software contains code from the International Organisation for Standardization for the definition of character entities used in the software s documentat
333. ication Express Listener Administration 1 16 Application Express Listener Administration The Oracle Application Express Listener Administration interface enables you to specify global settings and multiple database settings with different database connections for the Oracle Application Express Listener You can create retrieve upload and save Application Express Listener settings See the following subtopics for more information a About Oracle Application Express Listener Application Express Listener Administration Toolbar and Context Menu Connecting to Application Express Listener Server Listener Navigator Global and Database Settings 1 16 1 About Oracle Application Express Listener Oracle Application Express Listener is a JEE based alternative for Oracle HTTP Server OHS and mod plsql The JEE implementation offers increased functionality including command line based configuration enhanced security file caching and RESTful Web Services Oracle Application Express Listener also provides increased flexibility by supporting deployments using Oracle WebLogic Server Oracle Glassfish Server and a standalone mode The Oracle Application Express architecture requires some form of Web server to proxy requests between a Web browser and the Oracle Application Express engine Oracle Application Express Listener satisfies this need but its use goes beyond that of Oracle Application Express configurations Using Oracle Applicati
334. ick the Deploy icon to display the Deploy Objects dialog box After you complete the information in that dialog box SOL Developer creates a zip file containing scripts including a master script that can be used to create the objects in the schema of a desired destination connection Before you use the Cart ensure that the Database Utilities Cart and Database Utilities Cart Cart Deploy preferences reflect what you want To display the Cart window click View then Cart The following figure shows that window after some objects have been added SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 53 Deploying Objects Using the Cart Ef Cart x amp l 2 g Bpa Selected Objects x w Include Type Owner Mame v DDL v Data Where viu v TABLE HR EMPLOYEES Y Y J eD v TABLE HR JOB_HISTORY Y Y v TABLE HR JOBS v v 4 iv PROCEDURE HR ADD JOB HISTORY v _ Before Script After Script Deploy Cloud icon Deploy to the Oracle Cloud active if one or more objects are included After you have added the objects to be deployed and specified any desired options click this icon to display the Deploy Objects to Cloud dialog box where you can specify further options and deploy the objects to the Oracle Cloud Deploy icon Create a deployment file active if one or more objects are included After you have added the objects to be deployed and specified any desired options
335. ick the pin again the object s display is available for reuse a Run updates the display by querying the database for the latest information Refresh lets you select an interval for automatically updating the display a Actions displays a menu with actions appropriate for the object For example the actions for a job include New Job Drop Run Job Now and Create Like With information displays that are in grid form you can often use the context right click menu on a header or a data cell to perform operations like those for the 1 52 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Deploying Objects Using the Cart table data grid as explained in Section 1 5 Entering and Modifying Data For example right clicking on a header lets you select options like Auto fit Columns Sort Delete Persisted Settings such as any sort order specifications and Filter Column right clicking any data cell lets you select options like Save Grid as Report Single Record View Count Rows Find Highlight find and optionally highlight values in the grid and Export unload data Several Scheduler reports are also available 1 12 1 Scheduler Design Editor The scheduler design editor is a graphical interface for Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer To create edit or delete any Oracle Scheduler objects in the editor you must be in write mode You can use the editor toolbar toggle button or the right click command to Switch to write mode and Switch to re
336. ides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages 9 Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof You may choose to offer and charge a fee for acceptance of support warranty indemnity or other liability obligations and or rights consistent with this License However in accepting such obligations You may act only
337. ify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant permission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor prov
338. imported files Path The directory within the Subversion repository for storing the imported files Source Source Directory The directory containing the source files that you want to import into Subversion Initially contains a path based on the item that was selected when you launched the wizard Comments Comment text to accompany the imported files The comments are recorded with the files in the Subversion repository and will be viewable with the version history of the files You must enter some comment text otherwise an error will occur when you click Finish to attempt to perform the import operation Filters Filters that will be applied to the import operation If you do not want one or more of the filters to be applied move them from Selected Filters to Available Filters using the left arrow keys If necessary you can use the right arrow keys to move filters from Available Filters to Selected Filters New Displays a dialog box in which you can create a new filter that will be applied to the import operation New filters are added to the Selected Filters list Options You can configure options specific to the import operation Do Not Recurse If this option is enabled it prevents files being imported from directories subordinate to the one you identified on the Source page Perform Checkout If this option is enabled the imported source files will be checked out after import Summary Displays the selected options
339. ine Counts For each PL SQL object lists the number of source code lines This information can help you to identify complex objects for example to identify code that may need to be simplified or divided into several objects 1 17 10 Security reports Security reports list information about users that have been granted privileges and in some cases about the users that granted the privileges This information can help you or the database administrator if you are not a DBA to understand possible security issues and vulnerabilities and to decide on the appropriate action to take for example revoking certain privileges from users that do not need those privileges Auditing Lists information about audit policies Encryption Lists information about encrypted columns Grants and Privileges Includes the following reports Column Privileges For each privilege granted on a specific column in a specific table lists the user that granted the privilege the user to which the privilege was granted the table the privilege and whether the user to which the privilege was granted can grant that privilege to other users Object Grants For each privilege granted on a specific table lists the user that granted the privilege the user to which the privilege was granted the table the privilege and whether the user to which the privilege was granted can grant that privilege to other users Role Privileges For each granted role lists th
340. ing of SecureFiles LOB segments specify this if you want to log only metadata changes Force Logging If this option is enabled Oracle Database will log all changes to all objects in the tablespace except changes to temporary segments overriding any NOLOGGING setting for individual objects The database must be open and in READ WRITE mode Segment Management Auto the database manages the free space of segments in the tablespace using a bitmap also called automatic segment space management or Manual the database to manage the free space of segments in the tablespace using free lists Table Compression Type of compression for table data in the tablespace No Compress no compression performed Compress basic table compression Oracle Database attempts to compress data during direct path INSERT operations when it is productive to do so Compress for All Operations OLTP table compression Oracle Database compresses data during all DML operations on the table or Compress for Direct Load same as Compress File Specifications tab Specifies data files for the tablespace For more information see the ALTER TABLESPACE statement in Oracle Database SQL Language Reference File Specifications Contains one entry for each data file in the tablespace To add a file click the Add plus sign icon to remove a file from the tablespace but not delete the file itself click the Remove X icon File Specification Properties Displays pro
341. ion 2 Must include Apache License Version 2 0 with any distribution of Apache Batik 1 7 Apache License Version 2 0 January 2004 http www apache org licenses TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE REPRODUCTION AND DISTRIBUTION 1 Definitions License shall mean the terms and conditions for use reproduction and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control are controlled by or are under common control with that entity For the purposes of this definition control means i the power direct or indirect to cause the direction or management of such entity whether by contract or otherwise or ii ownership of fifty percent 50 or more of the outstanding shares or iii beneficial ownership of such entity You or Your shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of au
342. ion for example if an EMPLOYEES table exists in the source and destination this option deletes any existing data in the destination object before copying the data from the source connection If this option is not selected the copied data is appended to the existing data in the destination object Object Types page See Types under Shared Wizard Pages Select Schemas page If you specified Schemas Copy select one or more schemas from the Available Source Schemas list and click the right arrow to move them to Selected Source Schemas Select Tablespace page If you specified Tablespace Copy select the Source Tablespace and Destination Tablespace Objects in the source tablespace are copied into the destination tablespace Specify Objects page See Specify Objects under Shared Wizard Pages Specify Data page See Data under Shared Wizard Pages Summary page See Summary under Shared Wizard Pages 5 72 Database Differences This wizard is displayed if you click Tools then Database Diff You can find differences between objects of the same type and name for example tables named CUSTOMERS accessible from two different connections and optionally generate DDL to update the objects in the destination schema to reflect the differences in the source schema Use the Source Destination page to specify the source and destination database connections Database objects in the schemas associated with these connections will be compared The
343. ion in the Connections navigator 5 139 Report Panel This panel is mainly used to display specific SOL Developer Reports See the help for the relevant report or report type This panel is also used for displays of some other features such as Monitor Sessions on the Tools menu 5 140 Reset Expired Password Enter New Password This dialog box is displayed if you attempt to create a new database connection or open an existing connection and if the password associated with the used for the connection has expired It is also displayed only if an OCI thick driver is available if an OCI driver is not available an error message is displayed instead of this dialog box To reset the password enter the current password for the specified user enter the new password confirm the password type the same new password and click OK 5 141 Revision Lister This dialog box is displayed if you click List Revisions in the Subversion Branch Tag dialog box It contains a list of revisions in the repository Select the desired revision to use and click OK 5 142 Run Debug Profile PL SQL Use this box to specify parameter values for running debugging or profiling a PL SQL function or procedure If you specify a package select a function or procedure in the package A profile operation runs the function or procedure and collects execution statistics it also requires auxiliary structures in the user schema For information see Section 1 6
344. ipt Linux on the operating system command line ututil is located in the sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin folder or sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin directory under the location where you installed SOL Developer ututil batorututil sh accepts these commands run to run a test or suite exp to perform an export operation and imp to perform an import operation For detailed information about the syntax and options start by running ututil without any parameters at the system command prompt For example C Program Files sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin gt ututil ututil run ututil exp ututil imp Then enter the command for information about the command that you want to use For example ututil run The ututil run command includes the following parameters SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 11 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial a db connection name gt specifies the database connection associated with the database user to be used for running the unit test a repo connection name gt specifies the database connection associated with the unit testing repository to be used for running the unit test a log lt 0 1 2 3 gt specifies the logging level where 0 No logging the default 1 Report the status 2 Report the status and error message 3 Report the status error message and return ID value a return return id gt specifies the return ID value which is used as the primary key in the results table and
345. ir original SOL code remains unchanged Objects that remain in their original SOL code will not be used when the generation scripts are created Therefore to have any such objects migrated you must either fix the problem in the original SOL code before generating the script or edit the generated script to replace the original SOL code with valid PL SQL code The conversion of the captured model to a converted model is done as part of Migrating Using the Migration Wizard You can specify or accept the defaults for data mappings The following topic describes how to modify the converted model if this becomes necessary Correcting Errors in the Converted Model 2 2 6 1 Correcting Errors in the Converted Model If error messages with the prefix Parse Exception are listed in the migration log manual intervention is required to resolve the issues To complete the converted model 1 Note the converted model schema object that failed 2 Select that schema object in the converted model SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 19 Migration Background Information and Guidelines 3 Copy the schema objects DDL and paste it into the translation scratch editor displayed by clicking Migration then Translation Scratch Editor 4 Inspect the properties on the schema object in the translation scratch editor for possible causes of the error 5 Modify a property of the schema object in the translation scratch editor For exa
346. ironment uncheck this option Export Data If this option is checked the output file or files contain appropriate statements or data for inserting the data for an exported table or view the specific output format is determined by the Export Data Format setting If this option is not checked the data for an exported table or view is not exported that is only the DDL statements are included If you check Export Data all data in all tables in the selected schema is exported unless you use the Filter Data tab to limit the data to be migrated Export Data Format Specifies the format to be used for exporting data for a table or view For example insert causes SOL INSERT statements to be included to insert the data loader causes SOL Loader files to be created and x1s causes a Microsoft Excel xls file to be created SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 91 SQL Developer Preferences Save As Specifies how the output of an export operation is to be generated You can also click Browse to find and select the location for the output Single File A single file contains both DDL and data Separate Files Each object is saved to a separate file in the specified directory Type Files Objects of the same type are saved to a single file in the specified directory Separate Directories A directory for each object type being exported is created Files are created in the appropriate directory a Worksheet Statements are sent to
347. is dialog box is displayed if you click Edit server in the Versioning Subversion General preferences pane You can modify the Subversion configuration file directly 5 86 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Subversion Import to Subversion Reset Discards any changes that you have made and leaves the dialog box open To save any changes and close the box click OK to discard any changes and close the box click Cancel 5 175 Subversion Export Files Use this dialog box to copy files from the Subversion repository to a local file system directory or to copy working copies to a local file system directory Working Copy Path The location of the files that will be copied for export Only files that are under Subversion control will be exported Destination Path A path that includes the directory where you want the files to be copied to 5 176 Subversion Export Subversion Connections Use this dialog box to export the details of one or more current Subversion connections to a file The details can subsequently be imported from the file to re create the connections File Name The location and name for the file that will contain the connection details or browse to a file location using the Browse button Connections Select one or more connections whose details will be exported 5 177 Subversion Ignore Use this dialog box to mark a file or a pattern that identifies common file names as content that Subversion should ig
348. is program includes Bouncy Castle Crypto API 1 45 which has the following associated attribution text Copyright c 2000 2009 The Legion Of The Bouncy Castle http www bouncycastle org Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE JGoodies Looks 1 3 1 This program includes JGoodies Looks 1 3 1 which has the following associated attribution text The BSD License for the JGoodies Looks xxi xxii Copyright O 2003 JGoodies Karsten Lentzsch All rights reserved Redistributi
349. ission to use the trade names trademarks service marks or product names of the Licensor except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file 7 Disclaimer of Warranty Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing Licensor provides the Work and each Contributor provides its Contributions on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied including without limitation any warranties or conditions of TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License 8 Limitation of Liability In no event and under no legal theory whether in tort including negligence contract or otherwise unless required by applicable law such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts or agreed to in writing shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages including any direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill work stoppage computer failure or malfunction or any and all other commercial damages or losses even if such Contributor has been advise
350. ithout notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT END USERS Oracle programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation delivered to U S Government end users are commercial computer software pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs No other rights are granted to the U S Government This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications that may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure its safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability
351. ition Details For each subpartition template specify a name and if relevant a value or set of values that is appropriate for the subpartition type Storage Enables you to specify a tablespace for the subpartition Partition Definitions pane Defines each partition for a partitioned table The options depend on the partition type and might include the following Partitions Specifications to control the placement of rows in each partition Click the Add icon to add a partition specification that is appropriate for the partition type Partition Details For each partition specification specify a name and if relevant a value or set of values that is appropriate for the subpartition type Storage Enables you to specify a tablespace for the partition Subpartitions Enables you to specify subpartition information Index Organized Properties pane Specifies options for an index organized table which is a table in which the rows both primary key column values and nonkey column values are maintained in an index built on the primary key Index organized tables are best suited for primary key based access and manipulation PCTTHRESHOLD The percentage of space reserved in the index block for an index organized table row must be large enough to hold the primary key All trailing columns of a row starting with the column that causes the specified threshold to be exceeded are stored in the overflow segment PCTTHRESHOLD must be a val
352. izards 5 59 Deploy Objects Truncate Destination Data Causes any data in any destination tables or views with the same names to be deleted before the deployed data is inserted If this option is not selected the deployed data is appended to any existing data Apply Creates a single file containing the deployment script files including the master script that invokes the other scripts 5 77 2 Deploy Objects to Cloud You can deploy objects to the Cloud except as noted in Section 5 77 2 1 Unsupported Type Error for Cloud Deployment Cloud Connection Name of a previously created Cloud connection Title A short descriptive string identifying this deployment Server Server for the Cloud service for example a WebLogic Server system Port Port to be used for the deployment For example 2222 Authorization SFTP User Secure FTP user name that you received in email when you signed up for the Cloud service SFTP Password Password for the SFTP user Transfer File zip file to contain the files to be used by SOL Developer for the deployment Deploy DDL Specify whether not to replace or to replace existing destination objects that have the same schema name and object name combination Deploy Data Truncate destination data If you specified not to replace existing destination objects then for each existing destination table this controls whether any existing data is truncated deleted before the source table data i
353. jobs that use this schedule are to run Repeating specify the repeat interval Queue specify the queue name or File Watcher specify the file watcher object name SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 25 Create Edit Sequence SQL Displays the DBMS SCHEDULER CREATE SCHEDULE procedure that will be used to create the schedule according to your specifications 5 50 Create Edit Sequence The following information applies to a sequence which is an object from which multiple users may generate unique integers You can use sequences to automatically generate primary key values Schema Database schema in which to create the sequence Name Name of the sequence Must be unique within a schema Increment Interval between successive numbers in a sequence Start with Starting value of the sequence Min value Lowest possible value for the sequence The default is 1 for an ascending sequence and 10 26 for a descending sequence Max value Highest possible value for the sequence The default is 10 27 for an ascending sequence and 1 for a descending sequence Cycle Indicates whether the sequence wraps around to reuse numbers after reaching its maximum value for an ascending sequence or its minimum value for a descending sequence If cycling of values is not enabled the sequence cannot generate more values after reaching its maximum or minimum value Cache and Cache size If Cache is checked sequence values are prealloca
354. lans in Enterprise Manager and populate them from Change Manager schema comparisons On the Databases page select Schema Change Plans then Create Enter the name of the new change plan and click OK In the resulting Change Plan page click Create from Comparison Select a version of a Schema Comparison and a Conversion Assignment as follows For the Change From side select the side of the comparison that represents the original state of the schema objects Forthe Change To side select the side of the comparison that represents the developed or evolved state of the schema objects Based on your selection Change Manager populates the change clan with Add Drop and Modify change items that if applied to the Change From objects will convert them into the Change To objects 1 15 3 2 Deploying Change Plans To deploy change plans Change Manager uses the script generation capability contained in its Schema Synchronizations application You deploy a change plan by creating a synchronization that applies the changes in the change plan to a database that you select To reduce the chance of incompatible change conflicts the objects in the database should be identical or similar to the initial objects from which the change plan s change items were created SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 61 Change Manager Support in SQL Developer To deploy a change clan to a database select the plan on the Change Plans page and then click Cr
355. lause 5 47 recompiling 1 22 SELECT clause 5 46 splitting the data pane 1 28 WHERE clause 5 46 Ww watches 1 32 WHERE clause 5 46 X XML DB Repository 1 22 XML schema 1 22 creating 5 49 xUnit frameworks 3 1 Z zero date handling MySQL connections 5 11 Index 8
356. le Lists the columns whose values are available to be used in assigning rows to partitions Selected Lists the column whose values are to be used in assigning rows to partitions To add a column to the partitioning definition select it in Available Columns and click the Add gt icon to remove a column from the partitioning definition select it in Selected Columns and click the Remove icon To move all columns from available 5 34 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Table with advanced options to selected or the reverse use the Add All gt gt or Remove All lt lt icon To move a column up or down in the partitioning definition select it in Selected Columns and use the arrow buttons Subpartition By The partitioning type to be used to create subpartitions within each range partition Use the Available and Selected column lists select and deselect a column for subpartitioning Subpartition Templates pane Specifies subpartitioning options for a partitioned table The options depend on the subpartition type and might include the following Hash Quantity Hash subpartition quantity Tablespaces Available and Selected tablespaces for storage of the data in a subpartition Subpartition Templates Specifications subpartition templates to control the placement of rows in each subpartition Click the Add icon to add a subpartition template that is appropriate for the subpartition type Subpart
357. le customized setting 6 4 1 How to Customize the Accelerators Keys You can add and change the default accelerator keys for Oracle SOL Developer in the Tools Preferences Shortcut Keys page You can also load preset keymaps that you are accustomed to using 6 4 2 How to Pass a Conflicting Accelerator Key to Oracle SQL Developer In addition to changing the mapped accelerator keys you can pass a conflicting accelerator key to JAWS by preceding the accelerator key combination with Insert F3 6 4 3 How to Change the Look and Feel of SQL Developer You can change the default look and feel for Oracle SOL Developer in the Tools gt Preferences Environment page The look and feel determines the display colors and shapes of objects like menus and buttons 6 4 4 How to Customize the Fonts in Code Editors You can change the font and font size that display in editors in the Tools Preferences Code Editor Fonts page 6 4 5 How to Customize Syntax Highlighting You can change the font style as well as the foreground and background colors used in syntax highlighting within the source editor in the Tools Preferences Code Editor PL SOL Syntax Colors page 6 4 6 How to Display Line Numbers in Code Editors You can display or hide line numbers in the source editor in the Tools gt Preferences gt Code Editor gt Line Gutter page 6 4 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Highly Visual Features of Oracle SQL Developer
358. le in the right hand area the same as the revision of the file in the left hand area Generate Patch button Opens the Generate Patch dialog where you can generate a patch containing changes that have been made to the files Left hand and right hand boxes The versions are aligned line by line Lines with differences are highlighted using shaded boxes joined as appropriate You cannot edit the left hand area you can edit the right hand area 5 110 Import to CVS This interface is displayed when you click Versioning then CVS then Import Module It enables you to import local files into the repository as a CVS module Module Select the connection name enter a name for the module and optionally enter a descriptive comment about the import operation SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 69 Install SQL Translator Tags Select the connection name enter a name for the module and optionally enter a descriptive comment about the import operation Sources Source Folder Location from which files will be copied for the import operation Filters You can configure filters to be used for excluding folders and files from the import operation Use the arrow keys to move selected filters or all filters between Available Filters and Selected Filters To create a filter and add it to the Selected Filters list click New to display the Create Filter dialog box Options You can specify options to be used during the import op
359. less than 25 GB Data warehouse Simple online transaction processing Large applications more than 100 OLTP forms reports and batch jobs Small application less than 100 forms Database used by multiple lines of reports and batch jobs business Database used by one department Distributed deployment Centralized deployment Large user base more than 100 Small user base less than 100 High availability requirement suchas Average availability business hours a 24 X 7 X 365 environment Determine whether the destination database requires additional hardware and rewriting of backup schedules 2 8 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines Define testing and acceptance criteria Define tests to measure the accuracy of the migration You then use the acceptance criteria to determine whether the migration was successful The tests that you develop from the requirements should also measure stability evaluate performance and test the applications You must decide how much testing is necessary before you can deploy the Oracle database and applications into a production environment Create a requirements document with a list of requirements for the migration project The requirements document should have clearly defined tasks and number each specific requirement breaking these into sub requirements where necessary 2 2 2 2 Task 2 Estimating Workload In this ta
360. lick OK to close the error box then follow the instructions for performing the schema differences operation as explained in Section 5 72 Database Differences 5 149 Script Execution Failed This error box is displayed if the script generated by the Quick Migrate procedure fails before it completes its execution The Build pane displays the error that caused the failure To close the error box and open the script in a SOL Worksheet window where you can edit the text and run the corrected script click Yes or to close the error box without opening the script in a SOL Worksheet window click No 5 150 Script Generation Complete This information box is displayed after you generate the controlling script and related files for performing an offline capture of a third party database as explained in Section 2 2 5 1 Offline Capture Click OK to close the box Later run the controlling script to generate output containing the converted model 5 151 Set Data Mapping This dialog box is displayed if you right click a captured model and select Set Data Mapping You can use this dialog box to specify source data type mappings when migrating the specified third party database to Oracle If you are editing an existing mapping you can change only the Oracle data type precision and scale information Show only data types used in the source model If you check this option only data types used in the selected captured model are shown If you d
361. ll be given a name based on the URL of the repository location 5 172 Subversion Create Edit Subversion Connection This information applies to creating or editing a Subversion connection For information about SOL Developer support for versioning and Subversion see Section 1 10 Repository URL Full valid URL for the location of the Subversion repository The following are URL schemas and the access methods they map to a file Direct repository access on local disk w http Access via WebDAV protocol to Subversion aware Apache server a https Same as http but with SSL encryption a SVn Access via custom protocol to an svnserve server a svn ssh Same as svn but through an SSH tunnel Connection Name Name for this connection If you leave this box blank the connection will be given a name based on the URL of the repository location User Name User name known to the repository if the repository requires user and password validation Password Password for the specified user or blank if a password is not required Test Read Access Attempts to establish a connection for read access to the Subversion repository Status Displays the result of the test success or an error message 5 173 Subversion Delete Resources Use this dialog box to delete the selected directory folder in the repository Comment Comment explaining the deletion 5 174 Subversion Edit Configuration File Th
362. ll books with a rating of 10 CALL list a rating 10 To run this procedure within SOL Developer right click LIST A RATING in the Connections navigator hierarchy display and select Run Under PL SOL Block in the Run PL SQL dialog box change IN RATING gt IN RATING to IN RATING gt 10 and click OK The Log window display will now include the following output All books with a rating of 10 Moby Dick Software Wizardry 4 8 Debug a PL SQL Procedure If you want to practice debugging a PL SQL procedure with SOL Developer create a procedure that is like the list a rating procedure that you created in Section 4 7 Create a PL SOL Procedure but with a logic error The coding is also deliberately inefficient to allow the display of the rating in a variable Before you can debug the procedure you must ensure that the user associated with the database connection has the DEBUG CONNECT SESSION and DEBUG ANY PROCEDURE privileges SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 9 Debug a PL SQL Procedure To create this procedure if you are not already connected connect to the database as the user for the schema you are using for this tutorial Right click the Procedures node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New Procedure and enter the following information using the Create PL SQL Procedure dialog box Object Name list a rating2 Click OK A source window for the new procedure is opened Ent
363. log box is displayed if you enable the Proxy Connection option in the Create Edit Select Database Connection dialog box For an explanation of proxy authentication see Section 1 4 5 Connections with Proxy Authentication Proxy Type User Name for authentication by proxy user name and password or Distinguished Name for authentication by proxy user name and distinguished name Proxy User Name of the user to be used for authentication for this connection Proxy Password if Proxy Type is User Name Password for the specified proxy user 5 74 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Delete or Truncate Repository Distinguished Name if Proxy Type is Distinguished Name Distinguished name for the specified proxy user 5 128 Paste This dialog box is displayed if you click Edit then Extended Paste It shows a list of clipboard items so that you can select the content to be pasted Click OK to paste the selected content into the current location Clipboard Items Clipboard items with content from copy operations Usually displays the first line of the content Item Content The content of the selected clipboard item 5 129 Privilege Warning for Migration This dialog box is displayed if you click Verify in the Quick Migrate box and the database user for the connection does not have all privileges necessary for a multischema migration For multischema migrations this user must granted the RESOURCE role with the ADMIN option and this
364. loper Migration Architecture shows how SOL Developer reads the information from the source database and creates the Oracle database schema objects SOL Developer uses the information stored in the migration repository to migrate to the Oracle schema You can make changes to the captured model or the converted model or both before migrating The information in the converted model is used to complete the migration that is to generate the database objects in the destination Oracle schema 2 6 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines Figure 2 1 SQL Developer Migration Architecture Source Database Migration Repository captu red SQL Developer odel o Converted ode o Destination Oracle Schema 2 2 1 2 Migration Implemented as SQL Developer Extensions Migration support is implemented in SOL Developer as a set of extensions If you want you can disable migration support or support for migrating individual third party databases To view the installed extensions and to enable or disable individual extensions click Tools then Preferences then Extensions Note that SOL Developer ships which all extensions and third party database plugins available at the time of release so to begin migrations other than for Microsoft Access only the third party drivers need be installed 2 2 2 Preparing a Migration Plan This topic describes the process of h
365. lowing operations on an object in the Recycle bin by right clicking the object name in the Recycle bin in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Purge Removes the object from the Recycle bin and deletes it To purge the Recycle bin you must have the SYSDBA or PURGEDBA RECYCLE system privilege DJ Z Flashback to Before Drop Moves the object from the Recycle bin back to its appropriate place in the Connections navigator display 1 3 25 Replication Schemes Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database A replication scheme is a configuration using SQL statements and a transaction based log whereby committed changes are copied from their source to one or more subscriber databases The goal is to enable high efficiency and low overhead during the replication 1 3 26 Schedules A schedule is an Oracle Scheduler object that specifies when and how many times a job is run Schedules can be shared by multiple jobs For example the end of a business quarter may be a common time frame for many jobs instead of having to define an end of quarter schedule each time a new job is defined job creators can point to a named schedule For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer 1 3 27 Sequences Sequences are used to generate unique integers You can use sequences to automatically generate primary key values For help with specific o
366. lowing places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use reproduction or distribution of Your modifications or for any such Derivative Works as a whole provided Your use reproduction and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License 5 Submission of Contributions Unless You explicitly state otherwise any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License without any additional terms or conditions Notwithstanding the above nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions 6 Trademarks This License does not grant perm
367. lso specify Kerberos thin driver configuration parameters which enables you to create database connections using Kerberos authentication and specifying the user name and password For more information see the Kerberos Authentication explanation on the Oracle tab in the Create Edit Select Database Connection dialog box For information about configuring Kerberos authentication see Oracle Database Advanced Security Administrator s Guide Use OCI Thick driver If this option is checked and if an OCI thick Type 2 driver is available that driver will be used instead of a JDBC thin driver for basic and TNS network alias database connections If any connections use a supported Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS server check this option Autocommit If this option is checked a commit operation is automatically performed after each INSERT UPDATE or DELETE statement executed using the SOL Worksheet If this option is not checked a commit operation is not performed until you execute a COMMIT statement Kerberos Thin Config Config File Kerberos configuration file for example krb5 conf If this is not specified default locations will be tried for your Java and system configuration Kerberos Thin Config Credential Cache File Kerberos credential cache file for example krb5 cc cache If this is not specified a cache will not be used and a principal name and password will be required each time Tnsnames Directory En
368. lter table tablename move lob blob column clob store as tablespace lob tablespace COMMIT END OF FILE FINISH SQL Modify this for your enironment This should be executed in the table schema in Oracle DESCRIPTION MOVES THE DATA FROM CLOB TO BLOB MODIFIES THE TABLE BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL SPEC without a clob THEN ENABLES THE SEQUENCES TRIGGERS AND INDEXES AGAIN Currently we have the hex values saved as text in the blob column CLOB column And we have NULL in all rows for the blob column column SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 23 Migration Background Information and Guidelines We have to get BLOB locators for each row in the BLOB column put empty blobs in the blob column UPDATE tablename SET blob column EMPTY BLOB COMMIT create the following procedure in your table schema CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE CLOBTOBLOB AS inputLength NUMBER size of input CLOB offSet NUMBER 1 pieceMaxSize NUMBER 2000 the max size of each peice piece VARCHAR2 2000 these pieces will make up the entire CLOB currentPlace NUMBER 1 this is where were up to in the CLOB blobLoc BLOB blob locator in the table clobLoc CLOB clob locator pointsthis is the value from the dat file THIS HAS TO BE CHANGED FOR SPECIFIC CUSTOMER TABLE AND COLUMN NAMES CURSOR cur IS SELECT blob column clob clob column blob column blob column FROM ta
369. lumn values are to be populated automatically This convenient approach uses a trigger and a sequence both created automatically by SOL Developer and ensures that each transaction ID value is unique Column TRANSACTION ID Sequence New Sequence Trigger TRANSACTIONS TRG The default a before insert trigger with this name will be created automatically Foreign Keys tab 1 Click Add to create the first of the two foreign keys for the TRANSACTIONS table Name for key patron id Referenced Schema Name of the schema containing the table with the primary key or unique constraint to which this foreign key refers Use the schema you have been using for this tutorial Referenced Table PATRONS Referenced Constraint PATRONS PK The name of the primary key constraint for the PATRONS table Be sure that the Referenced Column on PATRONS displayed value is PATRON ID Associations Local Column PATRON ID SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 5 Create a Sequence Associations Referenced Column on PATRONS PATRON ID 2 Click Add to create the second of the two foreign keys for the TRANSACTIONS table Name for key book id Referenced Schema Name of the schema containing the table with the primary key or unique constraint to which this foreign key refers Use the schema you have been using for this tutorial Referenced Table BOOKS Referenced Constraint BOOKS PK The name of the primary key con
370. lumns Data and so on 1 23 7 Folders for Organizing Connections You can group connections into folders Right click a connection name and select Add to Folder See the help topic Using Folders to Group Connections 1 23 8 Third Party Databases and SQL Developer In addition to Oracle databases SOL Developer works with several third party databases such as MySQL Sybase Microsoft Access Microsoft SOL Server and IBM DB2 For information about connecting to third party databases or about migrating a third party database to Oracle see the help topics Database Connections and SOL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 1 23 9 Debugger Ports and Firewalls The SOL Debugger by default uses ports 40000 to 49000 If you cannot get the debugger to start make sure that you are not being blocked by a firewall on these ports 1 23 10 Viewing Multiple Tables You can have tabs open for more than one table Just click the Freeze View button it looks like a push pin when you are viewing a table and when you click to display another table the tab for the first table will remain open 1 23 11 Customizing SQL Developer Appearance You can use the Look and Feel platform and Theme color scheme options under Environment preferences to customize the appearance of the SOL Developer window 1 108 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Tip of the Day 1 23 12 1 23 13 1 23 14 1 23 15 1 23 16 1 23 17 1 23 18 1 23 19
371. ly uses the DBMS SCHEDULER CREATE JOB procedure which is documented in Oracle Database PL SQL Packages and Types Reference Job Details Job Name Name of the job Embed Causes this schedule to be embedded into the main schedule Embedded schedules inherit certain attributes from the main schedule Description Optional text string that can be used to describe the job Logging Level Specifies how much information is written to the job log RUNS detailed information for all runs of each job in this class FULL RUNS plus all operations performed on all jobs in this class or OFF no logging Job Class Name of the job class to which this job belongs Type of Job Type of object to be executed by the job PL SOL Block Chain Stored Procedure Named Program or Executable When to Execute Job When to execute the job Immediate immediately on creation and once only Once once at a specified time Repeating Queue File Watcher SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 19 Create Edit Job Schedule using a named schedule object If you specify anything other than Immediate you are prompted for additional information Destination Local or the database destination for a remote database job or external destination for a remote external job Depending on what destination you selected for the job select the local credential the remote credential and destination or the multiple group Job Arguments If the
372. m Colors this option is not checked the blocks are placed at the least recently used end of the LRU list Build Type Specifies when to populate the materialized view Immediate indicates that the materialized view is to be populated immediately Deferred indicates that the materialized view is to be populated by the next refresh operation If you specify Deferred the first deferred refresh must always be a complete refresh until then the materialized view has a staleness value of unusable so it cannot be used for query rewrite Enable Query Rewrite If this option is checked the materialized view is enabled for query rewrite an optimization technique that transforms a user request written in terms of master tables into a semantically equivalent request that includes one or more materialized views Prebuilt Option If this option is checked an existing table is registered as a preinitialized materialized view This option is particularly useful for registering large materialized views in a data warehousing environment The table must have the same name and be in the same schema as the resulting materialized view and the table should reflect the materialization of a subquery Reduced Precision authorizes the loss of precision that will result if the precision of the table or materialized view columns do not exactly match the precision returned by subquery No Reduced Precision requires that the precision of the table or materialized vi
373. me Name of the application 5 58 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Deploy Objects Application Alias Alias for the application It is recommended that you never hard code the application ID into your application but instead use the application alias or a built in substitution string such as APP ID and APP ALIAS Build Status RUN ONLY or RUN AND BUILD Application ID Specify whether to have an application ID assigned automatically to use an existing listed ID or to specify a new ID Use these options to avoid application ID conflicts such as when you need to have two versions of the same application in the same instance For example you might be migrating an application to a production instance and still need to maintain the development version ID Currently Used by and Overwrite If the specified Application ID is currently used by another application you can enable Overwrite to have the application ID instead associated with the application being deployed or imported Summary Displays the selected options for the application to be deployed or imported To make any changes click Back To perform the operation click Finish 5 77 Deploy Objects This dialog box is displayed when you click the Deploy or Deploy Cloud icon in the Cart window described in Section 1 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart Deploy icon Deploy Objects Deploy Cloud icon Deploy Objects to Cloud 5 77 1 Deploy Objects You can speci
374. menu also contains items for any user defined external tools Preferences Enables you to customize the behavior of SOL Developer see Section 1 18 SOL Developer Preferences Help menu Displays help about SOL Developer and enables you to check for SOL Developer updates Search Displays the Help Center window Table of Contents Displays the Help Center window In this window you can click these icons Keep on Top Toggles whether to keep the Help Center window on top of the Data Modeler window Navigators Lets you select a help navigator SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 9 SQL Developer User Interface a Print Prints the topic Change Font Size Lets you increase or decrease the font size for the display of the current help topic Add to Favorites Adds the topic to the Favorites list a Find Lets you search for a string in the current help topic Start Page Displays a page with links for options for learning about SOL Developer Data Mining Displays an introductory help topic about Oracle Data Mining and its graphical user interface Data Miner which is integrated into SOL Developer Tip of the Day English locales only Displays a suggestion for efficient use of SOL Developer See Section 1 23 Tip of the Day Check for Updates Checks for any updates to the selected optional SOL Developer extensions as well as any mandatory SOL Developer extensions The available updates may include the J
375. migration project name in the Migration Projects navigator display and select Migration Project Doc you can specify whether to include child nodes of the selected node and child master detail per row reports To reset an expired password for the database user associated with a connection right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Reset Password enabled only if an OCI thick driver is available To rename a connection right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Rename Connection To delete a connection that is delete it from SOL Developer not merely disconnect from the current connection right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Delete Deleting a connection does not delete the user associated with that connection To connect using an existing connection expand its node in the Connections navigator or right click its name and select Connect A SOL Worksheet window is also opened for the connection see Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet To create a separate unshared worksheet for a connection click in the worksheet and use Ctrl Shift N To disconnect from the current connection right click its name in the Connections navigator and select Disconnect To reconnect to a connection where the session had been terminated right click its name in the Connections navigator and select Reconnect To specify a preference fo
376. ministration settings are already displayed you will be warned if you want to overwrite the existing settings Save As saves the current settings to a zip file which you can open later Retrieve Settings obtains the administration settings from the Application Express Listener SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 63 Application Express Listener Administration Upload Settings uploads the administration settings to the Application Express Listener The database settings will be validated before they are uploaded If any settings are invalid or if required settings are missing the administration settings will not be uploaded Tip Before you upload the administration settings click Test Settings to validate the database settings Review the messages and fix any errors a Test Settings validates the Database Settings and displays informational messages for incorrect settings or required settings that are missing If errors are not found during validation a message will be displayed that validation completed successfully Launch URL displays the home page in your browser for example http host port apex Connect context menu only Connects to the Application Express Listener see Connecting to Application Express Listener Server Retrieve Settings Upload Settings and Launch URL are enabled when you connect to the Application Express Listener Disconnect context menu only Disconnects from the Application
377. ministrator for assistance 5 93 Feature Required This dialog box is displayed if you try to use a SOL Developer feature that requires the licensing of the specified feature for Oracle Database If you do not have a license for the specified feature you must click No If you have a license for the feature on the database or databases on which you plan to use the feature this time you can click Yes To manage the license information for any database connections and to minimize prompts for license related information you can specify user preferences for Database Licensing To purchase any required license contact your Oracle sales representative or authorized Oracle Reseller or go to the Oracle Store to buy online 5 94 File Processing 5 95 Filter This dialog box is displayed if you right click a directory or file in the Files navigator and select Tag SOL In the selected file or in files under the selected directory all SOL statements that match a specified pattern are rewritten so that a comment is inserted after the SELECT keyword in the main query block that uniquely tags the statement For example a PL SQL source containing the statement SELECT 1 FROM dual would be rewritten into something like SELECT PREFIX 00f7d2 FROM dual This allows easy identification of problematic statements that appear in performance views such as V SOL Tag Prefix Text to appear after PREFIX in inserted comments Selected Extensi
378. mits the total number of bytes read from the file Encoding Character set used for encoding of the data to be imported Delimiter Line Terminator Left Enclosure Right Enclosure Select or type the character in the input file that is used for each of these Import Method Import Method One of the following methods for loading the table definitions and data Insert For new tables the table will be created and data will be inserted Insert Script A script will be generated with DDL statements to crete the new tables and INSERT statements to add the data rows External Table External table DDL statements will be generated for accessing the file as a read only table Staging External Table A script will be generated with DDL statements to create new tables and a staging external table for reading the file and with INSERT statements for inserting the data into the table from the staging external table a SQL Loader For new tables files will be created for running SQL Loader to load the data each table can be created during the import or a script can be generated with DDL statements to create the table The number of remaining fields on this page and their availability depend on the load method and whether or not you invoked the wizard on a specific table Table Name Target table in which to import the data Staging Table Name External table to be used for loading the target table Commit and Drop Staging Table
379. moved to the corresponding Oracle database tables Generate for Windows Batch File generates a bat file to be run on Windows systems Linux Shell Scripts generates sh files to be run on Linux systems For a MySQL migration if you generate sh files you must also execute the following command to make the sh files executable and the ocp file writable chmod 755 Platform The IDM DB2 MySQL Microsoft SQL Server Sybase Adaptive Server or Teradata version for which to generate the scripts 5 89 Edit Font Location Lets you specify the locations for fonts to be used in PDF generation and the order in which the locations are searched Add Entry Lets you select a location to be added to the list Edit Entry Lets you change the location for the selected item in the list Remove Deletes the selected location from the list Up and down arrows Let you move selected items up or down to change the order of items in the list 5 90 Edit Header or Footer PDF Formatting In the user preferences for PDF Format Header and Footer under Database Utilities Export Formats CSV Delimited Excel Fixed HTML PDF SOL Loader Text XML you can edit the header and footer separately to specify text to be used To include the date in that text click the Insert Date icon to display a dialog box to specify the desired date format and whether or not to have the inserted date be updated automatically to reflect any update of the PDF file
380. mple you might comment out one line of a stored procedure 6 Translate using the appropriate translator 7 Ifthe error appears again repeat steps 2 to 6 8 Iftheerror cannot be resolved in this way it is best to modify the object manually in the converted model 2 2 7 Generating the DDL for the Oracle Schema Objects To generate the DDL statements to create the Oracle schema objects you must already have captured the captured model and created the converted model After you generate the DDL you can run the DDL statements to cause the objects to be created in the Oracle database At this point the database schema is migrated to Oracle After you generate and run the DDL statements to migrate the schema objects you can migrate the data from the original source database as explained in Section 2 2 8 2 2 8 Migrating the Data The Migration Wizard lets you choose whether to migrate move any existing data from the source database to the Oracle database If you choose to migrate the data a Ifyou are performing migration in online mode you can perform the data migration in online or offline mode Ifyou are performing the migration in offline mode the data migration is included in the generated files Online data moves are suitable for small data sets whereas offline data moves are useful for moving large volumes of data 2 2 8 1 Transferring the Data Offline To transfer the data offline you generate and use scripts to
381. mporary tablespace can alleviate problems caused where one tablespace is inadequate to hold the results of a sort particularly on a table that has many partitions The Temporary Tablespace Groups option displays for each tablespace group its name the number of tablespaces in the group the total size of the tablespaces and whether the group is the default temporary tablespace 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SQL Developer SQL Developer provides a graphical interface for using the DBMS SCHEDULER PL SQL package to work with Oracle Scheduler objects To use the SOL Developer SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 51 Scheduling Jobs Using SQL Developer scheduling features you must first understand the concepts and essential tasks for job scheduling which are explained in the chapters about Oracle Scheduler concepts and scheduling jobs in Oracle Database Administrator s Guide The Scheduler node for a connection appears in the Connections navigator and in the DBA navigator The DBA navigator displays Scheduler objects owned by the SYS user and requiring DBA privileges for creating and modifying the Connections navigator displays other Scheduler objects that may require specific privileges for creating and modifying The Oracle Scheduler objects are grouped under object types that include a Chains a Credentials Database Destinations Jobs a Job Classes Programs a Schedules You can right click an item node at any level in th
382. n action Boolean function Validation succeeds if Boolean TRUE is returned by the specified function Query returning no row s Validation succeeds if the specified query returns no rows Query returning row s Validation succeeds if the specified query returns one or more rows that satisfy the specified query 5 94 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Unit Testing Result of Operation Result Set Compare Validation succeeds if the results returned by the specified query match the values that you specify Table Compare Validation succeeds if the target table the table modified by the test case is identical to the specified table User PL SOL Code Validation succeeds if the specified script runs successfully Specify Teardown Specify the action to perform after the validation action or the test case in no validation action was specified is finished Reasons for using a teardown action might include the following You want to restore a table to its original values effectively rolling back any changes that were made by the test case a You want to perform some special operations after the test is run None Perform no teardown action Table Drop Drop delete the specified table Table Restore Replace all rows in the specified target table the table modified by the test case with the rows in the specified source table For example you might want to replace the contents of EMPLOYEES target table with a source
383. n addition or as an alternative can use the Command Line Interface for SOL Formatting Advanced Format displays a dialog box where you can specify the output destination and output type for the formal operation Quick Outline displays the Outline pane with a graphical outline of the object displayed in the worksheet if an outline is relevant for this type of object You can click a node in the outline to go to the associated place in the text in the worksheet Popup Describe if the name of a database object is completely selected displays a window with tabs and information appropriate for that type of object see Section 5 78 Describe Object Window Save Snippet opens the Save Snippet User Defined dialog box with the selected text as the snippet text Enter SOL Statement The statement or statements that you intend to execute For multiple statements each non PL SQL statement must be terminated with either a semicolon or on a new line a slash and each PL SQL statement must be terminated with a slash on a new line SOL keywords are automatically highlighted To format the statement right click in the statement area and select Format SOL You can drag some kinds of objects from the Connections navigator and drop them into the Enter SOL Statement box Ifyou drag and drop a table or view by default a SELECT statement is constructed with all columns in the table or view You can then edit the statement for
384. n an efficient largely automated way Thus you have two options for working with third party databases in SOL Developer Creating database connections so that you can view schema objects and data in these databases Migrating these databases to Oracle to take advantage of the full range of Oracle Database features and capabilities This chapter contains the following major sections Section 2 1 Migration Basic Options and Steps Section 2 2 Migration Background Information and Guidelines Section 2 3 SQL Developer User Interface for Migration Section 2 4 Command Line Interface for Migration 2 1 Migration Basic Options and Steps To migrate all or part of a third party database to Oracle you have the following basic options Migrating Using the Migration Wizard Copying Selected Tables to Oracle However before you perform any migration actions you may want to prepare by setting any appropriate Migration user preferences such as date and timestamp masks and Is Quoted Identifier On and by reading relevant topics in Section 2 2 Migration Background Information and Guidelines After you migrate by using the wizard or by copying tables to Oracle verify that the results are what you expected For a description of the user interface for database migrations see Section 2 3 SQL Developer User Interface for Migration SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 1 Migration Basic Options and
385. n bat ormigration sh accepts these commands capture convert datamove delcaptured delconn del converted driver generate guide help idmap info init lscaptured 1sconn lsconverted mkconn qm runsal and scan For information about the syntax and options start by running migration without any parameters at the system command prompt For example 2 34 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Command Line Interface for Migration C Program Files sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin gt migration You can use the help option for information about one or more actions For the most detailed information including some examples use the help guide option For example C Program Files sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin gt migration help guide SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 35 Command Line Interface for Migration 2 36 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide 3 SQL Developer Unit Testing The SQL Developer unit testing feature provides a framework for testing PL SQL objects such as functions and procedures and monitoring the results of such objects over time You create tests and for each you provide information about what is to be tested and what result is expected The SOL Developer implementation of unit testing is modeled on the classic and well known xUnit collection of unit test frameworks The unit testing feature is part of the support within the SQL Developer family of products for major parts of the lif
386. n is checked only shortcut keys with mappings are displayed More Actions a Export Exports the shortcut key definitions to an XML file Import Imports the shortcut key definitions from a previously exported XML file Load Keyboard Scheme Drops all current shortcut key mappings and sets the mappings in the specified scheme This option was called Load Preset in previous releases If you have made changes to the mappings and want to restore the default settings select Default Category Select All or a specific category Code Editor Database Debug Edit and so on to control which actions are displayed Command The actions for the selected category When you select an action any existing shortcut key mappings are displayed Shortcut Any existing key mappings for the selected action To remove an existing key mapping select it and click Remove New Shortcut The new shortcut key to be associated with the action Press and hold the desired modifier key then press the other key For example to associate Ctrl J with an action press and hold the Ctrl key then press the j key If any actions are currently associated with that shortcut key they are listed in the Current Assignment box Conflicts A read only display of the current action if any that is mapped to the shortcut key that you specified in the New Shortcut box 1 18 14 Unit Test Parameters Unit Test Parameters preferences affect the behavior of the SOL Dev
387. n the Connections navigator and selecting Open SOL Worksheet by selecting Tools and then SOL Worksheet or by clicking the Use SOL Worksheet icon under the menu bar In the Select Connection dialog box select the database connection to use for your work with the worksheet You can also use that dialog box to create and edit database connections You can have a SOL Worksheet window open automatically when you open a database connection by enabling the appropriate SOL Developer user preference under Database Connections To create a separate unshared worksheet for a connection click in the worksheet and use Ctrl Shift N The SOL Worksheet has Worksheet and Query Builder tabs as shown in the following figure where the Worksheet tab is selected 1 32 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using the SQL Worksheet D ix BBG Go amp 48 da E3 hr local Worksheet Query Builder SELECT last name salary FROM employees WHERE salary gt 10000 AND employee id lt 115 Yv b Script Output D gt Query Result Ld a 3 E SQL All Rows Fetched 5 in 0 016 seconds LasT NAME B SALARY 1 King 24000 2 Kochhar 17000 3 De Haan 17000 4 Greenberg 12000 5 Raphaely 11000 SOL Worksheet toolbar under the Worksheet tab Contains icons for the following Operations a Execute Statement executes the statement at the mouse pointer in the Enter SOL Statement box The SOL statements can include bind variabl
388. nclude SOL which displays the SOL statement for creating the object You can export unload data from a detail pane or from the results of a SOL Worksheet operation or a report by using the context menu and selecting Export The Messages Log area is used for feedback information as appropriate for example results of an action or error or warning messages If this area is not already visible you can display is by clicking View and then Log The Compiler Log area is used for any messages displayed as a result of a Compile or Compile for Debug operation 1 2 1 Menus for SQL Developer This topic explains menu items that are specific to SOL Developer Edit menu Extended Paste Displays the Paste dialog box in which you select a clipboard item from potentially many to be pasted into the current location Duplicate Selection When you have selected text while editing a function or procedure creates a copy of the selected text at the current location Wrap Selection When you have selected text while editing a function or procedure wraps the selected text View menu Contains options that affect what is displayed in the SOL Developer interface Data Modeler Lets you display the Browser and Thumbnail Diagram panes of the Data Modeler in SOL Developer Breakpoints Displays the Breakpoints pane which shows breakpoints both system defined and user defined see Section 1 6 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures
389. ncrement columns only if the INCREMENT BY value is 1 and if the sequence starts at 1 or is adjusted to MAX VAL 1 at the first call to the trigger If these restrictions are acceptable this approach is fast and convenient For example many Microsoft Access database owners only need the basic table definitions and the data copied to an Oracle database after which they can add keys and constraints in the Oracle database using SOL Developer To copy selected tables follow these steps 2 4 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines 5 Create and open a database connection for the third party database For migrations other than from Microsoft Access you should set the third party JDBC driver preference before creating the connection For example create a database connection named Sales Access to a Microsoft Access database named sales mdb and connect to it In the Connections navigator expand the display of Tables for the third party database connection and select the table or tables to be migrated To select multiple tables use the standard method for individual and range selections using the Ctrl and Shift keys as appropriate Right click and select Copy to Oracle In the Choose Database for Copy to Oracle dialog box select the appropriate entries Destination Database Name Database connection to use for copying the selected tables into the Oracle database Only Oracle
390. ne 1 18 4 Compare and Merge The Compare and Merge pane defines options for comparing and merging two source files For more information see Comparing Source Files For each type of option you can specify a Maximum File Size KB the maximum size of the file number of kilobytes for which the operation will be performed Ignore Whitespace If this option is enabled leading and trailing tabs and letter spacing are ignored when comparing files Carriage returns are not ignored Enabling this option makes comparing two files easier when you have replaced all the space with hard tabs or vice versa Otherwise every line in the two documents might be shown as different in the Compare window Show Character Differences If this option is enabled characters that are present in one file and not in another are highlighted Red highlighting indicates a character that has been removed Green highlighting indicates a character that has been added The highlighting is shown only when you click into a comparison block that contains character differences Enable Java Compare If this option is enabled Java source files can be compared in a structured format Enable XML Compare If this option is enabled XML files can be compared Enable XML Merge If this option is enabled XML files can be merged Reformat Result If this option is enabled merged XML files can be reformatted Validate Result May require Internet access If this option is ena
391. neci eto eet a P Pe pe ottica 5 61 5 79 Edit View Value Data or Table Column seanoa tenentes 5 61 5 80 Enter Bind Maltes Ec EISE Tice NEITHER eed e een Fere dE 5 61 5 81 5 82 5 83 5 84 5 85 5 86 5 87 5 88 5 89 5 90 5 91 5 92 5 93 5 94 5 95 5 96 5 97 5 98 5 99 5 100 5 101 5 102 5 103 5 104 5 105 5 106 5 107 5 108 5 109 5 110 5 111 5 111 5 112 5 113 5 114 5 115 5 116 5 117 5 118 5 119 5 120 5 121 5 122 5 123 5 124 5 125 5 126 Erasedronmnvblsk 5e toe NH Ree Mete Meine ETT 5 61 Error Writing to Export Flle ote ota 5 62 BXDOELDUBEPTOTA sees rrt cto n o eere ire o S deste Ete e en OA 5 62 EXPOLIO SM Cedo 5 62 External Locator Configuration ssssssseeeeeeeeenenee nennen nennen nnne 5 62 External LOOMS ine ro tete tree eet eere me e e eek is 5 62 Create Edit External T60l 55 eni ER Reiten iu tetti RE 5 63 Choose Offline Optiohs oh nne teinte re eie ee eres rd i terrore teris 5 64 Edit Font Location ign doe eii e a este t os br arte cec Rodgers 5 64 Edit Header or Footer PDF Formatting sss eee eene nennen 5 64 Edit JO A e a a Deo 5 64 EA ES AAA Riveae AER E E E E EE EEE 5 65 F at re Required note ertet ERE E E N 5 65 File Processing gi oer ettet ene nae ibe devess leet hae eret beo bee larai 5 65 Falter m M 5 65 Filter Object Vy pes sooo toldo 5 66 Filter Schemas niire aii wane te ae a tete ee ek etes 5 66 Filter ETTOR REPRE
392. nformation and guidelines that are helpful in planning for a database migration Section 2 2 1 Overview of Migration Section 2 22 Preparing a Migration Plan Section 2 2 3 Before You Start Migrating General Information Section 2 2 4 Before You Start Migrating Source Specific Information Section 2 2 5 Capturing the Source Database Section 2 2 6 Creating and Customizing the Converted Model SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 5 Migration Background Information and Guidelines Section 2 2 7 Generating the DDL for the Oracle Schema Objects Section 2 2 8 Migrating the Data a Section 22 9 Making Queries Case Insensitive a Section 2 2 10 Testing the Oracle Database Section 22 11 Deploying the Oracle Database 2 2 1 Overview of Migration An Oracle database provides you with better scalability reliability increased performance and better security than third party databases For this reason organizations migrate from their current database such as Microsoft SQL Server Sybase Adaptive Server Microsoft Access or IBM DB2 to an Oracle database Although database migration can be complicated SOL Developer enables you to simplify the process of migrating a third party database to an Oracle database SOL Developer captures information from the source database and displays it in the captured model which is a representation of the structure of the source database This representation i
393. ng Jobs Using SOL Developer sss eene 1 51 12 1 Scheduler Design Editor ieiienetee ace teclas tacite hierba de 1 53 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart esses eene nennen 1 53 13 1 Cart Versus Database Export Wizard ooooncocicinicinnonnnincnnoronnnnincnnoronanca non ro ronca e enne 1 55 14 Spatial Support in SOL Developer sees eee eee eene nennen 1 55 14 1 Context Menu Operations on Spatial Data and Metadata sss 1 55 14 2 Map Visualization of Spatial Data ssssssssssseeeeeeen e eee nnne 1 56 14 2 1 Visualizing Geometries by Creating and Executing a Query 1 57 14 2 2 Visualizing Geometries from the Table Data Grid sess 1 57 15 Change Manager Support in SOL Developer sese enn 1 58 15 1 Change Plan Administrators and Developers esee eee 1 58 15 2 Developing Change Plans with SOL Developer sse 1 59 15 2 1 Creating a Repository Connection sse nnn 1 60 15 2 2 Creating and Deleting Change Plans sss eee 1 60 15 2 3 Adding and Updating Change Items sss eee 1 60 15 2 4 Using Change Plans to Capture Change in SQL Developer 1 61 15 3 Change Manager Actions to Perform with Enterprise Manager 1 61 15 3 1 Creating Change Plans from Change Manager Schema Comparisons 1 61 15 3 2 Deployin
394. nore This dialog box sets the svn ignore property for the specified content Often a directory contains files that should not be kept under version control For example log files from a debug or batch operation do not need to be tracked or merged yet they are often in the same directory as the shared code for a project Such files should be marked to be ignored by Subversion 5 178 Subversion Import Subversion Connections Use this dialog box to import the details of Subversion connections from a previously created file File Name The location and name for the file that contains the connection details or browse to a file location using the Browse button Connections Select one or more connections whose details will be imported If a connection to be imported already exists with the same URL you will be asked to confirm whether you want to overwrite the existing connection details with the details in the imported connection 5 179 Subversion Import to Subversion Use this wizard to import source files into the Subversion repository To go from one step to the next click Next to go back to the previous step click Back SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 87 Subversion Lock Resources Destination Use to identify the Subversion repository and directory within the repository where the imported files will be stored Repository Connection The connection for the Subversion repository in which you wish to store the
395. ns be sure not to check this option Automatically Freeze Result Tabs If this option is checked each pane showing the result of a Script Runner query is pinned and a new tab is created for each new query s results If this option is not checked the results pane is reused for all queries Re initialize on script exit command If this option is checked Script Runner context settings such as a WHENEVER SOLERROR directive and substitution variables are cleared when the script exits If this option is not checked these context settings are 1 94 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences retained For example uncheck this option if you want to keep any WHENEVER SOLERROR setting specified in a script after the script exits 1 18 6 Debugger The Debugger pane contains general options for the SOL Developer debugger Other panes contain additional specific kinds of debugger options Debugger Breakpoints The Breakpoints pane sets the columns to appear in the Breakpoints pane and the scope of each breakpoint Debugger Breakpoints Default Actions The Breakpoints Default Actions pane sets defaults for actions to occur at breakpoints These actions are the same as on the Actions tab in the Create Edit Breakpoint dialog box Debugger Data The Data pane enables you to control the columns to appear in the debugger Data pane and aspects of how the data is displayed Debugger Inspector The Inspector pan
396. ns and click the Remove icon To move all columns from available to selected or the reverse use the Add All gt gt or Remove All lt lt icon To move a column up or down in the primary key definition select it in Selected Columns and use the arrow buttons The remaining fields Populate Primary Key Column through Trigger Name appear only when you are creating a table They are not available when you are editing an existing table Populate Primary Key Column When you are creating a table if you want to use a trigger and a sequence to have a unique value automatically inserted into the primary key column when you insert a new row specify the primary key column From An existing sequence that you select or a new sequence whose name you enter For a new sequence SOL Developer creates the sequence automatically using the name that you enter Trigger Name The name for the before insert trigger that will be automatically created This trigger uses the sequence to generate a new value for the primary key when a row is inserted For an example of using this technique see the tutorial section Section 4 3 Create a Table TRANSACTIONS Unique Constraints pane Specifies one or more unique constraints for the table A unique constraint specifies a column or set of columns whose data values must be unique each data value must not be null and it must not be the same as any other value in the column For a multicolumn uniqu
397. ns and use URL mapping to route requests to the appropriate database You can create edit or remove multiple database settings in the Listener navigator To add database settings right click Database Settings and select New Settings To remove database settings right slick on the desired settings and select Remove Settings In panes that display database settings any setting values that are highlighted indicate the global settings value If you change a database settings value and later decide to use the global settings value you can click Reset to restore the global settings values To check the validity of database settings click Test Settings in the Application Express Listener Administration window toolbar SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 65 Application Express Listener Administration 1 16 4 1 Connections Use Connections to enter database credentials Includes the following options related to connection management Username The database user used when invoking PL SQL Gateway operations for example all Oracle Application Express operations Password Password for the specified database user For the remaining Connections options see the Connection Type information Basic TNS Advanced for Create Edit Select Database Connection especially for the Oracle tab JDBC Use JDBC to configure JDBC options JDBC Driver Type thin or oci8 Initial Pool Size Initial pool size for the number of connections that will
398. nstraints By Controls whether constraints are matched for comparison by the names Name or definitions Definition Ignore Segment Attributes Causes differences in segment specification to be ignored Ignore Table Column Position Causes differences in the positions of table columns to be ignored when objects are compared For example if this option is enabled checked two tables would not be considered different in the only difference is that Column1 and Column2 appear first and second in one table but second and first in the other table Ignore Storage Causes differences in storage specification to be ignored Ignore High Values Causes differences in partition high values for tables to be ignored SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 55 Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data Ignore Tablespace Causes differences in the tablespace specified for the object to be ignored Logical Compare Causes meaningless SOL formatting differences in definitions of objects such packages package bodies procedures and functions to be ignored Ignore Partitioning Causes differences in partitioning specifications for the object to be ignored Report Constraint Name Difference If Match constraints by Definition is selected causes the constraint name to be displayed when differences are reported Types to Diff page See Types under Shared Wizard Pages Specify Objects page See Specify Objects under Shared Wizard Pag
399. nto which to copy the objects schemas or tablespace Note For Schemas Copy or Tablespace Copy the Source Connection user and the Destination Connection user must have DBA privileges DBA privileges are not required for Objects Copy Copy Options Specify whether to copy database objects schemas or tablespaces Objects Copy Copies types of database objects and specific objects of those types Schemas Copy Copies one or more schemas If you select multiple schemas from the source connection you can maintain the individual schemas in the destination connection or consolidate them all into one schema in the destination connection Tablespace Copy Copies the objects from a source tablespace to a destination tablespace SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 53 Database Differences Copy DDL Copies the object definitions For destination objects with the same names as source objects of the same type for example if both contain a table named EMPLOYEES specify whether to not perform the copy that is do not replace the destination objects or to perform the copy that is replace the existing destination objects with the source objects Copy Data Copies the data for any tables and views that are copied If you do not select this option any copied tables or views are empty in the destination connection Truncate Destination Data Before Copying If a table or view of the same name already exists in the destination connect
400. nvention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or the glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter Third Party License Information xviii Oracle SOL Developer contains third party code Oracle is required to provide the following notices Note however that the Oracle program license that accompanied this product determines your right to use the Oracle program including the third party software and the terms contained in the following notices do not change those rights Antlr 3 1 3 This program contains Antlr 3 1 3 which has the following associated attribution text ANTLR 3 License The BSD License Copyright c 2003 2007 Terence Parr All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distr
401. ny previously applied filters clear the Filter box then either press Ctrl spacebar or click the drop down arrow in the Filter box Filter Column enables you to enter a partial value such as a number or a string at least two characters for a string to limit the dialog box display to items containing the partial value so that you can then select the one item to appear in the grid For example entering EMP for column names might show a list of columns including EMPLOYEE ID and IS TEMP Actions displays a menu with actions relevant to the table When you enter a cell in the grid you can directly edit the data for many data types and for all data types you can click the ellipsis button to edit the data For binary data you cannot edit the data in the cell but must use the ellipsis button In the data grid the context menu right click includes the following commands a Single Record View displays the Single Record View dialog box which enables you to edit data for a table or view one record at a time SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 27 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures a Auto fit All Columns adjusts the width of all columns according to your specification by column header by column data or best fit Auto fit Selected Columns adjusts the width of the selected columns according to your specification by column header by column data or best fit a Count Rows displays the number of
402. o monitor the changing values of variables or expressions as your program runs After you enter a watch expression the Watches window displays the current value of the expression As your program runs the value of the watch changes as your program updates the values of the variables in the watch expression A watch evaluates an expression according to the current context which is controlled by the selection in the Stack window If you move to a new context the expression is reevaluated for the new context If the execution point moves to a location where any of the variables in the watch expression are undefined the entire watch expression becomes undefined If the execution point returns to a location where the watch expression can be evaluated the Watches window again displays the value of the watch expression To open the Watches window click View then Debugger then Watches To add a watch right click in the Watches window and select Add Watch To edit a watch right click in the Watches window and select Edit Watch 1 7 Using the SQL Worksheet You can use the SOL Worksheet to enter and execute SOL PL SQL and SQL Plus statements You can specify any actions that can be processed by the database connection associated with the worksheet such as creating a table inserting data creating and editing a trigger selecting data from a table and saving that data to a file You can display a SOL Worksheet by right clicking a connection i
403. o not check this option all valid data types for the source third party database are shown SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 79 Add Edit Rule Source Data Type Data type name in the third party database Oracle Data Type Data type name in Oracle Database Type System for a system defined data type or User for a user defined data type Add New Rule Displays the Add Edit Rule dialog box for specifying a mapping for another data type Edit Rule Displays the Add Edit Rule dialog box for editing the selected mapping Remove Rule Deletes the selected mapping 5 152 Add Edit Rule This dialog box is displayed if you click Add New Rule or Edit Rule in the Set Data Mapping dialog box which is used for specifying source data type mappings when migrating a specified third party database to Oracle Source Data Type Data type name in the third party database Oracle Data Type Data type name in Oracle Database Precision and Scale Precision and scale values to be used for the source data type and Oracle data type during the conversion 5 153 Set Encoding This dialog box is displayed if you right click a CVS connection and select Set Encoding Specify a character set for the connection The character set that you choose is applied to the encoding of files under CVS control through that connection Platform Default Newline Conversions Uses the character set specified for the platform operating system Newline conve
404. o return the desired geometries Example for a table named COUNTIES that includes a geometry column named GEOM and a STATE ABRV column for 2 character state abbreviations SELECT geom FROM counties WHERE state abrv SC Map Styles Optionally customize the Line Color and Fill Color for the geometries and select an Annotation Column For the colors you can click the square to display a dialog box for specifying a color using a swatch or an HSB or RGB value 5 Click OK to complete the definition 6 Optionally repeat steps 4 and 5 to create one or more additional queries For a query using a different database connection repeat steps 3 through 5 To execute the query and display the map in the left pane of the window select check mark the query and click the Execute Checked Queries icon above Query List To modify a query select check mark it and click the Edit Query pencil icon above Query List To delete a query from the list select check mark it and click the Remove Query X icon above Query List In the map display pane on the left you can click icons above the pane to control aspects of the display Zoom In expands the display and makes the objects appear larger a Zoom Out contracts the display and makes the objects appear smaller Fit adjusts the display so that all objects fit in the pane Marquee Zoom lets you select a rectangle press drag release after which the display zooms to fit the sel
405. o temporary tables to replicate the inserted and deleted tables in Sybase and SQL Server In such cases this can enable the conversion of logic that cannot otherwise be converted 1 18 12 Mouseover Popups The Mouseover Popups pane specifies text to be displayed on hover related mouse actions over relevant object names Popup Name The type of information to be displayed Data Values value of the item under the mouse pointer such as the value of a variable during a debugging operation Documentation documentation on the item under the mouse pointer such as Javadoc on a method call or Source source code of the item under the mouse pointer such as the source code of a method Activate Via Use action with the mouse cursor to activate the display Hover or Hover while pressing one or two specified modifier keys Description Description of the associated Popup Name entry Smart Enabled If this option is checked then the text for the relevant type of information is displayed if Smart Popup is also checked Smart Popup If this option is checked the relevant text for the first smart enabled popup is displayed for the item under the mouse pointer 1 18 13 Shortcut Keys Accelerator Keys The Shortcut Keys pane enables you to view and customize the shortcut key also called accelerator key mappings for SOL Developer 1 100 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Hide Unmapped Commands If this optio
406. of the connection being used unit test repos and whether the user associated with that connection has only User access to the repository or both Administrator and User access here both Administrator and User access are explained in Section 3 3 The preceding figure also shows the types of actions under the Library node Startups Teardowns Validations one test suite and several tests 3 2 1 Unit Test Submenu To display the Unit Test submenu click Tools then Unit Test The commands on the Unit Test submenu affect the Unit Test Repository Select Current Repository Enables you to select the database connection to use for the unit testing repository and to create a repository using that connection if no repository exists in the associated schema Deselect Current Repository Disconnects from the current unit testing repository To connect again to a unit testing repository the same one or a different one use Select Current Repository Create Update Repository Enables you to create a unit resting repository to hold schema objects associated with the SOL Developer unit testing feature Drop Repository Drops deletes the current unit testing repository Purge Repository Deletes the contents of the current unit testing repository but does not delete the repository metadata Manage Users Enables you to select add and modify database connections to be used for the unit testing repository Select As Shared Reposito
407. og on an object table only Yes indicates that the system generated or user defined object identifier of every modified row should be recorded in the materialized view log No indicates that the system generated or user defined object identifier of every modified row should not be recorded in the materialized view log Sequence Yes indicates that a sequence value providing additional ordering information should be recorded in the materialized view log No indicates that a sequence value providing additional ordering information should not be recorded in the materialized view log Sequence numbers that is Yes for this option are necessary to support fast refresh after some update scenarios Available Filter Columns Additional columns which are non primary key columns referenced by subquery materialized views to be recorded in the materialized view log To select one or more filter columns use the arrow buttons to move columns from Available to Selected DDL tab You can view a SOL CREATE statement that reflects the current definition of the object or a SOL ALTER statement to modify an existing object to reflect your changes To save the SOL statement to a script file click Save and specify the location and file name 5 22 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Program 5 45 Create PL SQL Package Use this dialog box to create a package to contain PL SQL subprograms functions or procedures or a combination Schema Datab
408. olumns in one or more rows and all sets of values returned are checked by any process validation that you have specified for the test One common use of dynamic value queries is to perform reasonableness tests such as checking that each salary or price resulting from a test is within a specified range To create a test that uses dynamic value queries create and populate the table to be used by the query create the test by specifying the object to be tested and any startup SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 5 Using a Dynamic Value Query to Create a Unit Test and teardown actions and specify a validation action such as a query returning rows Or no rows Note A dynamic value query is executed before the execution of all implementations in a test including any startup action for the test If you must populate a table before a dynamic value query is evaluated you can do this is the startup action for a suite that includes the test The following example assumes that you done at least the following in Section 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial created the EMPLOYEES table created the AWARD BONUS procedure and created the unit test repository It creates a unit test that checks to be sure that no salesperson would receive a bonus so large that his or her salary amount would be greater than 20000 Follow these steps 1 10 Create and populate the table for the data by executing the following statements CREATE
409. omizing 2 19 Create Local Connections command 1 23 Create Unit Test wizard 5 93 credentials Scheduler 1 12 creating and editing 5 5 crossedition triggers 1 21 customizing SOL Developer setting preferences 1 80 CVS Concurrent Versions System preferences for 1 101 SOL Developer support for 1 42 D data entering and modifying 1 26 Data Modeler included in SOL Developer 1 106 data move generating user 1 98 number of parallel streams 1 97 options 1 97 Data Pump Export wizard 5 51 Data Pump Import wizard 5 52 data types creating 5 41 database administrator DBA features in SOL Developer 1 44 database connections 5 11 Index 2 creating editing or selecting 5 7 explanation 1 23 IBM DB2 5 10 JDBC 5 10 Microsoft Access 5 9 Microsoft SOL Server 5 11 MySQL 5 10 Oracle Database 5 7 Oracle TimesTen 5 9 Sybase Adaptive Server 5 11 Teradata 5 11 database destination groups Scheduler 1 13 creating and editing 5 16 database destinations Scheduler 1 12 creating and editing 5 16 database links 1 13 creating or editing 5 17 database objects 1 11 exporting 5 56 finding searching for 1 42 unloadiing 5 56 database schema differences differences between two database schemas 5 54 DB2 before migrating 2 14 DB2 IBM connections 5 10 DBA features in SOL Developer using 1 44 DBMS OUTPUT user defined report example 1 79 DBMS OUTPUT pane 1 37 debugging PL
410. omizing SQL Developer 1 80 preferences options 1 101 primary key 5 29 private database links 1 13 private synonyms 1 19 5 26 privileges required for migration 2 12 procedures creating 5 23 profiler PL SQL hierarchical 1 31 profiling a PL SQL function or procedure 5 77 programs Scheduler 1 17 creating and editing 5 23 projects creating plan 2 10 proxy authentication 1 26 proxy connections 1 26 5 8 public database links 1 13 public synonyms 1 19 5 26 Publish to Apex Application Express option 1 28 Q query builder 1 39 quotation marks for name with lowercase characters special characters or spaces 5 1 R Raptor former code name for SOL Developer 1 1 rebuilding an index 1 14 recompiling view 1 22 Recycle bin 1 18 refactor in bulk 1 12 remote debugging 1 31 replication schemes 1 18 report navigator 1 71 reports 1 71 bind variables for 1 72 exporting 1 71 importing 1 71 shared 1 72 unit testing 3 10 user defined chart example 1 78 creating and editing 5 42 dynamic HTML example 1 79 explanation 1 78 folders for 1 78 5 43 gauge example 1 40 UserReports xml 1 78 repository unittest 3 4 Reset Password menu command 1 24 roles creating and editing 5 24 required for migration 2 12 running PL SOL function or procedure 1 28 dialog box 5 77 Index 5 S scheduler using in SOL Developer 1 51 schedules Scheduler 1 18 creating and editing 5 25 s
411. ommitted to the Subversion repository you update them Destination Directory or folder into which to place the checked out files If this destination is not empty a warning message will be displayed asking if you are sure you want to check out into this directory Attempting to check out files into a non empty destination might reflect a mistake in specifying the destination or it might be your intention Use Revision If this option is checked the revision you specify in the text box is used To see the available revisions click the binoculars icon Depth The level of recursion for selecting files to be checked out from Infinity all children at all levels under the selected item in the Versioning browser hierarchy through Empty only this item and no children 5 84 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Subversion Create Remote Directory 5 167 Subversion Commit Resources Use this dialog box to commit individual files to the Subversion repository If a file is a child of a changed parent that has not been committed you must either first commit the parent or instead commit the working copy The committed files will replace those in the repository as the most recent Other developers who subsequently check out or update from these files will see the file changed in comparison with the previous version held in the repository Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the files that will be committed to the Subversi
412. on Express Listener simplifies the deployment process because there is no Oracle home required as connectivity is provided using an embedded JDBC driver See Oracle Application Express Listener Installation and Developer Guide for concepts and details The Oracle Application Express Listener Release 2 0 or later must be installed and running in order to retrieve or upload administration settings In addition the Application Express Listener Administrator user must be configured on the Application Express Listener See Oracle Application Express Listener Installation and Developer Guide for information about installing Oracle Application Express Listener 1 16 2 Application Express Listener Administration Toolbar and Context Menu The Application Express Listener Administration window has a toolbar with icons at the top and a context menu when you right click on the Listener navigator The toolbar and context menu let you perform the following actions New Administration displays the Create Listener Administration dialog box where you specify the Name and optionally a Description of the administration After you click Apply in that box the Listener navigator in the Application Express Listener Administration window contains a hierarchical display of global and database settings Select any node to display the pane for viewing and changing related settings Open File lets you open a file that contains saved administration settings If ad
413. on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility not on behalf of any other Contributor and only if You agree to indemnify defend and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by or claims asserted against such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS Appendix How to Apply Apache License to Your Work To apply the Apache License to your work attach the following boilerplate notice with the fields enclosed by brackets replaced with your own identifying information Don t include the brackets The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same printed page as the copyright notice for easier identification within third party archives Copyright yyyy name of copyright owner Licensed under the Apache License Version 2 0 the License you may not use this file except in compliance with the License You may obtain a copy of the License at http www apache org licenses LICENSE 2 0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License Bouncy Castle Crypto API 1 45 Th
414. on and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of JGoodies Karsten Lentzsch nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE I5 PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE JXLayer 4 0 This program includes JXLayer 4 0
415. on for all runs of each job in this class FULL RUNS plus all operations performed on all jobs in this class or OFF no logging Log Retention Period days Number of days that job log entries for jobs in this class are retained The range of valid values is 0 through 999 If set to 0 no history is kept If NULL the default retention days are set by the 1og history Scheduler attribute set with SET SCHEDULER ATTRIBUTE Resource Consumer Group Resource consumer group this class is associated with If no resource consumer group is specified the job class is associated with the default resource consumer group Service Name The database service that the jobs in this class will have affinity to If no service is specified the job class will belong to the default service which means it will have no service affinity and any one of the database instances within the cluster might run the job 5 44 Create Edit Materialized View Log User this dialog box to create of edit a materialized view log which is a table associated with the master table of a materialized view For more information see SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 21 Create Edit Materialized View Log Section 1 3 17 Materialized View Logs Schema Database schema in which to create the materialized view log Name Name of the master table of the materialized view to be associated with this materialized view log Properties tab Tablespace Tablespace in
416. on repository Keep Locks Retains the locks that you previously obtained on the files that you are about to commit This will mean that other developers will still not be able to commit changes they may have made to the files Comments Comments to accompany the commit action You will later be able to see these comments when viewing the list of versions of a particular file Template or Previous Comments A template with comment text for the Comments box 5 168 Subversion Commit Working Copy Use this dialog box to commit the working copy to the Subversion repository The committed files will replace those in the repository as the most recent Other developers who subsequently check out or update from these files will see the file changed in comparison with the previous version held in the repository Files List Lists the names and physical locations of the working copy that will be committed to the Subversion repository Keep Locks Retains the locks that you previously obtained on the files that you are about to commit This will mean that other developers will still not be able to commit changes they may have made to the files Comments Comments to accompany the commit action You will later be able to see these comments when viewing the list of versions of a particular file 5 169 Subversion Confirm Checkout This dialog box is displayed if you attempt to check out from the repository root as opposed to from the branches tag
417. on the currently selected object Refresh queries the database for the current details about the selected object for example a connection or just a table a Apply Filter restricts the display of objects using a filter that you specify For example you can right click the Tables node and specify a filter of EM to see only tables that start with EM and to have the Tables node label be changed to Tables EM To remove the effects of applying a filter right click the node and select Clear Filter Note that for tables the initial default node label is Tables Filtered to reflect the exclusion of tables that are in the Recycle Bin To have such tables included in the display clear the filter The metadata tree in the Connections pane displays all the objects categorized by object type accessible to the defined connections To select an object expand the appropriate tree node or nodes then click the object The right side of the SOL Developer window has tabs and panes for objects that you select or open as shown in the following figure which displays information about a table named BOOKS If you hold the mouse pointer over the tab label BOOKS in this figure a tooltip displays the object s owner and the database connection books Columns Data Constraints Grants Statistics Triggers Flashback Depender pP WB Actions Column Name Data Type D Nullable Data Default 8 COLUt BOOK ID WARCHAR2 20 BYTE
418. onally to export table data see the Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data interface Monitor SOL requires the Oracle Tuning Pack Displays information about any query currently executing and queries that are done executing for a selected connection To see detailed information about a query right click its row and select Show SQL Details The information is especially useful for real time monitoring of long running SOL statements Cursor statistics such as CPU times and IO times and execution plan statistics such as number of output rows memory and temporary space used are updated close to real time during statement execution Internally this feature calls the DBMS SOLTUNE REPORT SOL MONITOR subprogram Monitor Sessions Displays the status of one or more sessions using information from the VBRSRC SESSION INFO view which shows how the session has been affected by the Oracle Database Resource Manager For more information about session monitoring see Oracle Database Administrator s Guide SOL Worksheet Displays a worksheet in which you can enter and execute SOL and PL SQL statements using a specified connection see Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet External Tools Displays the External Tools dialog box with information about user defined external tools that are integrated with the SOL Developer interface From this dialog box can add external tools see Section 5 87 Create Edit External Tool The Tools
419. one or by combination of their Contribution s with the Work to which such Contribution s was submitted If You institute patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and c You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and d If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the fol
420. onnections Depending on the context you can select a connection to connect to the database edit the information about existing connections or specify information while creating a new connection See Creating and Editing Connections Connection Name An alias for a connection to the database using the information that you enter The connection name is not stored in the database and the connection is not a database object Suggestion Include the database name SID and user name in the connection name Example personnel herman for connecting to the personnel database as user Herman Username Name of the database user for the connection This user must have sufficient privileges to perform the tasks that you want to perform while connected to the database such as creating editing and deleting tables views and other objects Password Password associated with the specified database user Save Password If this option is checked the password is saved with the connection information and you will not be prompted for the password on subsequent attempts to connect using this connection Information for Database Specific Tabs Oracle tab a limesTen tab m Access tab DB2tab JDBC tab MySQL tab a SQL Server and Sybase tabs Teradata tab Oracle tab The following information applies to a connection to an Oracle Database Role The set of privileges to be associated with the connection For a user that has b
421. ons Extensions of files on which to perform the SQL statement rewrite operations This dialog box is displayed when you right click a connection node or an object type node such as Tables in the Connections navigator and select Apply Filter Use this box to limit the number of objects of that type that are displayed according to one or more filter criteria that you specify For each criterion specify the following Criterion name list always includes NAME other criteria depend on the object type Operator for example LIKE SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 65 Filter Object Types Value for comparison for example EM Case sensitive option for character data comparison E x For example to display only tables with names that start with EM specify NAME LIK and EM with the percent sign as a wildcard character Any remaining options in this dialog box depend on the context for the filter option Override Schema Filter object type node filters If this option is checked any filter criterion specified at the connection level is ignored and only the object type node filter criteria are applied Include Synonyms object type node filters If this option is checked synonyms for objects of this object type are included To add another filter criterion click the Add icon to delete a criterion select it and click the Delete X icon to move a criterion up or down in the list selec
422. ons patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 100 A4444 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 102 A2222 SYSDATE 2 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 102 A5555 SYSDATE 1 INSERT INTO transactions patron id book id transaction date transaction type VALUES 101 A2222 SYSDATE 1 Test the view and the procedure SELECT FROM patrons trans view CALL list a rating 10 4 14 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide 9 SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards SQL Developer uses dialog boxes for creating and editing database connections and objects in the database tables views procedures and so on The dialog boxes sometimes have multiple tabs each reflecting a logical grouping of properties for that type of object For an explanation of any dialog box or tab click the Help button or press the F1 key The dialog boxes and wizards are not presented here in any rigorous order because the help for each is an independent piece of information and is normally seen when you click Help or press F1 in that context Note For all Name fields any name that you type is automatically converted to and stored in the database metadata in uppercase unless you enclose the name in quotation marks Names
423. ons seq START WITH 1 INCREMENT BY 1 The before insert trigger for transaction ID values in the tutorial is created automatically and may have the name TRANSACTIONS TRG CREATE OR REPLACE TRIGGER transactions trg BEFORE INSERT ON TRANSACTIONS FOR EACH ROW BEGIN SELECT TRANSACTIONS SEQ NEXTVAL INTO NEW TRANSACTION ID FROM DUAL END CREATE VIEW patrons trans view AS SELECT p patron id p last name p first name t transaction type t transaction date FROM patrons p transactions t WHERE p patron id t patron id ORDER BY p patron id t transaction type Procedure List all books that have a specified rating CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE list a rating in rating IN NUMBER AS matching title VARCHAR2 50 TYPE my cursor IS REF CURSOR the cursor my cursor BEGIN OPEN the cursor FOR SELECT title FROM books WHERE rating in rating USING in rating DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE All books with a rating of in rating LOOP FETCH the cursor INTO matching title EXIT WHEN the cursor NOTFOUND DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE matching title END LOOP CLOSE the cursor END Show errors Insert and query data INSERT INTO books VALUES A1111 Moby Dick Melville Herman 10 INSERT INTO books VALUES A2222 Get Rich Really Fast Scammer Ima 1 SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 13 Script for Creating and Using the Library
424. onsumer group is a group of sessions that are grouped together based on resource requirements The Resource Manager allocates resources to resource consumer groups not to individual sessions The Consumer Groups option displays for each consumer group its description and whether it is mandatory Plans A resource plan is a container for directives that specify how resources are allocated to resource consumer group you specify how the database allocates resources by activating a specific resource plan The Plans option displays for each plan its description and if its status is Active Settings Lists any active resource plans Statistics Lists various resource related statistics if applicable 1 11 7 SQL Translator FrameWork Available only for Release 12c connections Includes options for creating and managing SOL translation profiles and SOL translators SQL Translation Profiles A SQL translation profile is a database schema object that directs how non Oracle SOL statements are translated into Oracle SOL dialects SQL Translators A SQL translator is a stored procedure that translates non Oracle SOL statements into Oracle SOL dialects automatically After a SOL translation profile is created users can SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 49 Using DBA Features in SQL Developer register a SOL translator with the translation profile to translate the non Oracle SOL statements For reference and usage information abou
425. ontainer Database CDB sese 1 16 1 3 19 Pack agesis sissc2taiiite cessive tblailesvand gie hr mete eee ee ei e eee Ete is 1 16 1 3 20 Proce d tes a Reed hes 1 17 1 3 21 A pase itae e Hg oc see HE ert etre dilema een 1 17 1 3 22 GJ EH T e a Cactueasueceueeestens 1 17 1 3 23 Queue Tables iaa eran qtii inde E UR e Te ER HRS 1 18 1 3 24 Recycle Dic eR detener eee ee ee eidem e eee ats 1 18 1 3 25 Replication Schemes Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database 1 18 1 3 26 Schedules tar Eee ee tee ne ete 1 18 1 3 27 SequeTiCeSi aee E TAN 1 18 1 3 28 Synonyms Public and Private sess nens 1 19 1 3 29 Tables 5 stt e recen tee iet oid etm e o e ege ied eve b d 1 19 1 3 29 1 Flashback Table Support nr mthi et ecd ree 1 20 1 3 30 BRIG BOTS sob dieque e e e oe eio adonde Sis detinet Uto AAA 1 21 1 3 31 LV POS urn osttitatenitat E EN v es 1 21 1 3 32 Users Othier Users ariari iiin aa hee quere ene ede ego ete reete 1 21 1 3 33 VIC WS ts che Ee HERE eee ete ae ni ente e e E ORE Ne EHE 1 21 1 3 34 XML DB RepoOSItOry aite eee tte het eee ete tete e eh te De bete pans 1 22 1 3 35 XML Schemas 3 tei ee ib ei b e bh b d eid 1 22 1 3 36 Captured and Converted Database Objects for Migration sssssss 1 22 1 4 Database Connections ina eii edu et reete ens 1 23 1 4 1 Using Folders to Group Connections sss eee eee nennen 1 24 1 4 2 Sharing of Connection
426. option lets you specify which of them to use with SOL Developer Other Path Location of the CVS server executable if it is not on the system path at all Run CVS in Edit Watch Mode If this option is enabled you coordinate access to files by declaring an editor for them through CVS after which they may be modified Only those files that you check out after changing this preference will be affected If this option is disabled the edit and watch commands on the Versioning menu are disabled State Overlay Scheme Scheme for the icons displayed alongside folder and file names in the navigators to indicate their versioning status Versioning CVS Commands The CVS Commands pane sets options for CVS source control Some options are not available when using the internal CVS client Enable Advanced Controls If this option is enabled advanced CVS controls are shown in dialog boxes If you find that you use only basic CVS features you might wish to use SOL Developer without advanced controls to reduce complexity and save screen space Global Options Run Quietly If this option is enabled informational messages are suppressed Global Options Do not Log Commands If this option is enabled CVS commands are not logged in the repository command history Global Options Encrypt If this option is enabled all communication between the client and the server is encrypted Encryption support is not available in CVS by default it must be
427. or automatically populating primary key column values with unique values Column Name of the column for which a sequence and a trigger are to be used to insert unique values The data type of the column must be numeric Sequence None causes no sequence to be used Existing Sequence uses the sequence that you specify New Sequence creates a new sequence with a default or specified name Trigger Before insert trigger that automatically inserts the next value of the specified sequence into the column when a new row is inserted Table Properties pane Enables you to specify table properties such as compression parallelism and storage options Compress heap organized tables only If this option is checked data segments are compressed to reduce disk use This clause is especially useful in environments such as data warehouses where the amount of insert and update operations is small and in OLTP environments 5 32 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Table with advanced options Parallel If this option is checked parallel creation of the table is enabled and the default degree of parallelism is set for queries and the DML INSERT UPDATE DELETE and MERGE statements after table creation You can also enter an integer in the text box to specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Each parallel thread may use one or two parallel execution servers If you s
428. or making modifications including but not limited to software source code documentation source and configuration files Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form including but not limited to compiled object code generated documentation and conversions to other media types Work shall mean the work of authorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal
429. or menus 1 4 Access Microsoft connections 5 9 Active Session History ASH reports 1 73 Advanced Security for JDBC connection 1 25 analyzing tables 1 20 application deploying Application Express 5 58 importing Application Express 5 58 Application Express applications 1 11 deploying an application 5 58 importing an application 5 58 Publish to Apex option 1 28 refactor in bulk command 1 12 starting and stopping EPG embedded PL SOL gateway 1 12 applications Application Express 1 11 Apply Filter to display of objects 1 5 5 65 ASH Active Session History reports 1 73 associations filetypes 5 50 AST abstract syntax tree 1 100 authentication Kerberos 5 8 Database Advanced Parameters 1 86 OS operating system 5 8 autocommit preference for database connections 1 86 autocomplete preferences 1 83 autogenerated connections 1 23 Auto Generated connections folder 1 23 Automated Workload Repository AWR reports 1 73 autotrace Autotrace pane 1 37 preferences for 1 86 AWR Automated Workload Repository reports 1 73 Index bequeath connection type 5 8 Berkeley DB data storage for Subversion repository 5 86 bind variables forreports 1 72 saving to disk on exit 1 94 blogs SOL Developer 1 111 breakpoints creating and editing 5 78 C cache groups 1 12 Cart SOL Developer 1 53 case insensitivity for queries setting 2 25 CDB definition 1 16 chains Scheduler 1 12 creating and
430. order to use the synonym If this option is not checked the synonym is a private synonym and is accessible only within its schema Schema Database schema in which to create the synonym Name Name of the synonym A private synonym must be unique within its schema a public synonym must be unique within the database For Referenced Schema Schema containing the object or name to which this synonym refers Object Based Specify the object to which this synonym refers Name Based Enter the name of the object to which this synonym refers DDL tab You can review the SQL statement that SOL Developer will use to create a new synonym or that reflects any changes you have made to the synonym properties 5 53 Create Table quick creation This dialog box if you do not check the Advanced box creates a new table quickly by specifying columns and some frequently used features If you need to add or change features after you create the table you can edit the table by clicking the Modify icon while viewing the table or by right clicking its name in the Connections navigator and selecting Properties which displays the Create Edit Table with advanced options dialog box To create a new table the only things you must do are specify the schema and the table name add the necessary columns and click OK Although it is not required you should also specify a primary key Advanced If this option is checked the dialog box changes to in
431. ore non null values NULLS LAST to have null expression values appear after non null values Before and after positions are determined by the Order value View Information or Materialized View Properties pane Options for a standard view Restrict Query If this option is checked you can enable one of the following options Read Only Prevents the view from being used to add delete or change data in the underlying table or tables Check Option If this option is checked it prohibits any changes to the underlying table or tables that would produce rows that are not included in this view Force on create If this option is checked the view is created even if it has errors in its definition This option is useful if you want to create the view regardless of any errors and go back and correct the errors later If this option is not checked the view is not created is its definition contains any errors Options for a materialized view Refresh Options Method The method of refresh operation to be performed Complete Refresh Executes the defining query of the materialized view even if a fast refresh is possible SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 47 Create Edit View Fast Refresh Uses the incremental refresh method which performs the refresh according to the changes that have occurred to the master tables The changes for conventional DML changes are stored in the materialized view log associated with t
432. ored in the parameter overwriting its initial input value Default Value Optionally the default value if the parameter is omitted or specified as null when the subprogram is called To add a parameter click the Add icon to delete a parameter click the Remove X icon to move a parameter up or down in the list click the up arrow or down arrow icon DDL tab You can view a SOL CREATE statement that reflects the current definition of the object or a SOL ALTER statement to modify an existing object to reflect your changes 5 47 Create Program This dialog box is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler program which can include creating a new program using details from an existing program Create Like For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 23 Create Edit Role To create a program SOL Developer internally uses the DBMS_ SCHEDULER CREATE PROGRAM procedure Name Name of the program The name has to be unique in the SOL namespace For example a program cannot have the same name as a table in a schema Schema Schema for the program Description Optional text string that can be used to describe the program Enabled If this option is specified validity checks will be made and the program will be created enabled if all the checks are successful If this option is not specified the program is not created enabled
433. ormance requirements SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 25 Migration Background Information and Guidelines You may already have a collection of unit tests and system tests from the original application that you can use to test the Oracle database You should run these tests in the same way that you ran tests against the source database However regardless of added features you should ensure that the application connects to the Oracle database and that the SOL statements it issues produces the correct results Note The tests that you run against the application vary depending on the scope of the application Oracle recommends that you thoroughly test each SQL statement that is changed in the application You should also test the system to make sure that the application functions the same way as in the third party database See also the following a Section 22 10 1 Testing Methodology a Section 22 102 Testing the Oracle Database 2 2 10 1 Testing Methodology Many constraints shape the style and amount of testing that you perform on a database Testing can contain one or all of the following Simple data validation Full life cycle of testing addressing individual unit tests System and acceptance testing You should follow a strategy for testing that suits your organization and circumstances Your strategy should define the process by which you test the migrated application and Oracle database
434. ormation about Oracle TimesTen see the online documentation that is included in the TimesTen installation For additional information go to http www oracle com technetwork database timesten Access tab For a connection to a Microsoft Access database click Browse and find the database mdb file However to be able to use the connection you must first ensure that the system tables in the database file are readable by SQL Developer To do this using Access 2003 SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 9 Create Edit Select Database Connection 1 Open the database file in Microsoft Access 2 Click Tools then Options and on the View tab ensure that System Objects are shown With Access 2007 to view the system tables click the Office button then Access Options then Navigation Options and in Display Options group ensure that Show System Objects is enabled 3 Click Tools then Security and if necessary modify the user and group permissions for the MSysObjects MsysQueries and MSysRelationships tables as follows select the table and give the Admin user at least Read Design and Read Data permission on the table 4 Save changes and close the Access database file 5 Create and test the connection in SOL Developer DB2 tab The following information applies to a connection to an IBM DB2 database Note that to connect to an IBM DB2 database you must first download the db2jcc jar and db2jcc license cu jar file
435. ory and the location and name of the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file xls to be created with information to help you estimate the effort required to migrate the third party databases in the migration repository to Oracle Repository Connection Database connection for the migration repository Estimation Output File xIs Microsoft Excel spreadsheet file that will contain information to help you estimate the migration effort It will contain worksheets for Summary executive summary Instructions steps and assumptions and various detailed information 5 4 Application Migration The Application Wizard enables you to migrate a DBLib or CTLib Sybase application to Oracle by specifying a directory with source code from the DBLib or CTLib Sybase application You will be able to see what changes must be made to migrate the application to Oracle and to perform the migration The Welcome page includes a description of the wizard s operation and options If you want to continue to see this Welcome page in the future do not enable do not check the Do not show this page again option Follow the instructions on each page of the wizard 5 5 Change Type Use this dialog box to change the data type of a column in a captured model before you perform the migration Source Data Type Specify the new data type for the column Any remaining fields in the dialog box depend on the Source Data Type that is selected 5 6 Check for Updates Wh
436. ote After you add an index to add another index click the Add Index 4 icon Name Name of the index Must be unique within the schema Index A list of index expressions that is the table columns or column expressions in the index To add an index expression click the Add Column Expression icon this adds a column name here and in Column Expression where you can edit it To delete an index expression click the Remove Column Expression X icon to move an index expression up or down in the list click the Move Column Up and Move Column Down icons An index must have at least one index expression For example to create an index on the AUTHOR LAST NAME column of the BOOKS table from the tutorial see Create a Table BOOKS click the icon and select AUTHOR LAST NAME in Column Name or Expression next field which changes BOOKS to AUTHOR LAST NAME in the Index field Column Name or Expression A column name or column expression A column expression is an expression built from columns constants SOL functions and user defined functions When you specify a column expression you create a function based index Order ASC for an ascending index index values sorted in ascending order DESC for a descending index index values sorted in descending order Column Sequences pane Enables you to specify sequences and before insert triggers to be used in populating a column with values This approach is especially convenient f
437. ote Debugging 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures When you are editing a long function or procedure you may find it convenient to create bookmarks in the code so that you can easily navigate to points of interest To create or remove a bookmark click Navigate then Toggle Bookmark When a bookmark is created an icon appears to the left of the thin vertical line To go to a specific bookmark click Navigate then Go to Bookmark To go to the next or previous bookmark click Navigate then Go to Next Bookmark or Go to Previous Bookmark respectively To remove all bookmarks from the currently active editing window for a function or procedure or from all open editing windows click Navigate then Remove Bookmarks from File or Remove All Bookmarks respectively 1 30 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures You can also go to a specific line or to your last edit by clicking Navigate then Go to Line or Go to Last Edit respectively 1 6 2 Remote Debugging To debug a function or procedure for a connection where the database is on a different host than the one on which you are running SOL Developer you can perform remote debugging Remote debugging involves many of the steps as for local debugging however do the following before you start the remote debugging 1 Use an Oracle client such as SOL Plus to issue the debugger connection command Whatever client you use
438. ow to create a migration plan It identifies the sections to include in the migration plan describes how to determine what to include for each section and explains how to avoid the risks involved in a migration project This information includes Task 1 Determining the Requirements of the Migration Project Task 2 Estimating Workload Task 3 Analyzing Operational Requirements Task 4 Analyzing the Application Task 5 Planning the Migration Project 2 2 2 1 Task 1 Determining the Requirements of the Migration Project In this task you identify which databases you want to migrate and applications that access that database You also evaluate the business requirements and define testing criteria To determine the requirements of the migration project 1 Define the scope of the project SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 7 Migration Background Information and Guidelines There are several choices you must make about the third party database and applications that access that database in order to define the scope of the migration project To obtain a list of migration issues and dependencies you should consider the following What third party databases are you migrating What is the version of the third party database What is the character set of the third party database a What source applications are affected by migrating the third party database to an Oracle database W
439. p help exit orhelp reserved words If the statement is not supported in SOL Developer or if there are restrictions or usage notes the help display includes this information for example Not currently in SOL Developer 1 7 2 Script Runner The script runner emulates a limited set of SOL Plus features You can often enter SOL and SQL Plus statements and execute them by clicking the Run Script icon The Script Output pane displays the output The SOL Plus features available in the script runner include 99 CONNECT EXIT QUIT UNDEFINE WHENEVER and substitution variables For example to run a script named c myscripts mytest sql type c myscripts mytest in the Enter SOL Statement box and click the drop down next to the Execute Statement icon and select Run Script The following considerations apply to using the SOL Developer script runner You cannot use bind variables The Execute SOL Statement feature does let you use bind variables of type VARCHAR2 NUMBER and DATE Forsubstitution variables the syntax amp amp variable assigns a permanent variable value and the syntax amp variable assigns a temporary not stored variable value 1 36 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using the SQL Worksheet a For EXIT and QUIT commit is the default behavior but you can specify rollback In either case the context is reset for example WHENEVER command information and substitution variable values are cleared
440. p level in the Connections navigator hierarchy display To remove a folder right click the folder name select Remove Folder This does not delete any connections that are in the folder these connections are moved to the top level in the Connections navigator hierarchy display To rename a folder right click the folder name select Rename Folder and specify the new name 1 4 2 Sharing of Connections By default each connection in SOL Developer is shared when possible For example if you open a table in the Connections navigator and two SOL Worksheets using the same connection all three panes use one shared connection to the database In this example a commit operation in one SOL Worksheet commits across all three panes If you want a dedicated session you must duplicate your connection and give it another name Sessions are shared by name not connection information so this new connection will be kept separate from the original 1 4 3 Advanced Security for JDBC Connection to the Database You are encouraged to use Oracle Advanced Security to secure a JDBC or OCI connection to the database Both the JDBC OCI and the JDBC Thin drivers support at least some of the Oracle Advanced Security features If you are using the OCI driver you can set relevant parameters in the same way that you would in any Oracle client setting The JDBC Thin driver supports the Oracle Advanced Security features through a set of Java classes included with the J
441. pecify Parallel without entering an integer the optimum degree of parallelism is automatically calculated Storage Options Enables you to specify storage options for the table Displays the Storage Options dialog box LOB Parameters pane Specifies storage options for LOB large object columns enabling you to override the default storage options Column Name of the LOB column LOB Parameters If this option is checked the specified values for the remaining field are used If this option is not checked the default values for all fields are used Segment LOB segment ID Tablespace Name of the tablespace for the LOB data Store in Row If this option is checked the LOB value is stored in the row inline if its length is less than approximately 4000 bytes minus system control information Cache Specifies how Oracle Database should store blocks in the buffer cache CACHE For data that is accessed frequently indicates that the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed This attribute is useful for small lookup tables NOCACHE For data that is not accessed frequently indicates that the blocks retrieved for this table are placed at the least recently used end of the LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed NOCACHE is the default for LOB storage CACHE READS LOB values
442. peration Displays the result of your selection Summary Displays information about the current operation the new operation and the changes that will be made to the unit test To make any changes click Back To perform the operation click Finish 5 208 Unsupported Database Version This box is displayed if you try to create a connection to a database release that is not supported by SOL Developer such as Oracle Database release 8 1 For information about database releases supported by SOL Developer see Oracle SQL Developer Installation Guide 5 209 Validate Geometry This dialog box is displayed if you select a table and specify Validate Geometry Using Tolerance or Validate Geometry Using Dimension Information Internally SOL Developer calls the SDO GEOM VALIDATE LAYER WITH CONTEXT procedure which examines the specified geometry column to determine if the stored geometries follow the defined rules for geometry objects and returns context information about any invalid geometries For information about the specific consistency checks performed see the documentation for the SDO GEOM VALIDATE LAYER WITH CONTEXT procedure in Oracle Spatial Developer s Guide Table Name Name of the feature table that has a column of type SDO GEOMETRY 5 96 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide XMLType Column Properties Tolerance for Validate Geometry Using Tolerance Tolerance value to be used for validating the geometries For example you
443. perties of the selected data file File Name Name of the data file File Directory Name of the directory or folder for the data file If not specified the default location for tablespace data files is used File Size Maximum size for the file you can specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit of measure Reuse Existing File If this option is enabled and if a file with the same name already exists the existing file is used If this option is disabled and if a file with the same name already exists a warning message is displayed Auto Extend If this option is enabled automatic extension is performed for a new or existing data file or temp file Next Size The size in bytes of the next increment of disk space to be allocated automatically when more extents are required The default is the size of one data block Max Size The maximum disk space allowed for automatic extension of the data file DDL tab Displays the SOL statements that SOL Developer will use to create a new tablespace or to edit an existing tablespace This display is read only if you want to make any changes go back to the relevant tabs and make the changes there SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 39 Create Trigger 5 57 Create Trigger The following information applies to a trigger which is which is a stored PL SOL block associated with a table a schema or the database or an anonymous PL SQL block or a call to a procedure implemen
444. ponent Palette The Component Palette displays the elements that you can drag and drop The components available for selection in the palette vary depending on the content of the active editor window To insert a component into a file open in the active editor drag the component from the palette to an insertion point in the editor In some file types you can click a component in the palette and then click in the editor to insert the component Enter the appropriate information in the dialog box that is displayed for example Insert CDATA or Insert Processing Instruction in an XML file 5 10 Component Palette Configure Component Palette Lets you configure the component palette Note that some page types cannot be edited or removed and most existing component types cannot be added to edited or removed SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 3 Component Palette Create Palette Page Add Displays the Component Palette Create Palette Page dialog box Remove Deletes the selected page from the palette Rename Renames a specified page 5 11 Component Palette Create Palette Page Lets you create a new page for the component palette Specify a name of the page and select the type of page from a list Page Name Name of the page Suggestion Include the type of page in the name perhaps naming pages in the form name type page Page Type Page type selected from the list 5 12 Component Palette New Edit Code Snippet
445. pository There can be multiple unshared repositories for example to allow individual developers to create private repositories a Ina shared repository the owner of the repository objects and any other user that has been granted Administrator access to the repository specifically UT REPO ADMINISTRATOR role can perform administrative operations such as managing users There can be at most one shared repository and this is the typical case for a team development environment A repository administrator can add users as explained in Section 3 3 1 and can switch the repository status between shared and unshared When a repository is made shared SOL Developer creates public synonyms for the appropriate repository objects To change an unshared repository to shared click Tools then Unit Test then Repository then Select As Shared Repository To change a shared repository to unshared click Tools then Unit Test then Repository then Deselect As Shared Repository 3 3 1 Managing Repository Users and Administrators To create and run unit tests and suites you must use a connection for a database user that has been granted User access to the repository specifically UT REPO USER role To perform repository administrative operations such as managing users you must use a connection for a database user that has been granted Administrator access to the repository specifically UT REPO ADMINISTRATOR role For example you may wan
446. profile is a set of limits on database resources If you assign the profile to a user then that user cannot exceed these limits The Profiles option displays any limits on activities and resource usage for each profile Roles A role is a set of privileges that can be granted to users or to other roles you can use roles to administer database privileges The Roles option displays the roles and their authentication settings Users A database user is an account through which you can connect to the database The Users option displays status and usage information about each database user 1 50 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Scheduling Jobs Using SQL Developer 1 11 10 Storage Includes the following options related to database storage management Archive Logs An archived redo log is a copy of one of the filled members of an online redo log group made when the database is in ARCHIVELOG mode After the LGWR process fills each online redo log with redo records the archiver process copies the log to one or more redo log archiving destinations this copy is the archived redo log Control Files A control file is a binary file that records the physical structure of a database and contains the names and locations of redo log files the time stamp of the database creation the current log sequence number checkpoint information and so on The Control Files option displays for each control file its status file name and file directory
447. program and places the execution point on its first statement If the execution point is located on the last statement of a subprogram Step Into returns from the subprogram placing the execution point on the line of code that follows the call to the subprogram from which you are returning Step Out leaves the current subprogram and goes to the next statement Step to End of Method goes to the last statement of the current subprogram Resume continues execution Pause halts execution but does not exit thus allowing you to resume execution Terminate halts and exits the execution You cannot resume execution from this point instead to start running or debugging from the beginning of the subprogram click the Run or Debug icon in the Source tab toolbar The Breakpoints tab displays breakpoints both system defined and user defined The Smart Data tab displays information about variables using your Debugger Smart Data preferences You can also specify these preferences by right clicking in the Smart Data window and selecting Preferences The Data tab displays information about variables using your Debugger Data preferences You can also specify these preferences by right clicking in the Data window and selecting Preferences The Watches tab displays information about watches see Section 1 6 5 Setting Expression Watches If the function or procedure to be debugged is on a remote system see also Section 1 6 2 Rem
448. ptions in creating and editing a sequence see Section 5 50 Create Edit Sequence 1 18 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Objects 1 3 28 Synonyms Public and Private 1 3 29 Tables Synonyms provide alternative names for tables views sequences procedures stored functions packages materialized views Java class database objects user defined object types or other synonyms The Connections navigator has a Synonyms node for all synonyms public and private owned by the user associated with the specified connection and a Public Synonyms node for all public synonyms on the database associated with the connection For help with specific options in creating and editing a synonym see Section 5 52 Create Edit Synonym Tables are used to hold data Each table typically has multiple columns that describe attributes of the database entity associated with the table and each column has an associated data type You can choose from many table creation options and table organizations such as partitioned tables index organized tables and external tables to meet a variety of enterprise needs To create a table you can do one of the following Create the table quickly by adding columns and specifying frequently used features To do this do not check the Advanced box in the Create Table dialog box For help with options for creating a table using this quick approach see Create Table quick creation Create the table by
449. r UNIX systems file to provide the appropriate user name and password strings 3 Runthe SOL Load script a On Windows enter prompt oracle ctl bat On Linux or UNIX enter prompt gt oracle_ctl sh For Microsoft SQL Server and Sybase migrations if you are inserting into BLOB fields with SOL Loader you will receive the following error SQL Loader 309 No SQL string allowed as part of LARGEOBJECT field specification To handle situations indicated by this error you can use either one of the following options Enable the Generate Stored Procedure for Migrate Blobs Offline SOL Developer preference see Migration Generation Options Use the following Workaround Workaround The workaround is to load the data which is in hex format into an additional CLOB field and then convert the CLOB to a BLOB through a PL SQL procedure The only way to export binary data properly through the Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server BCP is to export it in a hexadecimal hex format however to get the hex values into Oracle save them in a CLOB holds text column and then convert the hex values to binary values and insert them into the BLOB column The problem here is that the HEXTORAW function in Oracle only converts a maximum of 2000 hex pairs Consequently write your own procedure that will convert piece by piece your hex data to binary In the following steps and examples modify the START SQL and FINISH SQL to
450. r Configuration dialog box in which you can edit the details of the remote shell client and remote server program Root Value of CVSROOT CVS root variable made up from the information that you have already provided This variable provides the client with access details when contacting the server The format of the seeded variable is accessmethod usernameGserverlocation repositorypath You would not normally need to change this value One instance when you would change this value is when you are attempting to connect to a CVSNT server through a firewall In this case you would add proxy information to the beginning of the username portion so that the CVS root variable would take the following form accessmethod proxy proxyname proxyport portnumber usernameGserverlocation re positorypath 5 6 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Select Database Connection Test Test Connection Attempts to establish a connection to the CVS repository Status Displays the result of the test success or an error message Name Connection Name Name to identify the connection to the CVS repository The default name is the same as the CVSROOT value Summary Displays the connection information that you have specified To make any corrections click Back as needed and modify the information To create the connection click Finish 5 21 Create Edit Select Database Connection The database connection dialog box displays any existing c
451. r the following information If a tab or field is not mentioned do not enter anything for it Be sure that the Advanced box is not checked when you start creating the table Schema Specify your current schema as the schema in which to create the table Name PATRONS SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 3 Create a Table TRANSACTIONS Create most of the table columns using the following information After creating each column except the city state zip column click Add Column to add the next column If you accidentally click OK instead of Add Column right click the PATRONS table in the Connections navigator display select Edit and continue to add columns Column Name Type Size Other Information and Notes patron id NUMBER Primary Key Unique patron ID number with values to be created using a sequence that you will create last name VARCHAR2 30 Not Null first name VARCHAR2 30 street address VARCHAR2 30 city state zip VARCHAR2 30 The last column in the table location requires a complex data type for which you must use the Columns tab with advanced options Check Advanced next to Schema This displays a pane for selecting more table options In the Columns pane click the city state zip column name and click the Add Column icon to add the following as the last column in the table Column Name Type Other Information and Notes location Complex type Oracle Spatial geometry
452. r using an OCI thick Type 2 driver if available instead of a JDBC thin driver for basic and TNS network alias database connections enable the Use OCI Thick driver option under the Database Advanced user preferences 1 4 1 Using Folders to Group Connections You can use folders in the Connections navigator to organize connections into groups for example one folder for connections on your local system another for connections on the test system and another for connections on the production system 1 24 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Connections To create a folder to hold connections right click the name in the Connections navigator of a connection to be added to the folder select Add to Folder and then New Folder and specify the folder name such as Local Connections To add more connections to a folder right click the name in the Connections navigator of a connection to be added to the folder and select Add to Folder and then the name of the folder into which to add the connection To move a connection from one folder to another folder right click the connection name under its current folder select Add to Folder and then either the name of the destination folder or New Folder to move the connection to a new folder to be created To remove a connection from the folder right click the connection name under the folder and select Remove from Folder This does not delete the connection it is moved to the to
453. racle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Copy Filter page Lets you specify data and metadata filtering to limit the type of information that is imported You can specify multiple filters by adding rows Table Data page See Data under Shared Wizard Pages Ramapping page Lets you specify options for the relevant Data Pump Import remapping parameters REMAP DATAFILE REMAP SCHEMA REMAP TABLESPACE Options page Lets you specify Data Pump Import options for the job Job Schedule page Lets you specify scheduling options for the Data Pump Import job The options include whether to start the job immediately or later and any repeat options Summary page See Summary under Shared Wizard Pages On the Summary page you can click the PL SOL tab to see the PL SOL procedure that will perform the job For information about the Data Pump PL SQL API see Oracle Database Utilities 5 71 Database Copy This wizard is displayed if you click Tools then Database Copy You can copy objects schemas or a tablespace from a source connection to a destination connection The specific options depend on what you are copying Some pages include Proceed to Summary which lets you accept the default values for remaining pages and go directly to the Summary page by clicking Next Source Destination page Source Connection Database connection from which to copy the objects schemas or tablespace Destination Connection Database connection i
454. ration Basic Options and Steps Source Database The Source Database page of the wizard specifies the third party database to be migrated Mode Online causes the migration to be performed by SOL Developer when you have completed the necessary information in the wizard Offline causes SOL Developer to perform the migration using a file the Offline Capture Source File that you specify Connection Online mode The database connection to the third party database to be migrated To add a connection to the list click the Add icon to edit the selected connection click the Edit pencil icon Available Source Platforms Online mode List of third party databases that you can migrate If the desired platform is not listed you probably need the appropriate JDBC driver which you can get by clicking Help then Check for Updates or by clicking the Add Platform link and adding the necessary entry on the Database Third Party JDBC Drivers preferences page Offline Capture Source File Offline mode The ocp file or xml file for a Microsoft Access migration This is a file that you previously created by clicking Tools then Migration then Create Database Capture Scripts Capture The Capture page of the wizard lets you specify the database or databases of the platform that you specified to be migrated Select the desired items under Available Databases and use the arrow icons to move them individually or collectively to Selected D
455. rce database and migrate the data to the Oracle database There are several ways of putting the destination database into production after testing it such as a Place the successfully tested database into production The test system is now the production system Use Oracle Export to extract the destination database from the successfully tested database and use Oracle Import to create that database within the production environment Use the tested migration scripts to create the Oracle database and populate it with data using SOL Loader 5 Perform the final checks on the destination database and applications 6 Place the destination database into production using one of the rollout strategies 7 Perform a final audit by doing the following a Audit the integrity of the data a Audit the validity of the processes such as back up and recovery Obtain sign off for the project if necessary 2 3 SQL Developer User Interface for Migration If you are performing database migration you need to use some migration specific features in addition to those described in Section 1 2 SOL Developer User Interface The user interface includes an additional navigator Migration Projects a Migration submenu under Tools and many smaller changes throughout the interface Figure 2 3 Main Window for a Database Migration shows the SOL Developer main window with objects reflecting the migration of a Microsoft Access application named SQL Dev
456. re 2 Connections Reports a Y a Connections H A activities access H E hr local E td hr_systemO5 B Tables 53 Views 38 Indexes TA Packages DA Procedures a Functions FF The Connections navigator lists database connections that have been created To create a new database connection import an XML file with connection definitions or export or edit current connections right click the Connections node and select the appropriate menu item For more information see Section 1 4 Database Connections The Files navigator marked by a folder icon not shown in the preceding figure displays your local file system using a standard hierarchy of folders and files You can double click or drag and drop files to open them and you can edit and save the files For example if you open a sql file it is displayed in a SOL Worksheet window The Files navigator is especially useful if you are using versioning with SOL Developer see Section 1 10 Using Versioning 1 4 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface The Reports navigator lists informative reports provided by SOL Developer such as a list of tables without primary keys for each database connection as well as any user defined reports For more information see Section 1 17 SOL Developer Reports Icons under the Connections tab above the metadata tree perform the following actions
457. re Externals Select if you do not want the update operation to apply to external working copies created as the result of externals definition handling Externals definitions are used to pull data from multiple repositories See the Subversion documentation for details SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 91 Subversion Versioning Properties Recursive Deselect if you do not want the update operation to recurse into child objects of those selected 5 191 Subversion Versioning Properties This dialog box displays general and versioning information about the currently selected file or folder 5 192 Third Party Database Objects You have requested help about a type of object in the context of a third party non Oracle database connection See the documentation for the third party database for information about database objects as they apply to that product 5 193 Unable to Connect This box informs you that SOL Developer is unable to connect to the Internet The cause might be that the connection information for the specified HTTP proxy server is invalid or the server in not available 5 194 Unable to Open File This box informs you that SOL Developer is unable to perform the export operation to the location and file that you specified The cause might be that you do not have permission to write to that location 5 195 Unit Testing Action Required This dialog box is displayed if you are creating a repository but the databa
458. re in the Oracle Database Tuning Pack The Overview and Details tabs include advice or recommendations for how to tune the specified statement along with a rationale and expected benefit For more information see the material about the SOL Tuning Advisor in Oracle Database 2 Day DBA Autotrace generates trace information for the statement To see the Autotrace Pane click the Autotrace tab SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 33 Using the SQL Worksheet Clear erases the statement or statements in the Enter SOL Statement box a To the right of these icons is a drop down list for changing the database connection to use with the worksheet The context menu right click or Shift F10 includes the preceding Worksheet toolbar operations plus the following operations some depending on the type of object displayed in the worksheet Print File prints the contents of the Enter SOL Statement box Cut Copy Paste and Select All have the same meanings as for normal text editing operations Refactoring enables you to do the following on selected text switch character case to upper lower initcap extract the sequence of PL SQL statements to a procedure or rename the local variable Format formats the SOL statement capitalizing the names of statements clauses keywords and so on The Database SOL Formatter preferences are used for the formatting You can also the Command Line Interface for SOL Formatting I
459. red a Isit necessary to have the third party and the Oracle database running simultaneously 2 For each task determine the resources and time required to complete 3 Create an initial project plan Use the information that you have gathered during the requirements and planning stage to develop an initial project plan 2 2 2 4 Task 4 Analyzing the Application In this task you identify the users of the applications that run on the source database what hardware it requires what the application does and how it interfaces with the source database You also analyze the method the application uses to connect to the database and identify necessary modifications Note If the migration project is a complex scenario as defined in Table 2 1 Oracle recommends that you consider all of the following items If you have a simple scenario consider the most relevant items To analyze the application 1 Determine whether changes to the application are required to make them run effectively on the destination database 2 If changes are required to the application determine whether it is more efficient to rewrite or modify the applications If you are rewriting the application to use the Oracle database consider the following 2 10 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines a Create the necessary project documentation to rewrite the application For example you need a design
460. reements displayed only if you selected any updates that require a license agreement For each update that requires you to agree to the terms of a license review the license text and click I Agree You must do this for each applicable license 4 Download If you selected any updates to download this page displays the progress of the download operation 5 Summary Displays information about the updates that were downloaded After you click Finish you will be asked if you want to install the updates now and restart SOL Developer 5 7 Check Out from CVS Use this dialog box to check out modules from a CVS repository Connection Name Name of the connection to the repository Module Name Name of the module to be checked out Path Path to the module Get Refresh Module List Displays the list of modules or updates the current display Destination Folder Folder into which to place the checked out files Use Revision or Tag If this option is checked the revision or tag that you specify in the text box is used To see the available tags click the binoculars icon Prune Empty Folders If this option is checked empty folders are removed from the working directory 5 8 Choose Directory This is a standard box for choosing a directory in which to place files use Location to navigate to double clicking the folder in which to save the files or enter a directory name If the directory does not already exist it is created 5 9 Com
461. rences the SOL Developer installation folder and delete the jar files associated with that extension Check for Updates Checks for any updates to the selected optional SOL Developer extensions as well as any mandatory extensions If the system you are using is behind a firewall see the SOL Developer user preferences for Web Browser and Proxy Automatically Check for Updates If this option is checked SOL Developer automatically checks for any updates to the selected optional SOL Developer extensions and any mandatory extensions at startup Enabling this option might increase SOL Developer startup time You can manually check for updates by clicking Help then Check for Updates 1 18 8 External Editor The External Editor pane determines which external editor is called by SOL Developer when you try to edit binary large object BLOB data such as image files video files and other files created by certain applications For each combination of MIME type and file extension you can specify the executable application to be used to open and edit associated files MIME Type MIME type of the data File Extension File extension for files that contain BLOB data and that are associated with the MIME type associated Editor Location Path to the editor to be used to open and edit files associated with this MIME type and file extension To edit an existing path or to specify one if the cell is empty click in the cell and either modif
462. ress For table reports the owner is the user associated with the database connection Columns For each table lists each column its data type and whether it can contain a null value Also includes Datatype Occurrences For each table owner lists each data type and how many times it is used Comments for tables and columns For each table and for each column in each table lists the descriptive comments if any associated with it Also includes a report of tables without comments If database developers use the COMMENT statement when creating or modifying tables this report can provide useful information about the purposes of tables and columns Constraints Includes the following reports related to constraints a All Constraints For each table lists each associated constraint including its type unique constraint check constraint primary key foreign key and status enabled or disabled a Check Constraints For each check constraint lists information that includes the owner the table name the constraint name the constraint status enabled or disabled and the constraint specification Enabled Constraints and Disabled Constraints For each constraint with a status of enabled or disabled lists the table name constraint name constraint type unique constraint check constraint primary key foreign key and status A disabled constraint is not enforced when rows are added or modified to have a disabled constraint enfor
463. retrieve information for the report see Section 5 60 Create Edit User Defined Report You can organize user defined reports in folders and you can create a hierarchy of folders and subfolders To create a folder for user defined reports right click the User Defined node or any folder name under that node and select Add Folder see Section 5 61 Create Edit User Defined Report Folder Information about user defined reports including any folders for these reports is stored in a file named UserReports xml under the directory for user specific information For information about the location of this information see Section 1 19 Location of User Related Information For examples of creating user defined reports see a Section 1 17 15 1 User Defined Report Example Chart Section 1 17 15 2 User Defined Report Example Dynamic HTML a Section 1 7 10 Gauges In the SOL Worksheet and User Defined Reports 1 17 15 1 User Defined Report Example Chart This example creates a report displayed as a chart It uses the definition of the EMPLOYEES table from the HR schema which is a supplied sample schema Right click on User Defined Reports and select Add Report In the Add Report dialog box specify a report name for Style select Chart and for SOL enter the following select m department id e last name e salary from employees m employees e where e employee id m employee id order by 1 The preceding query lists th
464. rimary keys r_system0S E MB robles FIRST_NAME VARCHAR2 20 BYTE Yes 2 First name ol a S oe 9 COUNTRIES LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 25 BYTE No 3 Last name of amp H E DEPARTMENTS EMAIL VARCHAR2 25 BYTE No 4 Email id of th z x E EMPLOYEES PHONE NUMBER VARCHAR2 20BYTE Yes 5 Phone numb w EH JOB HISTORY HIRE_DATE DATE No 6 Date when tl 2 z T E 3085 JOB ID VARCHAR2 10 BYTE No 7 Current jobe 2 3 LOCATIONS ne cast BU E m REGIONS SALARY NUMBER 8 2 Yes 8 Monthly sala x 3 B8 views COMMISSION PCT NUMBER 2 2 Yes 9 Commission E a8 Indexes MANAGER ID NUMBER 6 0 Yes 10 Manager id c H A Packages DEPARTMENT ID NUMBER 4 0 Yes 11 Department 3g Procedures Note This text explains the default interface However you can customize many aspects of the appearance and behavior of SOL Developer by setting preferences see Section 1 18 If you ever need to restore the default interface see Section 1 2 2 Restoring the Original Look and Feel Note For migration of third party databases to Oracle see also Section 2 3 SQL Developer User Interface for Migration The menus at the top contain standard entries plus entries for features specific to SOL Developer see Section 1 2 1 Menus for SOL Developer as shown in the following figure File Edit View Navigate Run Versioning Tools Help qB8gococx amp n 0 o 5 SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 3 SQL Developer User Interface
465. ript outside SOL Developer to populate the object capture properties ocp file with information about the converted model a To load the converted model from the object capture properties ocp file generated by the offline capture controlling script click Tools then Migration then Third Party Database Offline Capture then Load Database Capture Script Output 2 2 5 1 1 IBM DB2 Offline Capture Notes Script files and the db2 x ocp file are generated in the target folder The main script is startDump xxx which you must execute to produce the schema dump The script files prompt you for the database name user name and password and they use this information to connect to the local DB2 database The scripts generate the schema dump for database objects within object specific folders To capture the schema information in offline file format use a command in the following format with the db2 executable in the run path db2 x 0 r file name schema query To export the schema data in offline file format use a command in the following format with the db2 executable in the run path 2 18 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines For DB2 version 9 data export db2 export to file name gt of DEL modified by lobsinsepfiles coldel timestampformat YYYY MM DD HH mm ss datesiso nochardel select query For DB2 version 8 data export db2 export to file name o
466. rocedure If the action is later changed in the library it is not automatically re copied into the process Subscribe Uses the action as stored in the library You cannot edit the action in the process if you use the Subscribe option If the action is later changed in the library the changed version is automatically used in the process 3 9 Unit Test Reports Several SOL Developer reports provide information about operations related to unit testing These reports are listed in the Unit Test navigator under the Reports node The available reports include All Suite Runs a All Test Implementation Runs All Test Runs Suite Runs Code Coverage Suite Test Implementation Runs Suite Test Runs Test Implementation Runs lest Runs Code Coverage 3 10 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Command Line Interface for Unit Testing a User Test Runs test runs grouped by user Each unit testing report contains a top pane with a summary information row for each item To see detailed information about any item click in its row to display the information in one or more detail panes below the summary information For example if you click in a summary row in the All Test Runs report details about that test run are displayed under the Test Run Details and Most Recent Code Coverage tabs Some reports prompt you for bind variables where you can accept the default values to display all relevant items or enter bind variables
467. rows in the table a Find Highlight displays the Find Highlight which enables you to find and optionally highlight data value matches in the table data grid a Publish to Apex if Application Express is installed creates a small Application Express application based on the data It displays a dialog box in which you specify the following for the application to be created workspace application name theme page name and SQL statement for generating the report Export enables you to export some or all of the table data to a file or to the system clipboard in any of the following formats XML XML tags and data CSV comma separated values including a header row for column identifiers SOL Insert INSERT statements or SOL Loader SOL Loader control file After you select a format the Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data wizard is displayed You can copy and paste data between table grid cells and cells in a Microsoft Excel worksheet To copy table data to the clipboard click the column header for all column data or select specific cells and press Ctrl C to copy the column header text along with the table data press Ctrl Shift C To sort the display of rows by values within a column double click the column header to switch between ascending and descending sorting double click the up down arrow in the column header In the Data pane for a table or view you can split the display vertically or horizontally
468. rsions for files crossing different platforms are handled automatically IDE Global Setting Uses the default character set for the integrated development environment IDE Other Uses the selected character set 5 154 Set Pause Continue This dialog box is displayed if you enter the SOL Plus statement SET PAUSE ON in the SOL Worksheet and then run the worksheet contents as a script After the SET PAUSE ON statement is processed execution pauses and this dialog box is displayed after each statement until the SET PAUSE OFF statement is processed To have execution continue at the next statement click OK 5 155 Shared Wizard Pages These pages are shared by two or more wizards such as Database Diff Database Copy Database Export Data Pump Export and Data Pump Import The page titles may vary slightly depending on the wizard Types a Specify Objects m Data 5 80 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Shared Wizard Pages 5 155 1 Types Summary The page title is Types to Diff Types to Export or Object Types Check the types of objects that you want to be included in the operation You can click Toggle All to check and uncheck all individual types You must select at least one object type 5 155 2 Specify Objects 5 155 3 Data You can limit the types or objects and the objects within selected types for the operation You can specify a Name string filter including wildcard characters and optionally an
469. rsors including cursors by session including open cursors and cursor details Database Parameters Provide information about all database parameters or only those parameters that are not set to their default values Locks Provide information about locks including the user associated with each Sessions Provide information about sessions selected and ordered by various criteria Storage Provide usage and allocation information for tablespaces and data files Top SOL Provide information about SQL statements selected and ordered by various criteria This information might help you to identify SOL statements that are being executed more often than expected or that are taking more time than expected Users Provide information about database users selected and ordered by various criteria For example you can find out which users were created most recently which user accounts have expired and which users use object types and how many objects each owns Waits and Events Provide information about waits and events selected by criteria related to time and other factors For Events in the Last x Minutes specify the number of minutes in the Enter Bind Values dialog box 1 17 7 Data Dictionary reports Data Dictionary reports list information about the data dictionary views that are accessible in the database Examples of data dictionary views are ALL OBJECTS and USER TABLES Dictionary View Columns For each Oracle data dictionary vie
470. rties For Data Type select one of the supported types for this import operation For a VARCHAR2 or NUMBER column you must specify an appropriate Size Precision value You can specify whether the column value can be null Nullable and you can specify a default value Default Finish Verify Parameters Before Import You are encouraged to verify the import parameters If any test fails the Information column contains a brief explanation and you can go back and fix any errors before you can click Finish To perform the import operation click Finish The action taken will depend on the load method selected and on whether you specified to send the script statements to a SOL Worksheet 5 36 Export Import Connection Descriptors The Export Connection Descriptors dialog box exports information about one or more database connections to an XML file The Import Connection Descriptors dialog box imports connections that have been exported Connections that you import are added to any connections that already exist in SOL Developer File Name Name of the XML file to contain exported information or that contains information to be imported Use the Browse button to specify the location Connections Names of connections that you can select for the export or import operation 5 37 Create Database Destination This interface is used for creating a new Oracle Scheduler database destination For more information about job scheduling see Section 1
471. rts 1 17 1 About Your Database reports The About Your Database reports list release information about the database associated with the selected connection The reports include Version Banner database settings and National Language Support Parameters NLS xxx parameter values for globalization support 1 17 2 All Objects reports All Objects reports list information about objects visible to the user associated with the database connection All Objects For each object lists the owner name type table view index and so on status valid or invalid the date it was created and the date when the last data definition language DDL operation was performed on it The Last DDL date can help you to find if any changes to the object definitions have been made on or after a specific time Collection Types Lists information about for each collection type The information includes the type owner element type name and owner and type dependent specific information Dependencies For each object with references to it lists information about references to uses of that object Invalid Objects Lists all objects that have a status of invalid Object Count by Type For each type of object associated with a specific owner lists the number of objects This report might help you to identify users that have created an especially large number of objects particularly objects of a specific type Public Database Links Lists all public da
472. ry Makes the current repository a shared repository Deselect As Shared Repository Makes the current repository an unshared repository 3 2 2 Other Menus Unit Test Items The View menu has the following item related to unit testing Unit Test Toggles the display of the Unit Test navigator SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 3 Unit Test Repository 3 2 3 Unit Test Preferences The SOL Developer user preferences window displayed by clicking Tools then Preferences contains a Unit Test Parameters pane For information about specific preferences click Help in the pane or see Section 1 18 14 3 3 Unit Test Repository The unit test repository is a set of tables views indexes and other schema objects that SOL Developer maintains to manage the use of the unit testing feature Most of these objects have UT in their names You can create a separate database user for a repository or use the schema of an existing database user but for simplicity and convenience in an environment with a single main shared repository you may want to create a separate database user as is done in Section 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial A repository can be unshared or shared depending on how many and which database users are allowed to perform various types of unit testing operations nan unshared repository only the database user that owns the unit test repository schema objects can be used for operations than can modify the re
473. ry box enter or copy and paste the following statement SELECT p patron id p last name p first name t transaction type t transaction date FROM patrons p transactions t WHERE p patron id t patron id ORDER BY p patron id t transaction type Then click Test Syntax and ensure that you have not made any syntax errors If you made any errors correct then and click Test Syntax again DDL Review the SOL statement that SOL Developer will use to create the view If you want to make any changes go back to the SOL Query tab and make the changes there If you want to save the CREATE VIEW statement to a SOL script file click Save and specify the location and file name When you are finished click OK You have finished creating the view If you inserted data to the underlying tables as described in Section 4 5 Insert Data into the Tables you can see the data returned by this view as follows in the Connections navigator expand Views and select PATRONS TRANS VIEW then click the Data tab To create a procedure that lists all books with a specified rating go to Section 47 Create a PL SOL Procedure 4 7 Create a PL SQL Procedure Create a procedure that lists all books with a specified rating You can then call this procedure with an input parameter a number from 1 to 10 and the output will be all the titles of all books with that rating 4 8 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Debug a PL SQL Procedure To create th
474. s esses 6 4 How to Change the Timing for Completion Insight sse 6 5 How to Specify the Columns in the Debugger sess eee 6 5 Highly Visual Features of Oracle SOL Developer esses eee 6 5 List of Figures 1 1 SOL Developer Main Window onasin re ec iia oe te BR Lei dci 1 3 2 1 SOL Developer Migration Architecture esses ee eee 2 7 2 2 V model with a Database Migration sse eee eene nnns 2 26 2 3 Main Window for a Database Migration 2 32 3 1 Unit Test Navigator arado dbi ettet aotem on dts ei ee Eos Pete 3 3 XV List of Tables Default Locations for User Related Information 1 1 2 1 xvi Complex and Simple Scenarios sese eene 2 8 Audience Preface This guide provides conceptual and usage information about Oracle SOL Developer a graphical tool that enables you to browse create edit and delete drop database objects run SQL statements and scripts edit and debug PL SQL code manipulate and export data and view and create reports This guide is intended for those using the Oracle SOL Developer tool Documentation Accessibility For information about Oracle s commitment to accessibility visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id docacc Access to Oracle Support Oracle customers have access to electronic support through
475. s Clear History Removes the selected statement or statements or all statements if no statements are selected from the SQL history You will be asked to confirm this action Filter If you type a string in the text box and click Filter only SOL statements containing that string are displayed 1 7 8 Query Builder The Query Builder pane enables you to display and build SQL queries graphically You can create a SELECT statement by dragging and dropping table and view names and by graphically specifying columns and other elements of the query While you are building the query you can click the Worksheet tab to see the SELECT statement reflecting current specifications and then click the Query Builder tab to continue building the query if you want In the area below the graphical display of tables and views you can specify one or more lines with the following information Output Specifies whether to include the expression in the statement output Expression Column name or expression Aggregate Aggregation function to be used Avg Avg Distinct Count and so on Alias Column alias to be used Sort Type Ascending or Descending sorting of results Sort Order Order to use in sorting results if multiple columns or expressions are to be used for example sorting first by department and then by salary within each department Grouping Specifies whether to insert a GROUP BY clause Criteria An expression with one or more crit
476. s H if Packages WHERE rating lt in_rating 23 Procedures USING in rating E LIST 4 RATING OPEN rating cursor F R SELECT rating FROM books WH 03 LIST A RATING2 rating lt in rating USING in rating ce E LIST_TENS DBMS OUTPUT PUT LINE ll books with a rating of Stack o E Loop E o FETCH the_cursor INTO matching title Subroutine e FETCH rating cursor INTO mate M n ES CIMURRAY LIST A RATING2 EXIT WHEN the cursor amp NOTFOUND El CAMURRAY ANONYMOUS BLOCK DBMS DUTPUT PUT LINE natching title END LOOP Uzalpsta a CLOSE the cursor Name Value Type CLOSE rating cursor IN RATING 10 NUMBER END list a rating2 MATCHING TITLE Moby Dick Y ARCH E MATCHING_RATINGNULL NUMBER E THE_CURSOR REFCUR amp Debugging Log E RATING_CURSOR REFCUR e i JE E MD I m I In the code editing window under the tab with the name of the subprogram is a toolbar and beneath it is the text of the subprogram which you can edit You can set and unset breakpoints for debugging by clicking to the left of the thin vertical line beside each statement with which you want to associate a breakpoint When a breakpoint is set a red circle is displayed The toolbar under the tab for the subprogram name includes the icons shown in the following figure 2 MT DX 3 a Run starts normal execution of the subprogram and displays the results in the Running Log tab a Debug starts execution of the subprogram in de
477. s and then click Tools then Preferences and use the SOL Developer user preference pane for Database Third Party JDBC Drivers to add these files Platform UDB Host Name Host system for the IBM DB2 database Port TCP IP Port on which the IBM DB2 server will listen Enter Database Name of the IBM DB2 database JDBC tab The following information applies to a JDBC connection JDBC ODBC Bridge or Other Third Party Driver Indicates a JDBC to ODBC bridge driver or another third party driver Data Source JDBC ODBC Bridge Name of an existing ODBC data source Extra Parameters JDBC ODBC Bridge Additional parameters for the connection JDBC URL Other Third Party Driver URL for connecting directly from Java to the database overrides any other connection type specification Driver Class Other Third Party Driver The name of the driver class that will be used for the connection for example com microsoft jdbc sqlserver SQLServerDriver This name can be found in the JDBC driver specification usually shipped with the driver MySQL tab The following information applies to a connection to a MySOL database Note that to connect to a MySQL database you must first download the appropriate MySQL connection driver and then click Tools then Preferences and use the SOL Developer user preference pane for Database Third Party JDBC Drivers to add the driver Host Name Host system for the MySQL database Port TCP IP Port on whi
478. s not magazines journals or other document formats and it can contain no more than one copy of any book You will perform the following major steps 1 Create a Table BOOKS Create a Table PATRONS Create a Table TRANSACTIONS Create a Sequence Insert Data into the Tables Create a View Create a PL SOL Procedure Debug a PL SQL Procedure optional Use the SOL Worksheet for Queries optional o o N Pf FP YS DN Note To delete the objects that you create for this tutorial you can use the DROP statements at the beginning of the script in Section 4 10 Script for Creating and Using the Library Tutorial Objects Related Topics Section 4 10 Script for Creating and Using the Library Tutorial Objects Chapter 1 SQL Developer Concepts and Usage Section 1 2 SOL Developer User Interface SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database 4 1 Create a Table BOOKS Section 1 3 Database Objects 4 1 Create a Table BOOKS The BOOKS table contains a row for each book in the library It includes columns of character and number types a primary key a unique constraint and a check constraint You will use the Create Table dialog box to create the table declaratively the table that you create will be essentially the same as if you had entered the following statement using the SOL Worksheet CREATE TABLE books book id VARCHAR2 20 title VARCHAR2 50 CONSTRAINT title_not_n
479. s or trunk of the repository To proceed with the checkout from the root click Yes to cancel this request click No Skip This Message Next Time If you enable this option on future requests to check out from the repository root this dialog box will not be displayed and the operation will proceed as if you had clicked Yes 5 170 Subversion Create Remote Directory Use this dialog box to create a remote directory for a connection in a Subversion repository Directory Name Directory name to be associated with the specified URL Comments Optional descriptive comment SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 85 Subversion Create Subversion Repository 5 171 Subversion Create Subversion Repository This information applies to creating a Subversion repository A connection to the repository will be created automatically For information about SOL Developer support for versioning and Subversion see Section 1 10 Repository Path Location for the new Subversion repository You can Browse to select the location File System Type Data storage system type for the repository For information about choosing a system see Version Control with Subversion at http svnbook red bean com Native The file system type being used by the operating system Berkeley DB Causes a Berkeley DB database to be used as the data storage system Connection Name Name for this connection If you leave this box blank the connection wi
480. s appended Disable constraints before moving data Controls whether to disable referential integrity constraints before deploying data to destination tables You may want to disable constraints to expedite the deployment and then reapply the constraints after the deployment Format Delimiter Identifies the character used to separate the data into columns The delimiter character is not included in the data loaded If the preview page does not show the data separated into columns the correct delimiter is probably not specified Examine the data in the preview area to determine the correct delimiter Line Terminator Identifies the terminator for each line The line terminator is not included in the data loaded If the preview page shows the data in one single row the correct terminator is not specified Left Enclosure and Right Enclosure Enclosures are used for character data and are optional Enclosures are not included in the data loaded 5 60 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Erase from Disk 5 77 2 1 Unsupported Type Error for Cloud Deployment An error box is displayed if any of the following conditions apply on an attempt to deploy objects from the Cart to the Cloud a The objects include any of the following object types database link directory external table materialized view materialized view log or synonym a The objects include any with a data type that is not supported for Cloud deployment such as SDO GEO
481. s deployed on example com its context path is apex and your database setting name is sales prod you can create the following URL prefix routing rule Rule Type URL Path Routing Rule http example com apex sales Schema for RESTful Services sales rest The preceding rule means that any requests matching http example com apex sales willbe routed to the sales prod database connection The sales rest schema specified in the sales prod database connection will be searched for RESTful Services definitions The preceding routing rule will match any of the following requests http example com apex sales f p 1 1 http example com apex sales leads http example com apex sales forecasting report month jan The preceding routing rule will not match any of the following requests https example com apex sales f p 1 1 the protocol is wrong http example com 8080 apex sales f p 1 1 the port is wrong http example com apex f p 1 1 missing the sales segment of the base URL http example com pls sales leads the context root is wrong http www example com apex sales forecasting report month jan the host name is wrong 1 16 4 2 RESTful Connections RESTful Services enable an application to publish Web services that are accessed by other applications to exchange data For example you can configure a RESTful Service SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 67 Application Express Listener Administration
482. s in SQL Developer Refresh lets you select an interval for automatically updating the display Actions displays a menu with actions appropriate for the object The actions are the same as when you right click an object of that type in the Connections navigator With information displays that are in grid form Youcan often use the context right click menu on a header or a data cell to perform operations like those for the table data grid as explained in Section 1 5 Entering and Modifying Data For example right clicking on a header lets you select options like Auto fit Columns Sort Delete Persisted Settings such as any sort order specifications and Filter Column right clicking any data cell lets you select options like Save Grid as Report Single Record View Count Rows Find Highlight find and optionally highlight values in the grid and Export unload data a You can click the column heading to display a Filter box to restrict the display to entries containing a string For example in the Database Configuration Current Database Properties page you can click PROPERTY NAME and type NLS to see only properties containing NLS that is globalization properties For information that is read only not editable using the DBA navigator you may have other options within SOL Developer to specify relevant values For example to change the value of any globalization support NLS parameter you can use the Databas
483. s in the operation to be tested For example you might want the unit test to use a new procedure perhaps owned by a different database user instead of the procedure for which the unit test was originally defined The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 To go from one step to the next click Next to go back to the previous step click Back Select Operation Select the database connection associated with the owner of the object on the right then use the hierarchy tree to select an object to be used as the new operation For example to specify a different procedure expand the Procedures node and select the desired procedure Current Target Operation The operation currently associated with this unit test Select New Target Operation Use the hierarchy tree to select the new operation to be associated with this unit test Reset Discards any unsaved specifications and restores the current definition Match Parameters by Name Position Specify whether to match the new operation s parameters with the current operation s parameters by using the names or positions of the parameters in the format signature of the object Connection selector Select the database connection to be used for displaying the hierarchy of objects from which to select the new operation For example if the new procedure is in a different database schema select a connection associated with the database user for that schema New Target O
484. s navigator and selecting an item from the menu Import Application Imports an application from a specified file and installs the application Deploy Application Deploys an application into a specified target schema Drop Deletes the application Modify Application Enables you to change the alias name Rename status global notification and proxy server for the application Quick DDL Saves the DDL statements to create the application or the selected component to a file a zip file a worksheet or the system clipboard SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 11 Database Objects a Refactor in bulk Collects all anonymous blocks refactors them into PL SQL procedures and places them in a package The output of a refactor in bulk operation is a PL SQL script which you can review and save and which you can execute to create the package The following operations are available only by right clicking the Application Express node in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu Start EPG Starts the embedded PL SQL gateway for Application Express Displays a dialog box for executing the following statements BEGIN DBMS_ EPG map dad APEX apex end Stop EPG Stops the embedded PL SQL gateway for Application Express Displays a dialog box for executing the following statements BEGIN DBMS_ EPG unmap dad APEX end 1 3 2 Cache Groups Oracle TimesTen In Memory Database 1 3 3 Ch
485. s not available with a connection it may be that the feature was not available in that release of Oracle Database The dialog boxes for creating and editing many objects contain a tab or pane named DDL or SQL where you can see the statement that SOL Developer will use to perform the actions you specify CREATE to create an object ALTER to apply changes to an existing object You can search for specific objects associated with an Oracle database connection by clicking the Search icon as explained in Section 1 9 Finding Database Objects If you have connected to any third party non Oracle databases such as MySQL Microsoft SOL Server Sybase Adaptive Server Microsoft Access or IBM DB2 you can view their objects using the Connections navigator For information about connecting to third party databases see the SOL Developer user preferences for Database Third Party JDBC Drivers 1 3 1 Applications Application Express 3 0 1 and Later Effective with Oracle Application Express 3 0 1 if you use SOL Developer to connect to a schema that owns any Application Express applications the Connections navigator has an Application Express node You can click an application name to display tabs Application Pages LOVs Lists Templates Breadcrumbs and so on with information about the application You can perform the following operations on an Application Express application by right clicking the application name in the Connection
486. s pane Specifies options for an external table which is a read only table whose metadata is stored in the database but whose data in stored outside the database Among other capabilities external tables enable you to query data without first loading it into the database Access Driver The access driver of the external table The access driver is the API that interprets the external data for the database ORACLE LOADER or ORACLE _ DATAPUMP You must specify the ORACLE DATAPUMP access driver if you specify the AS subquery clause to unload data from one Oracle database and reload it into the same database or a different Oracle database Access Type Type of data to be automatically converted during loads and unloads BLOB or CLOB Default Directory A default directory object corresponding to a directory on the file system where the external data sources may reside The default directory can also be used by the access driver to store auxiliary files such as error logs Project Column Determines how the access driver validates the rows of an external table in subsequent queries ALL processes all column values regardless of which columns are selected and validates only those rows with fully valid column entries If any column value would raise an error such as a data type conversion error the row is rejected even if that column was not referenced in the select list REFERENCED processes only those columns in the select list The ALL settin
487. s pane specifies whether to freeze object viewer windows and display options for the output The display options will affect the generated DDL on the SQL tab The Data Editor Options affect the behavior when you are using the Data tab to edit table data Data Editor Options Post Edits on Row Change If this option is checked posts DML changes when you perform edits using the Data tab and the Set Auto Commit On option determines whether or not the changes are automatically committed If this option is not checked changes are posted and committed when you press the Commit toolbar button Set Auto Commit On available only if Post Edit on Row Changes is enabled If this option is checked DML changes are automatically posted and committed when you perform edits using the Data tab Clear persisted table column widths order sort and filter settings If you click Clear then any customizations in the Data tab display for table column widths order sort and filtering are not saved for subsequent openings of the tab but instead the default settings are used for subsequent openings Use ORA ROWSCN for DataEditor insert and update statements If this option is checked SOL Developer internally uses the ORA ROWSCN pseudocolumn in SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 87 SQL Developer Preferences performing insert and update operations when you use the Data tab If you experience any errors trying to update data try unchecking disablin
488. s required by applicable law or agreed to in writing software distributed under the License is distributed on an AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND either express or implied See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License Oracle must give recipients a copy of this license doc Regular Expression Package 1 3 This program includes Regular Expression Package which has the following associated attribution text Jakarta Regexp Version 1 3 Copyright 1999 2002 The Apache Software Foundation All rights reserved Licensed under the Apache 1 1 License Agreement The names The Jakarta Project Jakarta Regexp and Apache Software Foundation must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact apache apache org This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation For more information on the Apache Software Foundation please see http www apache org The Apache Software License Version 1 1 Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
489. s se ree ete he er e ner tee e e Rene eie dte 1 25 1 4 3 Advanced Security for JDBC Connection to the Database sess 1 25 1 4 4 Connections with Operating System OS Authentication 1 25 1 4 5 Connections with Proxy Authentication sese eene ee nen 1 26 1 5 Entering and Modifying Data sse eee nennen nennen nennen 1 26 1 6 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures esses 1 28 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures 1 30 1 6 2 Remote Debugging etui eodeni ti TR oe i eret rete eee 1 31 1 6 3 Displaying SOL Trace tre Files ite tette ttes 1 31 1 6 4 Using the PL SQL Hierarchical Profiler sees eee 1 31 1 6 5 Setting Expression Watches centena ferie detiene teet tt hene 1 32 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet 515 eee tee e Echte e E eerta etes 1 32 1 7 1 SQL Plus Statements Supported and Not Supported in SOL Worksheet 1 35 1 7 2 Script Ruedas anal edad 1 36 1 7 3 Execution Plan nnn eG desde id eO 1 37 1 7 4 Autotrace Pane oed love coves Soca bce dn ce eee A a 1 37 1 7 5 DBMS Quitp t Partie due este per emet t de ire e het Ra cen et isis 1 37 1 7 6 OWA Output Pane nete nere een e e aei ne fert n n ceres 1 38 1 7 7 SOL HIStory ete ecrit d e ee E dente RTS 1 38 1 7 8 Query Build t 2n accen ene eden ede e el end e ena net etd uas 1 39 1 7 9 Command Line Interface for SOL Formatting
490. s stored in a migration repository which is a collection of schema objects that SOL Developer uses to store migration information The information in the repository is used to generate the converted model which is a representation of the structure of the destination database as it will be implemented in the Oracle database You can then use the information in the captured model and the converted model to compare database objects identify conflicts with Oracle reserved words and manage the migration progress When you are ready to migrate you generate the Oracle schema objects and then migrate the data SOL Developer contains logic to extract data from the data dictionary of the source database create the captured model and convert the captured model to the converted model Using SOL Developer to migrate a third party database to an Oracle database provides the following benefits Reduces the effort and risks involved in a migration project Enables you to migrate an entire third party database including triggers and stored procedures Enables you to see and compare the captured model and converted model and to customize each if you wish so that you can control how much automation there is in the migration process Provides feedback about the migration through reports 2 2 1 1 How Migration Works The components of SOL Developer work together to migrate a third party database to an Oracle database Figure 2 1 SQL Deve
491. s the default You cannot specify both a Pct Version value and the Retention option Free Pools Specifies the number of groups of free lists for the LOB segment usually the number of instances in a Real Application Clusters environment or 1 for a single instance database You can specify this option only if the database is running in automatic undo mode You cannot specify both a Free Pools value and the Free Lists fields Extents Initial Size of the first extent of the table Specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit associated with the number Extents Next Size of the next extent to be allocated to the table Specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit associated with the number Extents Min Minimum number of extents allocated when the table is created Extents Max Maximum number of extents allocated when the table is created Unlimited if checked means that there is no maximum and any specified maximum is ignored Extents Pct Increase Percentage that each extent grows over the previous extent Buffer Pool DEFAULT means to use the Oracle Database default KEEP means to put blocks from the segment into the Keep buffer pool maintaining an appropriately sized Keep buffer pool lets Oracle retain the database object in memory to avoid I O operations RECYCLE means to put blocks from the segment into the Recycle pool an appropriately sized Recycle pool reduces the number of objects whose default pool
492. schemas for the source and destination connections can be in the same database or different databases Some pages include Proceed to Summary which lets you accept the default values for remaining pages and go directly to the Summary page by clicking Next Source Destination page Source Connection Database connection that has access to the source objects to be compared 5 54 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Differences Destination Connection Database connection that has access to the destination Objects to be compared DDL Generation Options Check the options or features to be included if you later generate a script to update the objects in the destination schema to reflect differences in the source schema comments schema name prefixed to schema objects constraints password values constraint indexes referential constraints Options that are not checked are ignored or not performed during the script generation Schema This option if you also select Consolidate Schema under DDL Comparison Options causes object names to be prefixed with the target schema name in the generated script for example CREATE TABLE HR SKILLS instead of CREATE TABLE SKILLS If you select Maintain Schema under DDL Comparison Options this Schema option is ignored and object names are prefixed with the source schema name in the generated script DDL Comparison Options Check various options including differences to be ignored
493. se For example if a listener is running with a static listener configured for the database you can start and stop the database force database startup and restrict access to the database You can right click an item node at any level in the DBA navigator hierarchy to display a context menu with commands relevant to that item Typical commands include the following Refresh queries the database for the current details about the selected object for example a connection or just a table Apply Filter restricts the display of objects using a filter that you specify To remove the effects of applying a filter right click the node and select Clear Filter Open displays a pane with relevant information on the right side of the window The pane may be read only or editable Create New enables you to create a new object of that type Help displays a brief definition or description of objects of that type The pane with information about an item opened from the DBA navigator typically contains icons and other controls for the following Freeze View the pin keeps that object s tab and information in the window when you click another object in the Connections navigator a separate tab and display are created for that other object If you click the pin again the object s display is available for reuse Run updates the display by querying the database for the latest information SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 45 Using DBA Feature
494. se Administrator s Guide User tab Specifies general properties for the database user User Name The user name string For an existing user this field is read only to change the name you must drop the user and create a new user with the desired name New Password Password string for the new user or new password for an existing user You must also type the same password string for Confirm Password Password Expired If this option is checked the password is marked as expired and the user must change the password before being permitted to connect to the database Account Locked If this option is checked the user will not be permitted to connect to the database until a DBA user unlocks the account associated with this user Roles tab Specifies roles to be granted to the user For each role you can check Granted to grant the role Admin to permit the user to grant the role to other users and Default to use the default settings for Granted and Admin SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 41 Create Edit User Defined Report For convenience you can click buttons to affect all settings Grant All Revoke All Admin All Admin None Default All Default None then you can specify other settings for individual roles System Privileges tab Specifies privileges to be granted to the user For each privilege you can check Granted to grant the privilege and Admin to permit the user to grant the privilege to other users
495. se Security Guide For example to create connection for a user named PROXY USER but connecting using the user name and password of existing database user SCOTT follow these steps 1 Create the proxy user and grant it the appropriate privileges CREATE USER proxy user IDENTIFIED BY password ALTER USER proxy user GRANT CONNECT THROUGH scott AUTHENTICATED USING PASSWORD GRANT create session TO proxy user Grant other privileges as needed 2 Create a new database connection For example connection name proxy conn user name scott password password for scott 3 Enable check Proxy Connection 4 Inthe Oracle Proxy Connection dialog box select User Name for Proxy Type 5 For Proxy User enter PROXY USER and for Proxy Password enter the password for the PROXY USER database user 6 Click OK to close the Oracle Proxy Connection dialog box 7 Complete any other necessary connection information and click Connect to create the connection In this example when you connect using the proxy conn connection the user name and password for user SCOTT are used to connect to the database but the connection sees those database objects that the PROXY USER user is permitted to see The preceding instructions cause two sessions to be started one for the proxy user and one for the proxy client when the connection is opened If you want to have a single session with no second password or distinguished name require
496. se backup and recovery The options use the Oracle Database Recovery Manager RMAN feature which is described in detail in Oracle Database Backup and Recovery User s Guide You should be familiar with RMAN concepts and techniques before using these options In any dialog box or wizard for RMAN operations you can click the SOL or Summary tab to see the statements that will be used to implement the specified options Create Backup Wizard on context menu Displays a wizard where you specify Backup Properties type of backup and whether to use RMAN encryption and Script Properties Save to File and where to save the script file or Run Scheduler Job and specify a credential or create a new one For Create New Credential specify the credential name and the user name and user password on the server system SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 47 Using DBA Features in SQL Developer Backup Jobs Displays the backup jobs that have been previously run lets you create and run new backup Note that backup jobs are distinct from action jobs Backup Sets Displays the backup sets that have been created by previous backup jobs and that can be used for recovery Image Copies Displays the image copies that have been created by previous backup jobs and that can be used for recovery RMAN Settings Displays settings for backup and recovery These settings are stored in the server and are used and managed by RMAN Scheduled RMAN
497. se so that it is reproducible 2 28 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines A test that is not reproducible is not acceptable for issue tracking or for an audit process Divide the source database into functions and procedures and create a test case for each function or procedure In the test case state what you are going to test define the testing criteria and describe the expected results Record the expected result of each test case Verify that the actual results meet the expected results for each test Define test cases that produce negative results as well as those that you expect a positive result 2 2 10 2 2 Example of a Unit Test Case The following displays a sample unit test plan for Windows Name Jane Harrison Module Table Test Emp Date test completed 23 May 2007 Coverage log file location mwb database TableTestEmp Description This unit test tests that the emp table was migrated successfully Reviewed by John Smith TaskID Task Description Expected Result Verified Yes No 1 Run the following on the source On the source database the Yes database for each table count produces a number The number of In this case the number is select count from emp rows in each table the number of rowsineach h indt table is the ane in the Run the following on the Ro destination database for each databidde table On the destination database f dede Pr
498. se user for the repository does not have the necessary privileges SOL Developer will issue one or more prompts For each click Yes enter the password for the SYS account and allow the commands to execute 5 196 Unit Testing Add Category Use this dialog box to create a lookup category for unit testing Using lookups is explained in Section 3 6 Using Lookups to Simplify Unit Test Creation 5 197 Unit Testing Add Data Type Use this dialog box to add a data type to a lookup category for unit testing The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 5 198 Unit Testing Add Item to Library Use this dialog box to add a startup teardown or validation specification to the unit testing library depending on which node you have selected in the Unit Test navigator After you specify a name and click OK specify a connection and then complete the definition The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 5 92 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Unit Testing Create Unit Test 5 199 Unit Testing Add Test Implementation Use this dialog box to add an implementation for a unit test The SOL Developer unit testing feature is explained in Chapter 3 When you create a unit test a default implementation is created however you can specify one or more additional implementations 5 200 Unit Testing Add Test Suite Use this dialog box to create a test suite for unit testing The SOL Develop
499. se you also specify non unique unique or bitmap as well as one or more index expressions or Text for an Oracle Text index created with INDEXTYPE IS CTXSYS CONTEXT in which case you specify the column to be indexed Non unique means that the index can contain multiple identical values Unique means that no duplicate values are permitted Bitmap stores rowids associated with a key value as a bitmap Index A list of index expressions that is the table columns or column expressions in the index To add an index expression click the Add Column Expression icon this adds a column name here and in Column Expression where you can edit it To delete an index expression click the Remove Column Expression X icon to move an index expression up or down in the list click the Move Column Up and Move Column Down icons An index must have at least one index expression For example to create an index on the AUTHOR LAST NAME column of the BOOKS table from the tutorial see Section 4 1 Create a Table BOOKS click the icon and select AUTHOR LAST NAME in Column Name or Expression next field which changes BOOKS to AUTHOR LAST NAME in the Index field Column Name or Expression A column name or column expression A column expression is an expression built from columns constants SOL functions and user defined functions When you specify a column expression you create a function based index Order ASC for an ascending index index v
500. selected schema Columns A list of the columns in the table Select one or more columns to be copied into the table that you are creating or editing and click OK 5 68 Custom Filters This dialog box is displayed if you right click and select Customize Filters in the History tab for a sql file or a SOL Trace trc file You can modify an existing filter or create a new filter Filter List Names of the available filters To edit an existing filter select its name the details for that filter are displayed in the dialog box To remove an existing filter select its name and click Remove To create a new filter click Add and specify the filter name To restore the filters to those at SOL Developer installation click Restore Defaults This deleted any filters that have been added since installation Simple Expression Create the filter by selecting a column and operator and by specifying a value To select a value from a list click Insert Complex Expression Create the filter by entering a complex expression 5 50 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Data Pump Export 5 69 Data Pump Export This wizard is displayed if you expand a connection in the DBA navigator right click Export Jobs and select Data Pump Export Wizard For information about using the DBA navigator see Section 1 11 Using DBA Features in SOL Developer To use the Data Pump Export wizard you must understand the concepts and techniques for Oracle Data
501. ses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed 4 Redistribution You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium with or without modifications and in Source or Object form provided that You meet the following conditions a You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License and b You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files and c You must retain in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute all copyright patent trademark and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works and d If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works in at least one of the following places within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works within the Source form or documentation if provided along with the Derivative Works or within a display generated by the Derivative Works if and wherever such third party notices normally appear The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not mod
502. settings for Granted and Admin For convenience you can click buttons to affect all settings Grant All Revoke All Admin All Admin None Default All Default None then you can specify other settings for individual roles System Privileges tab Specifies privileges to be granted to the user For each privilege you can check Granted to grant the privilege and Admin Option to permit the user to grant the privilege to other users For convenience you can click buttons to affect all settings Grant All Revoke All Admin All Admin None then you can specify other settings for individual privileges SQL tab Displays the SQL statements that SOL Developer will use to create after executing a CREATE ROLE statement a new user or to edit an existing role This display is read only if you want to make any changes go back to the relevant tabs and make the changes there 5 49 Create Edit Schedule This dialog box is used for creating or editing an Oracle Scheduler schedule For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer To create a schedule SOL Developer internally uses the DBMS_ SCHEDULER CREATE SCHEDULE procedure Properties Name Name of the schedule The name has to be unique in the SOL namespace For example a schedule cannot have the same name as a table in a schema Description Optional text string that can be used to describe the schedule When Specify when
503. sk you use SOL Developer to make calculated decisions on the amount of work that can be automated and how much is manual To estimate the workload 1 Capture the captured model create the converted model and migrate to the destination database You can analyze the source database through the captured model and a preview of the destination database through the converted model After you have captured the source database analyze the captured data contained in the captured model and the converted model Ensure the content and structure of the migration repository is correct and determine how much time the entire process takes Use the Migration Log pane to evaluate the capture and migration process categorize the total number of database objects and identify the number of objects that can be converted and migrated automatically The migration log provides information about the actions that have occurred and record any warnings and errors They identify the changes that have been made to the converted model so that you can evaluate if you should make changes to the applications that access the destination database Evaluate and categorize the issues that occurred The migration log can help by providing information about Tables that did not load when you captured the source database Stored procedures views and triggers that did not parse when you created the converted model Syntax that requires manual intervention
504. so the panes for Database Utilities Export Formats CSV Delimited Excel Fixed HTML PDF SQL Loader Text XML 1 90 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Export View DDL Options If this option is checked the data definition language DDL statements for the database objects to be exported are included in the output file and the other options in this group affect the content and format of the DDL statements Pretty Print If this option is checked the statements are attractively formatted in the output file and the size of the file will be larger than it would otherwise be Terminator If this option is checked a line terminator character is inserted at the end of each line Show Schema If this option is checked the schema name is included in CREATE statements If this option is not checked the schema name is not included in CREATE and INSERT statements which is convenient if you want to re create the exported objects and data under a schema that has a different name Include Dependents If this option is checked objects that are dependent on the Objects specified for export are also exported For nonprivileged users only dependent objects in their schema are exported for privileged users all dependent objects are exported Include BYTE Keyword If this option is checked column length specifications refer to bytes if this option is not checked column length specifications refer to characters
505. specification and requirements documentation b Rewrite the application according to the specification c Testthe application works against the Oracle database If you are modifying the application to use the Oracle database consider the following a Identify the number of connections to the database that are in the application and modify these connections to use the Oracle database You may need to change the connection information to use an ODBC or JDBC connection b Identify the embedded SQL statements that you need to change in the application before you can test it against the Oracle database c Testthe application using the Oracle database 3 Allocate time and resource to address each issue associated with rewriting or modifying the application 4 Update the general requirements document for the project that you created in Task 2 2 2 5 Task 5 Planning the Migration Project In this task you evaluate the unknown variables that the migration project may contain such as the difference in the technologies of the source database and the destination database During the planning stage you Estimate the budget constraints of the project Gather information to produce a migration plan a Estimate how much time the migration project should take Calculate how many resources are required to complete and test the migration To plan a migration project 1 Define a list of tasks required to successfully complete th
506. ssibility features of Oracle SOL Developer It includes the following a Section 6 1 About Oracle SOL Developer Accessibility a Section 62 Using a Screen Reader and Java Access Bridge with Oracle SOL Developer Section 63 Oracle SOL Developer Features that Support Accessibility Section 64 Recommendations for Customizing Oracle SOL Developer a Section 6 5 Highly Visual Features of Oracle SOL Developer 6 1 About Oracle SQL Developer Accessibility Itis our goal to make Oracle Products Services and supporting documentation accessible to the disabled community Oracle SOL Developer supports accessibility features For additional accessibility information for Oracle products see the Oracle Accessibility Program page at http www oracle com accessibility 6 2 Using a Screen Reader and Java Access Bridge with Oracle SQL Developer In order for assistive technologies like screen readers to work with Java based applications and applets the Windows based computer must also have Sun s Java Access Bridge installed See Oracle SQL Developer Installation Guide for the screen reader setup procedure and for the recommended minimum technology stack 6 3 Oracle SQL Developer Features that Support Accessibility Oracle SOL Developer provides features that are designed to support accessibility SQL Developer Accessibility Information 6 1 Oracle SQL Developer Features that Support Accessibility 6 3 1 Keyboard Ac
507. straint for the BOOKS table Be sure that the Referenced Column on BOOKS displayed value is BOOK ID Associations Local Column BOOK ID Associations Referenced Column on BOOKS BOOK ID 3 Click OK to finish creating the table You have finished creating all the tables To create a sequence for use in generating unique primary key values for the PATRONS table go to Section 4 4 Create a Sequence 4 4 Create a Sequence Create one sequence object which will be used in INSERT statements to generate unique primary key values in the PATRONS table You do not need to create a sequence for the primary key in the TRANSACTIONS table because you used the SOL Developer feature that enables automatic population of primary key values for that table You will use the Create Sequence dialog box to create the sequence declaratively the sequence that you create will be essentially the same as if you had entered the following statements using the SOL Worksheet CREATE SEQUENCE patron id seq START WITH 100 INCREMENT BY 1 After creating the sequence you can use it in INSERT statements to generate unique numeric values The following example uses the patron id seq sequence in creating a row for a new patron library user assigning her a patron ID that is the next available value of the patron id seq sequence INSERT INTO patrons VALUES patron id seq nextval Smith Jane 123 Main Street Mytown MA 01234 null To create the sequen
508. sts into a test suite to be run as a grouped item and the test suite can have its own startup and end processing in addition to any specified for test cases and unit tests To learn more about unit testing with SOL Developer take whichever approach suits your preference Goto Section 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial and follow the steps and then return to read the remaining conceptual information under SOL Developer Unit Testing Readthe remaining conceptual information under SOL Developer Unit Testing finishing with Section 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial 3 2 SQL Developer User Interface for Unit Testing The SOL Developer user interface for unit testing includes the Unit Test navigator the Unit Test submenu and other features Figure 3 1 Unit Test Navigator shows the Unit Test navigator which includes the top level nodes Library Lookups Reports Suites and Tests If this navigator is not visible click View then Unit Test 3 2 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface for Unit Testing Figure 3 1 Unit Test Navigator 5i Unit Test 3 Unit Tests unit test repos Admin User 2 Library Startups Teardowns validations 2 Lookups Reports gt Suites BONUS_TEST_SUITE Tests Hz AVVARD BONUS LIST amp RATING gt TEST 2 In the preceding figure the top level repository node shows the name
509. t matter although you might find it convenient to visit them in the sequence in this topic If you are editing an existing table you can visit the tabs in any order If you click OK before you are finished creating or editing the table right click the table name in the Connections navigator select Edit and continue creating or editing the table Schema Database schema in which to create the table Name Name of the table Must be unique within a schema Type The type of table Normal A regular database table It can be partitioned see Partitioning pane Subpartition Templates pane and Partition Definitions pane External An external table see External Table Properties pane a Index Organized An index organized table see Index Organized Properties pane Temporary Table A temporary table which is not stored permanently in the database The temporary table definition persists in the same way as the definition of a regular table but the table segment and any data in the temporary table persist only for the duration of either the transaction Transaction option or the session Session option The following panes may also be available Some panes are available only for tables of specific types or with specific features 5 28 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Table with advanced options Columns pane Specifies properties for each column in the table Columns Lists the columns currently in
510. t then Truncate Repository Deleting a repository removes all schema objects that are used for the migration repository Truncating a repository deletes all data from schema objects that are used SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 75 Capture Microsoft Access Exporter XML for the migration repository but does not delete the schema objects themselves effectively leaving you with an empty repository Repository Name of the database connection in which to delete or truncate the migration repository 5 133 Capture Microsoft Access Exporter XML This dialog box is displayed if you click Migration then Capture Exporter XML File Path File path to the xml file that was produced when you ran the appropriate version of the exporter tool for Microsoft Access when you clicked Migrations then Microsoft Access Exporter then the appropriate version for your version of Microsoft Access 5 134 Rename Local Variable This dialog box is displayed if you right click a variable name in the display of the source code for a function or procedure and select Refactoring and then Rename Local Variable Specify the desired new name for the variable 5 135 Rename Tab This dialog box is displayed if you right click a tab name and select Rename You can change the name of the tab to something more descriptive in this case for example changing Script Output to Employees Query The new name that you specify is used only for as long as the t
511. t Create Local Connections The connections are placed in a folder named Auto Generated Local Connections Note that for these autogenerated connections except for the one named system database name you will always be prompted for the password when you connect and you cannot edit the user name or password in the connection properties dialog box To edit the information about an existing database connection right click the connection name in the Connections navigator display and select Properties Use the dialog box to modify information about the connection but do not change the connection name See Section 5 21 Create Edit Select Database Connection To organize connection groups using folders see Section 1 4 1 Using Folders to Group Connections To export information about the existing database connections into an XML file that you can later use for importing connections right click Connections in the Connections navigator display and select Export Connections Use the dialog box to specify the connections to be exported see Section 5 36 Export Import Connection Descriptors To import connections that had previously been exported adding them to any connections that may already exist in SOL Developer right click Connections in the Connections navigator display and select Import Connections Use the dialog box to SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 23 Database Connections specify the connections to be imported
512. t creating SOL translators and SOL translation profiles see the Install SOL Translator dialog box material 1 11 8 Scheduler Includes the following options related to Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer The objects under Scheduler in the DBA navigator are for objects that owned by the SYS user and that can be created and modified only by users with DBA privileges Other objects are listed under Scheduler for users in the Connections navigator Global Attributes The Global Attributes display lets you view and edit attributes such as the default time zone the email sender and server event expiry time log history retention and maximum job slave processes Job Classes The Job Classes display lets you view and edit information about Job Classes The information for each job class includes the job class name logging level log history resource consumer group service and comments External Destinations The External Destinations display lets you view and edit information about external destinations for jobs 1 11 9 Security Includes the following options related to database security management For profiles roles and users you can perform relevant operations such as creating new objects of that type and editing and dropping existing objects Audit Settings The Audit Settings display includes the audit trail setting whether SYS user operations are audited and the directory or folder for the audit file Profiles A
513. t enter anything for it Be sure that the Advanced box is not checked when you start creating the table Schema Specify your current schema as the schema in which to create the table Name TRANSACTIONS Create the table columns using the following information After creating each column except the last one transaction type click Add Column to add the next column If you accidentally click OK instead of Add Column right click the TRANSACTIONS table in the Connections navigator display select Edit and continue to add columns Column Name Type Size Other Information and Notes transaction id NUMBER Primary Key Unique transaction ID number with values to be created using a trigger and sequence that will be created automatically patron id NUMBER Foreign key must match a patron id value in the PATRONS table book id VARCHAR2 20 Foreign key must match a book id value in the BOOKS table transaction date DATE Date and time of the transaction transaction type NUMBER Numeric code indicating the type of transaction such as 1 for checking out a book After you have entered the last column transaction type check Advanced next to Schema This displays a pane for selecting more table options For this table you will use the Column Sequences and Foreign Keys panes Column Sequences pane You have already specified TRANSACTION ID as the primary key and you will use this pane only to specify that the primary key co
514. t it and use the arrow icons To apply the filter criteria to the Connections navigator display click OK To remove the effects of applying a filter right click the object type node in the Connections navigator display and select Clear Filter 5 96 Filter Object Types This dialog box filters restricts the types of objects to be displayed for the schema associated with the selected user Available Object Types Lists the types of objects that are available to be added to the display Displayed Object Types Lists the types of objects that are included in the display To add a type of object to the display select it in Available Object Types and click the Add icon to remove a type of object from the display select it in Displayed Object Types and click the Remove icon To move all types of objects from available to displayed or the reverse use the Add All gt gt or Remove All lt lt icon 5 97 Filter Schemas This dialog box enables you to restrict the schemas that are displayed under Other Users in the Connections navigator Available Schemas Lists the schemas that are not currently displayed under Other Users in the Connections navigator but that are available to be added to the list of displayed users Displayed Schemas Lists the schemas that are to be included in the display under Other Users in the Connections navigator To add a schema to the display select it in Available Schemas and click the
515. t its row and click the Edit User Snippet icon which displays the Save Snippet User Defined dialog box 5 82 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Subversion Apply Patch To create a new user defined snippet click the Add User Snippet icon which displays the Save Snippet User Defined dialog box To delete a user defined snippet select its row and click the Delete User Snippet icon 5 160 Show SQL This displays SOL statements reflecting the current context and content if applicable 5 161 Start Date End Date Repeat Interval Comments Scheduler Dialog boxes are available for specifying start and end dates a repeat interval and optional comments for an Oracle Scheduler job For more information about job scheduling see Section 1 12 Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer Start Date End Date For Start Date and End Date specify the date and time or click Set Today to specify the current date and time Tabs are provided for Frequency and various refinements of the frequency Use as many as you need for specifying when to run the job Repeat Interval Frequency tab Specify a frequency for the job such as DAILY or WEEKLY Other tabs most in the form By xxxxx Select check Enable to be able to specify the value or values relevant to that frequency category A box at the bottom displays the keywords and values for the statement that SOL Developer will use to call the DBMS SCHEDULER CREATE SCHEDULE procedure
516. t the bottom of the SOL Developer window Show Toolbars Controls the display of the following toolbars Main toolbar under the SOL Developer menus the Connections Navigator toolbar the DBA navigator toolbar the Data Miner Workflow Property Inspector toolbar and if a package or subprogram is open the Code Editor toolbar Navigate menu Contains options for navigating to panes and in the execution of subprograms Back Moves to the pane that you most recently visited Forward Moves to the pane after the current one in the list of visited panes SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 7 SQL Developer User Interface Toggle Bookmark If you are editing a function or procedure creates or removes a bookmark see Section 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures Remove Bookmarks from File Removes bookmarks from the currently active editing window for a function or procedure see Section 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures Remove All Bookmarks Removes bookmarks from open editing windows for functions and procedures see Section 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures Go to Bookmark Displays a dialog box so that you can go to a specified bookmark see Section 1 6 1 Using Bookmarks When Editing Functions and Procedures Go to Next Bookmark Goes to the next bookmark in the currently active editing window for a function or procedure see Section 1 6 1
517. t to allow users SCOTT JONES and SMITH to use the unit test capabilities and thus have User access to the shared repository but to allow only SYS and the user that owns the repository objects such as UNIT TEST REPOS in Example of Unit Testing Tutorial to have Administrator access to the shared repository To grant either type of access to any database users click Tools then Unit Test then Repository then Manage Users Select the database connection for the owner of the 3 4 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Using a Dynamic Value Query to Create a Unit Test repository objects or for any other user that has been granted Administrator access to the repository The Unit Testing Manage Users dialog box is displayed 3 4 Editing and Running a Unit Test To edit or run a unit test click the unit test name in the Unit Test navigator and select the desired connection for running the unit test A pane is displayed with two tabs Details for the unit test specification and Results for results if you run or debug the test The toolbar under the Details tab for the subprogram name has a toolbar that includes the icons shown in the following figure Details Results Pu xXx Z0 Freeze View the pin keeps that pane in the SOL Developer window when you click another unit test in the Unit Test navigator a separate tab and detail view pane are created for that other unit test If you click the pin again the unit test s detail vi
518. t value inserted into the column if no value is specified when a row is inserted Cannot be NULL If this option is checked the column must contain data you cannot specify no value or an explicit null value for this column when you insert a row If this option is not checked the column can contain either data or no data A primary key column see Primary Key pane cannot be null Comment Optional descriptive comment about the column To add another column click the Add Column icon Primary Key pane Specifies the primary key for the table The primary key is the column or set of columns that uniquely identifies each row in the table An index is automatically created on the primary key Name Name of the constraint to be associated with the primary key definition Must be unique within the database Enabled If this option is checked the primary key constraint is enforced that is the data in the primary key column or set of columns must be unique and not null SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 29 Create Edit Table with advanced options Available Columns Lists the columns that are available to be added to the primary key definition Selected Columns Lists the columns that are included in the primary key definition To add a column to the primary key definition select it in Available Columns and click the Add gt icon to remove a column from the primary key definition select it in Selected Colum
519. ta run the unit tests and create and run a unit test suite It assumes that you have a table of employee data that includes salary information and that you need to create a procedure to award bonuses to sales representatives whose pay consists of a base salary plus a commission based bonus Note An Oracle By Example OBE tutorial Performing a Unit Test of Your PL SQL in Oracle SQL Developer 2 1 is similar to this one but it uses a copy of the EMPLOYEES table from the Oracle sample HR schema which includes more columns and rows as well as different data For information about SOL Developer OBEs see the Start Page click Help then Start Page 3 12 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Example of Unit Testing Tutorial The EMPLOYEES table includes the following columns all of type NUMBER EMPLOYEE ID Employee identification badge number COMMISSION PCT Commission percentage for the employee a decimal fraction representing the percentage of the amount of sales by the employee to be used to compute a bonus that will be added to the employee s base salary to determine the total salary For example 0 2 or 2 indicates a 20 percent commission or 0 2 times the amount of sales Only employees in the Sales department have numeric COMMISSION PCT values Other employees not on commission have null COMMISSION PCT values SALARY Salary amount for the employee includes base salary plus any bonus which will be
520. ta grids the cells are read only Navigation icons First moves to the first record Previous moves to the previous record Next gt moves to the next record and Last gt moves to the last record Apply Applies changes made to the current data record Cancel Cancels changes made to the current data record and closes the box 5 158 Save Snippet User Defined Use this box to create a user defined snippet For information about how to create user defined snippets including options for snippet categories see Section 1 8 1 User Defined Snippets Category Existing or new category in which to place the snippet To create a new user defined category type the category name instead of selecting a category name from the list Name Name of the snippet as it will be displayed when users see the list of available snippets in the specified category If an existing Oracle supplied snippet has the same name in the same category the user defined snippet definition replaces the Oracle supplied definition ToolTip Optional tooltip text to be displayed when the mouse pointer stays briefly over the snippet name in the display of snippets in the specified category Snippet Text that will be inserted for this snippet 5 159 Edit Snippets User Defined This box displays any existing user defined snippets and enables you to add edit or delete user defined snippets To edit an existing user defined snippet selec
521. tabase links Public Synonyms Lists all public synonyms 1 17 3 Application Express reports If you select a connection for a schema that owns any Oracle Application Express 3 0 1 or later applications the Application Express reports list information about applications pages schemas UI defaults and workspaces For information about Oracle Application Express see the documentation for that product 1 17 4 ASH and AWR reports The ASH and AWR reports list information provided by the Active Session History ASH and Automated Workload Repository AWR features which require special licensing For information about using AWR including how to use ASH reports see the information about automatic performance statistics in Oracle Database SQL Tuning Guide 1 17 5 Charts reports Charts reports include a chart showing the distribution of objects of various object types number of tables indexes and so on 1 17 6 Database Administration reports Database Administration reports list usage information about system resources This information can help you to manage storage user accounts and sessions efficiently SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 73 SQL Developer Reports The user for the database connection must have the DBA role to see most Database Administration reports All Tables Contains the reports that are also grouped under Table reports including Quality Assurance reports Cursors Provide information about cu
522. tables properties 5 36 external tools 1 9 5 62 5 63 F F10 key for File menu 1 4 F4key 1 34 Alt F4 to close window with focus 1 4 failed objects generating 1 98 file types associating with SOL Developer 5 50 file watchers Scheduler 1 14 file oriented development SOL Worksheet right click operations 1 34 Files navigator 1 4 filter applying 1 5 5 65 clearing 1 5 5 65 finding database objects 1 42 Flashback Table support 1 20 folders for user defined reports 1 78 5 43 in Connections navigator 1 24 font increasing or decreasing size for help text 1 107 foreign keys 5 31 format batch file or shellscript 1 39 Freeze View pinning an object s display 1 5 1 27 1 71 FROM clause 5 45 full pathname for java exe 1 2 functions compiling 1 14 1 17 compiling for debug 1 14 1 17 creating 5 23 debugging 5 77 running 5 77 G Gather Code Coverage Statistics option 3 5 Gather Schema Statistics menu command 1 24 gauges in SOL Worksheet and user defined reports 1 40 generate data move user option 1 98 Generate DB Doc menu command 1 24 generate failed objects option 1 98 generate separate emulation user option 1 99 grant information not migrated to Oracle 2 12 graphical user interface GUI 1 3 2 31 unit testing 3 2 GROUP BY clause 5 46 groups connections in folders 1 24 H HAVING clause 5 47 help increasing or decreasing help text fontsize 1 107 using the onlin
523. tarted for every instance of the event and each job instance is a lightweight job so multiple instances of the same event based job can run in parallel Job Style Style of the job being created REGULAR regular job or LIGHTWEIGHT lightweight job A lightweight must reference a program object Use lightweight jobs when you have many short duration jobs that run frequently Under certain circumstances using lightweight jobs can deliver a small performance gain Job Priority The priority of this job relative to other jobs in the same class as this job If multiple jobs within a class are scheduled to be executed at the same time the job priority determines the order in which jobs from that class are picked up for execution by the job coordinator It can be a value from 1 through 5 with 1 being the first to be picked up for job execution Job Weight Do not change the value Logging Level Determines how much information is logged DBMS_ SCHEDULER LOGGING OFF no logging DBMS SCHEDULER LOGGING FAILED RUNS only jobs that failed with the reason for failure DBMS_ 5 20 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Edit Materialized View Log SCHEDULER LOGGING RUNS all runs of each job in this class or DBMS_ SCHEDULER LOGGING FULL all operations performed on all jobs However if the job class has a higher more detailed logging level than the level specified for the job the job class logging level is used
524. tatement or statements select the specific translation from the Translator drop down for example Access SQL to PL SQL and optionally the applicable schema from the Captured Schema drop down then click the Translate gt gt icon to display the generated PL SQL statement or statements SOL keywords are automatically highlighted Note For a Microsoft SQL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server connection the worksheet does not support running T SQL statements It only supports SELECT CREATE INSERT UPDATE DELETE and DROP statements The first time you save the contents of either worksheet window in the translation scratch editor you are prompted for the file location and name If you perform any subsequent Save operations regardless of whether you have erased or changed the content of the window the contents are saved to the same file To save the contents to a different file click File then Save As For detailed information about the worksheet windows see Section 1 7 Using the SOL Worksheet 2 4 Command Line Interface for Migration As an alternative to using the SOL Developer graphical interface for migration operations you can use the migration batch file Windows or shell script Linux on the operating system command line These files are located in the sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin folder or sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin directory under the location where you installed SOL Developer migratio
525. ted Ignore physical attributes Causes differences in physical attributes to be ignored when objects are compared Ignore tablespace Causes differences in the tablespace specified for the object to be ignored when objects are compared Ignore segment attributes Causes differences in segment specification to be ignored when objects are compared Ignore storage Causes differences in storage specification to be ignored when objects are compared Ignore table column positions Causes differences in the positions of table columns to be ignored when objects are compared For example if this option is enabled checked two tables would not be considered different in the only difference is that Column1 and Column2 appear first and second in one table but second and first in the other table Match Constraints Controls whether constraints are matched for comparison by the names or definitions or the constraints Match constraints by name or Match constraints by definition Report constraint name difference If Match constraints by definition is selected causes the constraint name to be displayed when differences are reported SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 81 SQL Developer Preferences Generate constraint indexes Causes constraint indexes to be generated in the DDL for the deployment script Generate constraints Causes constraints to be generated in the DDL for the deployment script Generate password values Causes pass
526. ted in PL SQL or Java The trigger is automatically executed when the specified conditions occur Schema Database schema in which to create the trigger Name Name of the trigger Must be unique within the database Add New Source in Lowercase If this option is checked new text is entered in lowercase regardless of the case in which you type it This option affects only the appearance of the code because PL SQL is not case sensitive in its execution Trigger tab Trigger Type The type of object on which to create the trigger TABLE VIEW SCHEMA or DATABASE The remaining items depend on the type of trigger Table Owner or View Owner For a trigger on a table or a view the name of the owner of the table or the view Table Name or View Name For a trigger on a table or a view the name of the table or the view Before or After For a trigger on a table select Before to cause the database to fire the trigger before executing the triggering event or select After to cause the database to fire the trigger after executing the triggering event Statement Level or Row Level For a trigger on a table Statement Level fires the trigger once before or after the triggering statement that meets the optional trigger constraint defined in the WHEN condition Row Level fires the trigger once for each row that is affected by the triggering statement and that meets the optional trigger constraint defined in the WHEN condition Insert Update
527. ted in cache which can improve application performance Cache size indicates the number of sequence values preallocated in cache If Cache is not checked sequence values are not preallocated in cache Order Indicates whether sequence numbers are generated in the order in which they are requested If no ordering is specified sequence numbers are not guaranteed to be in the order in which they were requested DDL tab You can review the SOL statement that SOL Developer will use to create a new sequence or that reflects any changes you have made to the sequence properties 5 51 Create SQL File Use this dialog box to create a SQL script file and to open the file in a SOL Worksheet for editing File Name Name and extension of the file to be created The default and recommended extension is sgl Directory Name Directory path for the file To specify a directory you can click Browse The default directory is the Location of User Related Information 5 52 Create Edit Synonym The following information applies to a synonym which is an alternative name for a table view sequence procedure stored function package materialized view Java class database object user defined object type or another synonym 5 26 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Create Table quick creation Public If this option is checked the synonym is accessible to all users However each user must have appropriate privileges on the underlying object in
528. ted object The context menu for each converted object includes Generate which creates the corresponding Oracle Database object The context menus will contain other items as appropriate for the object For information about the related Oracle Database objects see the following a Section 1 3 11 Functions a Section 1 3 12 Indexes m Section 1 3 20 Procedures m Section 1 3 27 Sequences m Section 1 3 29 Tables m Section 1 3 30 Triggers a Section 1 3 32 Users Other Users a Section 1 3 33 Views 1 22 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Connections 1 4 Database Connections A connection is a SOL Developer object that specifies the necessary information for connecting to a specific database as a specific user of that database You must have at least one database connection existing created or imported to use SOL Developer You can connect to any target Oracle database schema using standard Oracle database authentication Once connected you can perform operations on objects in the database You can also connect to schemas for selected third party non Oracle databases such as MySOL Microsoft SOL Server Sybase Adaptive Server Microsoft Access and IBM DB2 and view metadata and data When you start SOL Developer and whenever you display the database connections dialog box SOL Developer automatically reads any connections defined in the tnsnames ora file on your system if that file exists
529. ter or browse to select the location of the tnsnames ora file If no location is specified SOL Developer looks for this file as explained in Section 1 4 Database Connections Thus any value you specify here overrides any TNS5 ADMIN environment variable or registry value or on Linux systems the global configuration directory Database Autotrace Explain Plan The Autotrace Explain Plan pane specifies information to be displayed on the Autotrace and Explain Plan panes in the SOL Worksheet Database Drag and Drop The Drag and Drop Effects pane determines the type of SOL statement created in the SOL Worksheet when you drag an object from the Connections navigator into the SOL Worksheet The SOL Developer preference sets the default which you can override in the Drag and Drop Effects dialog box The type of statement INSERT DELETE UPDATE or SELECT applies only for object types for which such a statement is possible For example SELECT makes sense for a table but not for a trigger For objects for which the statement type does not apply the object name is inserted in the SOL Worksheet 1 86 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences Database Licensing Some SQL Developer features require that licenses for specific Oracle Database options be in effect for the database connection that will use the feature The Licensing pane enables you to specify for each defined connection whether the database has the Or
530. the procedure name in the Connections navigator and selecting an item from the menu a Edit Displays the procedure text so that you can view and edit it Run Displays the Run Debug Profile PL SOL dialog box and then executes the procedure in normal not debug mode Compile Performs a PL SQL compilation of the procedure Compile for Debug Performs a PL SQL compilation of the procedure with PL SOL library units compiled for debugging Profile for an Oracle Database Release 11 1 or later connection Displays the Run Debug Profile PL SQL dialog box and then executes the procedure and collects execution statistics Drop Deletes the procedure Grant Enables you to grant available privileges on the procedure to selected users Revoke Enables you to revoke available privileges on the procedure from selected users Format Reformats the text of the procedure definition Create Unit Test Creates a unit test see Chapter 3 for the procedure Quick DDL Enables you to export the DDL statement for creating the procedure to a file a SOL Worksheet or the clipboard 1 3 21 Programs A program is an Oracle Scheduler object that describes what is to be run by the Scheduler A program includes an action a type and the number of arguments that the stored procedure or external executable accepts A program is a separate entity from a job A job runs at a certain time or because a certain event occurr
531. the count number curd cis corresponds to the number of rows in the new Oracle table 2 Run the following on the source On the source database Yes database for each table Select sum salary from emp Run the following on the destination database for each table Select sum salary from emp sum salary produces a check sum for the sum of the data in each table On the destination database sum salary corresponds to the sum of the salary in the emp table The sum for each table is the same in the source and destination databases 2 2 11 Deploying the Oracle Database Deploying the migrated and tested Oracle database within a business environment can be difficult Therefore you may need to consider different rollout strategies depending on your environment Several rollout strategies are identified for you but you may use another approach if that is recommended by your organization SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 29 Migration Background Information and Guidelines During the deployment phase you move the destination database from a development to a production environment A group separate from the migration and testing team may perform the deployment phase such as the in house IT department Deployment involves the following a Choosing a Rollout Strategy Deploying the Destination Database 2 2 11 1 Choosing a Rollout Strategy The strategy that you use for migrating a third party
532. the destination database The following task is an example that you should use as a guideline for deploying the destination database 2 30 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface for Migration Note If you have a complex scenario as defined in Table 2 1 Oracle recommends that you complete all of the deployment tasks However if you have a simple scenario you should choose the deployment tasks appropriate to your organization 1 Configure the hardware if necessary In a large scale or complex environment you must design the disk layout to correspond with the database design If you use redundant disks align them in stripes that you can increase as the destination database evolves You must install and configure the necessary disks check the memory and configure the system 2 Make sure the operating system meets the parameters of the Oracle configuration Before installing any Oracle software make sure that you have modified all System parameters For more information about modifying system parameters see the relevant installation guide for your platform such as Solaris Operating System 3 Install the Oracle software Aside from the Oracle software that allows you to create an Oracle database you may need to install ancillary software to support the application such as Extract Transformation and Load ETL Software for data warehousing 4 Create the destination database from the sou
533. the menu item and its associated icon Integration Options Specify how the external tool will be integrated with SOL Developer Add Items to Menus Check any menus on which you want to include an item for this tool Add Buttons to Toolbars To add the icon for this tool to the SOL Developer main toolbar check Main Toolbar After Tool Exits To have SOL Developer reload any open files after the tool exits check Reload Open Files Availability Options Specify when the external tool is enabled In contexts where the tool is not enabled its menu item and icon are grayed out Always Makes the tool always available When a File is Selected or Open in the Editor Makes the tool available only when a file is selected or open such as when the SOL Worksheet is open When Specific File Types are Selected Makes the tool available only when files of the specified type or types are selected Use the arrow buttons to move desired types from Available Types to Selected Types SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 63 Choose Offline Options 5 88 Choose Offline Options This dialog box is displayed when you click Tools then Migration then Create Database Capture Scripts It specifies options for creating an offline capture properties ocp file which you can later specify as the Offline Capture Source File on the Source Database page of the Migration Wizard Output Directory Converted model containing tables whose data is to be
534. the persistence and search behavior for bookmarks that you create when using the code editor Code Editor Caret Behavior The Caret Behavior pane contains options that determine the shape color and blinking characteristics of the caret cursor in the code editor Code Editor Completion Insight The Completion Insight pane contains options for the logical completion autocomplete options of keywords and names while you are coding in the SOL Worksheet When you pause for the auto popup time if the auto popup is enabled or when you press Ctrl Space code insight provides a context sensitive popup window that can help you select parameter names Completion insight provides you with a list of possible completions at the insertion point that you can use to auto complete code you are editing This list is based on the code context at the insertion point To exit code insight at any time press Esc or continue typing You can enable or disable automatic completion and parameter insight as well as set the time delay for the popup windows Generate Column Table Aliases Automatically Automatically generates table aliases if you select multiple tables from the popup window and if you then edit the column list each column name in the popup window is prefixed with a table alias SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 83 SQL Developer Preferences Autogenerate GROUP BY Clause Automatically generates a GROUP BY clause if you manually enter
535. the spatial data in the table and returns context information if any geometries are invalid Displays the Validate Geometry dialog box Validate Geometry Using Dimension Information performs a consistency check based on the dimensional information associated with the spatial data using the SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 55 Spatial Support in SQL Developer USER SDO GEOM METADATA view for valid geometry types in the spatial data in the table and returns context information if any geometries are invalid Displays the Validate Geometry dialog box Drop Spatial Metadata deletes the spatial metadata for the specified spatial column but does not delete the column definition or the data Create Spatial Index creates a spatial index INDEXTYPE IS MDSYS SPATIAL_ INDEX on the specified spatial geometry column a Drop Spatial Index deletes the specified spatial index 1 14 2 Map Visualization of Spatial Data You can use the Map View window for displaying spatial geometry objects that are returned by a query The SOL Developer Map View display lacks the rich features of a visualizing tool such as Oracle MapViewer but it provides a quick and flexible way to see simple representations of spatial data To display the Map View click View then Map View You can resize and reposition the Map View window so that it adequately displays the geometries you want to see The following figure show the Map View window display of a q
536. the text in a multiline edit field read by a screen reader you can select text by holding down the Shift key while moving the cursor either up or down with the Arrow keys depending on the initial cursor position SQL Developer Accessibility Information 6 3 Recommendations for Customizing Oracle SQL Developer 6 3 9 How to Read the Line Number in the Source Editor To have the line number read by a screen reader while you are editing a file in the source editor you can press Ctrl G 6 3 10 How to Access Exception Stack HTML Links and Generated Javadoc Links in the Log Window After generating exception stack HTML links or Javadoc links in the Log window they will not be recognized as links but read as plain text by a screen reader To access the links set the cursor focus to the Log window Right click or press Shift F1 and select Save As from the context menu Save the contents of the Log window as an HTML file Add the saved HTML file to a project or application workspace as a resource 6 4 Recommendations for Customizing Oracle SQL Developer SOL Developer provides a number of customization features that enable users to specify their requirements for keyboard usage display attributes of SOL Developer and timing where appropriate All customization features are organized within the Preferences dialog For maximum usability and to accommodate your needs you should consider changing any of the following from the defaults to a more usab
537. the value in the local column Check Constraints pane Specifies one or more check constraints for the table A check constraint specifies a condition that must be met when a row is inserted into the table or when an existing row is modified Check Constraints Lists the check constraints currently defined on the table To add a check constraint click the Add button to delete a check constraint select it and click the Remove button Note After you add a check constraint to add another check constraint click the Add button Name Name of the check constraint definition Must be unique within the database Enabled If this option is checked the check constraint is enforced Condition Condition that must be met for a row Can be any valid CHECK clause without the CHECK keyword For example to indicate that the value in a numeric column named RATING must be from 1 to 10 you can specify rating 1 and rating 10 To add another check constraint click the Add button SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 31 Create Edit Table with advanced options Indexes pane Specifies properties for each index on the table Indexes Lists the indexes currently defined on the table Note however that this display does not include any indexes related to primary key and unique key constraints To add an index click the Add Index icon to delete an index select it and click the Remove Index X icon N
538. this option is enabled it can increase the startup time You can manually check for updates by clicking Help then Check for Updates 1 110 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide For More Information 1 24 For More Information For more information about SOL Developer and related topics you may find the following resources helpful SOL Developer Start Page which contains links for tutorials and OBE Oracle By Example lessons online demonstrations documentation and other resources If the Start Page tab is not visible click Help then Start Page SOL Developer home page OTN which includes links for downloads white papers tutorials viewlets demonstrations blogs a discussion forum and other sources of information http www oracl er PL SQL page on OTN le com technetwork developer tools sql develop http www orac le com technetwork database features plsql Oracle Accessibility site http www oracle com accessibility Oracle Corporate site http www oracle com SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 111 For More Information 1 112 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide 2 SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases Migration is the process of copying the schema objects and data from a source third party non Oracle database such as MySQL Microsoft SQL Server Sybase Adaptive Server Microsoft Access or IBM DB2 UDB to an Oracle database You can perform the migration i
539. thorship whether in Source or Object form made available under the License as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work an example is provided in the Appendix below Derivative Works shall mean any work whether in Source or Object form that is based on or derived from the Work and for which the editorial revisions annotations elaborations or other modifications represent as a whole an original work of authorship For the purposes of this License Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from or merely link or bind by name to the interfaces of the Work and Derivative Works thereof Contribution shall mean any work of authorship including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner For the purposes of this definition submitted means any form of electronic verbal or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists source code control systems and issue tracking systems that are managed by or on behalf of the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise desi
540. ting 5 47 Microsoft Access capturing using exporter tool 2 16 configuring before migrating 2 15 creating data files 2 21 turning off security 2 15 Microsoft Access connections 5 9 Index 4 Microsoft Excel importing data 5 14 Microsoft SQL Server 2 14 connections 5 11 creating data files 2 21 third party JDBC drivers 1 89 migration architecture 2 6 before you start general 2 11 before you start source specific 2 13 command line interface 2 34 deployment after migrating 2 29 introduction and main topics 2 1 overview 2 6 planning for 2 7 quickstart 2 1 required roles and privileges 2 12 migration batch file or shell script 2 34 migration plan preparing 2 7 migration repository creating database user for 2 12 MIME type specifying external editor for BLOB data 1 96 MOD PLSQL OWA output 1 38 modifying data in tables 1 26 Monitor Sessions command 1 9 Monitor SOL command 1 9 moving a table to another tablespace 1 20 multitenant container database CDB definition 1 16 MySQL configuring before migrating 2 17 creating data files 2 21 third party JDBC drivers 1 89 MySQL connections 5 10 zero date handling 5 11 N New Worksheet to use unshared connection preference for database SOL Worksheet using unshared connection automatically 1 94 normalizing column data 1 20 O OBEs Oracle By Example lessons 1 111 objects database 1 11 exporting 5 56 unloadiing 5 56 OCI driver data
541. tion If you have made edits in several editing windows and are now in a different window and if you want to return to where you made the last edit press Ctrl Shift Backspace or click Navigate then Go to Last Edit Closing Tabbed Windows Using the Context Menu To close a tabbed editor or display window right click and select Close from the context menu List of All Open Windows To see a list of all open tabbed windows click the small button with the drop down arrow located to the right of the tabs and over the tabbed window vertical scroll bar To go to one of the listed windows select it from the drop down list Go to Subprogram Implementation from Package Window In the window for a package definition you can press Ctrl click on a procedure or function name to perform the Open Declaration command which opens the procedure or function implementation body specification in a new window Select Multiple Table or Column Names in Completion Insight When entering or editing a SELECT query you can select multiple tables and columns from the completion insight popup window Aliases are provided for column and table names if the Generate Column Table Aliases Automatically preference for Code Editor Completion Insight is enabled Startup Time and Automatic Check for Updates If the startup time for SOL Developer seems too slow consider disabling the Automatically Check for Updates option Tools Preferences Extensions If
542. tion is enabled matches are added to the Persisted Highlights list Highlight Row Highlight only If this option is enabled the entire row that contains the cell with a matching value is highlighted 5 100 Insert Macro This dialog box is displayed when you click Insert when specifying external program options see Section 5 87 Create Edit External Tool It enables you to insert a sample text string into the relevant field for the external program option you can then edit that string to suit your needs This is somewhat analogous to using snippets to insert text strings into the SOL Worksheet Select the desired type of macro read its description to ensure that it is what you want and click OK For some macros a sample expansion is included 5 101 Externally Modified Files This dialog box filters is displayed when an external application has modified a file that you have open in SOL Developer You are asked if you want to reload the externally modified file If you are offered the choice of Yes or No If you click Yes the externally modified file overwrites any changes that you might have made in SOL Developer If you click No the externally modified file will be overwritten by your version when you save the file in SOL Developer If you are offered only the choice of OK or Help Click OK and then do one of the following To discard changes in the Worksheet and replace the Worksheet with the file currently on disk
543. tion trigger is designed to handle these DML changes so that they can be appropriately applied after the changes to the application code are completed To create a crossedition trigger you must be enabled for Editions A data type associates a fixed set of properties with the values that can be used ina column of a table or in an argument of a function or procedure These properties cause Oracle Database to treat values of one data type differently from values of another data type Most data types are supplied by Oracle although users can create data types 1 3 32 Users Other Users 1 3 33 Views Database users are accounts through which you can log in to the database In the Connections navigator you can see the Other Users in the database associated with a connection but the database objects that you are allowed to see for each user are determined by the privileges of the database user associated with the current database connection If you are connected as a user with the DBA role you can create a database user by right clicking Other Users and selecting Create User and you can edit an existing database user by right clicking the user under Other Users and selecting Edit User For help on options in creating and editing users see Create Edit User Views are virtual tables analogous to queries in some database products that select data from one or more underlying tables Oracle Database provides many view creation options and spe
544. tion will be referred to as sq1developer install Unzipping the SOL Developer kit causes a directory named sqldeveloper to be created under the sq1developer install directory It also causes many files and folders to be placed in and under that directory If Oracle Database Release 11 or later is also installed a version of SOL Developer is also included and is accessible through the menu system under Oracle This version of SOL Developer is separate from any SOL Developer kit that you download and unzip on your own so do not confuse the two and do not unzip a kit over the SOL Developer files that are included with Oracle Database Suggestion Create a shortcut for the SOL Developer executable file that you install and always use it to start SOL Developer 2 To start SQL Developer go to the sqldeveloper directory under the sqldeveloper install directory and do one of the following On Linux and Mac OS X systems run sh sqldeveloper sh On Windows systems double click sqldeveloper exe If you are asked to enter the full pathname for java exe click Browse and find java exe For example on a Windows system the path might have a name similar to C Program Files Java jdk1 6 0_06 bin java exe 3 If you want to become familiar with SOL Developer concepts before using the interface read the rest of this chapter before proceeding to the next step 4 Create at least one database connection or import some previously e
545. to see two or more parts independently by using the split box thin blue rectangle located to the right of the bottom scroll bar and above the right scroll bar In the Data pane the acceptable format or formats for entering dates may be different from the date format required by SOL Plus 1 6 Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures You can use SQL Developer to run and debug PL SQL subprograms functions and procedures To run a subprogram click its name in the Connections navigator then either right click and select Run or click the Edit icon and then click the Run icon above its source listing To debug a subprogram click its name in the Connections navigator If the procedure in its current form has not already been compiled for debug right click and select Compile for Debug Then click the Edit icon and click the Debug icon above its source listing In both cases a code editing window is displayed The following figure shows the code editing window being used to debug a procedure named LIST A RATINC2 which is used for tutorial purposes in Section 4 8 Debug a PL SQL Procedure 1 28 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Running and Debugging Functions and Procedures Databases G Repo E El fius _A_RATING2 Gu Y 68 9 3 3S4 E td mytest_local BEGIH amp E93 Tables 4 E OPEN the cursor Views FOR SELECT title H A Indexes FROM book
546. to use to import the specified information for the specified types of objects Job Name Name to be given to this import job Data or DDL Specify whether to import only the data applies to tables and views only the object definitions the DDL or both the data and the object definitions Types to be Imported Specify whether to import the database from the dump file or files or just one or more tablespaces schemas or tables Your selection will affect the display of some remaining wizard pages Choose Import Files Specify one or more dump files that were created using Data Pump Export from which to import the objects To add files click Add Row Tablespaces page If you specified Tablespaces for Types to be Imported select one or more tablespaces to be imported and use the arrow icons to move them to the Selected Source Tablespaces box Schemas page If you specified Schemas for Types to be Imported select one or more schemas to be imported and use the arrow icons to move them to the Selected Source Schemas box Tables page If you specified Tables for Types to be Imported select one or more tables to be imported and use the arrow icons to move them to the Selected Source Schemas box Tables tab To select one or more tables see Specify Objects under Shared Wizard Pages Include Exclude Filter tab Optionally filter the objects to be included or excluded using the same interface as for the Filter page 5 52 O
547. tor under Suites click the AWARD BONUS SUITE node An pane for the AWARD BONUS SUITE test suite is displayed Do not specify a Startup Process or Teardown Process because neither is needed for this test suite Click the Add icon to add the first test to the suite In the Unit Testing Add Tests or Suites to a Suite dialog box click select AWARD BONUS check select Run Test Startups and Run Test Teardowns so that the startup and teardown actions for that unit test will be run and click OK Click the Add 4 icon to add the next test to the suite In the Unit Testing Add Tests or Suites to a Suite dialog box click select AWARD BONUS NO COMM EXC and click OK The check Run Test Startups and Run Test Teardowns options are irrelevant here because the AWARD BONUS NO COMM EXC test does not perform any startup and teardown actions Click the Commit Changes icon in the Code Editor toolbar at the top of the pane or press F11 3 12 8 Run the Unit Test Suite To run the unit test suite use the Unit Test navigator If you are in the editing pane for the AWARD BONUS SUITE test suite run the suite by clicking the Run Suite green arrowhead icon in the Code Editor toolbar Otherwise perform the following steps 1 In the Unit Test navigator expand the Suites node and click the AWARD BONUS SUITE test suite A pane for the AWARD BONUS SUITE test is displayed with Details and Results tabs 3 18 Oracle S
548. torage Options in the Properties pane when creating or editing a table or an index It enables you to override the default storage options Tablespace Name of the tablespace for the table or index Pct Free Percentage of space in each of the data blocks of the table or index reserved for future updates You can enter a value from 0 through 99 Pct Used Minimum percentage of used space that Oracle maintains for each data block A block becomes a candidate for row insertions when its used space falls below the Pct Used value You can enter a value from 1 through 99 Logging lt DEFAULT gt means to use the Oracle Database default ON means that the table creation and any subsequent direct loader SOL Loader and direct path INSERT operations against the table partition or LOB storage are logged in the redo log file OFF means that these operations are not logged in the redo log file Ini Trans Number of update transaction entries for which space is initially reserved in the data block header Max Trans Number of transaction entries that could concurrently use data in a data block This parameter has been deprecated Oracle Database now automatically allows up to 255 concurrent update transactions for any data block depending on the available space in the block Extents Initial Size of the first extent of the table or index Specify K kilobytes or M megabytes for the unit associated with the number Extents Next Size of the
549. try your query and check the spelling of the text to search for 5 104 Format Properties This box is displayed if you right click and select Advanced Format in the editor for a subprogram package view or trigger You can specify a set of formatting rules different from those if you had selected Format that is different from the Database SOL Formatter user preferences Output Destination Editor applies the selected Output Type formatting in the current editing pane Clipboard applies the formatting on the clipboard so that you can paste it into a pane or window of your choice Output Type A set of formatting rules associated with an output type SOL or another type from the list 5 105 Generate Patch You can generate a patch containing changes that have been made to files The patch can be applied to another set of checked out CVS files so that your changes are incorporated into them A patch must be applied to the same revision tag from which it was generated Source Files or Project Name and location of the project or set of files will be the subject of the patch Patch Target Where the generated patch will be sent System Clipboard from which you can paste the patch File accept the shown name and location or specify different ones or Open Patch File Editor where you can edit and then save it Output Format One of the standard diff formats Unified Context or Standard 5 68 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide
550. tured or converted model and select Rename Model To rename the model change the name and click OK 5 24 Delete Confirmation This dialog box is displayed in certain situations to confirm whether you want to delete the selected object or objects To perform the deletion click Yes to cancel the deletion request click No 5 12 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Connection Rename Error 5 25 Delete Confirmation Migration This dialog box is displayed when you right click a migration repository object under a captured or converted model and select Delete To delete the object click Yes If you do not want to be asked to confirm deletions of migration repository objects in the future enable check Skip This Message Next Time This will cause future deletions to occur when you right click and select Delete 5 26 Rename Database Item Migration This dialog box is displayed when you right click a database object under a captured or converted model and select Rename To rename the object change the name and dick OK 5 27 Select Connection Use this dialog box to select a database connection for use with a specific SOL Developer feature for example the SOL worksheet the Data Miner navigator or the Reports navigator After you click OK the interface for the component is displayed with the current user the same as the one specified in the connection To create a new database connection click the plus 4 icon to edit the s
551. u select a member in the package and run it Compile Performs a PL SQL compilation of the members in the package Compile for Debug Performs a PL SQL compilation of the members in the package with PL SQL library units compiled for debugging Order Members By Orders the members of the package by location in the source by name or by type and by name within each type Use as Template Lets you create a new package using the selected package as the initial content Drop Package Deletes the package Create Body Displays a pane in which you can enter text for the package body a Grant Lets you grant privileges on the package a Revoke Lets you revoke privileges on the package a Save Package Spec and Body Saves the package specification and body to a file that you specify 1 16 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Database Objects Quick DDL Saves the DDL statement to create the package to a file a SOL Worksheet or the system clipboard 1 3 20 Procedures A procedure is a type of PL SQL subprogram which is a programming object that can be stored and executed in the database server and called from other programming objects or applications Procedures do not return a value functions return a value For help with specific options in creating a PL SQL subprogram see Section 5 46 Create PL SOL Subprogram Function or Procedure You can perform the following operations on a procedure by right clicking
552. ue for text substitution or the underlying data value of the parameter for bind substitution using the syntax param name The following example shows both styles of substitution text style and bind style DECLARE l PARAM1 DATE bad date EXCEPTION BEGIN 1_PARAM1 PARAM1 IF PARAM1 lt gt TO CHAR l PARAM1 THEN RAISE bad date END IF END As a simple example of text style variable substitution IfPlisa parameter of type NUMBER and has the value 2 1 the string P1 will be replaced by the string 2 1 IfPlisa parameter of type VARCHAR2 and has the value ABC the string P1 will be replaced by the string ABC Note the single quotation marks around P1 in this example You can use variable substitution for all types of validation actions except Compare Tables For the applicable validation action types variable substitution is performed as follows For Query Returning Row s and Query Returning No Row s substitution is performed on the SQL query For Compare Query Results substitution is performed on both the source and target SOL queries a For Boolean Function and User PL SQL Code substitution is performed on the PL SQL block SQL Developer Unit Testing 3 9 Unit Test Library 3 8 Unit Test Library The unit testing library enables you to store actions that you can reuse in the definitions of multiple unit tests These user defined actions are displayed under the Li
553. ue from 1 to 50 the default is 50 Key Compression If this option is checked key compression is enabled which eliminates repeated occurrence of primary key column values in index organized tables In the box to the right of this field you can specify the prefix length which is the number of prefix columns to compress This value can be from 1 to the number of primary key columns minus 1 the default prefix length is the number of primary key columns minus 1 Include Column Column at which to divide an index organized table row into index and overflow portions The primary key columns are always stored in the index The SQL Developer Dialog Boxes and Wizards 5 35 Create Edit Table with advanced options Include Column can be either the last primary key column or any non primary key column All non primary key columns that follow the Include Column are stored in the overflow data segment Mapping Table If this option is checked SOL Developer creates a mapping of local to physical ROWIDs and store them in a heap organized table This mapping is needed in order to create a bitmap index on the index organized table If the index organized table is partitioned then the mapping table is also partitioned and its partitions have the same name and physical attributes as the base table partitions Overflow Specifications for the overflow segment The options are the same as in the Storage Options dialog box External Table Propertie
554. uery that returns all geometries for counties in the U S state of South Carolina On the left is a map display pane with some icons above it On the right is a Query List pane with one query named South Carolina Counties and some icons above it Not shown is the database connection drop down selector to the right of the Query List 7 X Query List v South Caroliona Counties You can visualize geometries in the Map View window by creating and executing a SQL query or by selecting a geometry in a table data grid cell and using the context menu a Visualizing Geometries by Creating and Executing a Query Visualizing Geometries from the Table Data Grid 1 56 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Spatial Support in SQL Developer 1 14 2 1 Visualizing Geometries by Creating and Executing a Query To visualize geometries by creating and executing a SOL query follow these steps 1 Click View then Map View to display the Map View window 2 Optionally resize and reposition the Map View window 3 Using the connection selector drop down on the right above Query List not shown in the figure select the database connection to be used for the query 4 Click the Add New Query icon above Query List to display a query dialog box and specify the information for the query Map Title Short descriptive name for the display to result from the query Example South Carolina Counties Map Query SELECT statement t
555. uested procedure To add an entry click the Add Procedure icon and enter the procedure name To delete an entry select it and click the Remove Procedure X icon 1 16 4 6 Excel If you are using Oracle Application Express you have the option of placing your Excel files into an Application Express collection Process Excel files into a collection If selected puts Excel files into an Application Express Collection Put each Excel worksheet into one collection If selected puts all Excel worksheets into a single collection for which you specify the Collection Name Use the name of the Excel worksheet as the collection name If selected creates a collection for each Excel worksheet and uses each worksheet name for the corresponding collection name 1 17 SQL Developer Reports SOL Developer provides many reports about the database and its objects You can also create your own user defined reports To display reports click the Reports tab on the left side of the window see SOL Developer User Interface If this tab is not visible select View and then Reports Individual reports are displayed in tabbed panes on the right side of the window and for each report you can select in a drop down control the database connection for which to display the report For reports about objects the objects shown are only those visible to the database user associated with the selected database connection and the rows are usually ordered by
556. ull NOT NULL author_last_name VARCHAR2 30 CONSTRAINT last name not null NOT NULL author first name VARCHAR2 30 rating NUMBER CONSTRAINT books pk PRIMARY KEY book id CONSTRAINT rating 1 to 10 CHECK rating IS NULL OR rating 1 and rating 10 CONSTRAINT author title unique UNIQUE author last name title To create the BOOKS table connect to the database as the user in the schema you want to use for this tutorial Right click the Tables node in the schema hierarchy on the left side select New Table and enter the following information If a tab or field is not mentioned do not enter anything for it Be sure that the Advanced box is not checked when you start creating the table For detailed information about the table dialog box and its tabs see Section 5 53 Create Table quick creation and Section 5 54 Create Edit Table with advanced options Schema Specify your current schema as the schema in which to create the table Name BOOKS Create the table columns using the following information After creating each column except the last one rating click Add Column to add the next column If you accidentally click OK instead of Add Column right click the BOOKS table in the Connections navigator display select Edit and continue to add columns Column Name Type Size Other Information and Notes book id VARCHAR2 20 Primary Key Automatically checks Not Null an index is also created on the primary key
557. unique constraint definition select it in Selected Columns and use the arrow buttons Foreign Keys pane Specifies one or more foreign keys for the table A foreign key specifies a column local column each of whose data values must match a value in the primary key or unique constraint of another table Foreign Keys Lists the foreign keys currently defined on the table To add a foreign key click the Add button to delete a foreign key select it and click the Remove button Note After you add a foreign key to add another foreign key click the Add button Name Name of the foreign key definition Must be unique within the database Enabled If this option is checked the foreign key is enforced Referenced Schema Name of the schema containing the table with the primary key or unique constraint to which this foreign key refers Referenced Table Name of the table with the primary key or unique constraint to which this foreign key refers Referenced Constraint Name of the primary key or unique constraint to which this foreign key refers Associations Local Column Lists the column in the currently selected local table that is included in the foreign key definition For each local column in the foreign key definition select the name of a column in the local table Associations Referenced Column on table For each local column identifies the column in the other foreign table that must have a value matching
558. uoted Identifier On option is enabled checked the following PL SQL code is generated SELECT coll col 2 column alias FROM tablex table alias If the Is Quoted Identifier On option is disabled not checked the following PL SQL code is generated SELECT coll col 2 column alias FROM tablex table alias 2 2 4 3 Before Migrating From Microsoft Access To configure a Microsoft Access database for migration 1 2 Make backup copies of the database file or files Ensure that the necessary software Microsoft Access perhaps other components is installed on the same system as SOL Developer Ensure that the Admin user has at least Read Design and Read Data permissions on the MSysObjects MSysQueries and MSysRelationships system tables as explained in the information about the Access tab in the Create Edit Select Database Connection dialog box If security is enabled you should turn it off by copying the contents of the secured database into a new database as follows SOL Developer does not support the migration of Microsoft Access databases that have security enabled By default SOL Developer uses the name of the Microsoft Access MDB file as the user name for the destination Oracle user If you create an Oracle user in this way the password is ORACLE a From the File menu in Microsoft Access select New Database b Select the Blank Database icon then click OK c Inthe File New Database option type a name for t
559. user must also be granted the CREATE ROLE CREATE USER and ALTER ANY TRIGGER privileges all with the ADMIN option If you are performing a single schema migration you can ignore this warning 5 130 Recent Files This dialog box displays files recently opened in SOL Developer Files A list of files opened in SOL Developer with the most recent file first The Show All option determines whether the list includes only files opened implicitly or files opened implicitly or explicitly Show All If this option is checked the list includes both explicitly and implicitly opened files if this option is not checked the list includes only implicitly opened files Explicitly opened files are those that you opened directly implicitly opened files are those that SOL Developer opened to support your work for example while you were debugging 5 131 Create Repository This dialog box is displayed if you click Migration then Repository Management then Create Repository Create Repository Name of the database connection to use to create a migration repository The objects associated with the migration repository are created in the schema of the user associated with the selected connection 5 132 Delete or Truncate Repository The Delete Repository dialog box is displayed if you click Migration then Repository Management then Delete Repository the Truncate Repository dialog box is displayed if you click Migration then Repository Managemen
560. ut prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software Foundation For more information on the Apache Software Foundation please see lt Link2 gt Portions of this software are based upon public domain software originally written at the National Center for Supercomputing Applications University of Illinois Urbana Champaign POI 2 5 1 This program contains POI 2 5 1 which has the following associated attribution text The following applies to all products licensed under the Apache 2 0 License You may not use the identified files except in compliance
561. utomatically on disconnect 1 94 opening automatically on database connection 1 94 unshared for a connection 1 24 1 32 using 1 32 Start Page for SOL Developer 1 111 statistics computing table and column 1 20 estimating table and column 1 20 gathering schema 1 24 storage options 5 37 stored procedures generating for Migrate Blobs Offline 1 99 subpartitions templates 5 35 subprograms creating 5 23 debugging 5 77 running 5 77 substitution variables 1 36 Subversion preferences for 1 103 SOL Developer support for 1 42 Sybase Adaptive Server 2 14 connections 5 11 creating data files 2 21 third party JDBC drivers 1 89 Sybase clustered primary keys generating as Oracle index organized tables 1 99 Sybase clustered unique indexes generating as Oracle index organized tables 1 99 Synchronize Unit Test wizard 5 96 synonyms 1 19 creating and editing 5 26 I tables 1 19 analyzing 1 20 compacting 1 20 computing statistics 1 20 creating and editing 5 28 creating quickly 5 27 decrypting column data 1 20 encrypting column data 1 20 entering and modifying data 1 26 estimating statistics 1 20 exporting data 1 20 5 62 external properties 5 36 index organized properties 5 35 locking 1 19 moving to another tablespace 1 20 normalizing column data 1 20 partitioned partition definitions 5 35 partitioning options 5 34 subpartitioning options templates 5 35 shrinking 1 20 splitting the
562. utput Directory SQL Developer Migrating Third Party Databases 2 3 Migration Basic Options and Steps Drop Target Objects If this option is enabled any existing database objects in the target schema are deleted before the migration is performed thus ensuring that the migration will be into an empty schema Advanced Options Displays the Migration Generation Options preferences page Move Data The Move Data page of the wizard lets you specify options for moving table data as part of the migration Moving the table data is independent of migrating the table definitions metadata Note that if you do not want to move the table data you can specify the mode as Offline and then simply not run the scripts for moving the data Mode Online causes the table data to be moved by SOL Developer when you have completed the necessary information in the wizard Offline causes SOL Developer to generate scripts after you have completed the necessary information in the wizard and you must later run those scripts if you want to move the data Online moves are convenient for moving small data sets offline moves are useful for moving large volumes of data Connections for online data move The Source and Target connections for the third party and Oracle connections respectively To add a connection to either list click the Add icon to edit the selected connection click the Edit pencil icon Truncate Data If this option is enabled an
563. veloper bin gt format input c temp myfile sql output c temp myfile_out sql 1 7 10 Gauges In the SQL Worksheet and User Defined Reports You can use graphical gauges to display query results in the SQL Worksheet and in user defined reports In both cases you need to specify the name of the value column for the gauge data and minimum and maximum values on the gauge and the values to be shown as low and high on the gauge usually between the minimum and maximum values In the SQL Worksheet the required structure for the value to be selected is SOLDEV GAUGE lt min gt lt max gt lt low gt lt high gt lt value column gt For example to display the last name and the salary in gauge format where the gauge shows from 1000 to 30000 with below 10000 as low and above 18000 as high for employees with ID numbers less than a number to be specified connect to the supplied HR schema and execute the following query SELECT last_name SQLDEV GAUGE 1000 30000 10000 18000 salary FROM employees WHERE employee_id lt employee_id If you specify 104 as the bind variable value the output appears as shown in the following figure D gt Resutts 2 Script Output explain S Autotrace oes Output row Results LAST NAME SQLDEV GAUGE 1000 30000 10000 18000 SALARY eee 1 King 2 Kochhar EEA E 3 De Haan AAA REN a Hunold gt For a user defined gauge report the query must specify only the value column the
564. ver Path Location at which the Application Express Listener is deployed on the application server Default apex 1 16 4 Listener Navigator Global and Database Settings The Administration settings are displayed in the following Listener navigator hierarchy The Administration settings consist of the global settings and database 1 64 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Application Express Listener Administration settings for one or more databases The settings are displayed in the following Listener navigator hierarchy Administration Global Settings Connections JDBC Security Allowed Procedures Blocked Procedures Validation Function Virus Scanning Cache Files Caching Environment Error Reporting Log Reporting Pre Processing Post Processing Excel Database Settings database name Connections JDBC URL Mapping RESTful Connections Security Allowed Procedures Blocked Procedures Validation Function Virus Scanning Cache Files Caching Environment Error Reporting Log Reporting Pre Processing Post Processing Excel Global Settings provide the default values for Database Settings Tip Specify commonly used settings in the global settings Connection Security Caching and so on Database Settings specify values for Listener connections to specific databases The Application Express Listener supports connecting to multiple databases by letting you create multiple database settings with different database connectio
565. ver database objects that the user cannot see are not captured For example if the user can execute a stored procedure but does not have sufficient privileges to see the source code the stored procedure cannot be captured 2 Ensure that you can connect to the Microsoft SOL Server or Sybase Adaptive Server database from the system where you have installed SOL Developer 3 Ensure that you have downloaded the JTDS JDBC driver from http jtds sourceforge net 4 In SQL Developer if you have not already installed the JTDS driver using Check for Updates on the Help menu do the following a Click Tools then Preferences then Database then Third Party JDBC Drivers b Click Add Entry c Select the jar file for the JTDS driver you downloaded from http jtds sourceforge net d Click OK 5 In SQL Developer click Tools then Preferences then Migration Identifier Options and ensure that the setting is correct for the Is Quoted Identifier On option that is that the setting reflects the database to be migrated 2 14 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide Migration Background Information and Guidelines If this option is enabled quotation marks double quotes can be used to refer to identifiers if this option is not enabled quotation marks identify string literals As an example of the difference in behavior consider the following T SQL code select coll col 2 column alias from tablex table alias If the Is Q
566. w lists information about the columns in the view Dictionary Views Lists each Oracle data dictionary view and in most cases a comment describing its contents or purpose 1 17 8 Scheduler reports Jobs reports list information about jobs and other objects related to Scheduling Jobs Using SOL Developer DBMS Jobs Lists information about all jobs DBA jobs jobs for which a DBA user is associated with the database connection and your jobs jobs for which the user associated with the database connection is the log user privilege user or schema user The information for each job includes the start time of its last run current run and next scheduled run Definitions Lists information about all objects of types associated with job scheduling Executions Lists information about the executions of jobs 1 74 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Reports 1 17 9 PL SQL reports PL SQL reports list information about PL SQL packages function and procedures and about types defined in them Program Unit Arguments For each argument parameter in a program unit lists the program unit name the argument position 1 2 3 and so on the argument name and whether the argument is input only In output only Out or both input and output In Out Search Source Code For each PL SQL object lists the source code for each line and allows the source to be searched for occurrences of the specified variable Unit L
567. when editing XML documents and the file extension with which each schema is associated User Schemas for XML Editing Lists the names and locations of the schemas you have added since installing SOL Developer that are available when editing XML documents and the file extension with which each schema is associated Add Displays a dialog box for specify a new schema to add to the list of User Schemas Remove Removes the selected schema from the list Edit Displays a dialog box in which you can modify a previously registered schema For adding or editing you can specify the location file system or URL and the file extension to register the schema for a specific file type Clear Cache Unloads all currently loaded schemas from memory when you modify a schema Any needed schemas will then be reloaded including the modified schema 1 19 Location of User Related Information SOL Developer stores user related information in several places with the specific location depending on the operating system and certain environment specifications User related information includes user defined reports user defined snippets SOL Worksheet history code templates and SOL Developer user preferences In most cases your user related information is stored outside the SOL Developer installation directory hierarchy so that it is preserved if you delete that directory and install a new version The user related information is stored in or under the IDE U
568. when objects in the source and destination schemas are compared Note The DDL Generation Options apply to how the DDL will be generated whereas the DDL Comparison Options apply to how the comparison is made between the two objects Consolidate Schema and Maintain Schema enable you either to compare the source objects with objects owned by the target connection user schema or with any object accessible by the target connection The resulting behavior is largely based on which option you select and which objects your connection has access to Consolidate Compares the source objects with those owned by the target schema in other words the selected objects are consolidated into the target schema If the target connection does not own an object by that name that is target schema object type object name the object will not be found and a comparison cannot be done If the target connection does own object target schema object type object name source schema objectname will compared with target schema object type object name Maintain Maintains the schema on the source objects and applies it in the target object processing If the target connection does not have access to those schema objects they will not be found and a comparison cannot be done If the target connection does has access to those schema objects source schema object type object name will be compared with target schema object type object name Match Co
569. when you edit functions procedures and packages Autopin PL SQL Editors Keeps the current PL SQL editor open when you open another function procedure or package Max Open PL SQL Editors Specifies the maximum number of PL SQL editors that can be kept open pinned Auto Indent New Lines Automatically indents a new line when you press Enter at the end of a line The new line will automatically be indented at the same initial indentation as the line preceding it Perform Block Indent or Outdent for Selections Performs a block indent or block outdent on a selection when your press Tab or Shift Tab respectively With this option selected when you press Tab on a selected block of text the entire block will be indented to the current tab size Shift Tab on the same block would outdent it as a block to the current tab size Use Smart Home Contextualizes the cursor s understanding of home the beginning of the line With this setting selected pressing Home positions the cursor at the start of the line after any leading spaces or tabs Pressing Home again repositions the cursor at the start of the line before any leading spaces or tabs Continuing to press Home toggles the cursor between these two locations 1 82 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer Preferences With this setting deselected pressing Home simply places the cursor at the start of the line Use Smart End Contextualizes the cursor s understanding of
570. which has the following associated attribution text Copyright c 2006 2009 Alexander Potochkin All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution Neither the name of the JXLayer project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWA
571. which the materialized view log is to be created Logging LOGGING or NOLOGGING to establish the logging characteristics for the materialized view log Row ID Yes indicates that the rowid of all rows changed should be recorded in the materialized view log No indicates that the rowid of all rows changed should not be recorded in the materialized view log Primary Key Yes indicates that the primary key of all rows changed should be recorded in the materialized view log No indicates that the primary key of all rows changed should not be recorded in the materialized view log New Values INCLUDING saves both old and new values for update DML operations in the materialized view log EXCLUDING disables the recording of new values in the materialized view log If this log is for a table on which you have a single table materialized aggregate view and if you want the materialized view to be eligible for fast refresh you must specify INCLUDING Cache For data that will be accessed frequently CACHE specifies that the blocks retrieved for this log are placed at the most recently used end of the least recently used LRU list in the buffer cache when a full table scan is performed This attribute is useful for small lookup tables NOCACHE specifies that the blocks are placed at the least recently used end of the LRU list Parallel If this option is checked parallel operations will be supported for the materialized view log Object ID For a l
572. which will allow automation tools to query the results from the database The following example runs a unit test named AWARD BONUS in a Windows environment where SQL Developer is installed under Program Files Note that test and suite names are case sensitive for the command line interface This example uses the repository connection for user unit test repos and runs the test as user fred gt cd c Program Files sqldeveloper sqldeveloper bin ututil run test name AWARD BONUS repo unit test repos db fred The following example exports a unit test named AWARD BONUS It uses the repository connection for user unit test repos and stores the exported definitions in the file C Nut xmlNaward bonus test xml gt ututil exp test name AWARD BONUS repo unit test repos file c ut_xml award_ bonus test xml The following example imports object definitions from the file C ut_xml award_ bonus suite xml It uses the repository connection for user unit test repos gt ututil imp repo unit test repos file c Nut xmlNaward bonus suite xml To check the results of any tests or suites that you run from the command line you can start SOL Developer and view the All Test Runs and All Suite Runs reports see Section 3 9 Unit Test Reports 3 12 Example of Unit Testing Tutorial This section presents a simplified example in which you create a table and a PL SOL procedure create unit tests with test cases for valid and invalid input da
573. word values to be generated in the DDL for the deployment script Generate referential constraints Causes referential constraints to be generated in the DDL for the deployment script Generate SOL terminator Causes the SOL statement terminator character to be generated at the end of each statement in the DDL for the deployment script Change Management Parameters Conflict Resolution The Conflict Resolution pane contains options for resolving conflicts when the old or existing item s value is different from the potential new or modified value or when the existing item would be removed Item to be added already exists or the item to be removed is different Apply Exists Different FALSE causes the item to be added or the existing item to be removed TRUE causes the item not to be added or the existing item not to be removed Item to be modified has already been modified to a different value Apply Exists Different FALSE causes the item to be modified so as to replace the existing different value TRUE causes the item to keep the existing different value Item to be modified has already been modified to the old value recorded in the difference Apply Exists Different FALSE causes the item to be changed to the new value TRUE causes the item to keep the existing value the old value recorded in the difference 1 18 3 Code Editor The Code Editor pane contains general options that affect the appearance and behavior of SOL Developer
574. ws to Commit After online data moves During the data move operation Oracle pauses to perform an automatic internal commit operation after each number of rows that you specify are moved from the source database to Oracle tables SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 97 SQL Developer Preferences Lower values will cause a successful move operation to take more time but if a failure occurs it is likely that more source records will exist in the Oracle tables and that if the move operation is resumed fewer source records will need to be moved Higher values will cause a successful move operation to take less time but if a failure occurs it is likely that fewer source records will exist in the Oracle tables and that is the move operation is resumed more source records will need to be moved Offline The offline data move options determine the results of files created such as when you click Tools then Migration then Create Database Capture Scripts End of Column Delimiter offline data moves String to indicate end of column End of Row Delimiter offline data moves String to indicate end of row Generic Date Mask offline data moves Format mask for dates unless overridden by user defined custom preferences Generic Timestamp Mask offline data moves Format mask for timestamps unless overridden by user defined custom preferences User Defined Custom Preferences by Source Type offline data moves Lets you specify for one or
575. xported connections so that you can view and work with database objects use the SOL Worksheet and use other features To create a new database connection right click the Connections node in the Connections navigator select New Connection and complete the required entries in the Create Edit Select Database Connection dialog box 1 2 Oracle SQL Developer User s Guide SQL Developer User Interface 5 If you want to get started quickly with SOL Developer do the short tutorial in Chapter 4 SQL Developer Tutorial Creating Objects for a Small Database or work with your existing database objects 1 2 SQL Developer User Interface The SOL Developer window generally uses the left side for navigation to find and select objects and the right side to display information about selected objects Figure 1 1 shows the main window Figure 1 1 SQL Developer Main Window F Oracle SQL Developer File Edit View Navigate Run Versioning Tools Help noaga e x amp amp O0 9 5 a y A Connections E Reports D E hrsystemos EBempLowees ADD_JOB_HISTORY 7 NM TY Columns Data Constraints Grants Statistics Triggers Flashback Depende gt T E 3 E a Connections IZ H Actions E L 3p A M pl activities_access B coiuMw name E DATATYPE B NU DAT cE Commer amp a t 2 iim EMPLOYEE ID NUMBER 6 0 No 1 P
576. xt otn htm Database Utilities The Utilities pane specifies options that affect the behavior of Database Utilities such as Export and Import when they are invoked using SOL Developer Database Utilities Cart The Cart pane specifies the default locations for saving and opening Cart xml files Default Cart Directory and for specifying sql script files Open Script Directory to be executed before and after the generated master deployment script see Section 1 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart Database Utilities Cart Cart Deploy The Cart Deploy pane specifies options that affect the behavior of the Cart for a deployment see Section 1 13 Deploying Objects Using the Cart For example if you do not want object names prefixed with the owner schema name in DDL creation statements for example if a generated script should create a BOOKS table and not a SMITH BOOKS table deselect uncheck the Show Schema option Default Cart Directory Default location for the zip file that contains the generated script files including the master script file for a deployment Database Utilities Difference The Difference pane specifies options that affect the behavior of the Database Differences Wizard see Section 5 72 Database Differences Database Utilities Export The Export pane determines the default values used for the Database Export Unload Database Objects and Data wizard and for some other interfaces See al
577. y try decreasing the size Suggestion Don t close the Help Center window because font size changes will be in effect only for as long as the current window is open Consider using the Keep on Top toggle in the Help Center window Procedure and Function Signatures To see the signature format including parameters of a procedure or function ina PL SQL package expand the package under Packages in the Connections navigator and place the mouse pointer over the procedure or function name Type Ahead in Navigators Many navigators that use a tree support type ahead to find and open an object For example expand the Tables node under a connection and start typing a table name SQL Developer Concepts and Usage 1 109 Tip of the Day 1 23 20 1 23 21 1 23 22 1 23 23 1 23 24 1 23 25 1 23 26 1 23 27 Note This works only on nodes when the child nodes are visible For example if the Tables node is not expanded to display the individual tables typing the name of a table will not find and open it Extended Paste If you have cut or copied multiple things to the clipboard and want to paste something other than the most recent copy you can use extended paste to display a dialog box to select which one to paste Press Ctrl Shift V or click Edit then Extended Paste Closing Tabbed Windows Using the Mouse Wheel To close a tabbed editor or display window click its tab with the mouse wheel Go to Last Edit Loca
578. y existing data in a target Oracle table that has the same name as the source table is deleted before the data is moved If this option is not enabled any data from a source table with the same name as the corresponding target Oracle table is appended to any existing data in the target table Summary The Summary page of the wizard provides a summary of your specifications for the project repository and actions in an expandable tree format If you want to make any changes go back to the relevant wizard page To perform the migrat ion actions that you have specified click Finish 2 1 2 Copying Selected Tables to Oracle To copy one or more tables from a third party database to an Oracle database you can select the third party tables and use the Copy to Oracle feature With this approach you do not need to create or use a migration repository or to capture and convert objects Note that this approach does not perform a complete migration It only lets you copy the table and optionally the table data from the third party database to an Oracle database It does not migrate or re create primary and foreign key definitions and most constraints Any UNIQUE constraints or default values are not preserved in the copy NOT NULL constraints are preserved in most cases but not for Microsoft Access tables The approach also does not consider any non table objects such as procedures In addition this approach supports autoi
579. y keys can also be used with foreign keys to provide referential integrity Tables without Indexes Lists tables that do not have any indexes If a column in a table has an index defined on it queries that use the column are usually much faster and more efficient than if there is no index on the column especially if there are many rows in the table and many different data values in the column Tables with Unindexed Foreign Keys Lists any foreign keys that do not have an associated index A foreign key is a column or set of columns that references a primary key that is each value in the foreign key must match a value in its associated primary key Foreign key columns are often joined in queries and an index usually improves performance significantly for queries that use a column If an unindexed foreign key is used in queries you may be able to improve runtime performance by creating an index on that foreign key 1 17 13 XML reports XML reports list information about XML objects XML Schemas For each user that owns any XML objects lists information about each object including the schema URL of the XSD file containing the schema definition 1 17 14 Data Modeler reports Data Modeler reports list information about objects that have been exported to the Data Modeler reporting repository For information about exporting designs to the reporting repository see the Data Modeler Reports topic in the Data Modeler help or the Oracle SQL Dev
580. y the existing text or click Browse to find and select the executable file for the editor 1 18 9 File Types The File Types pane determines which file types and extensions will be opened by default by SOL Developer The display shows each file extension the associated file type and a check mark if files with that extension are to be opened by SOL Developer be default such as when a user double clicks the file name Details area at bottom You can modify the file type content type text or binary and whether to open files with this extension automatically by SOL Developer To have files with a specific extension be opened by default by SOL Developer click the file extension in the list then check Open with SOL Developer in the Details area This overrides any previous application association that may have been in effect for that file extension To add a file extension click Add and specify the file extension including the period After adding the extension you can modify its associated information by selecting it and using the Details area 1 18 10 Global Ignore List The Global Ignore List pane specifies filters that determine which files and file types will not be used in any processing New Filter A file name or file type that you want to add to the list of files and file types in the Filter box that SOL Developer will ignore during all processing if the filter is enabled or checked You can exclude a particular file by
581. y the requested operation such as trying to perform a Describe operation when the currently selected object is not valid for a SOL Plus DESCRIBE statement 5 122 No Object Selected This dialog box is displayed if no object was selected for the requested operation such as trying to perform a Describe operation when no object is selected in the SOL Worksheet 5 123 Object Preferences This dialog box lets you specify preferences for the display of data output during debugging For a specified data type and its subclasses you can control what to display in value columns what to show when expanding the object expressions fields or both and for fields which fields to show and which to hide 5 124 Offline Generation Error Destination Directory This dialog box is displayed if you specify a nonexistent directory or folder for the generation of offline data move files Check the spelling of the path that you entered or create the desired directory or folder and try the operation again 5 125 OpenFile This is a standard box for selecting a file to open use Location to navigate to double clicking the folder with the file to open then click the file to select it 5 126 Oracle Only Report This dialog box is displayed if you select a non Oracle third party database connection for a report that applies only to Oracle database connections Be sure to select an Oracle connection 5 127 Oracle Proxy Authentication This dia

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Whirlpool LEW0050PQ2 User's Manual  00044449 / CallBlocker-Telefondose, Aufputz  Acer 471558 User's Manual  STELA V2 5 2 release note  OilLabData User Manual  Samsung AW12P1AG User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file